Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
38 Adams View
Overview
Overview
Note: If you accidentally exit without saving your work, you can use the Adams View Log file
(aview.log) to recover your work. Learn about using the Adams View log file
2. Specify the directory to be used as your working directory. Adams View saves all files in this
directory. You can change the working directory at any time. Learn about specifying working
directory.
3. If you selected to create a new model, do the following:
• In the Model name text box, enter the name you want assigned to the new model. You can
enter up to 80 alphanumeric characters. You cannot include special characters, such as spaces
or periods.
• Select the gravity settings for the new model. You can select:
Modeling Process
The steps that you use in Adams View to create a model mirror the same steps that you would use to build
a physical prototype. Click a step below or use the arrows on the right to read the steps sequentially.
Although we’ve listed the steps that you perform to create a model as though you create the entire model
at once and then test and improve it, we recommend that you build and test small elements or subsystems
of your model before you build the entire model. For example, create a few modeling objects, connect
them together, and then run a simple simulation to test their motion and ensure that you are connecting
them correctly. Once these are modeled correctly, add more complexity to your model. By starting out
slowly, you can ensure that each subsystem works before moving on to the next step. We call this the
crawl-walk-run approach.
Learning Basics 45
Overview
Main toolbox
Status bar
Note: If you accidentally exit without saving your work, you can use the Adams View Log file
(aview.log) to recover your work. Learn about using the Adams View log file
To unload a plugin:
1. From the Tools menu, select Plugin Manager.
2. In the Load column, next to the plugin you want to unload, clear the selection of Yes.
3. Select OK.
Adams View removes any plugin menus or commands.
If you select to display the results in the log file, you can keep the command results with the other
commands that you execute so that you can cut and paste the information together into a new file.
Note: You can change the name of the log file through the initialization file .mdi_init. For more
information, see Running and Configuring Adams.
To set the type of information displayed in the Display Log File dialog box:
1. Select the Show only lines of type check box and then select one of the following:
• Info - Displays all commands that you have executed in Adams View.
Learning Basics 49
Overview
• Warning - Displays non-fatal messages that warn you of possible problems with commands
you entered.
• Error - Displays fatal messages that Adams View did not understand and, therefore, did not
successfully process.
• Fatal - Displays messages that indicated that your model would not simulate.
2. If desired, select Show only lines containing and enter the text that the line must contain in the
text box. You can also enter wildcards. Learn about using wildcards.
3. Select Apply.
Using Wildcards
You can use wildcards to narrow any search, set the type of information displayed in a window, such as
the Database Navigator or the Log file, or specify a name of an object in a dialog box.
Here are some examples of more complex patterns and possible matches:
• x*y - Matches any object whose name starts with x and ends with y. This would include xy, x1y,
and xaby.
• x??y - Matches only those objects with four-character long names that start with x and end with
y. This would include xaay, xaby, and xrqy.
• x?y* - Matches all of those objects whose names start with x and have y as the third character.
This would include xayee, xyy, and xxya.
• *{aa,ee,ii,oo,uu}* - Matches all those objects whose name contains the same vowel twice in a
row. This would include loops and skiing.
• [aeiou]*[0-9] - Matches any object whose name starts with a vowel and ends with a digit. This
would include eagle10, arapahoe9, and ex29.
• [^aeiou]?[xyz]* - Matches any object whose name does not start with a vowel and has x, y, or z
as the third letter. This would include thx1138, rex, and fizzy.
• You can use quotation marks to identify all objects with a certain naming pattern. The following
example describes how to set a damping ratio of 0.05 to all beams in .model_1 that have
‘_beam’ in the name.
for var=the_beam obj=.model_1."*_beam*" type=Beam
force modify element_like beam &
beam_name = (eval(the_beam).name) &
damping_ratio = 0.05
end !for
Ribbon Capability
Introduction
The Adams 2016 introduces the new ribbon based style interface and the GUI explained below.
Main Menu
Main menu divided in to following sections.
• Text-based menus
• File handling Strip
52 Adams View
Ribbon Capability
• Selection Strip
Text-based menus
• File
• Edit
• View
• Settings
• Tools
Important: Those users who customize the Adams View main text menu should be advised that this
text menu's location is .gui.main.mmenu_menu.mbar_refresh. The Adams
View main text menu for the Classic interface style remains .gui.main.mbar as it has
been in previous releases. To learn more about customizing Adams View refer to
Customizing Adams View.
• Save Database
• Redo
• Undo
Learning Basics 53
Ribbon Capability
Selection Strip
• Set the view plane to coincident with the xy plane of an object users select
• Create Material
This will allow you to change the entity color. Right click on the button for more color
option.
• Align & Rotate Tool - Rotating Objects About or Along Grid or Features
• f(x) Tool
• f( θ ) tool
• View Fit
• Dynamic Pick
• Center
• Rotate
• Dynamic Translate
• Dynamic Zoom
Learning Basics 55
Ribbon Capability
Solids
• Box Tool
• Cylinder Tool
• Sphere Tool
• Frustum Tool
• Torus Tool
• Link Tool
• Plate Tool
• Extrusion Tool
• Revolution Tool
56 Adams View
Ribbon Capability
• Plane Tool
Flexible Bodies
• Adams Flex
• Rigid to Flex
• Flex to Flex
• MNF XForm
• ViewFlex
Construction
• Point Tool
• Marker Tool
• Polyline Tool
• Arc Tool
• Spline Tool
Learning Basics 57
Ribbon Capability
• Point Mass
Booleans
• Unite Tool
• Merge Tool
• Intersect Tool
• Cut Tool
• Split Tool
• Chain Tool
Features
• Chamfer Tool
• Fillet Tool
• Hole Tool
• Boss Tool
• Hollow Tool
58 Adams View
Ribbon Capability
Connectors
Joints
Primitives
Couplers
Special
• General Constraint
60 Adams View
Ribbon Capability
Motions
Joint Motions
General Motions
• Point Motion
Forces
Applied Forces
Flexible Connections
• Bushing Tool
• Beam
Special Forces
• Contact
• Tire
• Modal Force
• Gravity
62 Adams View
Ribbon Capability
Elements
Data Elements
• Spline Tool
• General Spline
• Array
• Create/Modify Matrix
• Create/Modify String
• Create FEMDATA
System Elements
Function
• Function Builder
Controls Toolkit
Design Exploration
Design Variable
Measures
• Object Measure
• Point-to-Point Measure
• Angle Measure
• Orientation Measure
• Range Measure
• Computed Measure
• Function Measure
• Display Measures
Instrumentation
• Create a Request
• Create/Modify Sensor
Design Evaluation
Adams Insight
Plugins
Controls
• Controls
Vibration
• Vibration
66 Adams View
Ribbon Capability
Durability
• Durability
Mechatronics
• Mechatronics
Note: Plugins located on this tab may be initially loaded by clicking the corresponding icon. To
unload these plugins or to subsequently reload these plugins one must use the Plugin
Manager located under the Tools menu. To learn more about the Plugin Manager, see
section Loading and Unloading Plugins.
Machinery
Gear
• Create Gear Pair
• Planetary Gear
• Gear Output
Belt
• Create Pully
• Create Belt
• Belt Actuation Input
Chain
• Create Sprockets
• Create Chain
• Sprocket Actuation Input
Learning Basics 67
Ribbon Capability
Bearing
• Create Bearing
• Bearing Output
Cable
• Create Cable
Motor
• Create Motor
Cam
• Create Follower Motion
• Create Cam Profile
• Construct Cam System
Simulation
Setup
• Import ACF
Simulate
• Interactive Controls
• Scripted Controls
68 Adams View
Ribbon Capability
Results
Review
• Animation Controls
Adams PostProcessor
• Adams PostProcessor
Learning Basics 69
Ribbon Capability
Model Browser
Browse
The browse tab is the default tab. It depicts a hierarchy of all the objects in the database. It has nine top
level folders that contain the objects by type. The objects that do not fit into the first eight categories, are
included in the "All Other" folder.
Groups
The Groups tab allows the user to gather database objects together.
Filters
The Filters tab enables you to create and save complex searches which can update dynamically.
To learn more about the model browser see section Model Browser.
70 Adams View
Ribbon Capability
Status Toolbar
View Setup Strip
• Toggle visibility
• Window layout
Information Strip
• Stop command
Learning Basics 71
Setting Preferences
Setting Preferences
Rotation Sequences
Adams View uses three orientation angles to perform three rotations about the axes of a coordinate
system. You specify the order in which axes are rotated about as a sequence of three numbers (1,2,3),
which correspond to x-, y-, and z-axes, respectively. For example, a rotation order of 312 produces
rotations about the z-, then x-, and then y-axis. Adams View provides you with a set of 24 rotation
sequences from which to choose. The most commonly used rotation sequence, body 313, is the default
sequence.
The figure below shows how successive rotations defined by the rotation angles orient the axes. Dashed
lines represent original orientations and solid lines represent new and unchanged orientations.
• The first angle rotates the coordinate system about its z-axis. This repositions the x-axis and the
y-axis (see a in figure).
• The second angle rotates the coordinate system about its new x-axis (x´) to reposition the new y-
axis (y´) and the z-axis (see b in figure).
72 Adams View
Setting Preferences
• The third angle rotates the coordinate system about its new z-axis (z´) to reposition the new x-
axis (x´) and the second new y-axis (y´´).
Together and in sequence, these rotations define the orientation of the coordinate system (see c in figure).
The right-hand rule defines the direction of positive rotation about each axis. For example, if you are
looking down the initial z-axis, positive rotations are counterclockwise and negative rotations are
clockwise.
When you turn on gravity, an icon appears in the middle of the Adams View Main window. To turn off
the display of the gravity icon, see Edit Appearance Dialog Box.
• From the Adams Toolbar, right-click the Adams View tool, and then select Change Settings.
• In the Registry Editor, select WorkingDirectory, and then change the working directory.
For more information, see Running and Configuring Adams.
2. On Windows:
• On the Desktop, right-click the Adams View shortcut, and then select Properties.
• In the Start In text box, enter the working directory.
You set default units when you create an Adams View model or you can use the Units command on the
Settings menu to change the units.
Unit Labels
To enter units other than the default in text boxes, you can use either simple unit labels or composed unit
labels.
Any unique abbreviation for a simple unit label is acceptable. For example, you can abbreviate radians
in the following ways, since none of the abbreviations conflict with abbreviations for any other units:
radians = radian = radia = radi = rad = ra = r
There are three exceptions for entering unique aliases:
Here are some examples of unit labels associated with a number within text boxes:
• 1mm
• 1.2 inch (spaces are not significant)
• 24in (you can use abbreviations)
A composed unit label is always enclosed in parentheses to eliminate ambiguity. Here are some tips and
examples of composed unit labels:
• To indicate torque, enter: 3.3 (newton*meter)
• To indicate composed acceleration, enter: 9.8 (meter/sec**2)
• To indicate angular acceleration, enter : PI (rad/sec**2)
• To indicate multiplication with a dash, enter: (fun(1)*3)(in - lbf)
• You cannot include parentheses inside of composed units. Therefore, the following is incorrect:
1.2 (inch / (sec*deg))
Instead, enter the following:
1.2 (inch / sec/deg)
Tip: In general, if you see units associated with numbers in the information window, command
file, log file, and so on, you should be able to take that unit string and use it in a text box
without error.
Interface Style
The user is provided with the option to switch 'Classic' View interface. This options provided under the
main menu Settings → Interface style → Classic. If user wants to switch back to the new ribbon based
view then select Settings → Interface style → Default.
When you start up Adams View, Adams View reads the settings stored in aviewBS.cmd, if it exists in
your path, and uses them instead of any settings in the Modeling database.
To save settings:
1. Set the display of your model and any other Adams View settings, as desired.
2. From the Settings menu, select Save Settings.
Model Browser
The Model Browser window can be divided into three sections, based on the three tabs:
• Browse
• Group
• Filters
These three tabs are discussed in detail in separate sections, later in this chapter.
Learning Basics 81
Model Browser
These actions may differ slightly depending on the current tab (Browse, Groups, or Filters) and are
discussed in detail in respective sections.
The text objects, selected in the browser window get synchronized with their corresponding objects in
the graphics viewport as well as with the corresponding objects in the graphical topology display. For
example, if you select an object in the browser the same object gets selected and highlighted in the
viewport.
Right-click Menus
When you click right mouse button, different shortcut menus appear depending on the tab and the entity
selected in the Model Browser. The menus can be divided in three types:
• Shortcut menu: Appears, when you right-click in the free space in the Model Browser.
• Context menu for single selection: Appears, when you right-click on a single entity in the Model
Browser.
82 Adams View
Model Browser
• Context menu for multiple selection: Appears, when you right-click after selecting multiple
entities.
Shortcut Menu
When you click in the free space of any tab of the Model Browser a shortcut menu appears. The options
in this menu differ in different tabs but some common functionality is described below:
• To expand all nodes in the Model Browser tree, select Expand All from the shortcut menu.
• To collapse all nodes in the Model Browser tree, select Collapse All from the shortcut menu.
• To refresh the Model Browser, select Refresh from the shortcut menu.
• To sort the objects in the Model Browser by either type or name, point to Sort Entities by on the
shortcut menu and click either Type or Name, as required.
Note that the Browse section provides only one option: Sort Entities by Name.
The options under the context menus for single and multiple selection differ depending on the current tab
(Browse, Groups, or Filters) and are discussed in the respective sections.
Learning Basics 83
Model Browser
Browse Tab
The browse tab is the default tab. It depicts a hierarchy of all the objects in the database. It has nine top
level folders that contain the objects by type. The objects that do not fit into the first eight categories are
included in the "All Other" folder.
A drop down menu at the top of the browse tab displays currently active model. The browse tab has a
quick search box that enables you to specify search criteria and find matching objects in the database.
Modifying Objects
The Model Browser lets you modify database objects.
To modify objects:
1. Right-click on the object, and then select Modify. Based on the object type selected the relevant
Modify window appears.
2. Modify the specified values as required and click OK.
Creating Measure
The procedure of creating object measure is described below. Read About Measures for more information
on object measures.
Renaming Objects
You can rename an object in the model browser.
To activate/deactivate objects:
1. Right-click on the object to Activate/Deactivate, and then select (De)activate. The
Activate/Deactivate window appears.
Learning Basics 85
Model Browser
Hiding/Showing Objects
You can change object display preferences.
Groups Tab
The groups tab enables you to create and manage groups in the database. Group creation and
modification is supported along with the facility to drag-drop members across groups.
Grouping Objects
The Groups tab enables you to select and group database objects based on your preferences. It is shown
below.
Modifying Groups
The Model Browser lets you modify the object groups.
Learning Basics 87
Model Browser
To modify groups:
1. Right-click on the group, and then select Modify. The Group Modify window appears.
2. .Modify the specified values as desired and click OK.
To empty a group:
1. Right-click on the group, and then select Empty. All the objects get removed from the group.
Sorting Groups
You can sort groups by either name or type.
To sort groups:
Right-click in the free space in Groups tab, and then point to Sort by and select Name or Type as
required. The groups will get sorted.
Quick Search
The quick search box will also be present at the bottom of the groups tab. It functions in exactly the same
way as on the Browse Tab, but only displays group names or those items present in groups.
88 Adams View
Model Browser
Filters Tab
The Filters tab enables you to create and save complex searches which can update dynamically.
Filtering Objects
You can select search criteria in the filter input area located at the bottom of the browser window, and
type text in the search text field for this search.
To create a filter:
1. Right-click in the free space in Filter tab, and then select New Filter. The Filter Creation
window appears.
2. Type the name of the filter and click Add Filter. The filter gets added.
3. In the Filter text box, enter the name of the objects that you want to display. Type any wildcard
that you want to include.
4. From the pull-down menu below Filter text box, select the type of object or objects that you want
to display in the Model Browser.
5. To only display active or inactive objects, set the pull-down menu below the Filter objects to
either Active Objects or Inactive Objects.
Learning Basics 89
Model Browser
6. Select the Dynamic check box if you want the filter to update automatically when new objects
that meet the filter specifications are added.
7. Press Enter.
Combining Filters
You can create a new filter by combining two filters. One of the three operators: AND, OR, or NOT can
be used for combining the filters.
• AND: Creates a filter that consolidates the two filters as: F 1 ∩ F 2 , only the common objects of
both filters will be in the resulting filter.
90 Adams View
Model Browser
• OR: Creates a filter that consolidates the two filters as: F 1 ∪ F 2 , all objects of both filters will
be in the resulting filter.
• NOT: Creates a filter that consolidates the two filters as: F 1 – F 2 , only the objects that are in
F 1 but not in F 2 , will be in the resulting filter.
Where F 1 and F 2 are the names of the filters to combine.
To combine filters:
1. Select the two filters to combine and right-click on them.
2. From the right-click menu that appears, point to Combine and select one condition from AND,
OR, or NOT, as required.
The new filter will be created, satisfying the condition selected.
The order of the filter combination is determined by the order in which the filters appear in the list from
the bottom to top. For example, if two filters A and B are selected for combination such that A appears
above B in the list, then the filter created with an AND operation between the two will be B_AND_A
(and will be so named as the default). In order to create a filter A_AND_B, the list needs to be sorted first
(using the 'Sort Filters' option from the context menu that pops up when the list is right-mouse clicked.).
The filter operations AND and OR are inherently commutative and as such the order of the filter created
by a combination of these do not matter as far as the result is concerned. For example, the filter created
with the combinations (A AND B) and (B AND A) will yield the same result. The filter combination
NOT however is not commutative and the order here can be determined by the sorting method as
explained above.
Models
Learn about working with Model in a Modeling database:
• Creating Models
• Displaying Models in the Database
• Merging Models
• Renaming a Model
• Modifying a Model's Comments
• Printing Models
• Deleting a Model
• Viewing Model Topology Map Through Information Window
Creating Models
You can store more than one Model in a Modeling database. You may find it helpful to store multiple
models in the same database because it lets you:
• Keep multiple versions of the same mechanical system in the same file.
• Store models of subsystems in one file that you want to combine and simulate as a whole.
• Compare results between models.
Merging Models
You can merge one Model in your Modeling database into another model. For example, you can merge a
subsystem, called the source model, which you want to work on separately, into the base destination
model when you are ready to work on them as a whole. Adams View maintains the source model and
does not change it after the merge operation.
This is helpful for merging two subsystems stored in the same database into a single model. It allows you
to work on each subsystem individually and merge them together when you are ready to work on them
as a whole.
As you merge models, you can:
• Enter a set of translations and rotations that Adams View applies to the source model. Adams
View first rotates the model then translates it.
• Specify whether Adams View merges parts with the same name into one part, or copies and
renames the duplicate objects before merging them into the destination model.
• Place all merged objects into a group. Learn more about Grouping and Ungrouping Objects.
To merge models:
1. On the Tools menu, select Merge Two Models.
The Merge Two Models dialog box appears.
2. In the Base Model Name text box, enter the name of the destination model.
3. In the Model to be merged text box, enter the name of the source model that you want to merge
into the destination model.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
4. Specify the translations to apply to the source model before merging it with the destination model.
93
Models
By default, you enter Cartesian (x,y,z) coordinates. You can change the convention for entering
translational positions. Learn more about Coordinate Systems in Adams View.
5. Specify the angular position of the parts and polylines in the source model.
Adams View orients the coordinate system starting from the initial coordinate system and
applying three successive rotations. By default, you supply body-fixed 313 Euler angles. You can
change the convention for entering orientation angles.
6. If desired, enter a new or existing group into which Adams View adds all merged objects.
7. Set the pull-down menu to either merge parts that have the same name (Merge) or rename the
parts before merging the models (Rename).
8. Select OK.
Renaming a Model
Adams View lets you change the name of a Model.
To rename a model:
1. On the Model Browser right click on the model you want to rename and select Rename.
The Rename Object dialog box appears.
2. Enter a new name for the model.
3. Select OK.
Printing Models
Adams View prints the currently displayed Model as it appears in the currently active View window. You
can set various print options, such as specifying Postscript or HPGL format.
94 Adams View
Models
Before printing, be sure to check which view window is the active window and what the magnification
of your model is in the view window. You might also want to check the font that Adams View is using
for printing text. Learn about Setting Screen and Printer Fonts.
To cancel printing:
• Select Cancel or press the Esc key.
Deleting a Model
You can remove a Model and all its objects from the Modeling database. When you delete a model,
Adams View removes the following objects from the modeling database:
• Parts
• Geometry
• Markers
• Joints
• Forces
• Simulation results
• Data elements and System elements
95
Models
• Design variables
It does not remove plots, interface changes, or design variables that belong to the modeling database.
To delete a model:
1. Do one of the following:
• On the Model Browser menu, right-click on the Model name you want to delete, and then
select Delete.
• On the Edit menu, select Delete.
The Database Navigator appears.
2. Select the model you want to delete. Learn about selecting objects.
3. Select OK.
If you selected Delete from the Build menu, Adams View asks you to confirm the deletion of the
model.
4. Select Delete.
Part ground
Is connected to:
LINK_1 via JOINT_2 (Revolute Joint)
LINK_6 via JOINT_1 (Revolute Joint)
LINK_1 via FORCE_1 (Single_Component_Force)
96 Adams View
Models
Part LINK_1
Is connected to:
LINK_5 via JOINT_3 (Revolute Joint)
ground via JOINT_2 (Revolute Joint)
ground via FORCE_1 (Single_Component_Force)
Part LINK_5
Is connected to:
LINK_1 via JOINT_3 (Revolute Joint)
LINK_6 via JOINT_4 (Revolute Joint)
Part LINK_6
Is connected to:
LINK_5 via JOINT_4 (Revolute Joint)
ground via JOINT_1 (Revolute Joint)
Parts tool .
Unconnected Parts:
LINK_1
97
Models
Constraints tool .
Note: You can also view model topology through the Database Navigator.
98 Adams View
Models (Classic Interface)
Creating Models
You can store more than one Model in a Modeling database. You may find it helpful to store multiple
models in the same database because it lets you:
• Keep multiple versions of the same mechanical system in the same file.
• Store models of subsystems in one file that you want to combine and simulate as a whole.
• Compare results between models.
Merging Models
You can merge one Model in your Modeling database into another model. For example, you can merge a
subsystem, called the source model, which you want to work on separately, into the base destination
model when you are ready to work on them as a whole. Adams View maintains the source model and
does not change it after the merge operation.
This is helpful for merging two subsystems stored in the same database into a single model. It allows you
to work on each subsystem individually and merge them together when you are ready to work on them
as a whole.
As you merge models, you can:
• Enter a set of translations and rotations that Adams View applies to the source model. Adams
View first rotates the model then translates it.
• Specify whether Adams View merges parts with the same name into one part, or copies and
renames the duplicate objects before merging them into the destination model.
• Place all merged objects into a group. Learn more about Grouping and Ungrouping Objects.
To merge models:
1. On the Tools menu, select Merge Two Models.
The Merge Two Models dialog box appears.
2. In the Base Model Name text box, enter the name of the destination model.
3. In the Model to be merged text box, enter the name of the source model that you want to merge
into the destination model.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
4. Specify the translations to apply to the source model before merging it with the destination model.
100 Adams View
Models (Classic Interface)
By default, you enter Cartesian (x,y,z) coordinates. You can change the convention for entering
translational positions. Learn more about Coordinate Systems in Adams View.
5. Specify the angular position of the parts and polylines in the source model.
Adams View orients the coordinate system starting from the initial coordinate system and
applying three successive rotations. By default, you supply body-fixed 313 Euler angles. You can
change the convention for entering orientation angles.
6. If desired, enter a new or existing group into which Adams View adds all merged objects.
7. Set the pull-down menu to either merge parts that have the same name (Merge) or rename the
parts before merging the models (Rename).
8. Select OK.
Renaming a Model
Adams View lets you change the name of a Model.
To rename a model:
1. On the Build menu, point to Model, and then select Rename.
The Database Navigator appears.
2. Select the model you want to rename.
The Rename Object appears.
3. Enter a new name for the model.
4. Select the More button to display the Database Navigator and rename another object in the
database.
5. Select OK.
Printing Models
Adams View prints the currently displayed Model as it appears in the currently active View window. You
can set various print options, such as specifying Postscript or HPGL format.
Before printing, be sure to check which view window is the active window and what the magnification
of your model is in the view window. You might also want to check the font that Adams View is using
for printing text. Learn about Setting Screen and Printer Fonts.
To cancel printing:
• Select Cancel or press the Esc key.
Deleting a Model
You can remove a Model and all its objects from the Modeling database. When you delete a model,
Adams View removes the following objects from the modeling database:
• Parts
• Geometry
• Markers
102 Adams View
Models (Classic Interface)
• Joints
• Forces
• Simulation results
• Data elements and System elements
• Design variables
It does not remove plots, interface changes, or design variables that belong to the modeling database.
To delete a model:
1. Do one of the following:
• On the Build menu, point to Model, and then select Delete.
• On the Edit menu, select Delete.
The Database Navigator appears.
2. Select the model you want to delete. Learn about selecting objects.
3. Select OK.
If you selected Delete from the Build menu, Adams View asks you to confirm the deletion of the
model.
4. Select Delete.
Part ground
Is connected to:
LINK_1 via JOINT_2 (Revolute Joint)
LINK_6 via JOINT_1 (Revolute Joint)
LINK_1 via FORCE_1 (Single_Component_Force)
Part LINK_1
Is connected to:
LINK_5 via JOINT_3 (Revolute Joint)
ground via JOINT_2 (Revolute Joint)
ground via FORCE_1 (Single_Component_Force)
Part LINK_5
Is connected to:
LINK_1 via JOINT_3 (Revolute Joint)
LINK_6 via JOINT_4 (Revolute Joint)
Part LINK_6
Is connected to:
LINK_5 via JOINT_4 (Revolute Joint)
ground via JOINT_1 (Revolute Joint)
Unconnected Parts:
LINK_1
104 Adams View
Models (Classic Interface)
Note: You can also view model topology through the Database Navigator.
105
Modeling Database
Modeling Database
Adams View stores all your work in Modeling database.
Learn more:
• About the Adams View Modeling Database
• Creating a Modeling Database
• Opening a Modeling Database
• Saving Modeling Database
• Saving the Current Modeling Database with a New Name
Names of objects in the database use a hierarchical naming structure. For example, a block built on the
ground part is named .model_1.ground.block.
interface appears and you will need to make any changes again in the new database. If, however, you use
the command, Save Settings, on the Settings menu to save any preferences you set, Adams View reads
these and changes the interface accordingly. Learn about Saving and Restoring Settings.
Database Navigator
The Database Navigator helps you view, select, and modify objects in your Modeling database.
Learn more:
• About the Database Navigator
Viewing Objects
• Showing, Hiding, and Selecting Objects in the Database Navigator
• Managing the Select List
• Filtering Objects in the Database Navigator
• Sorting Objects in the Database Navigator
• Setting Highlighting in the Database Navigator
Changing Objects
• Setting Appearance of Objects Through the Database Navigator
• Renaming Objects Through the Database Navigator
• Adding Comments Through the Database Navigator
The Database Navigator has several modes in which you can display object information. It can be set to
just let you browse for objects or you can set it to rename objects, view information about the objects,
such as view how the object relates to other objects, and view dependencies.
The Database Navigator only displays the types of objects that are appropriate for the command you are
executing. For example, if you are renaming a model, it only displays models in your database. On the
other hand, if you are searching for any modeling object in the database, it displays all types of modeling
objects. You can also set a filter for the types of objects that the Database Navigator displays.
109
Database Navigator
The Database Navigator shows objects in their database hierarchy. The following figure shows the
Database Navigator with the top-level modeling objects in a small database that contains one model,
model_1. These objects do not have parents. Double-click the name of a model, in this case model_1, to
find all the objects belonging to that model.
You can use the Database Navigator to select any object in the database. You can also select more than
one object to complete a command. You can create a list of selected objects on which to perform options
by choosing Select List from the pull-down menu at the top of the Database Navigator.
To use the Up and Down arrow keys to select a continuous set of objects:
1. In the tree list, click on the first object, hold down the Shift key, and then use the Up or Down
arrows to select a block of objects.
2. Select OK.
2. From the tree list or view window, select the objects to be on the select list as explained in the
previous section.
3. Select Add.
4. Select Apply.
To toggle highlighting:
• Select Highlighting.
You can also set appearance through the Edit -> Appearance command. Learn about Setting Object
Appearance through Edit -> Appearance Command.
Tip: For transparency, the higher the value, the more transparent the object is, allowing other
objects to show through. The lower the value, the more opaque the object is, covering
other objects. However, setting the transparency of objects can have a negative impact
on graphical performance if you are using a graphics card without hardware
acceleration for OpenGL. Instead of setting an object’s transparency, consider setting
the object’s render mode to wireframe.
3. To set the scope of the appearance changes, you can select either:
113
Database Navigator
To rename an object:
1. From the Database Navigator pull-down menu, select Rename.
2. From the Tree list, select the object to rename.
3. In the text box that appears to the right, type a new name for the object.
4. Select Apply.
• By connections - Displays each constraint and force with the parts they connect and act on. Also
displays any unconnected parts.
Learn more about Model Topology by Connections.
• Graphically - Displays a representation of the selected part and shows its connections to other
parts.
Learn more about Graphically Viewing Model Topology.
• Select .
Information Window
Adams View uses the Information window to display many different types of information about your
model, Simulation, or motion data. In addition to just viewing information about your model, you can
perform a variety of operations in the Information window. For example, you can display additional
information about the current object's parent or child, print the information, display information about a
different object in the database, and more.
Learn more:
Displaying Information
• Displaying Object Information and Accessing the Information Window
• Displaying Parent and Children Information
• Displaying an Object's Modify Dialog Box
Managing Information
• Clearing the Information Window
• Saving Information in the Information Window
• Displaying a Text File in the Information Window
• Copying Text in the Information Window
• Setting the Information Mode
Tip: You may want to zoom in on the object on the screen to more easily place the cursor
over just that object.
To use the Database Navigator to display information about objects in the Information
window:
1. On the
1. On the Status Toolbar, select the Info tool from the Information Strip.
The Database Navigator appears.
2. Select the object about which you want to display information. Learn about selecting objects.
3. Select OK.
The information window appears.
To display object information once you've displayed the Information window, do one of
the following:
• In the text box at the top of the Information window, enter the name of the object, and then select
Apply.
• If the object name already appears in the Information window, place the text cursor in the name
of the object, and then select Apply.
As you create objects, such as parts or constraints, Adams View provides settings to assist in defining the
objects. It provides the settings in a definition container at the left side of the page below the Main Menu
toolbar. For example, as you create a link, Adams View lets you specify its width, length, and depth
before you create it. Then, as you create the link, these dimensions are set regardless of how you move
the cursor. You can also define Design variables or Expressions for these setting values.
To select a default tool so you can use it several times or set the display in all view
windows:
• Double-click the tool with the left mouse button.
database. The types of commands that appear on shortcut menus depend on the type of object required
in the text box. The table below shows the different menu commands that appear for each type of object.
Browsing Directories
You can use the Select File dialog box to browse for a file.
To browse for a file:
1. Right-click a text box that requires a file name to display a shortcut menu.
2. Select Browse to display the Select File dialog box.
3. Double-click the directory that contains the file.
4. In the File Name box, type the file name you want to open, or highlight the file in the list.
5. Select Open.
Tip: Clear the text box, if necessary, and double-click to display the File Selection dialog box
119
Adams View Interface
• Indicates whether or not the information in the text box is required to execute the command. The
following text appears in the menu. They are for information only and do not execute a
command.
• Required appears if the information is required.
• Optional appears if the information is not required.
• Displays the type of information you should enter (text, integer, model, and so on).
• Validates the information you have entered in the text box. This is particularly helpful if you
entered a function in the text box. Adams View also automatically validates the information
when you move the cursor out of the text box.
To toggle on and off the display of the coordinate window, do one of the following:
• On the View menu, select Coordinate Window.
• On the Status Toolbar, from the View Setup Strip, select the Coordinate Window tool .
The coordinate window appears in the lower right corner of the screen. You can move and size it
as you do any window in your operating system.
Tip: Press the F4 key to toggle the display of the coordinate window.
• Resizing Columns
OR:
To paste text:
• Right-click the cell where you want to insert the text, and select Paste.
The following figure shows the Location Table as it appears in Linux when cells contain more
information than can be displayed at once.
Resizing Columns
You can change the size of any column in a table. In addition, in the Location table, you can resize all
columns equally.
To resize a column:
1. Point to the right border of the column heading that you want to resize. The cursor changes to a
double-sided arrow.
2. Drag the cursor until the column is the desired size.
3. Release the mouse button
• On the Main Menu → File handling Strip select the Undo tool .
125
Adams View Interface
• Type Ctrl + Z.
• On the Main Menu → File handling Strip, select the Redo tool .
• Type Ctrl + Shift + Z.
Canceling Operations
You can cancel any operation that you started in Adams View. For example, you can exit from a dialog
box or from a drawing operation or stop a simulation or animation.
• Press the Esc key or from the Status Toolbar → Information Strip → Stop command .
Managing Messages
Types of Messages
Adams View displays informational messages, errors, warnings, and faults in the following interface
elements.
In addition, you can set the size of the icons either in current units or as a factor of their current size.
Learn more about how to set the display of screen icons by database and object type.
• Setting Screen Icon Display by Database
• Setting Screen Icon Display by Object Type
For information on quickly toggling the display of all screen icons, see Displaying View Accessories. For
information on setting the display of icons for individual objects, see Setting Object Appearance.
4. To save the settings for each new database in the Adams View settings file (aviewBS.cmd), select
Save new size as default. Learn about Saving and Restoring Settings.
5. Select OK.
• No Change - Does not change the current settings. Lets you make changes to other display
options without affecting the visibility of the icons.
4. Enter the size you want for the icons or select the amount by which you want to scale the icons.
The scale factor is relative to the current size set. A scale factor of 1 keeps the icons the same size.
A scale factor less than 1.0 reduces the size of the icons and a scale factor greater than 1.0
increases the size of the icons. Note that these changes take precedence over the size you specify
globally for the modeling database.
5. Enter the color you want to use for the icons.
To browse for or create a color, right-click the Color text box, and then select Browse or
Create.
1. Set Name Visibility Option to whether or not you want the names of objects of the selected type
displayed in the view. Refer to Step 3 for an explanation of the choices.
2. Select OK.
130 Adams View
Display Options
Display Options
To use a dialog box to toggle on and off the display of view accessories:
1. Click the view window whose accessories you want to change.
2. On the View menu, select View Accessories, and then select the accessories that you want to turn
on or off from the View Accessories dialog box that appears.
3. Enter the title you want displayed in the currently active view window, and then press Enter.
4. On the Window menu in the View Accessories dialog box, select Exit.
To use tools in the Main menu to toggle on and off the display of view accessories:
1. If you want to change the view accessories for only one view window, click that view window.
2. On the Main Menu, from the Status Toolbar , select a view accessory tool. Double-click
any of the tools to apply the accessory changes to all view windows. Note that the tool must be
on top of the tool stack to double-click it.
131
Display Options
3. Select the buttons Icons or Grid on the Main toolbox to toggle on and off the display of screen
icons and the working grid.
Tip: • Type a lowercase g while the cursor is in the view window to toggle on and off the
display of the working grid in the active view window
• Type a lowercase v to toggle on and off the display of screen icons.
Stereo viewing is only available when running Native OpenGL graphics with the
OpenGL_Software_Assisted registry setting set to disabled. You use the Registry Editor.
The View Background Color command contains all the pre-set colors, while the Background Color tool
stack contains only four of the most commonly used colors.
To create a color:
1. From the Settings menu, select View Background Colors.
The Edit Background Color dialog box appears.
2. If desired, select a color near to the color that you want to create from the palette of preset
background colors.
The color appears in the Current color box, and its color values appear in the Red, Green, and Blue
color value sliders. Adams View creates the color by mixing the red, green, and blue light
percentages as specified in the color value sliders.
3. Change the color values for the color in the Red, Green, and Blue color value sliders, as desired.
As you change the color values, the New color box changes to reflect the new values.
4. Select OK.
You can set the appearance of various elements in the Working grid and toggle their visibility. You can
also set the working grid to represent Polar working grid or Rectangular working grid coordinates.
Size - Enter the size of the grid in the x and y directions in length units.
Spacing - Enter the spacing between each point in the grid in the x and y directions in length
units.
See Rectangular Working Grid Size and Spacing.
• For a polar coordinate system, set the following:
Maximum Radius - Enter the radius of the working grid from its origin to its outermost circle.
Circle Spacing - Enter the amount of space between each circle in the working grid. The
smaller the spacing, the more circles Adams View defines.
Radial Increments - Enter the number of lines radiating from the origin of the working grid.
Adams View spaces the lines equally around the working grid. The lines do not include the
axes. The number of lines (N) determines the angle increment between lines (q), as shown in
the formula:
θ = 360×/N
For example, if you specify 8 lines, the angle increment between the lines is 45.
See Polar Working Grid Sizing and Spacing.
5. Select the color and weight (thickness) of each object in the grid. You can also set the color of the
objects to Contrast, which indicates that Adams View should select a color that contrasts with the
color currently set for the view background. Setting the color to Contrast is particularly helpful
when you set each of your view windows to a different background color or when you frequently
change the view background.
The colors listed for the working grid elements are the same colors provided for setting the color
of objects. The colors do not include any new colors that you created.
The weight values are from 1 to 3 screen pixels.
6. Select OK.
3. Set Set Orientation to how you want to orient the working grid. You can set its orientation by
picking points or by aligning it with the screen plane. Note that if you select Pick for orientation,
you will also set the location of the working grid.
138 Adams View
View Options
View Options
You select the layout you’d like for your main window from a palette of layouts or from the Window
Layout Tool Stack on the Main Toolbox. The palette and tool stack contain the same set of view layouts.
If you display the palette, you can keep it open so that you can quickly select another layout.
To select a layout:
1. Do one of the following:
• On the View menu, select Layout to display the Window Layout palette.
• Select the Window Layouts tool stack.
2. Select a layout.
139
View Options
3. If you used the palette, select Close to close it. You can keep it open to quickly switch between
layouts.
Tip: Type one of the following uppercase letters while the cursor is in a view window to change
to the corresponding view:
• F - Front view
• T - Top view
• R - Right view
• I - Iso
140 Adams View
View Options
2. Click the left mouse button on the point in the model that you want at the center of the window.
To return the origin (0,0) of the window to the center of the window:
• On the View menu, point to Position/Orientation, and then select Origin.
2. Place the cursor in the view window and click and hold down the left mouse button.
3. Drag the cursor in the window as follows:
• To increase perspective, drag the cursor upward.
• To decrease perspective, drag the cursor downward.
4. When the window contains the desired perspective, release the mouse button.
4. When the window contains the desired view, release the mouse button.
Rotate XY tool to rotate the view about the screen’s x- and y-axes at the same time.
2. Place the cursor in the view window, hold down the left mouse button, and move the cursor to
rotate the view in the specified direction. As you move the cursor, the view changes.
143
View Options
3. When the window contains the desired view, release the mouse button.
Tip: Type a lowercase r while the cursor is in the view window to rotate the view about
the x- and y-axes and type a lowercase s to rotate (spin) the view about the z-axis.
2. Select an object.
Tip: Type a lowercase e when the cursor is in the view window. e stands for entity orient.
Tip: Type a lowercase z while the cursor is in the window to dynamically zoom the view.
For example, if you have a model of a car that also has a very large piece of geometry on ground
representing a road, and you use Fit to view the entire model, the view contains all of the geometry, as
shown in the image on the left. The car appears very small after the fit to accommodate the road. If you
use Fit - No Ground, the view is only of the car, as shown in the image on the right.
• On the Main Menu → View Manipulation Strip, select the Fit tool .
• Right-click the background of the screen, and, from the pop-up menu, select Fit to View.
Geometric Modeling tool stack as the Geometric Modeling Palette. You can keep these palettes open
during your entire modeling session and place them anywhere on your screen.
As you create objects, such as parts or constraints, Adams View provides settings to assist in defining the
objects. It provides the settings in a container at the bottom of the palette or Main toolbox. For example,
as you create a link, Adams View lets you specify its width, length, and depth before you create it. Then,
as you create the link, these dimensions are set regardless of how you move the cursor. You can also
define Design variables or Expressions for these setting values.
To select a default tool so you can use it several times or set the display in all view
windows:
• Double-click the tool with the left mouse button.
The shortcut menu also has a command called Guesses. Guesses displays the five most recently created
objects of that type. Depending on the object required, the shortcut menu also contains a command to
create a new object of the required type.
Browsing Directories
You can use the Select File dialog box to browse for a file.
To browse for a file:
1. Right-click a text box that requires a file name to display a shortcut menu.
2. Select Browse to display the Select File dialog box.
3. Double-click the directory that contains the file.
4. In the File Name box, type the file name you want to open, or highlight the file in the list.
5. Select Open.
Tip: Clear the text box, if necessary, and double-click to display the File Selection dialog box
152 Adams View
Adams View Interface (Classic Interface)
• Indicates whether or not the information in the text box is required to execute the command. The
following text appears in the menu. They are for information only and do not execute a
command.
• Required appears if the information is required.
• Optional appears if the information is not required.
• Displays the type of information you should enter (text, integer, model, and so on).
• Validates the information you have entered in the text box. This is particularly helpful if you
entered a function in the text box. Adams View also automatically validates the information
when you move the cursor out of the text box.
To toggle on and off the display of the coordinate window, do one of the following:
• On the View menu, select Coordinate Window.
• On the Main toolbox, from the Toggle Tool Stack, select the Coordinate Window tool .
The coordinate window appears in the lower right corner of the screen. You can move and size it
as you do any window in your operating system.
Tip: Press the F4 key to toggle the display of the coordinate window.
• Resizing Columns
OR:
To paste text:
• Right-click the cell where you want to insert the text, and select Paste.
The following figure shows the Location Table as it appears in Linux when cells contain more
information than can be displayed at once.
Resizing Columns
You can change the size of any column in a table. In addition, in the Location table, you can resize all
columns equally.
To resize a column:
1. Point to the right border of the column heading that you want to resize. The cursor changes to a
double-sided arrow.
2. Drag the cursor until the column is the desired size.
3. Release the mouse button
• Type Ctrl + Z.
158 Adams View
Adams View Interface (Classic Interface)
Canceling Operations
You can cancel any operation that you started in Adams View. For example, you can exit from a dialog
box or from a drawing operation or stop a simulation or animation.
• Press the Esc key or select the Stop tool on the Status bar.
Managing Messages
Types of Messages
Adams View displays informational messages, errors, warnings, and faults in the following interface
elements.
file. In addition, you can set the severity level of the messages displayed, from informational to fatal
messages.
In addition, you can set the size of the icons either in current units or as a factor of their current size.
Learn more about how to set the display of screen icons by database and object type.
• Setting Screen Icon Display by Database
• Setting Screen Icon Display by Object Type
For information on quickly toggling the display of all screen icons, see Displaying View Accessories. For
information on setting the display of icons for individual objects, see Setting Object Appearance.
4. Enter the size you want for the icons or select the amount by which you want to scale the icons.
The scale factor is relative to the current size set. A scale factor of 1 keeps the icons the same size.
A scale factor less than 1.0 reduces the size of the icons and a scale factor greater than 1.0
increases the size of the icons. Note that these changes take precedence over the size you specify
globally for the modeling database.
5. Enter the color you want to use for the icons.
To browse for or create a color, right-click the Color text box, and then select Browse or
Create.
1. Set Name Visibility Option to whether or not you want the names of objects of the selected type
displayed in the view. Refer to Step 3 for an explanation of the choices.
2. Select OK.
163
Display Options
Display Options
Note: You can also use the tools in the Main toolbox to set the display of these items. If you use
the tools, you can change the accessories for all view windows at once but you cannot
change the view title.
To use a dialog box to toggle on and off the display of view accessories:
1. Click the view window whose accessories you want to change.
2. On the View menu, select View Accessories, and then select the accessories that you want to turn
on or off from the View Accessories dialog box that appears.
3. Enter the title you want displayed in the currently active view window, and then press Enter.
4. On the Window menu in the View Accessories dialog box, select Exit.
To use tools in the Main toolbox to toggle on and off the display of view accessories:
1. If you want to change the view accessories for only one view window, click that view window.
164 Adams View
Display Options
2. On the Main toolbox, from the Toggle Tool Stack, select a view accessory tool. Double-click any
of the tools to apply the accessory changes to all view windows. Note that the tool must be on top
of the tool stack to double-click it.
3. Select the buttons Icons or Grid on the Main toolbox to toggle on and off the display of screen
icons and the working grid.
Tip: • Type a lowercase g while the cursor is in the view window to toggle on and off the
display of the working grid in the active view window
• Type a lowercase v to toggle on and off the display of screen icons.
Stereo viewing is only available when running Native OpenGL graphics with the
OpenGL_Software_Assisted registry setting set to disabled. You use the Registry Editor.
The View Background Color command contains all the pre-set colors, while the Background Color tool
stack contains only four of the most commonly used colors.
167
Display Options
To create a color:
1. From the Settings menu, select View Background Colors.
The Edit Background Color dialog box appears.
2. If desired, select a color near to the color that you want to create from the palette of preset
background colors.
The color appears in the Current color box, and its color values appear in the Red, Green, and Blue
color value sliders. Adams View creates the color by mixing the red, green, and blue light
percentages as specified in the color value sliders.
3. Change the color values for the color in the Red, Green, and Blue color value sliders, as desired.
As you change the color values, the New color box changes to reflect the new values.
4. Select OK.
You can set the appearance of various elements in the Working grid and toggle their visibility. You can
also set the working grid to represent Polar working grid or Rectangular working grid coordinates.
4. Select the size and spacing of the working grid. The options for setting the size and spacing
depend on the type of working grid you select, as listed below.
• For a rectangular working grid, set the following:
Size - Enter the size of the grid in the x and y directions in length units.
Spacing - Enter the spacing between each point in the grid in the x and y directions in length
units.
See Rectangular Working Grid Size and Spacing.
• For a polar coordinate system, set the following:
Maximum Radius - Enter the radius of the working grid from its origin to its outermost circle.
Circle Spacing - Enter the amount of space between each circle in the working grid. The
smaller the spacing, the more circles Adams View defines.
Radial Increments - Enter the number of lines radiating from the origin of the working grid.
Adams View spaces the lines equally around the working grid. The lines do not include the
axes. The number of lines (N) determines the angle increment between lines (q), as shown in
the formula:
θ = 360×/N
For example, if you specify 8 lines, the angle increment between the lines is 45.
See Polar Working Grid Sizing and Spacing.
5. Select the color and weight (thickness) of each object in the grid. You can also set the color of the
objects to Contrast, which indicates that Adams View should select a color that contrasts with the
color currently set for the view background. Setting the color to Contrast is particularly helpful
when you set each of your view windows to a different background color or when you frequently
change the view background.
The colors listed for the working grid elements are the same colors provided for setting the color
of objects. The colors do not include any new colors that you created.
The weight values are from 1 to 3 screen pixels.
6. Select OK.
2. Set the center location of the working grid by setting Set Location to one of the following:
• Global Origin to set the center location of the working grid to the center of the view window.
• Pick and click a location on the screen to set as the center of the working grid.
3. Set Set Orientation to how you want to orient the working grid. You can set its orientation by
picking points or by aligning it with the screen plane. Note that if you select Pick for orientation,
you will also set the location of the working grid.
171
View Options
View Options
You select the layout you’d like for your main window from a palette of layouts or from the Window
Layout Tool Stack on the Main Toolbox. The palette and tool stack contain the same set of view layouts.
If you display the palette, you can keep it open so that you can quickly select another layout.
To select a layout:
1. Do one of the following:
• On the View menu, select Layout to display the Window Layout palette.
• Select the Window Layouts tool stack.
2. Select a layout.
172 Adams View
View Options
3. If you used the palette, select Close to close it. You can keep it open to quickly switch between
layouts.
Tip: Type one of the following uppercase letters while the cursor is in a view window to change
to the corresponding view:
• F - Front view
• T - Top view
• R - Right view
• I - Iso
lets you set the center about which Adams View rotates the view. You can also reposition the model so
that the origin (0,0) of the window is again at the center of the window.
2. Click the left mouse button on the point in the model that you want at the center of the window.
To return the origin (0,0) of the window to the center of the window:
• On the View menu, point to Position/Orientation, and then select Origin.
2. Place the cursor in the view window and click and hold down the left mouse button.
3. Drag the cursor in the window as follows:
• To increase perspective, drag the cursor upward.
• To decrease perspective, drag the cursor downward.
4. When the window contains the desired perspective, release the mouse button.
Tip: Type a lowercase r while the cursor is in the view window to rotate the view about
the x- and y-axes and type a lowercase s to rotate (spin) the view about the z-axis.
• As you rotate the view, hold down the Shift key. Holding down the Shift key limits Adams View
to the increments you specified. To rotate the view continuously, release the Shift key.
Tip: Type a lowercase e when the cursor is in the view window. e stands for entity orient.
Tip: Type a lowercase z while the cursor is in the window to dynamically zoom the view.
of the view window. The shape of the window you define does not need to correspond to the shape of the
view window. Adams View fits the specified area into the view window as necessary.
For example, if you have a model of a car that also has a very large piece of geometry on ground
representing a road, and you use Fit to view the entire model, the view contains all of the geometry, as
180 Adams View
View Options
shown in the image on the left. The car appears very small after the fit to accommodate the road. If you
use Fit - No Ground, the view is only of the car, as shown in the image on the right.
Parts
Parts define the objects in your model that can have mass and inertia properties and can move. All forces
and constraints that you define in your model act on these parts during a simulation. The next sections
explain more about parts:
Types of Parts
Adams View provides you with four different types of parts that you can create:
• Rigid Bodies
• Flexible bodies - Basic Adams View provides you with the ability to create Discrete Flexible Link.
For more functionality, you can purchase Adams Flex. For information on purchasing Adams
Flex, see your MSC sales representative, and for information on using Adams Flex, refer to
Adams Flex online help.
• Point mass
• FE part beam
In addition, Adams View provides a ground part that is already created for you.
The local coordinate system is a convenient way to define the position and location of objects. Adams
View also returns Simulation results, such as the position of a part, as the displacement of a part’s local
coordinate system with respect to the global coordinate system. It returns object results, however, as the
displacement of a part’s center of mass relative to the global coordinate system.
Degrees of Freedom
Each rigid body that you create can move within all Degrees of freedom; a point mass can move within
three translational degrees of freedom. You can constrain the movement of parts by:
• Adding them to the ground part, which means they are fixed to the ground and cannot move in
any direction. Each time you create geometry, Adams View gives you the option to add it to
ground, create a new part, or add it to an existing part.
• Adding constraints, such as joints, to define how the parts are attached and how they move
relative to each other.
Naming Conventions
As you create parts, Adams View automatically generates names for them based on their type and the
number of objects of that type in your model. For example, when you create a point mass, Adams View
names it POINT_MASS_1. For all rigid bodies, except points and coordinate system markers, Adams
View uses the name PART regardless of the type of geometry. For example, if you create a box, Adams
View names it PART_1. When you create a second box, Adams View names it PART_2, and so on. You
can rename your parts. Learn about Renaming Objects Through Menu Commands.
Rigid Bodies
The most common type of part in your model is a Rigid body. Adams View provides a library of geometry
that you can use to create rigid bodies. A part can be made up of many different geometric objects. There
are two types of geometry that you can use to create rigid bodies.
• Construction geometry
• Solid geometry
Each time you create geometry, you can select to do one of the following:
• Create a new part containing the geometry.
• Add the geometry to an existing part.
• Add the geometry to ground. You add geometry to ground if the geometry does not move or
influence the simulation of your model. For example, if you are simulating a car driving around
a race track, the geometry that defines the race track can be added to ground. (You can also fix
parts temporarily to ground using a fixed joint.
In addition, you specify the location of the geometry in space. You can select to define the location of the
geometry:
152 Adams View
Parts
• Graphically, by picking locations on the screen or by selecting an object on the screen that is at
the desired location.
• Precisely, by entering coordinate locations.
Also See Geometric Modeling Palette and Tool Stack to learn more about creating rigid body geometry.
Note: • Using planar parts does not limit your use of three-dimensional contacts. If you can
simplify your contacts to two-dimensional representations, however, you will usually
realize speed improvements.
• A planar body is implicitly constrained to move in a plane at a fixed global value of z.
Any force applied to the planar part in the global z direction is discarded. The same
applies to torques about the global x- and y-axes. It is not possible to measure the
reaction forces required to constrain the planar part to stay in plane. If such forces are
desired, you must subsitute the equivalent part and planar joint combination.
Parameterization
As you create rigid bodies in your model, you can define them so that the location or orientation of one
object affects the location or orientation of another body. This is called parameterizing your model.
Parameterizing your model simplifies changes to your model because it helps you automatically size,
relocate, and orient objects. For example, if you parameterize the geometry of two links to the location
of a point, when you move the point, the link geometry changes accordingly, as shown in the figure
below.
Example of Parameterizing Locations
The ways in which you can build parameterization into your model while creating rigid bodies include
the following:
• Attach objects to points so that when you change the location of the points, the body locations
and orientations update accordingly.
As you create a point, Adams View gives you the option to attach other nearby objects to the
point. The help that explain how to create points also explain how to attach objects to them.
• Define design variables to represent values of your rigid body geometry, such as the length or
width of a link. You can create design variables for any values you specify for a rigid body.
Design variables are needed when you run tests on your model, such as design studies. Learn
about Using Design Variables.
• Create expressions that calculate the values of your rigid bodies, such as the length or width of a
box. You can specify expressions for any values you specify for a rigid body geometry. For more
information on creating expressions, see Adams View Function Builder online help.
You can also parameterize your model after you build it. For more information on parameterization, see
Improving Your Model Designs
• Turn on the Working grid so that the points snap to a grid. In addition, Adams View draws objects
parallel to the current working grid so by displaying it you can better see how your objects are
being drawn. Learn about Setting Up the Working Grid.
• Display the Coordinate window so that you can view the coordinate values as you place points.
Learn about Working with the Coordinate Window.
• Be sure to set the current units to those required for your model. Learn about Setting Default
Coordinate System.
• Review the different tools for drawing and placing objects in Tools and Techniques.
Building Models 155
Tools and Techniques
The Model Navigator only highlights those objects that are appropriate for the operation you are
currently performing. For example, when you are aligning the faces of two parts, the Model Navigator
only highlights faces. It does not highlight edges or points. In addition, if you are chaining together wire
geometry, the Model Navigator only highlights wire geometry.
Finally, when you are defining a direction, the Model Navigator lets you select points, edges, or faces.
When you select an edge or face, the Model Navigator then lets you select the direction along the object
that you want to define since edges and faces don't provide unique direction.
To improve performance you can turn off the Model Navigator.
Note: If the Working grid is on, when you draw, move, resize, or reshape geometry, the geometry
automatically snaps to the grid points. Learn about turning on and off the working grid.
2. In the upper box, enter the coordinates at which to place the object.
3. Select the element (Working grid, global coordinate system, or modeling object) to which the
coordinates are relative. By default, the coordinates are relative to the working grid.
4. In the lower box, enter the object to which the coordinates are relative. You only need to enter an
object if you selected that the coordinates are relative to an object.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
5. Select Apply.
Building Models 157
Tools and Techniques
Orientation Methods
Orientation
Orientation of rigid or flexible body using three rotation angles. Adams View orients the body starting
from the initial coordinate system and applying three successive rotations.
Depending on the convention you select, the rotations occur about space-fixed or body-fixed axes in any
combination of the x, y, and z axes. By default, you supply body 313 (body-fixed z, x, z) angles.
Adams View applies your orientation angles with respect to the coordinate system in the Orientation
Relative To or Relative To text box.
Adams View applies the location coordinates in the coordinate system you identify in the Location
Relative To or Relative To text box.
Note that this does not completely dictate the orientation of the coordinate system. Adams View positions
the coordinate system with an arbitrary rotation about the axis. If you must completely control the
coordinate system orientation, select Orientation or In Plane Orientation.
By default, you direct the z-axis of the coordinate system. You can use the DEFAULTS
ORIENT_AXIS_AND_PLANE AXIS_AND_PLANE_SETTING command to change this convention.
For example, selecting either X_AXIS_XY_PLANE or X_AXIS_XZ_PLANE directs the x-axis. The
plane-convention setting does not affect this parameter.
You can also direct the axis graphically using the marker’s position handle. Simply point the appropriate
axis on the marker in the desired direction.
Building Models 159
Orientation Methods
In Plane Oriention
Orientation of the rigid or flexible body by directing one of the axes and locating one of the coordinate
planes.
In Plane Orientation
To define an axis and a plane, you need three points. You can enter either two or three locations, however.
If you enter three locations, the axis points from the first location to the second and the plane is parallel
to the plane defined by the three locations. If you enter only two locations, Adams View uses the location
you specified in the Location text box as the first point and the other two locations as the second and third
points.
Adams View applies the location coordinates in the coordinate system in the Relative To text box.
By default, you direct the z-axis of the coordinate system marker and locate the zx plane. You can use
the DEFAULTS ORIENT_AXIS_AND_PLANE AXIS_AND_PLANE_SETTING command to change
this convention. For example, selecting X_AXIS_XY_PLANE directs the x-axis and orients the xy
plane.
160 Adams View
Orientation Methods
Construction Geometry
You can create several types of Construction geometry. You draw construction geometry normal to the
screen or the working grid, if you turned it on.
Creating Points
To create a point:
1. From the Geometric Modeling Palette and Tool Stack, select the Point Tool .
2. In the settings container, specify the following:
• Whether you want the point added to ground or to another part in your model.
• Whether you want to attach nearby objects to the point. For information on attaching
objects, see Parameterization.
3. If you selected to add the point to another part in your model, select the part.
4. Place the cursor where you want the point to be located and click the left mouse button.
Tip: If you want to place the point at the location of another object, as you create the point, right-
click near the object. Adams View displays a list of objects near the cursor. Select the object
at whose location you want to place the point. Adams View creates the point at that
location.
If you want to specify precise coordinates, right-click away from the object. A dialog box
for entering the location of the point appears. For information on using the dialog box, see
Entering Precise Location Coordinates.
Creating Markers
To create a marker:
1. From the Geometric Modeling Palette and Tool Stack, select the Marker Tool .
2. In the settings container, specify the following:
• Whether you want the marker added to: (a) Ground (b) Another part in your model (including
a flexible body); or (c) Curve (only available with Adams Solver (C++)) (Learn about
switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box help.)
• How you want to orient the marker. Set Orientation to the desired orientation method. When
adding a marker to a curve, the orientation is prescribed implicitly.
3. Do one of the following:
• If you selected to add the marker to a part, select the part to which you want to add the marker.
• If you selected to add the marker to a curve, select the spline curve onto which you want to
add the marker (splines and data-element curves are all considered curves).
162 Adams View
Construction Geometry
4. Place the cursor where you want the marker to be located and click.
5. If you selected to orient the marker to anything other than the global or view coordinate system,
select the directions along which you want to align the marker’s axes. Do this for each axis that
you selected to specify.
Adams View draws the marker, aligning its axes as specified.
Tip: To reorient the marker, use the Align & Rotate tool from the Move tool stack, select Align
One Axis, and then follow the prompts:
5. To create the first line segment, drag the cursor and click to select its endpoint.
6. To add line segments to the polyline, continue dragging the cursor and clicking.
7. To stop drawing and create the open or closed polyline, right-click. If you selected to create a
closed polyline, Adams View automatically draws a line segment between the last and first points
to close the polyline. Note that clicking the right mouse button does not create another point.
Tip: While creating the polyline, you can remove the last line segment that you created by
clicking its endpoint. You can continue removing line segments in the reverse order that
you created them.
To draw a circle:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette, select the Arc Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part or add the geometry to an existing part. By
default, Adams View creates a new part.
• If desired, set the radius of the circle.
• Select Circle.
3. Click where you want the center of the circle and then drag the mouse to define the radius of the
circle. If you specified the radius of the circle in the settings container, Adams View maintains
that radius regardless of how you drag the mouse.
4. When the radius is the desired size, click.
164 Adams View
Construction Geometry
Creating Splines
To create a spline by selecting points on the screen:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Spline Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the
geometry to an existing part or ground.
• Select whether you want the spline to be closed or open.
3. Set Create by Picking to Curve or Edge.
4. Place the cursor where you want to begin drawing the spline, and click.
5. Click the locations where you want the spline to pass through. You must specify at least eight
locations for a closed spline and four locations for an open spline.
6. To stop drawing the spline, right-click.
Tip: If you make a mistake, click the last location you defined. You can continue removing
locations by clicking on each location in the reverse order that you defined them.
Creating a Box
To create a box:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Box Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the
geometry to an existing part or ground.
• If desired, set any of length, height, or depth dimensions of the box.
3. Place the cursor where you want a corner of the box and click and hold down the left mouse
button.
4. Drag the mouse to define the size of the box. If you specified any of the length, height, or depth
dimensions of the box in the settings container, Adams View maintains those dimensions
regardless of how you drag the mouse.
5. Release the mouse button when the box is the desired size.
Creating a Cylinder
To create a cylinder:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette, select the Cylinder Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the
geometry to an existing part or ground. By default, Adams View creates a new part.
166 Adams View
Creating Solid Geometry
• If desired, set the length or radius dimensions of the cylinder in the settings container.
3. Click and hold down the mouse where you want to begin drawing the cylinder.
4. Drag the mouse to size the cylinder. If you specified any of the length and radius dimensions of
the cylinder in the settings container, Adams View maintains those dimensions regardless of how
you drag the mouse.
5. When the cylinder is the desired size, click.
Creating a Sphere
To create a sphere:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Sphere Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the
geometry to an existing part or ground. By default, Adams View creates a new part.
• If desired, set the radius of the sphere.
3. Click where you want the center of the sphere.
4. Drag the mouse to size the sphere. If you specified a radius dimension for the sphere in the settings
container, Adams View maintains that dimension regardless of how you drag the mouse.
5. When the sphere is the desired size, click.
Creating a Frustum
To create a frustum:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette, select the Frustum Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the
geometry to an existing part or ground.
• If desired, set the length or radii of the frustum.
3. Click where you want to begin drawing the frustum.
4. Drag the mouse to size the frustum. If you specified the length or radii of the frustum in the
settings container, Adams View maintains those dimensions regardless of how you drag the
mouse.
5. When the frustum is the desired size, click.
167
Creating Solid Geometry
Creating a Torus
To create a torus:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette, select the Torus Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the
geometry to an existing part or ground. By default, Adams View creates a new part.
• If desired, set the minor and major radii of the torus.
3. Place the cursor where you want the center of the torus and click.
4. Drag the mouse to define the radius of the torus. If you specified the radii of the torus in the
settings container, Adams View maintains those dimensions regardless of how you drag the
mouse.
5. When the torus is the desired size, click.
Creating a Link
To create a link:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Link Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the
geometry to an existing part or ground.
• If desired, set any of the length, width, or depth dimensions of the link.
3. Place the cursor where you want to begin drawing the link, and click.
4. Drag the mouse until the link is the desired size and then release the mouse button. If you specified
the length, width, and depth of the link in the settings container, Adams View maintains those
dimensions regardless of how you drag the mouse.
Creating a Plate
To create a plate:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette, select the Plate Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the
geometry to an existing part or ground.
• If desired, set the thickness or radius of the corners of the plate.
3. Place the cursor where you want the first corner of the plate and click the left mouse button.
4. Click at each corner of the plate. You must specify at least three locations.
168 Adams View
Creating Solid Geometry
Note: If the distance between any two adjacent points is less than two times the radius of the
corner, Adams View cannot create the plate.
Creating an Extrusion
To create an extrusion based on an existing curve profile:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette, select the Extrusion Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the
geometry to an existing part or ground.
• Set Create profile by to Curve.
• If desired, set the length (depth) of the extrusion.
• Specify the direction you want the profile to be extruded from the current Working grid.
Learn about directions.
• Select Analytical to create the revolution using the Analytical Method. Clear to use the Non-
analytical Method.
3. Select the curve profile.
Creating a Revolution
To create a revolution by selecting points to define the profile:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Revolution Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part or add the geometry to an existing part or
ground.
• Set Create by Picking to Points.
• Specify whether or not you want to create a closed revolution.
• Select Analytical to create the revolution using the Analytical Method. Clear to use the Non-
analytical Method.
3. Click at two points that define the axis about which Adams View revolves the profile.
4. Click at the location of each vertex in the profile; then right-click to finish drawing the profile.
Tip: Be sure to draw the profile so that it does not intersect the line you drew to define
the axis of revolution.
Extrusion Limits
You can only select to extrude a profile whose extrusion would have the following properties:
• Same dimensions. For example, you cannot extrude a profile that would have mixed dimensions.
See an Example of Mixed Dimensions.
• Edge or face shared by only one face. See an Example of Objects with Shared edges and faces.
• No intersecting lines.
Objects with these properties are called manifold. If the object extruded did not have these properties, it
would be non-manifold.
If the result of an extrusion is an object that is non-manifold, you receive the following error message
when you try to create the extrusion:
171
Creating Complex Geometry
Combining Geometry
Once you have created individual parts of Solid geometry, you can combine them into one part to create
complex, solid geometry, referred to as constructive, solid geometry or CSG. Adams View creates the
solid geometry using Boolean operations, such as union and intersection.
Cutting a Solid
To create a part from the difference of two solids:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette, select the Cut Tool .
2. Select the solid geometry to be cut. As you move the cursor, Adams View highlights those objects
that can be cut. The second part you select is cut from the first part.
Splitting a Solid
To split a complex solid:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Split Tool .
2. Select the solid geometry to be split. Adams View highlights those objects in your model that can
be split.
173
Adding Features to Geometry
Tip: To create a hole or boss at a specific location, create a temporary marker at the desired
location for the hole or boss, and select it in Step 4.
174 Adams View
Adding Features to Geometry
Merging Geometry
To merge two rigid body geometry:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Merge Tool .
2. Select the geometry to be merged. Adams View highlights those objects in your model that can
be merged as you move the cursor around the modeling window. The second geometry that you
select is combined into the first.
Adams View combines the selected geometry and deletes the second.
Discrete Flexible Links
A discrete flexible link consists of two or more rigid bodies connected by beam force elements. You
indicate the following and Adams View creates the appropriate parts, geometry, forces, and constraints
at the endpoints:
• Endpoints of the link
• Number of parts and the material type
• Properties of the beam
• Types of endpoint attachments (flexible, rigid, or free)
The following figure shows a flexible link composed of rigid bodies whose cross-section geometry is
rectangular.
For more information on beam force elements, see Adding a Massless Beam. Also note the caution about
the asymmetry of beams explained in that section.
Learn more:
• Types of Flexible Link Geometry
• Positioning Flexible Links
• About Number of Beams Created
• Creating Flexible Links
• Modifying Flexible Links
176 Adams View
Discrete Flexible Links
Note that Adams View does not directly use the geometry to account for stress on the beam. Therefore,
any stress values are based on the area and area moments.
For links with axisymmetric cross-sections, such as solid and hollow circular sections, the orientation of
the cross section is not critical and so Adams View does not require the use of an orientation marker.
3. Define the length of the link and its flexibility at its ends as explained in the table below.
4. Select one of the following to define the geometry of the link or specify the area and area moments
of inertia of the flexible link, and then select OK.
• Solid Rectangle
• Solid Circle
• Hollow Rectangle
• Hollow Circle
• I-Beam
• Properties
• Orient Marker - The marker that defines the orientation (z-axis) of link. For information on
setting the orientation of the geometry, see Positioning Flexible Links.
• Base - The width of the rectangle (dimension in local y direction).
• Height - The height of the rectangle (dimension in local z direction).
Solid Circle
• Diameter - Diameter of the circular cross-section.
Hollow Rectangle
• Orient Marker - The marker that defines the orientation (z-axis) of the link. See Positioning
Flexible Links on setting the orientation of the geometry.
• Base - The outer width of the rectangular shell.
• Height - The height of the outer rectangular shell.
• Thickness - Uniform width of the wall of the rectangular shell.
180 Adams View
Discrete Flexible Links
Hollow Circle
• Diameter - Outer diameter of the circular shell.
• Thickness - Width of the wall of the circular shell.
I-Beam
• Orient Marker - The marker that defines the orientation of the link. See Positioning Flexible
Links for information on setting the orientation of the geometry.
• Base - Enter the width of the I-beam.
• Height - Enter the height of I-beam.
• Flange - Enter the width of the flange of the I-beam.
• Web - Enter the width of the web of the beam.
Properties
Enter values in the following text boxes to create your own custom-shaped cross-section:
• Orient Marker - The marker that defines the orientation (z-axis) of the link. For information on
setting the orientation of the link, see Positioning Flexible Links.
• X Section Area - Specify the uniform area of the beam cross section. The centroidal axis must
be orthogonal to this cross section.
• Link Mass - Enter the total mass of all the link segments combined.
• Link Segment Inertias - Specify the area moments of inertia for the link.
• Ixx - Enter the torsional constant, also referred to as torsional shape factor or torsional stiffness
coefficient. It is expressed as unit length to the fourth power. For a solid circular section, Ixx is
identical to the polar moment of inertia J = (πr4/2). For thin-walled sections, open sections, and
noncircular sections, consult a handbook.
181
Discrete Flexible Links
• Iyy, Izz - Enter the area moments of inertia about the neutral axes of the beam-cross sectional
areas (y-y and z-z). These are sometimes referred to as the second moments of area about a given
axis. They are expressed as unit length to the fourth power. For a solid circular section, Iyy=Izz =
(πr4/4). For thin-walled sections, open sections, and noncircular sections, consult a handbook.
Note: The example of an elliptical cross-section below is only one example of many cross-
sections that you can create using the Properties option.
Point Masses
Point masses are points that have mass but no inertia properties or angular velocities. They are
computationally more efficient when rotational effects are not important.
For example, you could use point masses to represent the concentrated masses in a net. You could then
represent the ropes between the masses as forces or springs. The following figure shows a model of a net
with point masses.
After simulating the motion, you then request Adams View to trace the motion of the follower circle
relative to the cam circle and create spline geometry based on that geometry. The following figure shows
the cam and follower geometry and the trace that Adams View creates.
7. Replay the simulation to see the selected object follow the trace curve.
Tip: The following are some tips on creating splines from traces:
• When you trace an object, the point/circle should move in a smooth, even path or
the trace ends up looking like scribbles on the screen.
• If the path is closed, you should simulate for one cycle only.
• If the trace is uneven or complex, you can get a strange looking curve as a result.
As an alternative to the Create Trace Spline menu command, you can use the
Command Navigator to execute the command: geometry create curve
point_trace. It lets you create a polyline instead of a spline, which works better if
the trace is uneven or complex. In that case, the motion of the cam or slot is
transferred through the traced curve and gives the desired follower motion.
186 Adams View
Creating Trace Spline
Overview of Constraints
Constraints define how parts (rigid bodies, Flexible bodies, or Point mass) are attached to one another and
how they are allowed to move relative to each other. Constraints restrict relative movement between parts
and represent idealized connections.
Types of Constraints
Adams View provides a library of constraints including:
• Idealized joints
• Primitive joints
• Motions generators
• Higher-pair constraints
The following figure shows some of the different types of idealized joints that Adams View supports.
to one another regardless of any motion or force in the model. Each constraint in Adams View removes
different DOF.
For example, a revolute joint removes all three translational DOF and two of the rotational DOF between
two parts. If each part had a point on the joint that was on the centerline of the revolute pin, then the two
points would always remain coincident. They would only rotate with respect to one another about one
axis: the centerline of the revolute joint.
The total number of DOF in a model is equal to the difference between the number of allowed part
motions and the number of active constraints in the model. When you run a simulation of your model,
Adams Solver calculates the number of DOF in your model as it determines the algebraic equations of
motion to be solved in your model. You can also calculate the DOF in your model before running a
simulation as explained in Verifying Your Model.
For a list of the DOF that the different constraints in Adams View remove, see the following:
• DOF Removed by Idealized Joints
• DOF Removed by Primitive Joints
• DOF Removed by Higher-Pair Constraints
• DOF Removed by Motion
There are other constraints, such as Hooke/universal, inline, and perpendicular, which are very
sensitive to which part is the first part and which is the second. When you create these
constraints, you should explicitly select the parts to be connected.
• Explicitly select the parts to be connected. The first part that you select moves relative to the
second part that you select.
• If you created your model in exploded view, which lets you create individual parts and then
assemble them together into a model, you can specify the parts to be connected by the constraint
and then select a different location for the constraint on each part. When you assemble the parts
into a model, Adams View joins the parts together at the location on the first part that you
selected. Learn about Performing Initial Conditions Simulation.
Try to find only one constraint that removes all the DOF that you need to remove. If you define
more than one constraint between two parts, you get the union of the DOF that each constraint
removes, which may not be what you expected. For example, if you have two concentric,
cylindrical parts that you want to allow to rotate and translate with respect to each other, and you
use one translational and one revolute joint between the parts, you lock the parts together. They
lock together because the translational joint allows no relative rotational movement and the
revolute joint allows no relative translational movement. In this case, instead of using the two
joints, you should use a single cylindrical joint.
• Check the DOF in your system periodically.
Use the Verify command to check the DOF in your model to make sure you have the correct
number of parts and constraints. Learn about Verifying Your Model.
• Run a Kinematic simulation to test your model without forces.
If possible, run a kinematic simulation before performing a dynamic simulation. By running a
kinematic simulation, you can ensure that connections are correct before you add forces to your
model. You may have to add temporary constraints to your model to run a kinematic simulation.
• Remove redundant constraints from your model even if a simulation of your model runs
correctly. See More on Redundant Constraint Checking.
Point-Curve Constraints
The point-curve constraint restricts a fixed point defined on one part to lie on a curve defined on a second
part. The first part is free to roll and slide on the curve that is fixed to a second part. The curve on the
second part can be planar or spatial or open or closed. The first part cannot lift off the second part; it must
always lie on the curve. A point-curve constraint removes two translational Degrees of freedom from
your model.
When you specify the location of the point-curve constraint on the first part, Adams View creates a
marker at that location. The marker is called the I marker. The I marker can only translate in one direction
relative to the curve. The I marker, however, is free to rotate in all three directions.
You can use the point-curve constraint to model a Pin-in-slot mechanism or a Simple Cam Follower
mechanism where a lever arm is articulated by the profile of a revolving cam.
When modeling a pin-in-slot mechanism, the point-curve constraint keeps the center of the pin in the
center of the slot, while allowing it to move freely along the slot and rotate in the slot.
191
Overview of Constraints
Note: You can also modify constraint properties using the Table Editor.
1. Display the Constraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Point Curve dialog box as explained in
Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
2. Assign a unique ID number to it. Learn about Adams Solver IDs.
3. In the Comments text box, add any comments about the cam that you want to enter to help you
manage and identify the cam. Learn about Comments.
4. Set the basic properties as explained in the table below.
Ref Marker Name Enter marker that is fixed on the part containing the curve on which the point
must move. Adams Solver uses the reference marker to associate the shape
defined by the curve to the part on which the reference marker lies. The
curve coordinates are, therefore, specified in the coordinate system of the
reference marker.
Displacement Ic/ Select either:
No Displacement Ic
• Displacement Ic - Enter the initial point of contact along the curve. If
the point you specify is not exactly on the curve, Adams View uses a
point on the curve nearest to the point you specify. By default, you
specify the initial point of contact in the coordinate system of the part
containing the curve or specify it in the coordinate system of the marker
you specify for Ic Ref Marker Name.
• No Displacement Ic - Leaves the initial displacement unset.
Learn about Higher-Pair Constraints Initial Conditions.
193
Overview of Constraints
• Enter the marker with which the initial point of contact on the curve is
specified.
• Leave blank. Adams View uses the coordinate system of the part
containing the curve.
5. Set the initial conditions as explained in the table below, and then select OK.
• Enter the marker with which the initial point of contact on the curve is
specified.
• Leave blank. Adams View uses the coordinate system of the part containing
the curve.
Results Note
In addition to the forces generated by this constraint, the result set will also contain the entry "A" which
is the position along the curve at which the constraint is acting. This is a normalized length measured
from -1.0 (one end of the curve) to 1.0 (opposite end of the curve).
Curve-Curve Constraints
A curve-curve constraint restricts a curve defined on the first part to remain in contact with a second
curve defined on a second part. The curve-curve constraint is useful for modeling cams where the point
194 Adams View
Overview of Constraints
of contact between two parts changes during the motion of the mechanism. The curve-curve constraint
removes two Degrees of freedom from your model.
An example of a curve-curve constraint is a valve lifter where a cam lifts a plate-like object. The point
of contact between the plate and the cam changes depending on the position and shape of the cam.
The two curves of the constraint, which you define by selecting edges in your model, must lie in the same
plane. You can initially select curves that are not in the same plane, but Adams Solver moves the parts
during Simulation to ensure that the two curves are constrained to the same plane of motion with respect
to each other. Both curves can be open or closed.
The curves always maintain contact, even when the dynamics of the model might actually lift one curve
off the other. You can examine the constraint forces to determine if any lift-off should have occurred. If
your results require an accurate simulation of intermittent contact, you should model the contact forces
directly using a vector force.
The curve-curve constraint models only one contact. Therefore, if the curves have contact at more than
one point, you need to create a curve-curve constraint for each contact, each with a initial condition
displacement near the appropriate point. Learn about Higher-Pair Constraints Initial Conditions.
Note: Instead of defining a curve by selecting a curve on a part, you can also use a curve element
that you create to define the curve. To specify a curve element, you can create geometry for
the curve and select that geometry as you create the cam or modify the cam to reference
the curve element. Learn about Creating and Modifying Curve Data Elements.
2. In the settings container, for each part, set whether or not you will be selecting an edge or curve:
• Curves - Splines, chains, and data element curves are all considered curves.
• Edge - An edge is one of the wireframe outlines drawn on a solid. For example, you can use
a Parasolid object representing a cam that you imported into Adams View.
3. Select a curve or edge that will travel along a second curve.
4. Select the curve along which the first curve will travel. The curve can be closed or open. Note that
when you select a closed curve, Adams View highlights only a portion of the curve. Adams View
will use the entire curve.
Note: You can also modify constraint properties using the Table Editor.
1. Display the Constraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Curve Curve as explained in Accessing Modify
Dialog Boxes.
2. Assign a unique ID number to it. Learn about Adams Solver IDs.
3. In the Comments text box, add any comments about the cam that you want to enter to help you
manage and identify the cam. Learn about Comments.
4. Set the basic properties as explained in the table below.
5. Set the initial conditions as explained in the table below, and then select OK. Learn about Higher-
Pair Constraints Initial Conditions.
• Enter the marker with which the initial point of contact (displacement) on
the first curve (I curve) is specified.
• Leave blank. Adams View uses the coordinate system of the part
containing the curve.
J Ic Ref Marker Name You can:
• Enter the marker with which the initial point of contact (displacement) on
the second curve (J curve) is specified.
• Leave blank. Adams View uses the coordinate system of the part
containing the curve
Results Note
In addition to the forces generated by this constraint, the result set will also contain the entries "A1" and
"A2":
• A1 is the position along the I part's curve at which the constraint is acting. This is a normalized
length measured from -1.0 (one end of the curve) to 1.0 (opposite end of the curve).
• A2 is the position along the J part's curve at which the constraint is acting. This is a normalized
length measured from -1.0 (one end of the curve) to 1.0 (opposite end of the curve).
198 Adams View
Overview of Constraints
• You can create more than one contact using the same curve.
199
Overview of Constraints
• It is easy to over-constrain a model using the curve-to-curve constraint. For example, in a cam-
follower configuration, the cam should usually be rotating on a cylindrical joint, not a revolute
joint. If the follower is held by a translational joint and the cam by a cylindrical joint, the curve-
to-curve cam between the follower and cam prevents the cam from translating along the axis of
rotation, which is the axis of the cylindrical joint. A revolute joint would add a redundant
constraint in that direction.
If you supply an initial point, Adams View assembles the model with the marker at the specified
point on the curve, even if it must override part initial conditions to do so. If you do not supply
an initial point, Adams View assumes the initial contact is at the point on the curve closest to the
first curve (I curve). Adams View may adjust that contact point to maintain other part or
constraint initial conditions.
The initial conditions are only active during an Initial conditions simulation, which Adams View runs
before it runs a Simulation of your model.
You can also leave some or all of the initial conditions unset. Leaving an initial condition unset lets
Adams View calculate the initial conditions of the constraint during an initial conditions simulation
depending on the other forces and constraints acting on the constraint. Note that it is not the same as
setting an initial condition to zero. Setting an initial condition to zero means that the constraint will not
be moving in the specified direction or from a specified point when the simulation starts, regardless of
any forces and constraints acting upon it. For a Kinematic simulation, the initial conditions are redundant.
Therefore, for a model with zero Degrees of freedom, you should always leave the initial conditions
unset.
General Constraints
Available with Adams Solver (C++) only
You can create a general constraint that defines an arbitrary constraint specific to a model. As its name
implies, it is more general than the Idealized joints, which describe physically recognizable combination
of constraints that are used to connect bodies together. You can also use the general constraint to
equivalently define an existing idealized joint. Read more about the GCON statement in Adams Solver
(C++) help.
We advise that you use the general constraint with caution. Be sure to read the Known Limitations in the
GCON statement.
Constraint tool .
• To modify a general constraint, from the Edit menu, select Modify. From the Database
Navigator that appears, select the general constraint to modify.
2. The Create/Modify General Constraint dialog box appears.
3. If you are creating a general constraint, in the Name text box, change the name for the constraint.
Adams View assigns a default name to the constraint.
4. Enter a runtime function that Adams Solver (C++) forces to zero during the simulation. To enter
a function expression, next to the f (q) = text box, select the More tool to display the Adams
View Function Builder. For information on using the Function Builder, see the Function Builder
online help. Learn more about defining a runtime function for a general constraint.
5. In the Report reaction forces on marker text box, enter a marker whose reaction forces are
measured and reported as part of standard results. The reaction force reported is the force that is
exerted on the marker to satisfy the constraint equation. Note that if you specify a marker and the
runtime function has no dependency on it, the general constraint reports a zero force. The default
is the ground coordinate system (GCS).
Note: You cannot enter the Adams ID for the marker; you must enter the name of the
marker. Learn about Adams Solver IDs.
6. Select OK.
202 Adams View
Overview of Constraints
Joints
• Idealized Joints
• Primitive Joints
• Couplers
• About Gears
Idealized Joints
Note: The joints you can attach to flexible bodies depend on the version of Adams Solver you are
using (C++ or FORTRAN). In addition, Adams Solver (C++) does not support point
masses.
For a summary of which joints and forces are supported on flexible bodies, see Table of
Supported Forces and Joints in the Adams Flex online help. Also refer to the Adams Flex
online help for more information on attaching joints and forces to flexible bodies.
Adams View supports two types of idealized joints: simple and complex. Simple joints directly connect
bodies and include the following:
• Revolute Joints. See Revolute Joint Tool.
• Translational Joints. See Translational Joint Tool.
• Cylindrical Joints. See Cylindrical Joint Tool.
• Spherical Joints. See Spherical Joint Tool.
• Planar Joints. See Planar Joint Tool.
• Constant-Velocity Joints. See Constant-Velocity Joint Tool.
• Screw Joints. See Screw Joint Tool.
• Fixed Joints. See Fixed Joint Tool.
• Hooke/Universal Joint. See Hooke/Universal Joint Tool.
Complex joints indirectly connect parts by coupling simple joints. They include:
• Gears. See Gear Joint Tool.
• Couplers. See Coupler Joint Tool.
You access the joints through the Joint Palette and Joint and Motion Tool Stacks.
204 Adams View
Joints
• Translational or rotational velocity that define the velocity of the location of the joint on the first
part (I marker) with respect to its location on the second part (J marker) in units of length per unit
of time.
Adams View measures the translational velocity of the I marker along the common z-axis of I
and J and with respect to the J marker. It measures the rotational velocity of the x-axis of the I
marker about the common z-axis of the I and J markers with respect to the x-axis of the J marker.
If you specify initial conditions, Adams View uses them as the initial velocity of the joint during an
assemble model operation regardless of any other forces acting on the joint. You can also leave some or
all of the initial conditions unset. Leaving an initial condition unset lets Adams View calculate the
conditions of the part during an assemble model operation depending on the other forces acting on the
joint. Note that it is not the same as setting an initial condition to zero. Setting an initial condition to zero
means that the joint will not be moving in the specified direction or will not be displaced when the model
is assembled, regardless of any forces acting on it.
If you impose initial conditions on the joint that are inconsistent with those on a part that the joint
connects, the initial conditions on the joint have precedence over those on the part. If, however, you
impose initial conditions on the joint that are inconsistent with imparted motions on the joint, the initial
conditions as specified by the motion generator take precedence over those on the joint.
Note: If the initial rotational displacement of a revolute or cylindrical joint varies by anywhere
from 5 to 60 degrees from the actual location of the joint, Adams Solver issues a warning
message and continues execution. If the variation is greater than 60 degrees, Adams View
issues an error message and stops execution.
207
Joints
Note: For translational, revolute, and cylindrical joints, you might find it easier to use the joint
motion tools to impose motion. Learn about Creating Point Motions Using the Motion Tools.
Note: Using Adams Solver (C++), you can apply joint friction to joints if they are attached to
flexible bodies; using Adams Solver (FORTRAN), you cannot. In addition, Adams Solver
(C++) does not support point masses.
For a summary of which joints and forces are supported on flexible bodies, see Table of
Supported Forces and Joints in the Adams Flex online help. Also refer to the Adams Flex
online help for more information on attaching joints and forces to flexible bodies.
The joint velocity determines the instantaneous friction regime for a joint. The following is a block
diagram of the friction regimes available in Adams Solver.
Symbol: Description:
Scalar quantity
Vector quantity
210 Adams View
Joints
Symbol: Description:
Summing junction:
c=a+b
Multiplication junction:
c=axb
Relationship Between the Inputs Option and Switches Used in the Block Diagrams
frictional force is broken down into an equivalent frictional torque and frictional force acting along the
common axis of translation and rotation.
212 Adams View
Joints
The static frictional force acts to oppose the net force or torque along the
Degrees of freedom of the joint.
The dynamic frictional force acts in the opposite direction of the velocity
of the joint.
The default is 0.1 length units/unit time on the surface of contact in the
joint, and the range is > 0.
Max Stiction Define the maximum displacement that can occur in a joint once the
Deformation frictional force in the joint enters the stiction regime. The slight
deformation allows Adams Solver to easily impose the Coulomb
conditions for stiction or static friction, for example:
Therefore, even at zero velocity, you can apply a finite stiction force if your
system dynamics require it.
• Preload
• Reaction Force
• Bending Moment
Friction Inactive During Specify whether or not the frictional forces are to be calculated during a
Static equilibrium or Quasi-static simulation.
pin radius (Rp) divided by bending reaction arm (Rb). The frictional torque (Tfrict) is applied along the
axis of rotation in the direction that the FRD block computes.
216 Adams View
Joints
The static frictional force acts to oppose the net force or torque along the
Degrees of freedom of the joint.
The dynamic frictional force acts in the opposite direction of the velocity
of the joint.
The default is 0.1 length units/unit time on the surface of contact in the
joint, and the range is > 0.
217
Joints
Therefore, even at zero velocity, you can apply a finite stiction force if your
system dynamics require it.
• Preload
• Reaction Force
• Bending Moment
Friction Inactive During Specify whether or not the frictional forces are to be calculated during a
Static equilibrium or Quasi-static simulation.
218 Adams View
Joints
The static frictional force acts to oppose the net force or torque along the
Degrees of freedom of the joint.
The dynamic frictional force acts in the opposite direction of the velocity
of the joint.
The default is 0.1 length units/unit time on the surface of contact in the
joint, and the range is > 0.
220 Adams View
Joints
Therefore, even at zero velocity, you can apply a finite stiction force if your
system dynamics require it.
• Preload
• Reaction Force
Friction Inactive During Specify whether or not the frictional forces are to be calculated during a
Static equilibrium or Quasi-static simulation.
moment is converted into an equivalent joint force using the friction arm (Rn). Frictional force (Ffrict) is
applied along the axis of translation in the direction that the FRD block computes.
222 Adams View
Joints
The static frictional force acts to oppose the net force or torque along the
Degrees of freedom of the joint.
The dynamic frictional force acts in the opposite direction of the velocity
of the joint.
The default is 0.1 length units/unit time on the surface of contact in the
joint, and the range is > 0.
Max Stiction Define the maximum displacement that can occur in a joint once the
Deformation frictional force in the joint enters the stiction regime. The slight
deformation allows Adams Solver to easily impose the Coulomb
conditions for stiction or static friction, for example:
Therefore, even at zero velocity, you can apply a finite stiction force if your
system dynamics require it.
• Preload
• Reaction Force
• Bending Moment
• Torsional Moment
Friction Inactive During Specify whether or not the frictional forces are to be calculated during a
Static equilibrium or Quasi-static simulation.
225
Joints
The static frictional force acts to oppose the net force or torque along the
Degrees of freedom of the joint.
The dynamic frictional force acts in the opposite direction of the velocity
of the joint.
The default is 0.1 length units/unit time on the surface of contact in the
joint, and the range is > 0.
227
Joints
Therefore, even at zero velocity, you can apply a finite stiction force if your
system dynamics require it.
• Preload
• Reaction Force
• Bending Moment
Friction Inactive During Specify whether or not the frictional forces are to be calculated during a
Static equilibrium or Quasi-static simulation.
cannot be placed in any one of the categories in the table. The table does not contain gears and couplers
because they connect joints rather than parts.
Primitive Joints
The different types of joint primitives that are available in Adams View are:
• Inline. See Inline Joint Tool.
• Inplane. See Inplane Joint Tool.
• Orientation. See Orientation Joint Tool.
• Parallel Axes. See Parallel Axes Joint Tool.
• Perpendicular Axes. See Perpendicular Axes Joint Tool.
229
Joints
Note that joint primitives are only available from the Joint palette, not the Joint tool stack on the Main
toolbox.
Couplers
Creating Couplers
When you create a coupler, you can only create a two-joint coupler. You select the driver joint, the joint
to which the second joint is coupled, and the coupled joint, the joint that follows the driver joint. To
specify the relationship between the driver and the coupled joint or to create a three-joint coupler, you
modify the coupler.
To create a coupler:
1. From the Joint palette, select the Coupler tool .
2. Select the driver joint to which the second joint is coupled.
3. Select the coupled joint that follows the driver joint.
231
Joints
Modifying Couplers
When you modify a coupler joint, you can:
• Set the number of joints being coupled together.
• Change the joints being coupled together.
• Select which joint is the driver joint and which are the coupled joints.
• Specify the relationship between the joints as linear or nonlinear.
• If you specify a linear relationship, enter scales for the coupled joints.
• If you specify a nonlinear relationship, enter the parameters to be passed to a User-written
subroutine COUSUB, COUXX, COUXX2 or you can also specify an alternative library and name
for the user subroutine. See the Subroutines section of the Adams Solver online help. Learn about
specifying your own routine with ROUTINE Argument.
• You can also modify coupler properties using the Table Editor.
About Gears
Gears in Adams View connect two of the parts, which are called the geared parts, by coupling together
the allowable Degrees of freedom in two joints.
The coupled joints are attached to the third part, called the carrier part. The joints can be translational,
revolute, or cylindrical joints. Using different combinations of joint types and orientations, you can
model many different physical gears, including spur, helical, planetary, bevel, and rack-and-pinion.
When you create the joints to be geared together, you must create them so the first part you select is a
geared part and the second part is the carrier part. Therefore, the I marker parameters of the joints must
belong to the geared parts and the J marker parameters must belong to the carrier part. In addition, the
CV marker must belong to the carrier part.
The gear uses the location of the CV marker to determine the point of contact or mesh of the two geared
parts. The direction of the z-axis of the common velocity marker points in the direction of the common
motion of the geared parts. This is also the direction in which the gear teeth forces act.
The location of the CV marker is constant with respect to the carrier part. Its location does not change
when the direction of power flows through the gear changes.
An Adamsgear joint does not model backlash.
233
Joints
Note: If you encounter a warning message that the gear has a suspicious configuration, the
z-axis of the CV marker is probably oriented incorrectly.
7. Select OK.
where:
• q1 and q2 are the rotational or translation displacement variables defined by the allowable
Degrees of freedom in the geared joints.
234 Adams View
Joints
• S1 and S2 represent scalar multipliers that act to couple these displacements together. S1 and S2
are defined indirectly by the spatial relationship between the locations of the joints with respect
to the common velocity marker.
You do not explicitly define the scalar multipliers (gear ratio) when creating a gear. Instead, Adams View
automatically determines the gear ratio as the distance between the origin of the common velocity marker
and the origins of the coupled joints. The gear ratio is shown below.
The figure also shows a specific case of creating a spur gear. For this gear, the general equation is:
a ⋅ θA = b ⋅ θB
a ⋅ θA – b ⋅ θB = 0
Motion
• Overview of Motion
• Applying Joint Motion
• Applying Point Motion
Overview of Motion
A motion generator dictates the movement of a part as a function of time. It supplies whatever force is
required to make the part satisfy the motion. For example, a translational joint motion prescribes that a
joint on a part move at 10 mm/second in the z direction. You can apply the motion to either idealized
joints or between a pair of parts.
Types of Motion
Adams View provides you with the following types of motion:
• Joint Motion - Prescribes translational or rotational motion on a translational, revolute, or
cylindrical joint. Each joint motion removes one degree of freedom (DOF) from your model.
Joint motions are very easy to create, but they limit you to motions that are applied to the above
listed joints and movements in only one direction or rotation.
• Point Motion - Prescribes the movement between two parts. When you create a point motion,
you specify the direction along which the motion occurs. You can impose a point motion on any
type of idealized joint, such as a spherical or cylindrical.
Point motions enable you to build complex movements into your model without having to add
joints or invisible parts. For example, you can represent the movement along an arc, of a ship in
the ocean, or a robot’s arm.
For more on point motions, see About Creating Point Motions.
• Function expression - You can use Adams View function expressions to specify the exact
movement applied to a joint as a function of time. For example, using function expressions you
can define a motion function that holds the joint in a fixed position, as well as one that moves the
joint with the required force to produce a constant velocity. To learn more about function
expressions, see Function Builder and Adams View Function Builder online help.
Note: If you make your function a function of displacements or forces, Adams View issues an
error and stops execution. These types of functions contain a VARVAL (function that
returns variable name), and although a VARVAL is allowed in the function, Adams View
issues a warning. The motion function containing the VARVAL will not give correct
velocities, accelerations, or reaction forces in a joint, and may have trouble converging to
a solution.
• Parameters to be passed to a user-written subroutine - You can create a much more complex
motion by creating a MOTSUB User-written subroutine and entering the values to be passed to
the subroutine to determine the motion. For more on creating subroutines and passing values to
them, see the Subroutines section of the Adams Solver help.
2. In the settings container, specify the speed of the motion in displacement units per second. By
default, Adams View creates a rotational motion with a speed of 30 degrees per second and a
translational motion with a speed of 10 millimeters per second.
To enter a function expression or user-written subroutine, right-click the Speed text box, point to
Parameterize, and then select Expression Builder to display the Adams View Function Builder.
For information on using the Function Builder, see Function Builder and Adams View Function
Builder online help.
3. Use the left mouse button to select the joint on the screen to which the motion will be applied.
Note: You can also modify joint properties using the Table Editor.
If you selected Function, enter the following in the Function (time) text box that appears:
• Numerical value (For rotational motion, specify the magnitude in radians.)
• Function expression:
To enter a function expression, next to the Function (time) text box, select the More tool
to display the Adams View Function Builder. For information on using the Function Builder,
see Function Builder and Adams View Function Builder online help.
If you selected Subroutine, enter the parameters to be passed to a User-written subroutine
MOTSUB and its ID or you can specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine in
the Routine text box. For more on subroutines, see the Subroutines section of the Adams Solver
online help. Learn about specifying your own routine with ROUTINE Argument.
5. Set Type to Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration to specify how motion magnitude is
defined.
6. In the Displacement IC or Velocity IC text boxes, enter the initial conditions for displacement
or velocity. The text boxes that appear depend on how the magnitude of the motion is defined.
When you create a point motion, you specify the parts to which the motion is to be applied and the
location and orientation of the motion. Adams View creates markers on each part at the location of the
motion. The marker that Adams View creates on the first part you select is called the moving point. It
moves or rotates relative to the marker on the second part, called the reference point. The z-axis of the
reference point defines the positive direction using the right-hand rule.
When you create a point motion, Adams View creates a motion at the specified location.
• For a single point motion, Adams View defines the motion as a constant velocity over time,
based on a speed value that you can enter. The speed value can be a numerical value, function
expression, or User-written subroutine, as explained in Defining the Motion Magnitude.
By default, Adams creates the point motion around or along the z-axis. You specify the direction
of the z-axis when you create the single point motion. You can change the axis around or along
which the motion is applied.
• For a general point motion, Adams View creates a motion around or along all six coordinates of
the markers created on the selected parts. It does not define the magnitude of the motion. You’ll
need to modify the motion to define its magnitude.
240 Adams View
Motion
Note: You can also modify point motion using the Table Editor.
Note: You can also modify point motion using the Table Editor.
242 Adams View
Motion
Overview
Forces define loads and compliances on parts. Forces do not absolutely prohibit or prescribe motion.
Therefore, they do not add or remove degrees of freedom (DOF) from your model. Some forces can resist
motion, such as spring dampers, and some can try to induce motion.
Adams View provides the following types of forces:
• Applied forces
• Flexible connectors - Note that flexible connectors resist motion and are simpler and easier to use
than applied forces because you only supply constant coefficients for the forces. The forces
include Beams, Bushings, translational spring dampers, and torsion springs that provide
compliant force relationships.
• Special forces - Special forces are forces that are commonly encountered, such as tire and
gravity forces.
• Contacts - Specify how parts react when they come in contact with each other when the model is
in motion.
See Create Forces Palette and Tool Stack dialog box help for more information.
• Force functions that allow the force to depend on other forces in the system. An example
would be a Coulomb friction force that is proportional to the normal force between two
bodies.
• Mathematical functions, such as sine and cosine, series, polynomials, and steps.
• Spline functions that allow the force to depend on data stored in lookup tables. Examples of
these include motors using torque-speed curves or nonlinear bushings whose stiffness is not
entirely linear.
• Impact functions that make the force act like a compression-only spring-damper that turns
on and off as bodies intermittently contact one another.
• Enter parameters that are passed to User-written subroutines that are linked to Adams View. You
can enter parameters for all types of applied forces. You can also enter parameters to a subroutine
for the field flexible connector to create a nonlinear force between two parts. For more
information on how to use subroutines to define your force magnitudes, see the Subroutines
section of the Adams Solver online help.
If your force direction remains fixed with respect to some part in your model, either a moving part or the
ground part, then you can define the force using one vector component and specify only one magnitude
and direction.
If you have two or more forces whose directions always remain perpendicular to one another (such as a
normal force and a friction force), you can either define multiple Single-component forces whose
directions are perpendicular or you can use a Multi-Component force element. You must define several
expressions, one for each of the force magnitudes you need.
If the direction along which you want the force applied is defined by the line between two points in your
model and is constantly changing throughout the Simulation, you only need to define one component of
force along this direction and one expression for the corresponding force magnitude.
As you define forces, Adams View gives you shortcuts for defining the force application. These shortcuts
allow you to let Adams View automatically create the force definition using only a few clicks of the
mouse. For example, as you create a bushing, you can simply specify one location. Adams View
automatically determines the parts which should be included. You can also specify that the force be
aligned to the coordinates of the Working grid or screen or a feature of a part.
245
Forces
Applied Forces
Applied forces are forces that define loads and compliances on parts so they move in certain ways.
Adams View provides a library of applied forces that you can use. Applied forces give you a great deal
of flexibility, but they require work to model simple forces. Instead of using applied forces, you may want
to consider using the flexible connectors, which model several commonly used force elements, or special
forces, which provide environmental and complex forces.
Applied forces can have one, three, or six components (three translational and three rotational) that define
the resultant force. For example, a single-component force or torque defines the force using a single
component, while a multi-component force or torque defines the force using three or more components.
The following figure shows all six possible force components associated with a particular coordinate
system’s x-, y-, and z-axes.
• Custom - You define the magnitude of the force as a function of any combination of
displacements, velocities, other applied forces, user-defined variables, and time. You can
write a function expression or enter parameters to be passed to a User-written subroutine (for
example, SFOSUB or VFOSUB) that is linked into Adams View. You define the constitutive
equation for the force applied to the action body. Adams View evaluates the reaction forces
on the reaction body. You can also specify an alternative library and name for the user
subroutine. Learn about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
Adams View evaluates the signed magnitude of the force and applies it to the selected body or
bodies.
Single-Component Forces
To create a single-component force:
1. From the Create Forces tool stack or palette, select either:
• to create a single-component force.
• to create a single-component torque.
2. In the settings container, specify the following:
• The number of parts and the nature of the force direction. You can select the following:
• Space Fixed
• Body Moving
• Two Bodies
Learn about Specifying Force Direction for Single-Component Forces.
• How you want the force oriented. You can select:
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force normal to the current Working grid, if it is
displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a feature in your model,
such as along an edge or normal to the face of a part.
• The characteristics of the force. You can select the following:
• Constant force/torque - Enter a constant force or torque value or let Adams View use the
default value.
• Spring-Damper - Enter stiffness and damping coefficients and let Adams View create a
function expression for damping and stiffness based on the coefficient values. (Not available
when you are using the Main toolbar to access the force tool.)
• Custom - Adams View does not set any values for you, which, in effect, creates a force with
zero magnitude. After you create the force, you modify it by entering a function expressions
or parameters to a SFOSUB User-written subroutine that is linked to Adams View. You can
also specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn about specifying
a routine with ROUTINE Argument.
247
Forces
3. Do one of the following depending on whether you are creating a single-component force or
torque:
• For a single-component force, select the action body. If you selected to create a torque
between two parts, select the reaction body and then select the points of application on the two
bodies. Be sure to select the point of application on the action body first.
• For a single-component torque, select the action body. If you selected to create a torque
between two parts, select the reaction body and then select the points of application on the two
bodies. Be sure to select the point of application on the action body first.
4. If you selected to orient the force along a direction vector on a feature, move the cursor around in
your model to display an arrow representing the direction along a feature where you want the
force oriented. When the direction vector represents the desired orientation, click.
2. Set the following in the dialog box, and then select OK.
• Body moving - Applies the single-component force to one part, or action body, that you select.
Adams View automatically applies the reaction force to ground. You specify a direction for the
force. The direction can change during the simulation because the coordinate system marker
used to define the force direction is attached to the action body. You can attach the direction
marker to a different part when you modify the force.
• Two bodies - Applies the single-component force to two parts that you select, at two locations
that you select. Adams View defines the direction based on the line of sight between the two
locations you selected.
Multi-Component Forces
To define more complex forces, you can use multi-component forces. Multi-component forces apply
translational and/or rotational force between two parts in your model using three or more orthogonal
components. The following lists the different types of multi-component forces:
• Three-component force
• Three-component torque
251
Forces
A multi-component force applies an action force to the first part you select, which is called the action
body. Adams View automatically applies a corresponding reaction force to the second part you select,
which is called the reaction body. If you define the force characteristics as bushing-like, Adams View
generates equations to represent a linear spring-damper in the specified component directions.
To define the points of application of the multi-component force, Adams View creates a marker for each
part. The marker belonging to the action body is the action marker, and the marker belonging to the
reaction body is the reaction marker. Adams View keeps the reaction marker coincident with the action
marker at all times. The reaction marker is often referred to as a floating marker because its location is
not fixed relative to the body to which it belongs. Action and reaction markers are also referred to as I
and J markers.
Adams View also creates a third marker called a reference (R) marker that indicates the direction of the
force. You define the orientation of the reference marker when you create a multi-component force. You
can align the marker to the working grid, if it is turned on, or to the global coordinate system. You can
also orient the marker using any feature in your model, such as along an edge of a part.
Example of Action and Reaction Force Movement
The following figure illustrates the movement of reaction forces and the placement of the reference
marker. The figure shows a ball bouncing on a board. As the ball bounces, its location changes relative
to the board. The reaction forces applied to the board also change location because the reaction (J) marker
moves with the ball. The reaction forces applied to the board do not change direction because the
reference (R) marker belongs to the stationary board.
Tip: You can use the Info command to see the markers that Adams View creates for a multi-
component force. You can also see the markers when you modify the force. Learn about
Displaying Object Information and Accessing Information Window.
252 Adams View
Forces
Fr = –Fa
where r is the reaction force applied to the reaction body. If you apply the force to a part and ground,
Adams Solver does not calculate the reaction forces.
• TZ is the user-defined function defining the magnitude and sign of the z component according to
the right-hand rule.
Tr = –Ta
where T r is the reaction torque applied to the reaction body. If you apply the torque to a part and ground,
Adams Solver does not calculate the reaction torques.
The table summarizes the bodies and locations you specify as you create a force.
Tip: To precisely orient your force, first orient the Working grid so its x-, y-, and z-axes align
with the desired force axes. Then, use the Normal To Grid orientation method when you
create the force. Learn about the Working Grid dialog box
• Custom - Adams View does not set any values for you. After you create the force, you
modify it by entering a function expressions or parameters to a standard User-written
subroutine that is linked to Adams View. You can also specify your own rotine with
ROUTINE Argument.
3. Click the bodies.
4. Click one or two force-application points depending on the location method you selected.
5. If you selected to orient the force along direction vectors using features, move the cursor around
in your model to display an arrow that shows the direction along a feature where you want the
force oriented. Click when the direction vector shows the correct x-axis orientation and then click
again for the y-axis orientation.
Learn about:
• Total Force Equations
• Total Torque Equations
• Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts
2. Set the following in the dialog box, and then select OK.
Flexible Connectors
Bushings
Creating Bushings
To define a bushing, you need to create two markers, one for each part. The marker on the first part that
you specify is called the I marker. The marker on the second part that you specify is called the J marker.
257
Forces
To create a bushing:
1. From the Create Forces tool stack or palette, select the Bushing tool .
2. In the settings container, specify the following:
• How you want the force applied to parts. You can select the following:
• 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Learn about Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts.
• How you want the force oriented. You can select:
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force using the x-, y-, and z-axes of the current
Working grid, if it is displayed, or using the x-, y, and z-axes of the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a feature in your model,
such as the face of a part. The direction vector you select defines the z-axis for the force;
Adams View automatically calculates the x- and y-axes.
• The translational and rotational stiffness and damping properties for the bushing.
3. Click the bodies.
4. Click one or two force-application points depending on the location method you selected.
5. If you selected to orient the force along a direction vector using a feature, move the cursor around
in your model to display an arrow that shows the direction along a feature where you want the
force oriented. Click when the direction vector shows the correct z-axis orientation.
Modifying Bushings
The following procedure modifies the following for a Bushing:
• The two bodies to which the forces are applied.
• Translational and rotational properties for stiffness, damping, and preload.
• Force graphics.
To modify a bushing:
1. Display the Modify Bushing dialog box as explained in Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
258 Adams View
Forces
2. Enter the values in the dialog box as explained the table below, and then select OK.
• Action Body - Change the action body to which the force is applied.
• Reaction Body - Change the body that receives the reaction forces.
Change the properties For the translational force applied by the bushing, enter:
of the force
• Three stiffness coefficients.
• Three viscous-damping coefficients. The force due to damping is zero
when there are no relative translational velocities between the markers
on the action and reaction bodies.
• Enter three constant force (preload) values. Constant values indicate
the magnitude of the force components along the x-, y-, and z-axeis of
the coordinate system marker of the reaction body (J marker) when
both the relative translational displacement and velocity of the markers
on the action and reaction bodies are zero.
For the rotational (torque) properties, enter:
Note: A bushing has the same constitutive relation form as a field element. The primary
difference between the two forces is that nondiagonal coefficients (Kij and Cij, where i is
not equal to j) are zero for a bushing. You only define the diagonal coefficients (Kii and
Cii) when creating a bushing. For more on field elements, see Field Element Tool.
where:
• Fx, Fy, and Fz are measure numbers of the translational force components in the coordinate
system of the J marker.
• x, y, and z are measure numbers of the bushing deformation vector in the coordinate system of
the J marker.
• Vx, Vy, and Vz are time derivatives of x, y, and z, respectively.
• F1, F2, and F3 are measure numbers of any constant preload force components in the coordinate
system of the J marker.
• Tx, Ty, and Tz are rotational force components in the coordinate system of the J marker.
260 Adams View
Forces
• a, b, and c are projected, small-angle rotational displacements of the I marker with respect to the
J marker.
• wx, wy, and wz are the measure numbers of the angular velocity of the I marker as seen by the J
marker, expressed in the J marker coordinate system.
• T1, T2, and T3 are measure numbers of any constant preload torque components in the
coordinate system of the J marker.
The bushing element applies an equilibrating force and torque to the J marker in the following way:
where:
• δ is the instantaneous deformation vector from the J marker to the I marker. While the force at
the J marker is equal and opposite to the force at the I marker, the torque at the J marker is
usually not equal to the torque at the I marker because of the moment arm due to the deformation
of the bushing element.
For the rotational constitutive equations to be accurate, at least two of the rotations (a, b, c) must be small.
That is, two of the three values must remain smaller than 10 degrees. In addition, if a becomes greater
than 90 degrees, b becomes erratic. If b becomes greater than 90 degrees, a becomes erratic. Only c can
become greater than 90 degrees without causing convergence problems. For these reasons, it is best to
define your bushing such that angles a and b remain small (not a and c and not b and c).
force tends to push the action body away from the reaction body. A negative action force tends to pull
the action body toward the reaction body.
You can specify the damping and stiffness values as coefficients or use splines to define the relationships
of damping to velocity or stiffness to displacement. You can also set the stiffness value to 0 to create a
pure damper or set the damping value to 0 to create a pure spring.
You can also set a reference length for the spring, as well as a preload force. By default, Adams View
uses the length of the spring damper when you create it as its reference length.
• Stiffness Coefficient and enter a stiffness value for the spring damper.
• No Stiffness to turn off all spring forces and create a pure damper.
• Spline: F=f(defo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship of
force to deformation. Learn about Splines.
Damping Select one of the following:
• Damping Coefficient and enter a viscous damping value for the spring
damper.
• No Damping to turn off all damping forces and create a pure spring.
• Spline: F=f(velo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship of force
to velocity. Learn about Splines.
263
Forces
• Graphics - Specify whether coil spring graphics are always on, always
off, or on whenever you have defined a spring coefficient.
• Force Display - Specify whether you want to display force graphics for
one of the parts, both, or none. By default, Adams View displays the
force graphic on the action body.
• Damper Graphic - Specify whether cylinder damper graphics are
always on, always off, or on whenever you have defined a damping
coefficient.
Torsion Springs
A torsion spring force is a rotational spring-damper applied between two parts. It applies the action
torque to the first part you select, called the action body, and applies an equal and opposite reaction torque
to the second part you select, called the reaction body.
Adams View creates a marker at each location. The marker on the first location you specify is called the
I marker. The marker on the second location that you specify is called the J marker. The right-hand rule
defines a positive torque. Adams View assumes that the z-axes of the I and J markers remain aligned at
all times.
The following linear constitutive equation describes the torque applied at the first body:
torque = -CT*da/dt - KT*(a-ANGLE) + TORQUE
Adams Solver automatically computes the terms da/dt and a. The term a is the angle between the x axes
of the I and the J markers. Adams Solver takes into account the total number of complete turns.
You can specify the damping and stiffness values as coefficients or use a spline to define the relationship
of damping to velocity or stiffness to displacement. You can also set the stiffness value to 0 to create a
pure damper or set the damping values to 0 to create a pure spring. Learn about defining Splines.
You can also set the rotation angle of the torsion spring when it is in its preload state and any preload
forces on the spring. By default, Adams View uses the rotation angle of the torsion spring when you
create it as its preload angle.
• 2 bodies - 2 locations
Learn about Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts.
• How you want the force oriented. You can select:
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force using the x-, y-, and z-axes of the current
Working grid, if it is displayed, or using the x-, y, and z-axes of the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a feature in your model,
such as the face of a part. The direction vector you select defines the z-axis for the force;
Adams View calculates the x- and y-axes automatically.
• The torsional stiffness (KT) and torsional damping (CT) coefficients.
3. Click the bodies, unless Adams View is automatically selecting them (1 location method).
4. Click one or two force-application points, depending on the location method you selected.
5. If you selected to orient the force along a direction vector using a feature, move the cursor around
in your model to display an arrow that shows the direction along a feature where you want the
force oriented. Click when the direction vector shows the correct z-axis orientation.
3. Enter values for stiffness and damping as explained in the table below, and then select OK.
Beams
A beam creates a linear translational and rotational force between two locations that define the endpoints
of the beam. It creates markers at each endpoint. The marker on the action body, the first part you select,
is the I marker. The marker on the reaction body, the second part you select, is the J marker. The forces
the beam produces are linearly dependent on the relative displacements and velocities of the markers at
the beam’s endpoints.
See Beam example of two markers (I and J) that define the endpoints of the beam and indicates the twelve
forces (s1 to s12) it produces.
267
Forces
The x-axis of the J marker defines the centroidal axis of the beam. The y-axis and z-axis of the J marker
are the principal axes of the cross section. They are perpendicular to the x-axis and to each other. When
the beam is in an undeflected position, the I marker has the same angular orientation as the J marker, and
the I marker lies on the x-axis of the J marker. Adams View applies the following forces in response to
the translational and the rotational deflections of the I marker with respect to the J marker:
• Axial forces (s1 and s7)
• Bending moments about the y-axis and z-axis (s5, s6, s11, and s12)
• Twisting moments about the x-axis (s4 and s10)
• Shear forces (s2, s3, s8, and s9)
You can use a field element instead of a beam to define a beam with characteristics unlike those that the
beam assumes. For example, a field element can define a beam with a nonuniform cross section or a beam
with nonlinear material characteristics.
Caution: By definition a beam is asymmetric. Holding the J marker fixed and deflecting the I marker
produces different results than holding the I marker fixed and deflecting the J marker by
the same amount. This asymmetry occurs because the coordinate system frame that the
deflection of the beam is measured in moves with the J marker.
on the displacement and velocity of the I marker relative to the J marker on the reaction body. The
constitutive equations are analogous to those in the finite element method.
where:
• Fx, Fy, and Fz are the measure numbers of the translational force components in the coordinate
system of the J marker.
• x, y, and z are the translational displacements of the I marker with respect to the J marker
measured in the coordinate system of the J marker.
• Vx, Vy, and Vz are the time derivatives of x, y, and z, respectively.
• Tx, Ty, and Tz are the rotational force components in the coordinate system of the J marker.
• a, b, and c are the relative rotational displacements of the I marker with respect to the J marker as
expressed in the x-, y-, and z-axis, respectively, of the J marker.
• wx, wy, and wz are the measure numbers of the angular velocity of the I marker as seen by the J
marker, expressed in the J marker coordinate system.
Note: Both matrixes, Cij and Kij, are symmetric, that is, Cij=Cji and Kij=Kji. You define the
twenty-one unique damping coefficients when you modify the beam.
Adams Solver applies an equilibrating force and torque at the J marker on the reaction body, as defined
by the following equations:
L is the instantaneous displacement vector from the J marker to the I marker. While the force at the J
marker is equal and opposite to the force at the I marker, the torque is usually not equal and opposite,
because of the force transfer.
Creating Beams
To create a beam:
1. From the Create Forces palette or tool stack, select the Massless Beam tool .
2. Select a location for the beam on the first part. This is the action body.
3. Select a location for the beam on the second part. This is the reaction body.
4. Select the direction in the upward (y) direction for the cross-section geometry.
Modifying Beams
After you’ve created a Beam, you can modify the following:
• Markers between which the beam acts.
• Stiffness and damping values.
• Material properties of the beam, such as its length and area.
270 Adams View
Forces
To modify a beam:
1. Display the Force Modify Element Like Beam dialog box as explained in Accessing Modify Dialog
Boxes.
2. In the New Beam Name text box, enter a new name for the beam, if desired.
3. In the Solver ID text box, assign a unique ID number to the beam.
4. Enter any comments about the beam that might help you manage and identify the beam.
5. Enter values for the beam properties as explained in the table below, and then select OK.
where:
where:
Enter the elements by columns from top to bottom, then from left to
right. The damping matrix defaults to a matrix with thirty-six zero
entries; that is, r1 through r21 each default to zero.
The damping matrix should be positive semidefinite. This ensures
that damping does not feed energy into the model. Adams Solver does
not warn you if the matrix is not positive semidefinite.
273
Forces
By definition, the beam lies along the positive x-axis of the J marker.
Therefore, the I marker must have a positive x displacement with respect to
the J marker when viewed from the J marker. In its undeformed configuration,
the orientation of the I and the J markers must be the same.
When the x-axes of the markers defining a beam are not collinear, the beam
deflection and, consequently, the force corresponding to this deflection are
calculated. To minimize the effect of such misalignments, perform a static
equilibrium at the start of the simulation.
When the beam element angular deflections are small, the stiffness matrix
provides a meaningful description of the beam behavior. When the angular
deflections are large, they are not commutative; so the stiffness matrix that
produces the translational and rotational force components may not correctly
describe the beam behavior. Adams Solver issues a warning message if the
beam translational displacements exceed 10 percent of the undeformed
length.
Field Elements
A field element applies a translational and rotational action-reaction force between two locations. Adams
View creates markers at each location. The marker on the first location you specify is called the I marker.
The marker on the second location you specify is called the J marker. Adams View applies the component
translational and rotational forces for a field to the I marker and imposes reaction forces on the J marker.
The field element can apply either a linear or nonlinear force, depending on the values you specify after
you create the field.
• To specify a linear field, enter values that define a six-by-six stiffness matrix, translational and
rotational preload values, and a six-by-six damping matrix. The stiffness and damping matrixes
must be positive semidefinite, but need not be symmetric. You can also specify a damping ratio
instead of specifying a damping matrix.
• To specify a nonlinear field, use the User-written subroutine FIESUB to define the three force
components and three torque components and to enter values to pass to FIESUB. (See the
Adams Solver Subroutines online help.)
274 Adams View
Forces
For a nonlinear field, the following constitutive equations are defined in the FIESUB subroutine:
Adams Solver applies the defined forces and torques at the I marker. In the linear and nonlinear
equations:
• Fx, Fy, and Fz are the three translational force measure numbers.
• Tx, Ty, and Tz are the three rotational force measure numbers associated with unit vectors
directed along the x-, y-, and z-axes of the J marker.
275
Forces
Adams Solver computes all variables and time derivatives in the J marker coordinate system.
Adams Solver applies an equilibrating force and torque at the J marker, as defined by the following
equations:
Fj = - Fi
Tj = - Ti - L Fi
L is the instantaneous displacement vector from the J marker to the I marker. While the force at the J
marker is equal and opposite to the force at the I marker, the torque is usually not equal and opposite,
because of the force transfer.
The terms are the force components along the x-, y-, and z-axis of the J marker
and the torque components about the x, y-, and z-axis of the J marker,
respectively. Entering values for Force Preload and Torque Preload is optional
and defaults to six zero entries.
279
Forces
Enter the elements by columns from top to bottom, then from left to right.
Learn about Defining the Elements of the Stiffness and Damping Matrices for
field elements.
Tip: A finite element analysis program can give you the values for
the stiffness matrix.
280 Adams View
Forces
Enter the elements by columns from top to bottom, then from left to right.
Learn about Defining the Elements of the Stiffness and Damping Matrices for
field elements.
• To enter a damping ratio that defines the ratio of the damping matrix
to the stiffness matrix, select Damping Ratio and enter the value. If
you enter a damping ratio, Adams Solver multiplies the stiffness
matrix by the ratio to obtain the damping matrix. Do not enter a ratio
without also entering a stiffness matrix.
Tip: A finite element analysis program can give you the values for
the damping matrix.
Modal Forces
A modal force, or MFORCE, allows you to distribute a force to one or more, or all nodes of a flexible
body. The force can vary in time or position and can even be made dependent on a state variable.
Examples of modal force applications are pressures on journal bearings, simulating magnetically induced
fields, or the modeling of airfoil flutter. Modal forces are a special class of forces called distributed loads
that can only be applied to flexible bodies.
For a detailed overview of distributed loads and a tutorial that steps you through an example of adding
modal forces to your model, see Modeling Distributed Loads and Predeformed Flexible Bodies.
Adams View provides three options for defining MFORCEs on flexible bodies. All options require
additional work outside of Adams View to complete the definition and simulation of modal forces.
281
Forces
• Reference and scale a load case defined in the flexible body's modal load matrix. This option can
only be used in Adams View on flexible bodies that have been built with Modal Neutral File
(MNF) that contains modal load case information. For more information on flexible bodies, their
modal load matrix, and how to generate modal load case information in an MNF, see Creating
Loadcase Files.
• Specify the modal force as a product of a modal load case and scale function defined in a User-
written subroutine. The scale function can depend on time or the state of the system. The load
case can only be a function of time.
• Directly specify the components of a modal force in a User-written subroutine. Each component
can depend on time or the state of the system. This option is only available in Adams Solver
(C++).
The last two options provide much more capability in defining modal forces. To take advantage
of these options, however, you need to develop a MFOSUB routine that is built into the Adams
Solver. For more information, see the Subroutines section of the Adams Solver online help.
More than one modal force can be defined on a flexible body. For each modal force defined on a flexible
body a modal force icon appears at its local part reference frame. You can transfer modal forces from one
flexible body to another.
Learn more:
1. Creating a Modal Force
2. Modifying a Modal Force
3. Copying and Deleting a Modal Force
4. Viewing Modal Preloads of Flexible Bodies
Note: You can use the Info command to see the floating marker that
Adams View creates when you reference a reaction part. Learn about
Displaying Object Information and Accessing Information Window.
Select how you want Select the following from Define Using:
to define the modal
force. • Function - Lets you select the modal load case and scale function of
the MFORCE. Note that you cannot select Function when defining an
MFORCE on a flexible body that does not contain any modal load case
information in its corresponding MNF.
• Subroutine - Lets you specify up to thirty user-defined constants to be
passed to the user-defined subroutine, MFOSUB to directly compute
the modal load case and scale function whose product is the modal
force applied to the flexible body. The scale function can depend on
time or the state of the system. The load case can only be a function of
time.
• Force - Lets you specify up to thirty user-defined constants to be
passed to the user-defined subroutine, MFOSUB to directly compute
the modal force on the flexible body. Each component of the modal
force can depend on time or the state of the system. (Adams Solver
(C++) only. Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings -
Executable dialog box help.)
To use a subroutine, you need to build a version of the Adams Solver
that contains your version of the MFOSUB routine that quantifies the
modal force. For more information, see the Subroutines section of the
Adams Solver online help.
You can also specify an alternative library and name for the user
subroutine in the Routine text box. Learn about specifying your own
routine with ROUTINE Argument.
3. If you select to specify a flexible body with modal load case information, you also specify:
• Load Case - Lets you select a modal load case label from a list. The list of modal load case
labels is generated from the MNF. Learn about Creating Loadcase Files.
284 Adams View
Forces
• Scale Function - Lets you specify an expression for the scale factor to be applied to the
modal load case.
4. Select OK.
To modify a MFORCE:
1. Display the Create/Modify Modal Force dialog box as explained in Accessing Modify Dialog
Boxes.
2. Follow the instructions in the dialog box help.
3. Select OK.
Note: When you copy a MFORCE that has a reaction part specified or as a result, a Floating
marker referenced, Adams View also creates a new floating marker.
In addition, when you delete a MFORCE that has a reaction part specified, Adams View
does not delete its referenced floating marker.
To review the modal preloads using the Flexible Body Modify dialog box:
1. Double-click the flexible body to display the Flexible Body Modify dialog box.
285
Forces
2. From the Flexible Body Modify dialog box, select Modal ICs.
The Modify Modal ICs... dialog box appears. Preloads for the flexible body appear in the last
column.
3. Review the preloads, and then select Close.
No matter what form, the modal force results are presented with respect to the flexible body’s local part
reference frame. This is unlike most other Adams force elements that are plotted with respect to the
ground coordinate system, by default. For a detailed overview of modal forces and a tutorial that steps
you through an example of creating a modal force, see Modeling Distributed Loads and Predeformed
Flexible Bodies.
Note: • To create a contour or vector plot of a modal force, the MNF of the associated
flexible body must contain nodal masses. You can use the MNF browser to check
if the MNF contains nodal masses, see Browsing an MNF or an MD DB.
• Because modal forces can depend on the state of the system, you must run a
simulation before viewing the results of a modal force.
Overview
Using contacts, you can go beyond just modeling how parts meet at points and model how solid bodies
react when they come in contact with one another when the model is in motion.
For more on the theory behind contact forces, see the CONTACT statement in the Adams Solver online
help.
See Solver Settings - Contacts dialog box help.
• Restitution-based contact
• IMPACT-Function-Based Contact
Note: Contact defined between planar geometry (for example, circle to curve) must be
constrained to lie in the same plane. You usually accomplish this using planar joints or an
equivalent set of Constraints that enforce the planarity.
Failure to enforce planarity will result in a run-time error when the bodies go out of plane
during a Simulation.
You can also create your own contact force model by entering parameters to a User-written subroutine.
Two-Dimensional Contacts
Adams View supports two-dimensional contact between the following geometry:
• Arc
• Circle
• Polylines
• Splines
• Point
• Plane
For flexible bodies, only point-to-plane and point-to-curve contacts are supported, where the point is on
the flexible body. Adams Solver (C++) can treat multiple points per CONTACT statement. Adams Solver
(FORTRAN) can only treat one point per CONTACT statement.
Note: You cannot have contacts between a point and another point and a plane and another plane.
Three-Dimensional Contacts
Adams View supports three-dimensional contact between the following solid geometry:
• Sphere
• Cylinder
• Frustum
• Box
• Link
Adams View 289
Contacts
• Torus
• Extrusion
• Revolution
• Constructive, solid geometry (geometry combined from several geometries)
• Generic three-dimensional Parasolid geometry, including extrusion and revolution
• Shell (enclosed-volume only)
You can also create a contact between a three-dimensional elliposoid and a plane (sphere only).
In case of Adams Solver C++, you can create three-dimensional contacts between flexible bodies as well
as between a flexible body and a Solid geometry. When a three-dimensional contact is created between
a flexible body and a solid geometry, it is mandatory that the rigid body is always the J geometry.
Adams View also supports nonsolid, three-dimensional geometries, such as shells. Adams View allows
you to select the free edges of shell elements. You can create contacts between flexible body edges as
well as between flexible body edge and a plane or a curve.
Limitations
The contact code in Adams is designed to work with intersection volumes that are "thin", that is, that the
penetration squared is less than the area of contact. If this condition is violated, then the contact behavior
is unpredictable.
The below rule explains this condition:
If area > 2*d*d then contact force is calculated
If area < 2*d*d then contact force set to zero
where:
• area = contact area
• d = penetration
This condition was added to prevent the contact force from becoming excessively large or from being
applied in an unexpected direction.
2. Enter values in the dialog box as explained in the table below, and then select OK.
Tip: You can change the direction of the force on some geometry (for example, circle, curve,
plane, and sphere) by selecting the Change Direction tool .
For tracks:
• Double-click a track to view:
• I_Point
• I_Normal_Force
• I_Friction_Force
• I_Normal_Unit_Vector
• I_Friction_Unit_Vector
• J_Point
• J_Normal_Force
• J_Friction_Force
Adams View 295
Contacts
• J_Normal_Unit_Vector
• J_Friction_Unit_Vector
• Slip_Deformation
• Slip_Velocity
• Penetration
F = K*(distance)n
where:
• K - material stiffness
• n - exponent
• F - force
to determine the contact force due to the material stiffness (there can also be damping and friction forces
in the contact).
For example, if you apply this algorithm to a sphere on a plate, the intersection volume is some type of
spherical shape with a flat side. The centroid of this volume can be computed (this is where most of the
time is spent in the algorithm). It will be below the plate and inside the sphere. The nearest point on the
plate (to the centroid) and the nearest point on the sphere (to the centroid) can also be computed. In this
case, the line between them will pass through the center of the sphere (this will also be the direction in
which the contact force acts).
296 Adams View
Contacts
Again, the algorithm can handle the case of a sphere in a V-groove. There will be two volumes of
intersection and two separate forces will be applied to sphere and to the V-groove (equal and opposite
forces).
References
The friction values used in the material interaction table are generalized values based on the following
references:
• Bowden & Tabor, "The Friction and Lubrication of Solids," Oxford.
• Fuller, "Theory and Practice of Lubrication for Engineers," Wiley.
• Ham & Crane, "Mechanics of Machinery," McGraw-Hill.
• Bevan, "Theory of Machines," Longmans.
• Shigley, "Mechanical Design," McGraw-Hill.
• Rabinowicz, "Friction and Wear of Materials," Wiley.
These coefficients were chosen for parts whose mass is on the order of 1.0 Kg and which are made of
steel. Call this part the "default part".
For parts with small mass these coefficients should be reduced to optimize Adams Solver performance
and to minimize the chance of simulation failure.
In the following discussion, assume that:
• M = Part mass
• R = Average dimension (size) of part (order of magnitude is sufficient)
• g = gravitational acceleration
• G = G force (1 G = M*g)
Since steel has a density of about 8000 Kg/m^3, the default part would have a radius of about 30 mm
(assuming it is spherical).
The expression for the contact spring force is:
e
F = Kx
where:
• F = Contact force
• K = Contact Stiffness
300 Adams View
Contacts
• x = penetration
• e = exponent (default value in Adams is 2.2)
We would like to calculate the contact force in G's on the default part when its penetration is 0.1% of its
radius:
We choose a penetration of 0.1% because most well behaved contact models do not exceed this amount.
To compute the appropriate stiffness for a small part, we specify that it should experience the same G
force when it has a penetration of 0.1% of its radius.
Assume the following small part properties:
• M = 4.0e-06 Kg
• R = 1 mm
• e = 2.2
K ≅ 800N ⁄ mm
When both parts in contact are moving, the reduced mass may give a more accurate estimate of stiffness.
The reduced mass is given by:
M1 M2
M = ---------------------
M1 + M2
The contact damping coefficient for small parts should be calculated using critical damping.
The expression for critical damping is:
C = 2 KM
For the small part given above, the damping is:
The values for stiffness and damping are order of magnitude estimates. They can be tuned further (via
experiment) to refine performance.
System Elements
System elements allow you to add your own algebraic and differential equations, and corresponding
states, to your model. Adams Solver solves your equations simultaneously with the equations it generates
from other modeling elements.
Your user-defined equations can depend on any states in the model, such as time, part motions, forces, or
other user-defined states. In turn, you can reference your states in forces, system elements, and other
modeling elements.
System elements enable you to model system components that are not as easily represented by standard
Adams View modeling objects, such as parts, constraints, and forces. They are useful for modeling
components or subsystems that have dynamics of their own. You can use system elements to represent a
control system, for example, or to model the dynamics of an electro-mechanical, hydraulic, or pneumatic
actuator. You can also use system elements to compute simulation output. For example, you might
calculate the energy dissipated in a damper.
The system elements are listed in the table below.
The system
element: Defines:
Differential equation Differential equation that describes a user-defined variable in terms of its time
derivative.
General state System of explicit differential and (optionally) algebraic equations in state-
equation space form. You use array data elements to specify inputs, outputs, and
statements.
Linear state equation System of constant coefficient, explicit, differential, and algebraic equations in
the classic state-space format when used with associated array and matrix data
elements.
Transfer function Single-input, single-output transfer function as a ratio of two polynomials in
the Laplace domain when used with associated array data elements.
State variable Scalar algebraic equation for independent use or as part of the plant input, plant
output, or array data elements.
The path to the files is /install_dir/aview/examples/user_guide, where install_dir is where the Adams
software is installed.
You define each of these arrays using an array data element stored in the current Modeling database. All
array sizes must be consistent with the definition of the system elements. Do not define arrays with zero-
size and zero-valued partial-derivative matrices. Adams Solver correctly formulates the system equations
based on those arrays and derivatives that do exist.
y· = f ( y, q, q· , t )
where:
0 = F ( y, y·, q, q· , t )
304 Adams View
System Elements
You can use the solution to the differential equation in function expression that define a number of other
elements in Adams, such as a force, or in User-written subroutines. Both function expressions and user-
written subroutines can access the user-defined state variable and its derivative. Therefore, you can use
Adams Solver to solve an independent initial value problem, or you can fully couple the differential
equations with the system of equations that governs the dynamics of the problem.
Function expressions access the state variable using the function DIF(i1) and the derivative using
DIF1(i1). In each case, i1 specifies the name of the differential equation that defines the variable. User-
written subroutines access the value and derivative by calling the subroutine SYSFNC. For more
information on functions, see Adams View Function Builder online help. For more information on
subroutines, see the Subroutines section of the Adams Solver online help.
When you do not specify an IC array for a GSE, all the continuous states are
initialized to zero.
Static Hold Indicate whether or not the continuous GSE states are permitted to change
during static and quasi-static simulations.
307
System Elements
When you do not specify an IC array for a GSE, all the discrete states are
initialized to zero.
First Sample Time Specify the Simulation time at which the sampling of the discrete states is to
start. All discrete states before the first sample time are defined to be at the
initial condition specified. The default is zero.
Sample Specify the sampling period associated with the discrete states of a GSE. This
Function/Sample User tells Adams Solver to control its step size so that the discrete states of the GSE
Parameters are updated at:
last_sample_time + sample_period
In cases where an expression for the sampling period is difficult to write, you
can specify it in a user-written subroutine GSE_SAMP. Adams Solver will
call this function at each sample time to find out the next sample period.
Select the More button to display the Function Builder and build an
expression. See Function Builder and Adams View Function Builder online
help.
4. Add or change any comments about the equation element that you want to enter to help you
manage and identify the element.
5. Enter the arrays and matrices in the next text boxes as explained below.
• X State Array Name - Enter the array element that defines the state array for the linear
system. The array must be a states (X) array. It cannot be used in any other linear state
equation, general state equation, or transfer function.
• U Input Array Name - Enter the array element that defines the input (or control) array for the
linear system. Entering an inputs (U) array is optional. The array must be an inputs (U) array.
If you enter an inputs (U) array, you must also specify either a B input matrix, a D feedforward
matrix, or both.
The B and D matrices must have the same number of columns as there are elements in the
inputs (U) array.
• Y Output Array Name - Enter the array element that defines the column matrix of output
variables for the linear system. Entering an outputs (Y) array is optional. If you enter an
outputs (Y) array, you must also specify a C output matrix or a D feedforward matrix. The
corresponding matrix elements must have the same number of rows as there are elements in
the outputs (Y) array. It also must be an outputs (Y) array, and it cannot be used in any other
linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer function.
• IC Array Name - Enter the array element that defines the column matrix of initial conditions
for the linear system. Entering the IC array is optional. The IC array must have the same
number of elements as the states (X) array (equal to the number of rows in the A state matrix).
When you do not specify an IC array, Adams Solver initializes all states to zero.
• A State Matrix Name - Enter the matrix data element that defines the state transition matrix
for the linear system. The matrix must be a square matrix (same number of rows and columns),
and it must have the same number of columns as the number of rows in the states (X) array.
• B Input Matrix Name - Enter the matrix data element that defines the control matrix for the
linear system. The B input matrix must have the same number of rows as the A state matrix
and the same number of columns as the number of elements in the inputs (U) array.
Entering a B input matrix is optional. If you enter a B input matrix, you must also include an
inputs (U) array.
• C Output Matrix Name - Enter the matrix data element that defines the output matrix for the
linear system. The C output matrix must have the same number of columns as the A state
matrix and the same number of rows as the number of elements in the outputs (Y) array.
Entering a C output matrix is optional. If you enter a C output matrix, you must also include
an outputs (Y) array name.
• D Feedforward Matrix Name - Enter the matrix data element that defines the feedforward
matrix for the linear system. The D feedforward matrix must have the same number of rows
as the number of elements in the Y output array and the same number of columns as the
number of elements in the inputs (U) array.
When you enter a D feedforward matrix, you must also include both a Y output matrix and an
inputs (U) array.
309
System Elements
6. Set Static hold to yes to hold states at the constant value determined during static and quasi-static
simulations; no if they can change. Learn about Controlling Equilibrium Values When Using
System Elements.
7. Select OK.
9. Select OK.
Function expressions and user-written subroutines can access the computed value of the variable using
the Adams View function VARVAL(variable_name) to represent the value, where variable_name
specifies the name of the variable. User-written subroutines access a single variable by calling the
subroutine SYSFNC.
For more information on functions, see Adams View Function Builder online help. For more information
on subroutines, see the Subroutines section of the Adams Solver online help.
V = V + 1
When Adams Solver tries to solve this equation using the Newton-Raphson iteration, the solution
diverges and a message appears on the screen indicating that the solution has failed to converge.
Data Elements
Arrays
Types of Arrays
There are four types of arrays:
• General/Initial Conditions - Define an array of constants used as initial conditions for a system
element or User-written subroutine.
• States (X) and Outputs (Y) - Designate the state or output variable arrays for a system element,
such as a linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer function. Adams Solver
computes these values during a Simulation.
To use the arrays, you reference them in function expressions. You can reference the array as the
state or output variable array of only one system element in a model (for example, only one
linear state equation or one general state equation).
Learn about System Elements.
• Inputs (U) - An array that groups together a set of variables used to define the inputs for a system
element. Adams View computes variable values from the specified variable data elements.
The inputs (U) and the initial conditions arrays can exist independently, and do not need to be
referenced by another system element.
Both function expressions and user-written subroutines can access the array values. Function
expressions use the function ARYVAL (ARRAY_NAME, COMPONENT) to access the values.
ARRAY_NAME specifies the name of the array, and COMPONENT specifies the position of
the desired value in the array definition.
You should note that you can only access states (X), outputs (Y), and inputs (U) arrays in
functions because the initial condition array is not accessible in the model definition. You can
access the initial condition array in a user-written subroutine. To access all the elements of an
array, call the subroutine SYSARY. To access one element of an array in a subroutine, call the
subroutine SYSFNC. See the Subroutines section of the Adams Solver online help.
If you specify the size of an array, it should match the number of values or variables in the array or the
size needed for the associated element. The following table lists the sizes for arrays used in different
system element equations.
Tip: You might find it easier to track which array element goes with which system
element if you name the array elements and the corresponding system elements
with like names. For example, the states (X) array that goes with general state
equation GSE_100 would be ARRAY_100; the inputs (U) array would be
ARRAY_101; and the outputs (Y) array would be ARRAY_102.
4. Select the type of array that you want to define. Learn about the Types of Arrays. The dialog box
changes depending on the selection you make.
314 Adams View
Data Elements
5. Depending on the type of array you are creating or modifying, enter or change the values in the
dialog box as explained in the next table, and then select OK.
Strings
A string element defines a character string that you can refer to later in the execution of Adams View or
Adams Solver. The character string cannot be broken and continued on the next line. It can, however, be
longer than a single line. You can use the GTSTRG subroutine to retrieve the character string in a User-
written subroutine. For example, you could use a string element to pass a file name to a user-written
subroutine. For more information, see the Subroutines section of the Adams Solver online help.
Curves
Learn more:
• About Data Element Curves
• Uses for Data Element Curves
• Steps in Defining Curves
• Using Curve Elements in Your Model
• Creating and Modifying Curve Data Elements
315
Data Elements
• Geometry of a part - You can use the curve that you create in the definition of a part. For
example, when you create a Construction geometry spline using the geometric modeling tools as
explained in Creating Splines, Adams View automatically creates a curve element defining the
spline. You could replace the default curve element with a curve element that you create. You
could also create an empty part using the Table Editor, and modify it to contain a curve element.
• Function expression - You can use the curve element as the input to a function, such as CURVE
(B-Spline fitting method). See Spline Functions in Adams View Function Builder online help.
8. If you are entering values using a matrix, enter values in the dialog box as explained in the table
below, and then select OK.
9. If you are entering values using a subroutine, enter values in the dialog box as explained in the
table below, and then select OK.
Splines
A spline creates a continuous function from a set of data points.
Learn about:
• About Data Element Splines
320 Adams View
Data Elements
• File - The file is in RPC III, DAC, or user-defined format. The file contains x, y, and, optionally,
z values that define the spline data points. You can specify that Adams View only use a particular
named block or channel within the file. You can only enter time response data in RPC III and
DAC files if you are using Adams Durability. For more information on using splines in Adams
Durability, see Adams Durability online help.
Entering a user-defined file causes Adams Solver to call the User-written subroutine
SPLINE_READ, which you must provide. For more on how to define a SPLINE using a user-
defined file, see the example in SPLINE_READ of the Adams Solver Subroutines online help.
• Results of a simulation - You can also use the results of a Simulation as input to a spline by
referencing Result set components. For more on result set components, see About Simulation
Output.
• Numerical values directly input in the dialog box - You can directly input x, y, and, optionally,
z values in the dialog box.
General Procedures
• Displaying the Spline Editor and Setting the View
• Setting Spline Units and Dimensions
• Specifying Linear Extrapolation
Plotting a Spline:
• Setting the View of the Spline Plot
322 Adams View
Data Elements
To set units:
• Set Units to the desired units. Select no_units if you do not want units associated with the
values.
To view the curve that Adams View generates from the data points:
• Select Spline Curves.
If creating a 3D spline, you can view a 3D plot of the curves.
Note: Changing the number of points only changes the display of the curve, making it smoother
or more coarse. It does not change the number of data points in the curve.
To paste text:
• Right-click the cell where you want to insert the text, and then select Paste.
To resize a column:
1. Point to the right border of the column heading that you want to resize. The cursor changes to a
double-sided arrow.
2. Drag the cursor until the column is the desired size.
3. Release the mouse button.
4. Add any comments about the spline that you want to enter to help you manage and identify it.
5. Set Linear Extrapolate to yes to extrapolate a spline by applying a linear function over the first
or last two data points. By default, for user-defined files, Adams Solver extrapolates a spline that
exceeds a defined range by applying a parabolic function over the first or last three data points.
For RPC III or DAC files, the default method of extrapolation is zero-order (constant). Learn
about spline extrapolation in Curve-Fitting Techniques in Adams View.
6. Depending on how you are creating the spline, enter or change the values in the dialog box as
explained in the next table, and then select OK. See General Method for Creating Splines for
available options.
To create a spline
from: Do the following:
File 1. Set the pull-down menu to File.
2. Enter the name of the file.
3. If desired, enter the block within the file from which you want Adams
View to take the data. The block must be specifically named in the file.
4. Set the channel from which to take the data. This option is for use with
time response data in RPC III files only. See Adams Durability online
help.
Result set components 1. Set the pull-down menu to Result Set Component.
2. Select the result set components to be used for the x and y values.
Numerical input 1. Set the pull-down menu to Numerical.
2. Enter the x, y, and, optionally, z values in the text boxes. Note the
following:
• Specify at least four x and y values. The maximum number of x
values, n, depends on whether you specify a single curve or a
family of curves.
• Values must be constants; Adams Solver does not allow
expressions.
• Values must be in increasing order:
• x1 < x2 < x3, and so on.
Modifying Splines
The method you use to modify a spline (Spline Editor or general method) depends on the input to the
spline.
331
Data Elements
• Numerical values or Result set components - If the input for the spline data points was numerical
values or result set components, then when you select to modify the spline, Adams View
displays the Spline Editor because it provides the most convenient method for directly editing
values.
• File - If the method of input for the spline data points was a file, Adams View displays the Data
Element Modify Spline dialog box, for you to change the file or interpolation method using the
general method.
Note that because you do not always modify splines using the same method that you used to create them,
you cannot change the input to the spline data points without first deleting the spline and making it again.
For example, if you created a spline using the result set component TIME as the x values, and you want
to change the spline to reference the result set component that defines the force on a part, you would have
to delete the spline and create it again referencing the new component. In addition, if you defined spline
data points using direct numerical values and you want to instead reference a file, you must delete the
spline and make it again using the general method.
To modify a spline:
1. From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to Spline, and then select Modify.
The Database Navigator appears.
2. Select a data element spline to modify.
The Spline Editor or Data Element Modify dialog box appears.
3. Follow the instructions in Creating Splines Using the Spline Editor or Creating Splines Using the
General Method, as appropriate.
The x and z data must cover the anticipated range of values. However, the following situations sometimes
cause Adams Solver to evaluate a spline outside of its defined range:
• Adams Solver occasionally approximates partial derivatives using a finite differencing
algorithm.
• Adams Solver occasionally attempts an iteration that moves the independent variable outside of
its defined range. If this occurs, Adams Solver issues a warning message and extrapolates the
four closest spline points. If the extrapolation is poor, Adams Solver can have difficulty reaching
convergence, which may affect the results.
To avoid these problems, try to use real points, and extend spline values 10 percent beyond the total
dynamic range.
332 Adams View
Data Elements
Using this table, you can determine the force when deflection equals -0.33, and the force when deflection
equals -0.17. You cannot, however, determine the force when the deflection is -0.25. To determine the
force at any deflection value, Adams View creates a continuous function that relates deflection and force.
The continuous approximation is then used to evaluate the value of the spring force at a deflection of -
0.25. If you input two sets of values (x and y) using a spline data element, you can define the curve that
the data represents.
You would then use the spline data element in a function or subroutine that uses cubic spline functions
to fit a curve to the values. The curve allows Adams View to interpolate a value of y for any value of x.
Procedure
Briefly, the steps that you’d perform to use the spline data element to define the force deflections are:
1. Create the spline using the spline editor or the general method.
333
Data Elements
2. Build a simple nonlinear spring-damper, and then modify it to use the spline. To use the spline in
the spring-damper definition, under Stiffness and Damping in the Spring-Damper Modify dialog
box, change the stiffness coefficient to Spline: F= f(defo). Adams View builds a function
expression for you, using AKISPL and modeled spring length as free length.
Note: You can also use a single- or multi-component force to define the force deflections.
In this case, you would select Custom as you create the force, and then modify the
force by entering a function expression, such as:
-akispl(dm(.model_1.PART_1.MAR_4,.model_1.ground.MAR_2)
- 200.0, 0.0, .model_1.SPLINE_1)
You can use the Function Builder for assistance in building the expression
Matrices
When creating or modifying a data element matrix, you can specify its values:
• Using Full Format
• Using Sparse Format
• Using Result Set Components
• Using Data Files
If one-third or more of the entries in a matrix are nonzero, we recommend that you use full format since
it takes less time to create. If the matrix is mostly empty and entering each nonzero entry's row position,
column position, and value takes less time than entering all of the values, you should use the sparse
format
Although no other formats are supported, the ADAMSMAT option is fairly general because the format
for reading in the data is specified within the file, and should meet your requirements.
The first record in any file type contains an 80-character header that indicates the format of the file as
listed in the table below. The remainder of the first record can be used as a title to identify the kind of
data in the file.
Note that the specifications for the format of the data file are case-sensitive. Uppercase letters and a
lowercase x must be used to indicate MATRIXx.
The second record contains only an integer n, right-justified within the first five spaces (the I5
FORTRAN format). It tells how many matrices are contained in the file. The next several records (one
or more) contain the alphanumeric names (eight characters or less) of all of the matrices in the file. The
names are listed sequentially, four to a line, in eight-character fields separated by ten blanks. That is, the
FORTRAN format for the records containing the matrix names is A8, 10X, A8, 10X, A8, 10X, A8.
Sets of contiguous records define each matrix. Without any intervening blank lines, the blocks of records
begin immediately after the last line of matrix names. The first record in each block contains the name
of the matrix in the first eight characters of the line. The code searches through the file until it finds the
block of records corresponding to the name of the matrix element.
The first record of the block contains the type of matrix (either FULL or SPARSE ) within the second
eight spaces on the record. If the type is FULL, the next eight spaces (from 17 through 24) contain the
string CORDER or RORDER to indicate that the values are listed by column or by row, respectively.
Otherwise, if the type is SPARSE, the space is left blank. Learn about Matrix Format Types.
The numerical values specified on the first record of the block include the:
• Number of rows M in the matrix.
• Number of columns N.
335
Data Elements
If the matrix type is SPARSE, then the total number of entries must be less than or equal to (generally
much less than) M x N. If the matrix is FULL, the total number must be equal to M x N.
• For a matrix in the ADAMSMAT format, the values for M, N, and the total number of entries
must be right justified in the fields 25 to 29, 30 to 34, and 35 to 39, respectively.
• For a matrix in the ADAMSMAT2 format, the values for M, N, and the total number of entries
must be separated by spaces.
The final entry on the first line of the block of records defining each matrix is the format specification
for the records containing the values of the matrix. Beginning in column 40, 41 spaces are allowed for
the character string containing the FORTRAN format specification, which must include delimiting
parentheses. The lines of data begin on the next record and continue with successive records until the
code has read into storage either M x N values if the matrix is full or the total number specified if the
matrix is sparse.
For a full matrix, the code simply reads matrix entries sequentially from the file. If the matrix is sparse,
organize the data in triplets; Adams View reads the row and column indexes followed by the
corresponding entry in the matrix. One triplet follows another until Adams View has read the specified
total number of values into the storage arrays.
If the file contains another matrix, the block of records defining its structure and containing its values
must follow immediately after the last line of data for the previous matrix.
The second and third records are read with format I5 and 4(A8,10X), respectively. Then, the first record
of each of the blocks corresponding to the three matrices TRF, VALK, and STL is read with the format
3A8, 3I5, A41. Finally, as can be seen in the copy of the file shown above between the two strings of 80
characters that mark the columns (which, of course, are not part of the file), the single record of data for
the matrix TRF is read with the format 8F8.5; the three records for VALK are read with 3F6.3; and the
two records for STL with 2(2I5,E14.6).
Note: You must create additional matrix elements in your Adams View model if multiple
matrices are to be read from the same file.
340 Adams View
Data Elements
1.364 0.000
0.000 0.000
– 3.546 4.008
0.000 0.7999
enter the following in the text boxes:
• Row Count - 4
• Column Count - 2
341
Data Elements
Note: You must create additional matrix elements in your Adams View model if multiple
matrices are to be read from the same file.
Note: You must create additional matrix elements in your Adams View model if multiple
matrices are to be read from the same file.
Note: You must create additional matrix elements in your Adams View model if multiple
matrices are to be read from the same file
343
Data Elements
• From - Enter the time at which to start outputting the data. The default is the start of the
simulation.
• To - Enter the time at which to end the output of the data or the search of a peak load. The
default is to output to the end of the simulation.
6. Select OK.
345
Using the Adams View Controls Toolkit
• Time-based forcing functions, which might be considered "external inputs" such as Input A in
the figure above.
• Feedback loops, which might be considered "internal inputs" or closed, control loops such as
Input B in the figure above.
The outputs from the control and filter blocks that should be in your diagram include:
• Filtered measures of your model that you want to track for display or plotting purposes.
• Outputs from your model that are used as inputs to the control blocks you will be adding.
Consider adding switches to your models at places where you might want to "open the feedback loop,"
either for debugging your model or for seeing the change in performance that controls provide.
Once you have identified the inputs and outputs for the control and filter blocks, you are ready to create
the necessary blocks and connect them together and to the model.
Step 3 - Create Other Control and Filter Blocks and Connect Them
Once you have created the input blocks, you can then create controls blocks and specify how they
interconnect with each other and input functions. The input to a control or filter block must be given as
the name of another existing control block or input block. The output of controls blocks can be referenced
in function expressions. Each control block maintains a state variable value. The name of the Adams state
variable can be found using the Database Navigator for a PID block (see Picture of Database Navigator
with PID Block). This value is then referenced in elements, such as forces, by simply typing in the element
name as the function expression. See Picture of referencing element.
Second-Order Filter
The second-order filter block is used to create a second-order filter by specifying the undamped natural
frequency and the damping ratio. You can parametrize the undamped natural frequency or damping ratio
constant with an Adams View real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the frequency or
damping ratio of the associated block.
PID Controller
The PID controller is used to create a general proportional-integral-derivative control block. Two inputs
are necessary for this block: the proportional input and the derivative input. You must specify the
derivative state for input to this block that is consistent with the proportional state. For example, if the
proportional input is the measured x position of a part, the derivative input should be the linear velocity
in the x direction.
This block automatically creates the integrated state of the proportional input for use as the integrated
input. You can parameterize the P, I, and D gains of this block with Adams View real design variables to
quickly study the effect of changing control gains.
348 Adams View
Using the Adams View Controls Toolkit
Switch
The switch is a convenient means to "zero" the signal into any block. Connect the switch at a point in the
feedback loop to quickly see the change from open loop control to closed loop control. The switch takes
any control block as its input.
where:
• x is the linearized system state array.
• u is the array of system inputs defined by plant input.
• y is the array of system outputs defined by plant output.
This form is commonly referred to as the state-space form of the system equations in control theory.
Adams Solver outputs the A, B, C, and D matrices for use in a control-system design or any other linear
system analysis software. If only the A matrix is required, plant input and plant output are not necessary.
As shown below, plant inputs and outputs act as socket for input and output to your controller, organizing
the variable wires.
Adams Linear uses plant inputs and outputs to identify which variables to consider system inputs and
outputs when generating state matrices. A control design program can use these matrices to design a
controller for the system. The resulting controller can then be included in the model using variables,
arrays, transfer functions, linear state equations, or general state equations. See the LINEAR command in
the Adams Solver online help.
• For theoretical details, see the white paper in Simcompanion Knowledge Base Article
KB8016460.
• For an example of using PSTATE, see Simcompanion Knowledge Base Article KB8016414.
Selecting Objects
When you create a modeling object, such as a part or force, Adams View automatically selects it so that
you can edit it. When you create a Rigid body, Hotpoints and an Object position handle appear on the body
so that you can rotate and position the body's geometry.
You can also select objects for editing. You can select one or more objects or select a group of objects
based on their type, such as select all link geometry.
Select Tool
Main Menu -> Selection Strip
Selects modeling objec such as parts or forces. Selecting the object deselects any currently selected
object. If you select a rigid body, Adams View selects the entire body including its geometry.
2. Click the right mouse button when the cursor is the area of the screen containing the desired
object.
A selection box of all the objects in the area appears.
3. Highlight the desired object from the list, and then select OK.
To add or remove multiple objects to and from the select list based on search criteria:
1. In the Name Filter text box, enter the name of the objects that you want to add to or remove from
the select list. Type any wildcards that you want included.
2. Set Type Filter to the type of object or objects that you want to add or remove. To display all the
different object types, select Browse.
3. In the Scope text box, limit the scope of objects to be added or removed to only objects belonging
to a certain object by entering the name of the parent object.
4. Select Add or Remove.
Deselecting Objects
To deselect objects:
• From the Edit menu, select Deselect All.
Tip: Ctrl + D.
Select Tool
Main toolbox -> Select tool
Selects modeling objec such as parts or forces. Selecting the object deselects any currently selected
object. If you select a rigid body, Adams View selects the entire body including its geometry.
To add or remove multiple objects to and from the select list based on search criteria:
1. In the Name Filter text box, enter the name of the objects that you want to add to or remove from
the select list. Type any wildcards that you want included.
2. Set Type Filter to the type of object or objects that you want to add or remove. To display all the
different object types, select Browse.
3. In the Scope text box, limit the scope of objects to be added or removed to only objects belonging
to a certain object by entering the name of the parent object.
4. Select Add or Remove.
Deselecting Objects
To deselect objects:
• From the Edit menu, select Deselect All.
Tip: Ctrl + D.
Display Options
• Displaying the Table Editor
• Setting Types of Objects Displayed in the Table Editor
• Sorting Objects in the Table Editor
For general information on using tables in Adams View, see Using Tables to Enter Values.
By default, the Table Editor displays the x, y, and z location of parts in your model.
The categories of information that you can display about an object depend on the type of object. For
example, for parts, you can display their location, initial conditions, and attributes, such as whether they
are visible or active in the current simulation. For markers, you can view their locations, as well as their
locations relative to ground. For forces, you cannot change the information displayed, only the types of
forces displayed. For joints, you can change the information displayed as well as the type of joints
displayed.
• Numeric sorting, which sorts objects based on their numeric value. It sorts any alphabetic
characters as zeros.
Note: When you sort the Table Editor, Adams View sets the values displayed in cells back
to those stored in the Modeling database. Therefore, you lose any changes that you
made to cells and did not apply to your modeling database
To copy an object:
1. Select the row containing the object you want to copy.
2. Right-click a cell in a row that is not selected. From the shortcut menu that appears, select Copy
Object.
Adams View creates a duplicate of the object. It places the object in the last row of the Table
Editor.
Note: The operations you perform with the Table Editor are not stored in your Modeling
database until you apply them. Learn Applying Changes in the Table Editor.
366 Adams View
Editing Objects Using the Table Editor
Note: The operations you perform with the Table Editor are not stored in your Modeling
database until you apply them. Learn Applying Changes in the Table Editor.
To delete an object:
1. Select the row containing the object you want to delete.
2. Right-click a cell in the row. From the shortcut menu that appears, select Delete Object.
Basics 367
Editing Objects Using the Table Editor
Note: The operations you perform with the Table Editor are not stored in your Modeling
database until you apply them. Learn Applying Changes in the Table Editor.
Note: The operations you perform with the Table Editor are not stored in your modeling
database until you apply them. Learn Applying Changes in the Table Editor.
To quickly enter an object's full name and information field into the input box:
1. Place the cursor in the input box where you want the object name to be inserted.
2. Select the Object Name & Field tool f(x) on the Table Editor.
3. Select any cell in the row containing the object whose name you want to input.
Adams View inserts the object's full name and field information into the cell.
For more information on building functions, see the Adams View Function Builder online help. For
information on parameterizing your model, see Improving Your Model Designs.
For a marker example, the Table Editor would create a text string in the input box that represents the
current x location of all selected markers. You would then create an expression to add 3 to any current
cell value. The input box would look like the following:
$cell + 3
When you insert the expression into the x location cell of a selected marker, the variable changes to the
current value of the selected cell. For the marker example, the cell for MARKER_1 whose current value
is 20, now looks like the following:
(20 + 3)
When you apply the changes to the modeling database, Adams View stores the value as an expression
(an expression in Adams View always is enclosed in parenthesis ( )):
(20 + 3)
To have Adams View evaluate the expression and store only a number, enter eval in front of the
expression in the input box as shown below and then insert the expression to the cells:
eval($cell + 3)
To apply changes:
• From the Table Editor, select Apply.
Tip: You can zoom in on the object on the screen to more easily place the cursor over just
that object. Learn about Defining a Zoom Area.
Tip: Double-click the object to display its modify dialog box or select the object and then
enter Ctrl + e.
Copying Objects
You can copy any selected objects within the same model. Adams View creates an identical copy of the
selected object. Adams View assigns a default name to the duplicated object using the copied object name
as the base name and appending _2 to the name. For example, if Adams View copies a rigid body called
PART_1, it assigns the new object the name PART_1_2.
Tip: You can zoom in on the object on the screen to more easily place the cursor over just
that object.
Deleting Objects
You can delete any object that you created in the current modeling database, including deleting a model.
Learn about Deleting a Model.
You can delete any object that has a graphical representation on the screen, such as a rigid body or link,
by selecting them first and then deleting them. You can also select objects that do not have graphical
representations by searching for them through the Database Navigator and then deleting them.
Tip: You can zoom in on the object on the screen to more easily place the cursor over just
that object.
4. If there are no unused markers in a selected model, then Clicking "Cancel" will close the dialog
box.
Tip: You can zoom in on the object on the screen to more easily place the cursor over just
that object.
• Forces
• Data elements
• Output controls
Learn about:
• About activation status
• Activating and deactivating objects
If you deactivated an object, Adams View changes its color to indicate it is not active.
To change the activation status of an object on the screen and its children:
1. Right-click the object you want to activate or deactivate.
Tip: You can zoom in on the object on the screen to more easily place the cursor over just
that object.
Note: The pull-down menu Expand Groups is only present to provide backward
compatibility. We recommend that you not use it.
2. Enter a name for the group of objects. Adams View assigns a default name for you.
3. Add any comments about the group that you want to enter to help you manage and identify the
group.
4. Specify the objects to be included in the group as explained in the table below.
You can select an object on the screen or browse for an object in the
Database Navigator. If you select objects to group using the shortcut menu,
Adams View enters commas between the objects.
5. Specify whether or not the group of objects is active during a simulation. You can enter an
expression that evaluates to 0 (not active) or 1 (active) or enter 1 or 0. If you do not specify a value,
Adams View uses the activation status you set using the Activate and Deactivate commands as
explained in Activating and Deactivating Objects.
6. Select OK.
To ungroup objects:
1. From the Build menu, select Ungroup.
The Delete Group dialog box appears.
2. Enter the name of the group of objects you want to ungroup.
3. Select OK.
Tip: Right-click the object on the screen, point to the name of the object, and then select
Appearance.
• Polygon Fill - Sets the color of those areas of a graphic that can be shaded (they include sides
of a cylinders, frustums, boxes, and so on).
• Edge - Sets the color of the lines making up the edges of the facets of a graphic that can be
shaded.
• Outline - Sets the color of the lines that make up those graphics that cannot be shaded or filled
like the coil of a spring damper.
• All - Sets the selected color for all elements of an object.
To browse for a color in the Database Navigator or create a new color, right-click the Color text
box, and select Browse or Create.
8. Set the Render choices to:
• Filled - Adds shading to a solid fill to give a more realistic appearance. It does not show edges.
The light source is from the upper left.
• Wireframe - Shows only the edges of objects so that you can see through the objects. Helps
you select points and edges.
9. Set how transparent the object or objects are. The higher the value, the more transparent the object
is, allowing other objects to show through. The lower the value, the more opaque the object is,
covering other objects.
Tip: Setting the transparency of objects can have a negative impact on graphical
performance if you are using a graphics card without hardware acceleration for
OpenGL. Instead of setting an object’s transparency, consider setting the object’s
render mode to wireframe.
10. In the Icon Size text box, enter the size you want for the icons or, in the Icon Scale text box, enter
the amount by which you want to scale the icons. The scale factor is relative to the current size
set. A scale factor of 1 keeps the icons the same size. A scale factor less than 1 reduces the size
of the icons and a scale factor greater than 1 increases the size of the icons. Note that these changes
take precedence over the size you specify globally for the modeling database as explained in
Setting Screen Icon Display.
Learn about:
• Changing an Object's Color
• Modifying and Creating Object Colors
• To create a new color, select New Color. The Create New Color dialog box appears. Enter the
name of the color, and then select OK.
3. Select Color Picker, and then select a color.
The selected color appears in the New color box.
4. Select OK.
Tip: You can define a custom color by clicking the closest basic color in the Basic Color palette
and then modifying it.
Tip: There are sixteen Custom Color squares that you can fill with colors that you want to use
throughout the current session of Adams View. To store a custom color, select a Custom
Color square, define a color, and then select Add to Custom Colors. The colors are only
available for the current session of Adams View.
382 Adams View
Measuring Distance Between Positions
You can also select that Adams View calculate the results relative to a reference marker. When you select
a reference marker, Adams View calculates the distance information in the coordinate system of the
reference marker. If you do not specify a reference marker, Adams View calculates the distance relative
to the ground part.
You can select to measure the distance at the model’s initial configuration (how you built it) or at
particular Simulation step. You can specify a time, frame number, or a configuration of the model. For the
model configuration, you can select:
• Model input - The model configuration that was input to Adams Solver, the analysis engine,
before it ran a simulation.
• Initial conditions - The model configuration after initial conditions were met.
• Equilibrium - The configuration after an equilibrium simulation.
• Forward - One frame forward from the currently displayed frame.
• Backward - One frame backward from the currently displayed frame.
You can view the results in an information window or have Adams View store the results in a file.
3. In the Write Result to File Name text box, enter the name of the file in which you want to save
the distance information. If you want the information written to a directory other than the one from
which you are running Adams View, include the path.
4. Select either:
• Model Name if you want to calculate the distance based on the current configuration of a
model.
• Analysis Name if you’d like to calculate the distance based on a configuration, frame, or
Simulation time from a particular simulation.
5. The elements in the dialog box change depending on your selection.
6. Enter the options in the dialog box as explained in the table below and select OK. As you set
options, remember that you can use the shortcut menu that appears when you hold down the right
mouse button in a text box to select an object from the screen or a list.
Tip: To gain more precise control on the rotation angles, move the mouse away from the
center of the position handle as you rotate the object. The farther you move the
mouse away from the position handle, the smaller Adams View makes the angles of
rotation.
Tip: You can also locate the global position handle by entering precise locations as
explained in Exact Position Tool - Moving Objects Exactly. If other objects are also
selected, Adams View moves them to positions relative to the new position of the
global position handle.
• From the Object Manipulation Strip on the Main Menu, select Object Position Handle tool
.
To reset the global position handle to the default location for the selected object:
• Select Reset from the Object Handle Settings dialog box.
Tip: You can also delete the global position handle just as you would any object as
explained in Deleting Objects.
Moving Objects 391
Using Object Position Handle (Classic Interface)
Tip: To gain more precise control on the rotation angles, move the mouse away from the
center of the position handle as you rotate the object. The farther you move the
mouse away from the position handle, the smaller Adams View makes the angles of
rotation.
Tip: You can also locate the global position handle by entering precise locations as
explained in Exact Position Tool - Moving Objects Exactly. If other objects are also
selected, Adams View moves them to positions relative to the new position of the
global position handle.
To reset the global position handle to the default location for the selected object:
• Select Reset from the Object Handle Settings dialog box.
Tip: You can also delete the global position handle just as you would any object as
explained in Deleting Objects.
394 Adams View
Moving Objects Using the Move Tools
You can position an object incrementally using the By Increments tool . It lets you specify the
angle of rotation or the translational distance. The next two sections explain how to translate and rotate
objects by increments:
• Rotating Object by Increments
• Translating Object by Increments
Moving Objects 395
Moving Objects Using the Move Tools
2. From the Object Manipulation Strip, select the By Increments tool . The settings in the
Definition container change as shown below
.
3. In the Distance text box, set the amount by which you want to incrementally translate the object.
4. Select the appropriate translation arrows to translate the object along the x- or y-axis of the view
coordinate system. Adams View translates the object each time you select an arrow.
The following figure shows an example of entering the exact location of a box’s object handle position
so that the handle is in the same position as the handle of a second box.
If more than one object is selected or you’ve created a global position handle, Adams View moves the
first object you selected or the handle to the specified location and moves all other selected objects to
positions relative to the first selected object or the handle.
The following figures show a link (LINK_2) being centered over a hole of LINK_1 by moving the link
from position A to position B.
As you translate the objects, you can rotate an object that you select during the translation operation or
translate all objects currently selected. In addition, you can translate a copy of the selected objects instead
of the actual objects.
4. Select an axis or define the vector along which to translate the object by selecting two points on
the screen.
• From the pull-down menu, select the method you want to use to rotate or align objects. If you
selected About, enter the amount to rotate the object in the Angle box.
3. If you did not choose Selected in the settings container, select the object or objects that you want
to rotate.
4. Follow the prompts in the status bar to select the axis or axes about which to rotate or align the
objects. Refer to the table below for assistance.
If you
selected: Do the following:
About Select the axis about which to rotate the object or objects.
Align Select the axis about which to rotate the object or objects.
Note: Adams View rotates the object so that the first axis points toward the first
object, and the second axis points as closely as possible towards the second
object.
Depending on the locations that you selected, it may not be possible for both axes to
pass through the locations. Adams View orients the object so that the first axis passes
through the first location, and the plane defined by the two axes passes through the
second location. This means that the second axis comes as close as possible to the
second location, but may not pass through it.
402 Adams View
Moving Objects Using the Move Tools
Note: Four of the tools in the Move tool stack are not explained here because they are shortcuts
to other operations or apply more to parameterization. The tools are:
You can position an object incrementally using the By Increments tool . It lets you specify the angle
of rotation or the translational distance. The next two sections explain how to translate and rotate objects
by increments:
• Rotating Object by Increments
• Translating Object by Increments
404 Adams View
Moving Objects Using the Move Tools (Classic Interface)
2. From the Move Toolstack on the Main toolbox, select the By Increments tool . The settings
in the Main toolbox container change as shown below
.
3. In the Distance text box, set the amount by which you want to incrementally translate the object.
4. Select the appropriate translation arrows to translate the object along the x- or y-axis of the view
coordinate system. Adams View translates the object each time you select an arrow.
You can position an object precisely by specifying the translational coordinates and the rotational angles
of the object’s position handle relative to the Working grid axes, global coordinate system, or any object
on the screen. In addition, you can display the current position of an object’s position handle.
406 Adams View
Moving Objects Using the Move Tools (Classic Interface)
The following figure shows an example of entering the exact location of a box’s object handle position
so that the handle is in the same position as the handle of a second box.
If more than one object is selected or you’ve created a global position handle, Adams View moves the
first object you selected or the handle to the specified location and moves all other selected objects to
positions relative to the first selected object or the handle.
2. From the Move Toolstack on the Main toolbox, select the Exact Position tool . The settings
in the Main toolbox change as shown below.
Moves objects by translating them from an initial location to another. There are two ways to move an
object from one location to another:
• Pick two locations. The first location defines the location from which to move and the second
location defines the point to which to move the selected object. The objects move relative to the
selected locations.
• Define a distance and a vector along which to translate the selected objects.
The following figures show a link (LINK_2) being centered over a hole of LINK_1 by moving the link
from position A to position B.
As you translate the objects, you can rotate an object that you select during the translation operation or
translate all objects currently selected. In addition, you can translate a copy of the selected objects instead
of the actual objects.
Rotates objects about an axis or aligns them with the axes of other objects. You can set the alignment in
the following ways:
• About - Rotates an object about the axis of another object.
• Align - Rotates an object about its axis to align it with another object.
• Align Same As - Aligns an object to the orientation of another object.
• Align One Axis - Orients an axis of an object to be in the same direction as the axis of another
object. This is useful if the axis of a joint or force is defined by a marker in your model.
• Align Two Axes - Orients an object so it is the same direction as the axis of another object and
rotates the object about that axis to place a second axis in the plane defined by the two directions.
410 Adams View
Moving Objects Using the Move Tools (Classic Interface)
You can rotate an object that you select during the rotate operation or rotate all objects currently selected.
In addition, you can rotate a copy of the selected objects instead of the actual objects.
If you
selected: Do the following:
About Select the axis about which to rotate the object or objects.
Align Select the axis about which to rotate the object or objects.
If you
selected: Do the following:
Align One Axis Select the axis of the object to align.
Note: Adams View rotates the object so that the first axis points toward the first
object, and the second axis points as closely as possible towards the second
object.
Depending on the locations that you selected, it may not be possible for both axes to
pass through the locations. Adams View orients the object so that the first axis passes
through the first location, and the plane defined by the two axes passes through the
second location. This means that the second axis comes as close as possible to the
second location, but may not pass through it.
Positions an object by mating one object face with another object face so they are in the same plane. The
following figure shows two objects whose top and bottom faces were mated.
The objects must be in shaded render mode to mate their faces. See Rendering mode.
412 Adams View
Moving Objects Using the Move Tools (Classic Interface)
You can select to move the objects relative to a specified object's coordinate system, called the reference
coordinate system. You can also select to move objects relative to the screen. In addition, you can use the
Precision Move dialog box to view the coordinates of one object in relation to another.
The Precision Move dialog box consolidates some operations that are available using the By Increments
and Precise Coordinates tools and provides new functionality for rotating objects by increments relative
to any object.
• From the Object Manipulation Strip, select the Precision Move tool .
414 Adams View
Moving Objects Using the Precision Move Dialog Box
You can specify two options for the reference coordinate system: Relative to the or About the:
• If you specify the Relative to the option for rotations, objects rotate in place (their locations do
not change) and their rotations are with respect to the coordinate system specified in the Relative
to the text box.
• If you specify the About the option for rotations, the objects rotate about the origin of the
coordinate system specified (their locations change) and the rotations are with respect to the
coordinate system specified in the About the text box.
• Translations are with respect to the coordinate system defined as either Relative to the or the
About the.
3. If you do not enter a reference coordinate system, the Precision Move dialog box moves the
objects about the current default coordinate system.
Examples
Example 1
Rotate a marker (MAR2) 180 degrees relative to the y axis of the coordinate system that MAR1 defines:
416 Adams View
Moving Objects Using the Precision Move Dialog Box
1. Set Relocate the to marker, and then enter MAR2 in the text box to the right.
2. Set Relative to the, and then enter MAR1 in the text box to the right.
3. Set the increment value to 180.
4. Click the y cube on the Rotate dial
.
Example 2
Rotate a marker (MAR2) 45 degrees about the y axis of MAR1:
1. Set Relocate the to marker , and then enter MAR2 in the text box to the right.
2. Set About the , and then enter MAR1 in the text box to the right.
3. Set the increment value to 45.
4. Click the y cube on the Rotate dial.
For example, if you want to ensure that two markers, which you want to connect using an inplane joint,
are in the same plane, you can set one marker as the object to be moved and the other object as the relative
to object. You can then view the rotation coordinates of the first marker to ensure that they are (0, 0, 0).
Example
Move a marker (MAR2) to (0, -4, -4) in another marker's (MAR1) coordinate system.
1. Set Relocate the to marker , and then enter MAR2 in the text box to the right.
2. Set Relative to the , and then enter MAR1 in the text box to the right.
3. In the C1 through C3 text boxes, enter:
• C1: 0
• C2: -40
• C3: -40
418 Adams View
Moving Objects Using the Precision Move Dialog Box
4. Select OK.
• Think of the rotation as pushing on an object at that point. For example, if you select the arrow
that points to the right, you are pushing the horizontal axis back, resulting in a positive rotation
around the vertical axis.
You can select to move the objects relative to a specified object's coordinate system, called the reference
coordinate system. You can also select to move objects relative to the screen. In addition, you can use the
Precision Move dialog box to view the coordinates of one object in relation to another.
The Precision Move dialog box consolidates some operations that are available using the By Increments
and Precise Coordinates tools and provides new functionality for rotating objects by increments relative
to any object.
You can specify two options for the reference coordinate system: Relative to the or About the:
• If you specify the Relative to the option for rotations, objects rotate in place (their locations do
not change) and their rotations are with respect to the coordinate system specified in the Relative
to the text box.
• If you specify the About the option for rotations, the objects rotate about the origin of the
coordinate system specified (their locations change) and the rotations are with respect to the
coordinate system specified in the About the text box.
• Translations are with respect to the coordinate system defined as either Relative to the or the
About the.
3. If you do not enter a reference coordinate system, the Precision Move dialog box moves the
objects about the current default coordinate system.
Examples
Example 1
Rotate a marker (MAR2) 180 degrees relative to the y axis of the coordinate system that MAR1 defines:
Moving Objects 423
Moving Objects Using the Precision Move Dialog Box (Classic Interface)
1. Set Relocate the to marker, and then enter MAR2 in the text box to the right.
2. Set Relative to the, and then enter MAR1 in the text box to the right.
3. Set the increment value to 180.
4. Click the y cube on the Rotate dial
.
Example 2
Rotate a marker (MAR2) 45 degrees about the y axis of MAR1:
1. Set Relocate the to marker , and then enter MAR2 in the text box to the right.
2. Set About the , and then enter MAR1 in the text box to the right.
3. Set the increment value to 45.
4. Click the y cube on the Rotate dial.
For example, if you want to ensure that two markers, which you want to connect using an inplane joint,
are in the same plane, you can set one marker as the object to be moved and the other object as the relative
to object. You can then view the rotation coordinates of the first marker to ensure that they are (0, 0, 0).
Example
Move a marker (MAR2) to (0, -4, -4) in another marker's (MAR1) coordinate system.
1. Set Relocate the to marker , and then enter MAR2 in the text box to the right.
2. Set Relative to the , and then enter MAR1 in the text box to the right.
3. In the C1 through C3 text boxes, enter:
• C1: 0
• C2: -40
• C3: -40
Moving Objects 425
Moving Objects Using the Precision Move Dialog Box (Classic Interface)
4. Select OK.
• Think of the rotation as pushing on an object at that point. For example, if you select the arrow
that points to the right, you are pushing the horizontal axis back, resulting in a positive rotation
around the vertical axis.
Refer to the help on creating a geometry to see where Adams View places hotpoints on the different types
of geometry.
Note: To modify a point, you use the Table Editor because a point only consists of a location. In
addition, for lines, polylines, extrusions, and revolutions, you can use the Location Table
that lets you edit the locations of profile points. For more information, see Editing Locations
Using the Location Table.
Note: You can also use the Info command to view the geometry that belongs to a part. Learn about
Viewing Model Topology Map Through Information Window.
For general information on using tables in Adams View, see Using Tables to Enter Values.
• From a polyline, extrusion, spline, or revolution modify dialog box, select the More button .
To resize a column:
1. Point to the right border of the column heading that you want to resize. The cursor changes to a
double-sided arrow.
2. Drag the cursor until the column is the desired size.
3. Release the mouse button.
To delete a row:
1. Select the row or rows you want to delete.
2. Select Delete.
Note: Adams View reads the location information starting at the first line that has numerical
information. If there are headers in the file, Adams View reads the header information
when you first read in the file and changes the headers in the Location table accordingly. It
resets the headers to the default headers (X, Y, and Z), however, the next time you open the
Location table.
Adams View automatically calculates the total mass of the part and its inertia based on the part's volume
and density. It also automatically calculates the initial velocity and position for the part based on any
other initial conditions and connections in your model. You can set how you want Adams View to
calculate these properties as well as define these properties yourself as explained in the next sections.
Note: You can also modify part properties using the Table Editor. Learn about Editing Objects
Using the Table Editor
To select a material type from the Database Navigator or create a new material
type, right-click the text box, and then select the appropriate command. Learn
about Setting Up Material Types.
Geometry and In the Density text box, enter the density of the part. Adams View uses the part's
Density density and the volume of the geometry to calculate its mass and inertia.
User Input Mass - In the Mass text box, enter the mass of the part.
Center-of-mass marker - In the Center of Mass Marker text box, enter the
marker that is to be used to define the center-of-mass (CM) for the part.
Inertia marker - In the Inertia Reference Marker text box, specify the marker that
defines the axes for the inertia properties. If you do not enter an inertia marker,
Adams View uses the part CM marker for inertia properties.
The inertia matrix is a symmetrical, positive-definite matrix. You compute the individual terms in the
matrix as follows:
In the above formula, x, y, and z are the components of the displacement of an infinitesimal mass particle
of mass dm, measured from the origin of the inertia marker in the coordinate system of the inertia marker.
The integral is performed over the entire mass of the body. If you do not specify the inertia marker,
Adams View uses the CM marker. In that case, you compute these quantities about the origin of the CM
marker in the coordinate system of the CM marker.
Note: Adams View defines Ixy, Ixz, and Iyz as positive integrals, as shown. Some references
define these terms as the negative of these integrals. You should be sure to compute these
values as shown above.
You can specify translational and angular velocities for rigid bodies and flexible bodies and only
translational velocity for point masses.
• Translational velocity defines the time rate of change of a part's center of mass with respect to
ground or another marker in your model. You can specify translational velocity for each vector
component of the marker.
418 Adams View
Modifying Part Properties
• Angular velocity defines the time rate of change of a part's rotational position with respect to the
CM marker of the part or another marker in your model. You can specify angular velocity for
each vector component of the marker.
If you specify initial velocities, Adams View uses them as the initial velocity of the part during initial
conditions simulations regardless of any other forces acting on the part. You can also leave some or all
of the velocities unset. Leaving a velocity unset lets Adams View calculate the velocity of the part during
an assemble operation depending on the other forces and constraints acting on the part. Note that it is not
the same as setting the initial velocity to zero. Setting an initial velocity to zero means that the part will
not be moving in the specified direction when the simulation starts regardless of any forces and
constraints acting upon it.
You can control initial locations and orientations for rigid bodies and Flexible bodies and only initial
locations for Point masses.
• Location fixes any of the current translational coordinates (x, y, or z) of the part as the initial
location.
• Orientation fixes any of the current body-fixed 313 rotational coordinates (psi, theta, or phi
angles) as the initial orientation. These rotation angles are those associated with a body-fixed
313 rotation sequence regardless of which sequence you set as the default for the modeling
database. (Learn about Rotation Sequences.)
If Adams Solver has to alter part positions to obtain consistent initial conditions during an initial
conditions simulation, it does not vary the coordinates you specify, unless it must vary them to satisfy the
initial conditions you specify for a joint or a motion.
If you fix the initial positions of too many parts, the initial conditions simulation can fail. Use initial
positions sparingly.
Simulation Basics
After creating your model, or at any point in the modeling process, you can run a Simulation of the model
to test its:
• Performance characteristics
• Response to a set of operating conditions
The entries in this section of the table of contents explain how to define the output desired from
simulations and perform simulations
During a Simulation, Adams View performs the following operations:
• Sets the initial conditions for all the objects in your model.
• Formulates appropriate equations of motion based on the laws of Newtonian mechanics that
predict how objects in your model will move given the set of forces and constraints acting on
them.
• Solves the equations to within your specified accuracy tolerance for such information as part
displacements, velocities, and acceleration, as well as applied and constraint forces.
• Temporarily saves the data calculated so that you can investigate your results using animations,
plots, and numerical signal processing. You can also permanently save your results in your
Modeling database.
As Adams View simulates your model and solves equations, it displays the calculated results as frames
of an animation. The animation helps you graphically view the overall behavior of your model and
pinpoint specific problems, such as improper connectivity or misapplied motions or forces. After the
simulation is complete, you can replay the animation. For more information, see Animation Controls
Basics.
Adams View can display this information in Strip charts through measures or you can view the
information in Adams PostProcessor for more in-depth investigation and manipulation. See the Adams
PostProcessor online help.
Types of Simulations
You can run five types of Simulations in Adams View:
• Dynamic simulation
• Kinematic simulation
• Static equilibrium
• Initial conditions simulation
• Linear simulation
Simulation Basics 423
Simulation Basics
• Recalculate the Jacobian matrix - You can increase the frequency with which Adams Solver
recalculates the Jacobian matrix (the matrix of partial differentials) during the corrector phase. In
an attempt to gain greater efficiency, Adams Solver uses a modified Newton-Raphson approach
that does not update the Jacobian at every iteration.
• Control the maximum step size
Note that you may not always help the solution when you change the default parameters for convergence
tolerance, maximum number of iterations, and pattern for updating the Jacobian. For example, if you
loosen the convergence tolerance, you can allow too much error to build up in your solution over time
and your overall solution accuracy could suffer.
If you increase the number of iterations that Adams Solver attempts during each corrector phase, you
might be making the solution less efficient. Often, when Adams Solver cannot get the corrector to
converge using the default number of iterations, it is better to let the solution step back in time and predict
forward using a smaller time step rather than attempt more corrector iterations.
For more information on the effects of making these changes and tips for controlling the dynamic
solution, see the INTEGRATOR statement in the Adams Solver online help.
Comparison of Integrators
The equation
formulation: Has the following characteristics:
I3 • Ensures that the solution satisfies all constraints.
• Does not ensure that the the velocities and accelerations calculated satisfy all
first- and second-time derivatives.
• Monitors integration error only in system displacements, not in velocities.
• Is fast.
• The Jacobian matrix can become ill-conditioned at small step sizes.
426 Adams View
Simulation Basics
The equation
formulation: Has the following characteristics:
SI2 • Takes into account constraint derivatives when solving for equations of motion.
This process enables the GSTIFF integrator to monitor the integration error of
velocity variables, and, therefore, renders highly accurate simulations.
• Jacobian matrix remains stable at small step sizes, which in turn increases the
stability and robustness of the corrector at small step sizes.
SI1 • Takes into account constraint derivatives when solving for equations of motion.
• Monitors the integration error on the impulse of the Lagrange Multipliers in the
system. These additional safeguards enable the integrators to monitor the
integrator error in velocity variables and the impulse of the Lagrange
Multipliers.
• Very accurate.
• Jacobian matrix remains stable at small step sizes, which in turn increases the
stability and robustness of the corrector at small step sizes.
Simulation Basics 427
About Simulation Output
Note: Object characteristics correspond directly to object measures. You do not need to create
object measures to plot object characteristics because Adams Solver automatically
calculates and outputs them for you. To use object measures in the definition of your model
or to save the object characteristics from one simulation to another, however, you should
create object measures. Learn about measuring object characteristics.
• Result set components - Result set components are a basic set of state variable data that Adams
Solver calculates during a simulation. Adams Solver outputs the data at each simulation output
step. A component of a result set is a time series of a particular quantity (for example, the x
displacement of a part or the y torque in a joint). Learn about result set components.
• Define measures that Adams View tracks during and after a simulation. You can measure almost
any characteristic of the objects in your model, such as the force applied by a spring or the
distance or angle between objects. As you run the simulation, Adams View displays strip charts
of the measures so you can view the results as the simulation occurs. Learn About Measures.
• Create requests to ask for standard displacement, velocity, acceleration, or force information that
helps you investigate the results of your simulation. You can also define other quantities (such as
pressure, work, energy, momentum, and more) that you want output during a simulation. (Learn
more about Creating Requests.)
• Define FE model data to be output for use in third-party programs. Learn about Defining FE
Model Data for Output.
Measures are more flexible than requests. Besides specifying output, you can use measures in the
definition of your model. Requests, on the other hand, let you specify several types of output through one
request. (See comparison of requests and measures.)
Note: You can also use the Measure Distance command to measure the distance between two
markers at different model configurations. This is a quick way to measure distances and
does not require that you run a simulation. For more information, see About Measuring
Distance Between Positions.
Simulation Basics 429
About Simulation Output
The measurable characteristics of objects are shown in the table below. Click an object characteristic to
view the description.
Note: For flexible bodies, the location of the center of mass changes over
time relative to the body coordinate system.
[Icm] Inertia tensor of body about its center of mass.
Note: For flexible bodies, the inertia tensor actually changes as the body
deforms. Adams View accounts for this by correcting the inertia
tensor of the flexible body,
[I] according to its specified modal formulation as follows:
• Rigid or Constant:
[I] = [I]7
• Partial Coupling:
[I] = [I]7 - [I]8 {q}
• Full Coupling:
There is an experimental method of specifying a delta value for the separation criteria that will make the
program skip the automatic criteria, sometimes saving a significant amount of time. This can be done by
setting the tolerance parameter using the analysis collate_contacts command. By using a large tolerance
value, you can coerce tracks together that may have been separated by the automatic criteria. See
Simcompanion Knowledge Base Article KB8015944 for more information.
• From - Enter the time at which to start outputting the data. The default is the start of the
simulation.
• To - Enter the time at which to end the output of the data or the search of a peak load. The
default is to output to the end of the simulation.
6. Select OK.
446 Adams View
About Simulation Output
Measures
448 Adams View
About Measures
About Measures
A measure lets you investigate several predefined and user-defined characteristics of your model during
or after a simulation. For example, you can use a measure to find the angle between two links connected
by a revolute joint, the x component of relative velocity between two parts, and more.
The following explain more about measures:
• Types of Measures
• Ways in Which You Can Use Measures
• Limitations of Measures
• Measure Reference Frames and Coordinate Systems
• Using Measures in the Definition of Your Model
• Measures in Adams Solver Datasets
Types of Measures
There are two types of Measures available:
• Predefined measures that automatically output information.
• User-defined measures that you define to obtain more specific information about your model.
Predefined Measures
This type of
measure: Lets you capture and investigate:
Object Characteristics of the parts, forces, and constraints in your model.
Point Characteristics of a point, such as its location relative to the global coordinate
system or the sum of forces acting on it.
Point-to-point Kinematic characteristics of a point relative to another point, such as the
relative velocity or acceleration.
Orientation The orientation of one marker with respect to another marker using a variety
of known schemes, such as successive rotations, Euler parameters, direction
cosines, and so on.
Included angle The included angle defined by three points in space.
Range Statistical characteristics of another measure, such as its maximum, average,
and more.
Measures 449
About Measures
User-Defined Measures
This type of measure: Lets you capture and investigate:
Adams View computed A design expression that you want Adams View to evaluate before or
after a simulation.
Adams Solver function A function expression that you want Adams Solver to evaluate during a
simulation.
Limitations of Measures
The following are limitations to using measures:
• Many characteristics in measures are computed from the last Simulation of the model. If you
change your model after running a simulation, the characteristics will no longer be correct. You
need to simulate the modified model again.
• You cannot include Adams View computed measures in an Adams Solver run-time function
expression. Only Adams View can process computed measures.
• Only Adams Solver can evaluate Adams Solver computed measures. Therefore, you must define
an Adams Solver computed measure before you run a simulation. Adams View cannot evaluate
the measure after a simulation.
450 Adams View
About Measures
If you export your model to an Adams Solver dataset, and then import it back into Adams View, you lose
the associated measure information. We recommend that you use command files to archive models that
contain measures.
452 Adams View
Point Characteristics you can measure
Angle Measures
It is the instantaneous angle between these vectors that Adams View tracks in an included angle measure.
Note that the included angle changes over time as the markers move during a simulation.
There are two conventions used in Adams View to define the sign and magnitude of an included angle
measure as it changes over time:
• The sign and magnitude is always calculated so as to have an initial value within the range [0, PI]
regardless of the order in which you select the points. The sign convention (+/-) is defined such
that the first nonzero value is positive.
• The axis of rotation is automatically calculated as the cross-product of , and the order
in which you select the points have no effect. This, along with the right-hand rule, determines all
subsequent changes to the sign and magnitude of the included angle measure.
• Browse method - Displays the Angle Measure dialog box in which you browse for markers.
Point-to-Point Measures
Point-to-Point Measures let you measure kinematic characteristics, such as displacement or velocity,
between two locations during a simulation. For example, you can use a point-to-point measure to
calculate the global y-component of distance between any two specified markers.
You can also obtain point-to-point characteristics for geometric vertices. When you select vertices for the
markers, Adams View automatically creates a marker at each vertex and uses it in the point-to-point
measure.
Orientation Measures
To learn about creating orientation measures:
• About Measuring Orientation Characteristics
• Orientation Characteristics You Can Measure
• Creating an Orientation Measure
All such orientation characteristics are simply transformed from the direction cosine matrix.
The following example shows two markers whose orientation relative to each other you can capture using
orientation angles. When associated with a body-fixed 313 rotation sequence, the example returns the
rotation angles 1 = +90 °, 1 = +90 °, and 1 = +90°.
458 Adams View
Orientation Measures
Object Measures
In general, all objects in your model have some pre-defined measurable characteristics. For example, you
can capture and investigate the power consumption of a motion, or measure a part’s center-of-mass
velocity along the global x-axis, taking time derivatives in the ground reference frame. The default
coordinate system is the ground coordinate system, but you can use any marker as the coordinate system.
Learn about:
• Object Characteristics You Can Measure
• Point Characteristics you can measure
To access the object measure create dialog box, do one of the following:
• To create a measure for a selected object, select the object. Then, from the Build menu, point to
Measure, and then select Selected Object.
• To create a measure for any object in the database, when no objects are selected, from the Build
menu, point to Measure, point to Selected Object, and then select New. From the Database
Navigator, select the object on which you want to define a measure.
• To create a measure while modifying the object, from the object's modify dialog box, select the
Object Measure tool . Learn about Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
An Object Measure dialog box appears. Its content corresponds to the object type you are
creating. If you selected an object that is an assembly, the Assembly Measure dialog box
appears.
Range Measures
You can use range measures to obtain statistical feedback about any existing measure. Ranges
dynamically calculate the maximum, minimum, average, or variation characteristics of any measure.
Minimum Minimum value in the current set of measured data. Min (M1, M2, ..., Mn)
Maximum Maximum value in the current set of measured data. Max (M1, M2, ..., Mn)
Variation Difference between the maximum and minimum value Maximum - Minimum
in the current set of measured data.
Caution: Making changes in your model can cause a potential problem because model changes can
invalidate the accuracy of any measure that depends on the results of a simulation. The
simulation redefines the model data and re-evaluates your Adams View computed
measures.
Learn more:
• Adams View Function Builder online help
• Example of Using User-Defined Measures in a Model of a Pendulum
3. Select OK.
464 Adams View
Creating an Adams Solver Function Measure
Be careful, however, about the number of Adams Solver function measures you create because Adams
View writes each measure to the Adams Solver dataset as a VARIABLE statement. Each VARIABLE
statement adds another equation to the overall set of equations. The more equations Adams Solver must
solve, the longer your simulation takes.
Learn more:
• Adams View Function Builder online help
• Example of Using User-Defined Measures in a Model of a Pendulum
Deleting Measures
To delete a measure:
1. From the Build menu, point to Measure, and then select Delete.
2. From the Database Navigator, select the measure to delete.
466 Adams View
Modifying Measures
Modifying Measures
To modify a measure:
1. For any type of measure, from the Build menu, point to Measure, point to the appropriate type
of measure, and then select Modify.
2. From the Database Navigator, select the measure to modify.
Tip: For a shortcut to steps 1 and 2, in the strip chart containing the measure data, right-
click the background (not a curve), Point to Plot:scht1, and then select Measure
Modify.
Note: Displaying script charts during a simulation adversely affects the speed of the simulation.
The more strip charts you display, the slower your simulation.
To save a curve:
1. In the strip chart, right-click a curve.
2. Point to the name of the curve, and then select Save Curve.
Note: • You have to redisplay the strip chart to see the effects of changing the legend, color,
line type, line symbol, and line thickness. Learn about redisplaying strip charts.
• The Lower, Upper, and Label text boxes currently are not available.
2. In the Legend text box, enter text that describes the data that the curve in the strip chart represents.
The text appears in the title bar of the strip chart. Note that you have to redisplay the strip chart to
see the effects of changing the legend.
3. In the Comment text box, enter text that describes the measure. The text appears in Adams
PostProcessor when you transfer the strip chart to it for plotting. Learn how to transfer a strip chart
to Adams PostProcessor.
4. Select the type of plot to be displayed in Adams PostProcessor when you transfer the strip chart
to it for plotting:
• linear - Performs no transformation of data or axis values. This is the default.
• logar (Logarithmic) - Scales the axis values so that each power of 10 is separated by the same
distance. For example, the values 1, 10, 100, 1000, and 10,000 are equally spaced.
• db (Decibel) - Displays 20 * log 10 (value) for each value.
• default - Selecting this means no specific axis type is requested and it appears in the default
axis type, which is usually linear.
Learn how to transfer a strip chart to Adams PostProcessor.
5. Set Line Type to the type of line style for the curve. For example, you can select a line that
alternates between dots and dashes.
6. Set Symbol to the type of symbol displayed at data points along the curve.
7. In the Color text box, enter the color of the curve.
8. In the Thickness text box, change the weight of the curve line. Weight values range from 1 to 5
screen pixels.
9. Select OK.
To transfer a measure:
1. Right-click a strip chart to display a menu of measure results currently in the window.
2. Point to the measure results that you want to display, and then select Transfer to Full Plot.
Note: You can also select to display a measure from Adams PostProcessor. See the Adams
PostProcessor online help.
Static equilibrium or Quasi-static simulation. The strip charts can provide you with insight into how the
Adams Solver Integrator acts, particularly if you display strip charts of Measures of modeling objects,
such as key forces and accelerations, side-by-side with the debugging strip charts.
To help you interpret the solution-related information in the strip charts, see the DEBUG command in the
Adams Solver online help.
Similar to the Iterations per Step strip chart, if the Integrator Order strip chart shows the
consistent use of high (three or more) order polynomials, you may be able to increase
performance by increasing the maximum allowed time step. If Adams Solver consistently or
periodically uses low-order polynomials, it is symptomatic of a period of rapidly changing
dynamics that may require corrective action as described for the Step Size strip chart or the
integration step size may be too large for the dynamics in your model.
• Static Imbalance - The Static Imbalance strip chart displays the current imbalance in the
equilibrium equations that Adams Solver computes during a static equilibrium simulation. A
static equilibrium simulation is an iterative process to compute a position in which your model
assumes a minimum energy configuration. Learn about Performing Static Equilibrium
Simulations.
The Static Imbalance strip chart displays a measure of how close the solution is coming to a
complete balance of the equilibrium equations at each equilibrium iteration, in units of your
selected force units.
Note: You need to select the option, Update Every Iteration, to watch the iteration-by-
iteration progress of an equilibrium simulation. For more information, see Solver
Settings - Display.
472 Adams View
Setting Up Strip Charts
Requests
474 Adams View
Creating Requests
Creating Requests
You can create Requests to ask for standard displacement, velocity, acceleration, or force information
that will help you investigate the results of your simulation. You can also define other quantities (such as
pressure, work, energy, momentum, and more) that you want output during a simulation.
To learn more:
• About Naming Results and Components in Requests
• Creating by Specifying Predefined Data Type and Marker
• Creating by Specifying Function Expression
• Creating by Specifying a Subroutine
• Creating by Specifying Variables
To define the output in which you are interested, you can specify:
• Predefined data to be output
• Function expressions
• Subroutine
• Variables (available for XML format only) Learn about Creating and Modifying State Variables.
Adams Solver generates the data at each Output step in a Simulation. For more on output steps, see
Interactive Simulation Palette and Container.
Note: Unlike measures, you must create requests before you run a simulation. Once you define
them, you can use them with different simulations.
By default, Adams View does not save the requested data to external files, but will save it to your
modeling database. Learn about Solver Settings.
Component Naming
By default, there are eight components per results set, and they have generic names, such as X, Y, Z, and
MAG. You can specify more descriptive names for them or specify a particular unit label or unit type
associated with each component.
• Component Units - You can identify the unit dimension of the result set components. If you do
not specify units, then the units of the components are predefined based upon standard request
type (for example, displacement, velocity, and acceleration).
The units can be:
MASS AREA
TIME VOLUME
FORCE TORQUE
LENGTH PRESSURE
VELOCITY DENSITY
ACCELERATION ENERGY
ANGLE TORSION_STIFFNESS
ANGULAR_VELOCITY TORSION_DAMPING
ANGULAR_ACCELERATION FREQUENCY
INERTIA AREA_INERTIA
STIFFNESS FORCE_TIME
DAMPING TORQUE_TIME
• Component Labels - You can identify the labels to be used when plotting the result set
components.
To create a request:
1. From the Build menu, point to Measure, point to REQUEST, and then select New.
The Create a Request dialog box appears.
2. Enter the name that you want assigned to the request.
3. In the Adams Id text box, assign a unique ID number to the request.
4. In the Comments text box, add any comments about the request to help you manage and identify
the request.
5. If the output of the results set is XML format, set the naming for the results and components.
Learn About Naming Results and Components in Requests.
• In the Components Name and Results Name text boxes, enter the names of the components
and results. Separate the component names by commas.
• If desired, set the following to define a unit type or label associated with each of the
components:
• Component Units, and then enter the units associated with each component. See Available
units.
• Component Labels, and then enter the labels to appear when plotting the result set
components. Labels can be strings that include white space. Quotes must be used to define
the string if special characters or white space are used.
6. Set the option menu to Define Using Variables.
The elements of the dialog box change to those for entering variables.
7. Enter the variables, separated by commas.
8. Select OK.
To create a request:
1. From the Build menu, point to Measure, point to REQUEST, and then select New.
The Create a Request dialog box appears.
2. Enter the name that you want assigned to the request.
3. In the Adams Id text box, assign a unique ID number to the request.
4. In the Comments text box, add any comments about the request to help you manage and identify
the request.
5. If the output of the results set is XML format, set the naming for the results and components.
Learn About Naming Results and Components in Requests.
• In the Components Name and Results Name text boxes, enter the names of the components
and results. Separate the component names by commas.
478 Adams View
Creating Requests
• If desired, set the following to define a unit type or label associated with each of the
components:
• Component Units, and then enter the units associated with each component. See Available
units.
• Component Labels, and then enter the labels to appear when plotting the result set
components. Labels can be strings that include white space. Quotes must be used to define
the string if special characters or white space are used.
6. Set the option menu to Define Using Function Expressions.
The elements of the dialog box change to those for entering function expressions.
7. Enter function expressions in the boxes f2, f3, f4, f6, f7, and f8. Do no use f1 and f5. Adams Solver
uses them to hold magnitudes for the three functions that follow. You do not need to enter a
function in every text box.
8. Select OK.
7. In the User Function text box, enter parameters to the user-written subroutine REQSUB or
specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine in the Routine text box. (Learn
about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.)
Enter the USER function using the following format where r1 through r30 are constants passed to
the subroutine:
r1, ..., r30
8. If you specified to write an output file (.out), enter up to eight headings for columns of request
output. Separate each heading with a comma (,).
Each heading can have as many as eight alphanumeric characters, including underscores (_). The
first character in each heading must be alphabetic. You cannot use a comma (,), a semicolon (;),
an ampersand (&), or an exclamation point (!).
If you do not want to specify a title for a particular column, use two quotation marks (" ") with no
characters between them.
9. Select OK.
All information types are vectors, except for rotational displacements. Adams Solver internally calculates
all data in the global coordinate system, although you can specify that the data be calculated and reported
in another coordinate system.
Note that the units for rotational displacement data in the request output of the tabular output file default
to degrees. The units for all other angular output data default to radians.
Displacement
When you request predefined displacement output, Adams Solver outputs the displacement of a specified
marker (I marker) with respect to a second marker (J marker). When you select displacement data, Adams
Solver generates eight channels of output as follows:
• Time (Time)
• Translational magnitude (Mag)
• X component (X)
• Y component (Y)
480 Adams View
Creating Requests
• Z component (Z)
• Psi angle (Psi)
• Theta angle (Theta)
• Phi angle (Phi)
The psi, theta, and phi angles are Euler or body-fixed 313 rotations of the I marker with respect to the J
marker. Adams Solver calculates the displacement data in the global coordinate system. If you specify a
reference marker, Adams Solver resolves the translational x, y, and z components in the coordinate
system of the reference marker. The reference marker does not affect psi, theta, and phi.
Rotational displacement information differs from all other standard output. Whether this information is
in psi, theta, and phi coordinates or in yaw, pitch, and roll coordinates, the rotation sequence is not a
vector. As a result, Adams Solver outputs no magnitude column. In addition, the sequence of coordinates
is independent of any frame external to the I and the J markers. The reference marker has no effect on the
angular coordinates.
Velocity
When you request predefined velocity output, Adams Solver outputs the velocity of the first marker that
you specify (I marker) with respect to a second marker (J marker). When you request velocity data,
Adams Solver generates nine headings and nine columns of data. The nine columns include:
• Time (Time)
• Translational magnitude (Vm)
• Translational x component (Vx)
• Translational y component (Vy)
• Translational z component (Vz)
• Rotational magnitude (Wm)
• Rotational x component (Wx)
• Rotational y component (Wy)
• Rotational z component (Wz)
Adams Solver calculates this velocity data (the first derivative of the displacement of the I marker with
respect to the J marker) in the global coordinate system. If you specify a reference marker, Adams
calculates the translational and rotational x, y, and z components in the coordinate system of the reference
marker.
Acceleration
When you request predefined acceleration output, Adams Solver outputs the acceleration of the I marker
with respect to the J marker. This argument generates nine headings and nine columns of output. The
columns include:
• Time (Time)
Requests 481
Creating Requests
Adams Solver calculates the acceleration data (the second derivative of the displacement of the I marker
with respect to the J marker) in the global coordinate system. If you specify a reference marker, Adams
Solver calculates the translational and rotational x, y, and z components in the coordinate system of the
reference marker.
Force
When you request predefined force output, Adams Solver outputs the force associated with the I and the
J markers or outputs the action-only forces on the I marker if you specify the I marker. When you specify
both the I and the J markers, Adams Solver sums the forces on the I marker due to those forces associated
with the I and the J markers. These forces can include both applied forces (such as Translational Spring
Dampers and Bushings) and reaction forces from constraints (such as Joints and Motions).
When you specify only the I marker, Adams Solver sums all of the action-only forces that are applied to
the I marker. If you specify a reference marker, Adams Solver reports the components of the resulting
vectors in the reference frame of the reference coordinate system. If you do not specify a reference
marker, Adams Solver reports the components in the ground coordinate system.
Adams Solver outputs nine columns of data:
• Time (Time)
• Translational force magnitude (Fmag)
• Three components of translational force (Fx, Fy, and Fz)
• Rotational force (torque) magnitude (Tmag)
• Three components of torque (Tx, Ty, and Tz)
Applied forces and torques are those generated by Beams, bushings, Field Elements, Single-Component
Forces, and spring-dampers. Adams Solver outputs the applied forces and torques acting at the request I
marker (which can be either the applied force I marker or the applied force J marker). The magnitude and
point of force application on the part containing the applied force J marker varies according to the type
and source of the force:
• For spring-dampers and action-reaction single-component forces, the forces and torques acting
at the J marker are equal and opposite to the forces and torques acting at the I marker.
482 Adams View
Creating Requests
• For action-only, single-component forces, there is no force or torque acting at the applied force J
marker.
• For beams, fields, and bushings, the forces acting at the applied force J marker are equal and
opposite to the forces acting at the applied force I marker. As long as the applied force I marker
and the applied force J marker are coincident, the torques acting at the applied force J marker are
equal and opposite to the torques acting at the applied force I marker. If there is a finite
separation between the I and the J markers, the torques acting at the applied force J marker are
opposite, but not equal, to the torques acting at the applied force I marker.
Reaction forces and torques are those generated by constraint-inducing elements. For revolute, spherical,
and universal joints and for orientation, parallel axes, and perpendicular joint primitives, Adams Solver
outputs the reaction forces and torques acting at the request I marker (which can be either the constraint
I marker or the constraint J marker). The force and torque acting at the request J marker are equal and
opposite to the force and torque acting at the request I marker. Depending on the type of constraint, some
or all of the torques acting at the I marker are zero.
You must be careful when requesting a force with the I and the J markers reversed from those specified
in the force-producing element. Adams Solver reports the force as if it were applied to the J marker of
the force-producing element. The translational force on the J marker of the force element will be equal
and opposite to the translational force on the I marker of the force element if it is not action only. The
force will be zero if it is action only.
The torque on the J marker of the force element has an extra component that can have significance. The
torque is the sum of two contributions. The first contribution is the opposite of the torque on the I marker.
The second contribution is due to the force acting across the separation between the I and the J markers.
If the force acts along the line of sight of the two markers, this extra torque will be zero. To minimize
misunderstandings, attach your request markers in the same order as the markers on the force-producing
element.
• You can customize the expressions to output just what you want and are, therefore, more
versatile.
• The function expressions are very efficient, calculating in one or two requests what otherwise
might require eight or more requests.
The following example illustrates how to output quantities that could not be captured using predefined
outputs, especially not all within a single request:
f1 = (blank)
f2 = "0.5*17.49*VM(mar15, mar27)**2"
f3 = "FX(mar18, mar19, mar1)*DX(mar18, mar19, mar1)"
f4 = "FX(mar18, mar19, mar1)/TIME"
f5 = (blank)
f6 = "AZ(mar7, mar8)"
f7 = "JOINT(joi26, mar7, fy, mar99)"
f8 = "MOTION(joi26, mar7, tz, mar99)"
The easiest way to enter a function expression in Adams View is to use the Function Builder. For more
information on the Function Builder and the built-in functions, see the Adams View Function Builder
online help.
484 Adams View
Creating Requests
Simulation
486 Adams View
About Adjusting Your Model Before Simulation
• From the Simulation Controls dialog box, select the Model Verify Tool .
An information window appears with information about your model as shown in the figure below.
Tip: Select the Model Verify tool from the Information tool stack on the Status bar.
(1)
488 Adams View
About Adjusting Your Model Before Simulation
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Equation (1) through Equation (3) constrain translational DOF, while Equation (4) through Equation (6)
constrain rotational DOF. The table below explains each of the mathematical equations. In the
explanations, the I marker is on the first part and the J marker is on the second part.
The table below lists some of the most commonly used joints and the equations that are used to represent
them:
Notice that each of the five joints uses Equations 1 and 2. Duplicating constrained DOF between the same
parts can lead to overconstraining your model and introduce redundant constraint equations.
Adams Solver outputs warning messages to help you understand which equations are redundant and,
therefore, which DOF are removed more than once. For some examples of warning messages in Adams
View and how you can remove the redundancy that they indicate, See Examples of Redundant
Constraints Messages.
In the case of the door with two hinges, Adams Solver ignores five of the constraint equations that it finds
redundant. You do not know which equations Adams Solver ignores, however. If Adams Solver ignores
all of the equations corresponding to one of the hinges, then all the reaction forces are concentrated at the
other hinge in the Adams Solver solution. Adams Solver arbitrarily sets the reaction forces to zero at the
redundant hinge. But Adams Solver might not discard all the equations for one hinge and retain all the
equations from the other. It might just as easily retain one or more equations from each, and discard one
or more from each.
Although Adams Solver still provides the physically correct solution, the simulation may require extra
computational effort to constrain the motion when all of the constraint forces and torques are
concentrated at one end of the door. Consequently, it is always a good idea to carefully select your
constraints and define models without any redundancies. For example, you can construct the model of
the door with a spherical joint and a parallel-axes constraint instead of the single revolute joint.
When you verify your model or run a simulation, Adams Solver tells you which constraints are
redundant. To solve the redundancy, try replacing a redundant idealized joint with a joint primitive. You
may also want to replace redundant constraints with approximately equivalent flexible connections.
Adams Solver does not always check the initial conditions set for a constraint when it performs
overconstraint checking. If you apply a motion on one joint and initial conditions on another joint, check
to ensure that they are not redundant because Adams Solver does not check them for redundancy and your
model may lock up when simulation begins. As a general rule, do not specify more initial conditions than
the number of DOF in your model. For more on initial conditions for joints, see Setting Initial Conditions.
Simulation 491
About Adjusting Your Model Before Simulation
Note: Since Adams Solver creates an equivalent linear flex body on the fly, the nonlinear flex
body DOF count (for computing the Gruebler count) depends on the number of nodes
referenced by the nonlinear flex body markers. On the other hand, for a linear flex body,
the total number of modes (normal modes + constraint modes) are known a priori (defined
in the MNF) and thus, the linear flex body DOF does not depend on the number of flex
body markers. See "Adams MaxFlex" for more details about the nonlinear flexible body.
To learn more:
• About Performing Static Equilibrium Simulations
• Finding Static Equilibrium for Your Model
• About Performing Dynamic Simulations to Find Static Equilibrium
Because a dynamic simulation occurs, the settings in Solver Settings - Dynamic specify the error
tolerances and other parameters normally associated with dynamic simulations.
You can also use the initial conditions simulation if you are creating parts in exploded view. Exploded
view is simply creating the individual parts separately and then assembling them together into a model.
You might find this convenient if you have several complicated parts that you want to create individually
without seeing how they work together until much later. Adams View provides options for specifying that
you are creating your model in exploded view as you create constraints.
• From the Simulation Controls dialog box, select the Initial Conditions Tool .
Adams View tells you when it has assembled your model properly. You can revert back to your
original design configuration or you can save your assembled model as the new design
configuration for your model. For more information on how to do this, see Saving a Simulation
Frame.
496 Adams View
Performing an Interactive Simulation
• Steps, which represents the total number of times you want Adams View to provide output
information over your entire simulation. For example, specify 50 steps over a 1-second
simulation interval to define an output period of 0.02 seconds per step, which yields an
output frequency of 50 steps/second.
6. If you selected the More button to display the Simulation Controls palette, you can clear the
selection of Update graphics display if you do not want the model updated. This saves
simulation time, but you should only select it if you are sure that your simulation will run to
completion without difficulty. See Solver Settings - Display.
7. Select the Simulation Start tool .
The size of the output time step governs the highest frequency of response that you will be able
to visualize for your simulation. A rough rule-of-thumb is to use at least 5 to 10 output steps per
cycle of the response that you expect. To get a better estimate of the expected response, you
might want to investigate the use of the optional Adams Linear product, which can calculate the
natural frequencies and mode shapes for your model. For additional information, see the LINEAR
command in the Adams Solver online help.
Simulation 499
Performing a Scripted Simulation
Learn more:
• Types of Simulation Scripts
• Example Adams Solver Script
• Creating a Simulation Script
• Modifying a Simulation Script
• Getting Assistance Entering Commands
• Importing an Adams Solver Command File (.acf)
• Running a Scripted Simulation
You would use a script like this if you wanted to make sure your solution remained more accurate at a
particular point in time, and you wanted to increase the frequency of data output. You would increase the
accuracy and output because you expect a high-frequency response to become active in your model
starting around the specified time. For example, an abrupt event, such as parts coming into contact,
causing forces to change magnitude quickly, might make you increase your number of output steps
during that interval so you can see more fidelity in your animations and plots.
3. Select OK.
See Scripted Simulation pallette dialog box help for more information.
Simulation 505
Managing Simulation Results
Note: By default, the results of a simulation are only saved to the Modeling database, not to
external Adams Solver analysis files. To save the results to external Adams Solver analysis
files, set the simulation output before you run the simulation, as explained in Setting
Simulation Controls. To export the results to analysis files, see Export - Adams Solver
Analysis Files.
2. In the Name box, enter the name that you want to give to the results set that you are storing.
3. If you want Adams View to automatically increment the run names when you save subsequent
simulations, select Auto-Increment Name.
4. Select OK.
Note: Note: You must have saved your Modeling database before you can delete simulation
results (File -> Save Database).
Change solution settings for all types of simulations (kinematic, initial conditions,
dynamic, static)
The options for setting simulations match the arguments for the corresponding statements in Adams
Solver. For example, options for setting a kinematic simulation match the arguments for the
KINEMATICS statement. Therefore, you will find it very easy to refer to the more extensive simulation
setting information in Adams Solver online help.
Keep in mind that settings for individual simulations also affect the simulations during parametric
analyses, such as during a design study or optimization.
• Internal - Run Adams Solver from within Adams View and animate the results as they are
calculated, which is the default and is explained in Setting Simulation Controls. In addition, if
you select the Internal option, you can select from two different types of solvers:
• FORTRAN - Our existing version of Adams Solver.
• C++ - Our new version of Adams Solver, which is C++-based and promises to be faster, provide
new linear analysis capabilities, and have an improved methodology for identifying and handling
redundant constraints. Currently, it does not support all modeling elements that the Adams
Solver (FORTRAN) supports.
• External - Perform a simulation with Adams Solver while in Adams View, but without seeing
the model update on your screen during the simulation. Adams View automatically plays an
animation of the simulation when the simulation is complete.
• Write Files Only - Instruct Adams View to write out the files that are needed to run a simulation
using Adams Solver from outside of Adams View.
To access the Solver Settings dialog box from the Simulation Control dialog box:
1. On the Simulation Control dialog box, select Simulation Settings to display the Solver Settings
dialog box.
2. At the top of the Solver Settings dialog box, set Category to the setting that you want to control.
To access the Solver Settings dialog box from the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box:
• From the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box, select a button from the Settings area of the dialog
box.
You can select:
• Display to set the display of simulation results during a parametric analysis.
• Output to manage the results of the analysis.
• Optimizer to set options for optimizing.
Simulation 509
Adding Sensors to Your Model
Also refer to the cautions for using sensors in the Adams Solver SENSOR statement.
About Sensors
You can use sensors to trigger actions during simulations when a specified event occurs. The actions you
can trigger include:
• Stopping the simulation completely - You might want to monitor the vertical distance between
a wheel center and the ground and stop the simulation when it exceeds the undeformed radius of
the tire.
• Changing the parameters controlling the solution - You might want to monitor the distance
between two objects that are expected to collide during a simulation. Just before the objects
collide, you reduce the solution step size to avoid convergence problems and reduce the output
step size to capture the magnitude of the contact force.
• Changing inputs to the simulation - Sensors are often used in vehicle applications to transition
between different maneuvers, such as from a controlled, straight-line movement to a J-turn. Any
characteristic of the vehicle's movement that you can measure in Adams View, you can monitor
through a sensor and trigger a change in simulation conditions. For vehicles, these include the
yaw, lateral, or longitudinal velocity; the yaw or slip angle; the engine or wheel speed; and so on.
510 Adams View
Adding Sensors to Your Model
• Changing the model topology - You can create a sensor that monitors the reaction force in a
connection and then deactivates the connection when the force exceeds a specified value. A
simple example of this is shown in the figure below.
The comparison: Initiates the action when the function value is:
Equal From (Target - Error) to (Target + Error).
Greater than or equal Greater than or equal to (Target - Error).
Less than or equal Less than or equal to (Value + Error).
The figure below illustrates each of the comparisons. In the figure, the sensor triggers whenever the value
of the function being monitored is in the shaded areas. Be careful that your function does not evaluate in
512 Adams View
Adding Sensors to Your Model
the shaded area at the start of your simulation unless you want your sensor to trigger immediately. It is a
good idea to define a measure for your sensor function so you can check it by plotting it.
Standard Actions
You can specify one or more of the following standard actions to occur when Adams View senses the
event.
• Generate additional output step - Creates an extra Output step when Adams Solver triggers the
sensor so you can capture the action.
• Set output step size - Redefines the time between consecutive output steps. Adams Solver uses
this value until it is changed. The default is the current time between output steps for the
simulation.
• Terminate current step and stop, or continue with a simulation script - Stops simulation or
stops current command in simulation script and continues with next command. For information
on simulation scripts, see Performing a Scripted Simulation.
Simulation 513
Adding Sensors to Your Model
Special Actions
• Set integration step size - Redefines the next Integration step size. This change is temporary and
lasts only for the next solution step.
The default is an integrator-determined value except when you’ve included restarting the
integrator as part of the sensor action as explained next. In this case, the step size defaults to the
integrator step size.
• Restart integrator - Restarts integration and reduces the integration order to one. If you also set
integration step size as explained above, Adams Solver reinitializes the integration step size to
the specified value. If you do not specify the step size, Adams Solver reinitializes the integration
step size to the integrator step size.
• Refactorize Jacobian - Causes Adams Solver to generate a new pivot sequence for matrix
factorization. This can help the integrator produce more accurate data or proceed more robustly
through the simulation. Adams Solver generates a pivot sequence for matrix factorization before
starting the simulation. Adams Solver does not generate a new pivot sequence unless you specify
to refactorize the Jacobian or it is necessary to refactorize to reach convergence.
• Dump state variable vector - Writes the entire array of state variable values to a text file in your
current working directory.
Creating a Sensor
To create a sensor:
1. From the Simulate menu, point to Sensor, and then select New.
The Create/Modify Sensor dialog box appears.
2. Enter a name for the sensor.
3. To define the event to be detected:
• To define the event using a function expression, set Event Definition to Run-time
Expression, and then enter a function expression in the Expression text box.
To get help on entering a function expression, right-click the Expression text box, and then
select Function Builder to display the Adams View Function Builder. For information on
using the Function Builder, see Adams View Function Builder online help. Shortcut to
Function Builder: Click the More button .
• To define the event using a subroutine, set Event Definition to User Written Subroutine,
and then enter the parameters to be passed to the user-written subroutine SENSUB in the
Parameter List text box. Enter up to 30 values (r1[,...,r30]) that Adams View is to pass to
SENSUB.
4. To specify a function expression or user-written subroutine to be evaluated with the event occurs:
• To define the evaluation using a function expression, set Event Evaluation to Run-time
Expression, and then enter a function expression in the Expression text box.
514 Adams View
Adding Sensors to Your Model
To get help on entering a function expression, right-click the Expression text box, and then
select Function Builder to display the Adams View Function Builder. For information on
using the Function Builder, see Adams View Function Builder online help. Shortcut to
Function Builder: Click the More button .
• To define the evaluation using a subroutine, set Event Evaluation to User Written
Subroutine, and then enter the parameters to be passed to the user-written subroutine
SEVSUB in the Parameter List text box. Enter up to 30 values (r1[,...,r30]) that Adams View
is to pass to SEVSUB.
5. To set up the target value to trigger an action:
• Set the option menu to the comparison to be used to determine if the event is to be triggered.
For information on the different comparisons, see Triggering the Action of a Sensor.
• In the Value text box, enter the value to trigger an action.
• In the Error Tolerance text box, enter the absolute value of allowable error between the
targeted value and the actual sensed value.
6. To set up the action, select an action from the Standard or Special Actions areas of the dialog box
as explained in Types of Actions for Sensors. If you select to continue with a simulation script,
you must run the simulation with a script, as explained in Performing a Scripted Simulation.
Reviewing results
516 Adams View
Using Animations
Using Animations
You can replay an Animation again after the Simulation ends to investigate the results of a simulation, as
long as the results of the simulation have been stored in your Modeling database. By default, Adams
View only stores the last simulation you performed. You can either manually store a particular
simulation, or you can set Adams View so that it automatically stores all your simulations. Learn about
Saving Simulation Results.
You can play animation frames forwards or backwards, speed them up or slow them down, pause and
continue an animation, rewind to an earlier frame, continuously play an animation in a loop, or play only
a certain portion of the entire sequence of frames. The following sections explain how to control the
playing of your animations.
• Playing an Animation
• Stopping an Animation
• Rewinding an Animation
• Skipping Frames During an Animation
• Playing a Subset of Frames
• Repeating an Animation
• Displaying Specific Animation Frames
• Resetting the Model View
Playing an Animation
When you play an Animation, Adams View plays every frame by default. You can rewind an animation
and play the animation at various speeds as explained in the table below. During fast-forward and fast-
backward play modes, Adams View plays only every fifth frame.
The table below explains the options available on the Animation Controls dialog box for playing an
animation.
Stopping an Animation
You can pause an Animation at any time instead of waiting for it to complete.
Rewinding an Animation
After an Animation has ended or stopped, you can rewind it to the beginning of the animation. When you
rewind an animation, Adams View returns to the first frame calculated during the simulation, and not to
the initial design configuration. You can also rewind or advance one frame at a time. Learn about
displaying specific animation frames.
For example, if you performed a simulation from 0.0 to 10.0 seconds and asked for output every 0.1
seconds, Adams Solver records data at 101 steps or frames. It creates an animation frame every tenth of
a second for ten seconds plus one at time 0.0. To only view the animation between 3.0 and 5.5 seconds,
set the start time to 3.0 and the end time to 5.5. To achieve the same effect by specifying the frame
number, set the start frame to 31 and the stop frame to 56. Remember that frame 1 corresponds to time
0.0.
Repeating an Animation
By default, Adams View plays the specified sequence of frames once. You can replay the animation as
many times as desired.
• If you reset your model back to its initial configuration, when you select to replay the animation,
Adams View automatically sets the model back to the initial design configuration when the
animation is complete.
3. If desired, enter the name of an eigensolution in an existing analysis and set the view for the
animation. The eigensolution must be in an existing analysis that is associated with the current
model.
4. If desired, set the option menu to define the mode to be used to calculate the deformation of the
model. Set it to either:
• Mode and enter the number of the mode to be used.
• Frequency and enter the frequency of the mode.
If you specify the frequency, Adams View uses the mode closest to the specified frequency. If
you specify neither the mode nor the frequency, Adams View deforms the model using the first
mode.
Tip: To view the modes in the eigensolution to see which you should use, see Plotting and
Viewing Modes and Frequencies
Note: A full cycle goes from undeformed, to maximum positive displacement, back to
undeformed, then to maximum displacement in the negative direction, and finally
back to undeformed.
• Frames Per Cycles - Enter the number of frames to be displayed for each cycle. Adams
View performs the interpolation between the frames using trigonometric functions;
therefore, the frames tend to be segregated at the maximum deformation in the positive and
negative directions.
• Number of Cycles - Parameter used to specify the number of complete cycles to animate.
6. Select any of the following to set up the animation:
• Show time decay - Specifies whether the amplitudes of the deformations are to remain
constant or decay due to the damping factor calculated in the eigensolution.
• Show trail - Shows the path, or trail, of parts from one frame to another. Showing the trail is
useful in showing the relationship of the model parts between frames but often obscures the
view of the motion.
• Show undeformed - Specifies whether the undeformed model is to be displayed with the
deformed shape superimposed on top of it. If you select Show undeformed, select a color for
the undeformed model. If you do not specify a color, Adams View displays the undeformed
model using the same color as the deformed mode.
• Show icons - Turns on the display icons during an animation.
7. Set the maximum amount parts will translate or rotate from their undeformed position. If you do
not specify maximum amounts, Adams View translates parts no more than 20 percent of model
size and 20 degrees.
529
Animating Natural Frequencies
Plotting Eigenvalues
You can plot the real eigenvalues against the imaginary eigenvalues.
To plot eigenvalues:
1. At the bottom of the Linear Modes Controls dialog box, select Plot.
A Linear Modes Eigenvalue Plot window appears.
2. After viewing the plot, select Close and Delete Plot.
Viewing Eigenvalues
You can display information about all an eigensolution's predicted eigenvalues in the Information
window. Once you display the information in the Information window, you can save it to a file.
To view eigenvalues:
1. At the bottom of the Linear Modes Controls dialog box, select Table.
The Information window appears.
2. After viewing the information, select Close.
530 Adams View
Animating Natural Frequencies
Animation Controls Basics
Setting Up Lighting
You can enhance the quality and realism of your Animations. You can set:
• Overall intensity of the light (much like setting a dimmer switch in your home).
• Background, ambient light to control the diffusion of light sources to effect the amount of
lighting on edges.
• Reflections off of parts. (Note that this is computationally expensive and can slow down your
animations.)
• Focused lighting that comes from different directions, and define the angle of that lighting (how
far it is from the centerline). You can think of this as if you were swinging a light boom across
your model.
Note: The number of light sources you can select depends on the graphics driver and system you
are using. If you selected OpenGL, the number of light sources depends on your graphics
card.
522 Adams View
Animation Controls Basics
Tip: To achieve the fastest animations, set the lighting options to:
• No reflections
• One-sided
• One light source
Note: When animating multiple simulations simultaneously, each simulation must have the same
number of output steps or frames associated with it, as well as the same output time step
size.
To animate your results in a window other than the currently active one:
• On the Animation Controls dialog box, enter the name of any view window that is currently
visible on your screen. The default name is the currently active view.
Note: If you choose to animate in more than one view simultaneously, every view specified must
animate the same simulation results. You cannot display one simulation in one view and
another simulation in another view.
The table below explains the different options available to you to set up your view perspective from the
Animation Controls dialog box.
Note: The Camera option menu is only available in the Animation Controls dialog box.
Note: If you specify a camera and base marker, then the view direction points from the camera
marker towards the base marker. This does not, however, uniquely define the resulting
orientation of the view, so Adams View uses the positive y-axis of the camera point marker
to define the “up” direction for your animation view perspective.
2. In the Force Scale and Torque Scale text boxes, enter the amount by which you want to scale
force (straight arrows) and torque (semi-circular arrows) graphics. The default scale is 1.0.
3. If you do not want to see the values of the force and torque magnitudes during animation, clear
Display Numeric Values. If you leave it selected, Adams View continuously displays the
magnitudes for all force and torque graphics during the animation.
4. If you want to see the force and torque graphic arrows respresented as three-dimensional objects
instead of as simple lines and arcs, clear Always Wireframe Vectors. If you leave it selected
Adams View shows the force graphics in Wireframe render mode even when you are rendering
the view in Shaded rendering mode.
5. Select Always in Foreground if you want Adams View to show force graphics in the foreground
of the model so model geometry does not obscure them.
• Create a measure of your entire function or key elements of it - In addition, you may find it
helpful to build measures of your entire function or key elements of it and view strip charts of the
measures as your simulation progresses.
For example, if you create a function that defines the force of a spring-damper, you can create an object
measure that tracks the force of the spring-damper over time. In addition, if you create a function that
defines an impact force, you can create a function measure of either the displacement or velocity term in
the impact function. Learn About Measures.
Debugging Your Model 535
Debugging Your Model Using Eprint
Eprint displays the same information that the DEBUG command does when used with the argument
EPRINT. For more information, see the Adams Solver online help.
Note: You can close the command window and use your aview.log file to view the debugging
information. Learn about Using the Adams View Log File.
536 Adams View
Using the Simulation Debugger
You can select to view any or all of these options during a single simulation. Note, however, that the
options significantly slow down your simulation.
Note: You can only use the Simulation Debugger with an Adams View interactive custom or
standard library, not an Adams Solver stand-alone executable. Learn how to Set what type
of Adams Solver to run.
To turn on the Simulation Debugger and Debug table from the Simulation Control
dialog box:
1. From the Simulate menu, select Interactive Controls.
2. Set the pull-down menu in the middle of the Simulations Control dialog box to Table.
To turn on the Simulation Debugger and Debug table from the Main toolbox:
1. On the Main Toolbox, select the Simulation tool .
2. Set the pull-down menu at the bottom of the toolbox to Table.
Debugging Your Model 537
Using the Simulation Debugger
To display the Debug table from the Solver Settings dialog box:
1. From the Settings menu, point to Solver, and then select Debugging.
2. In the Solver Settings dialog box, set Display to Table.
The Debug table appears.
3. Set Track Maximum to the element that you want to track. Learn about Setting Up Tracking of
Modeling Objects.
4. Run an interactive simulation as explained in Performing an Interactive Simulation.
5. Select Debug from the Simulation container on the Main Toolbox or the Simulation Controls
dialog box.
Note: Selecting highlighting of objects will significantly slow down your simulation.
To highlight objects:
1. Turn on the debugging tool as explained in Running the Simulation Debugger.
2. From the Solver Settings dialog box, set Track Maximum to select the element that you want to
track. Learn about Setting Up Tracking of Modeling Objects.
3. Set Display to Highlighting.
Debugging Your Model 539
Using the Simulation Debugger
• If your simulation progresses with very few iterations at each time step, Adams Solver is
having an easy time simulating your model. You can further increase performance or speed
by increasing the allowed maximum time step.
• If Adams Solver requires many iterations for any particular step, it is likely encountering a
period of rapidly changing dynamics that can require corrective action as described for the
Step Size strip chart explained in the previous section.
• If you notice that Adams Solver requires many iterations right from the beginning of a
simulation, it is likely that you have chosen an integration step size that is too large for the
dynamics in your model. You can obtain better performance if you choose a smaller time
step. For information on changing the time step, see Running an Interactive Simulation.
• Integrator order - The Integrator Order strip chart displays the order of the polynomial that
Adams Solver uses during the predictor phase of integration. Adams Solver uses a polynomial to
predict the future value of the state variables in an Adams model. In general, lower order
polynomials are required to successfully integrate more difficult portions of a simulation,
characterized either by nonlinearities or rapidly changing dynamics.
Similar to the Iterations per Step strip chart, if the Integrator Order strip chart shows the
consistent use of high-order (three or more) polynomials, you may be able to increase
performance by increasing the maximum allowed time step. If Adams Solver consistently or
periodically uses low-order polynomials, it is symptomatic of a period of rapidly changing
dynamics that may require corrective action as described for the Step Size strip chart or the
integration step size may be too large for the dynamics in your model.
• Static Imbalance - The Static Imbalance strip chart displays the current imbalance in the
equilibrium equations that Adams Solver computes during a static equilibrium simulation. A
static equilibrium simulation is an iterative process to compute a position in which your model
assumes a minimum energy configuration. Learn about Performing Static Equilibrium
Simulations.
The Static Imbalance strip chart displays a measure of how close the solution is coming to a
complete balance of the equilibrium equations at each equilibrium iteration, in units of your
selected force units.
You need to select Update Every Iteration to watch the iteration-by-iteration progress of an
equilibrium simulation. Learn about Setting Simulation Controls.
Debugging Your Model 541
Setting Simulation Display
For tips on how to build modeling objects so that you avoid problems when building or simulating your
model, see:
• Tips on Constraining Your Model
• Tips on Creating Higher-Pair Constraints
• Tips on Creating Motions
• Tips on Running an Interactive Simulation
To ensure that you assigned geometry and markers to the correct parts, do one of the
following:
• Use the Model Topology by Connection tool to check the connections of your parts.
• Turn on icons during animations and watch carefully how markers move.
• Use the Table Editor to display all parts in your model so you can perform a quick check of each
part's mass and inertia and quickly fix the individual part masses and inertia. Learn about Editing
Objects Using the Table Editor.
• Use the Modify command to check an individual part's mass and inertia and to change it as
appropriate. Learn about modifying mass and inertia for rigid bodies in Modifying Part
Properties.
For example, often you set your length units in meters but data for bushing stiffness are given in Newtons
per millimeters. In this case, you need to convert your units.
Also, be sure that the constants that you use in applied force expressions and user-written subroutines are
consistent with the current set of Adams View units. Adams View does not change the units of constants
if you change the default units settings.
In addition, make sure that you select a set of units that minimizes the difference in magnitude (scale) of
all of your input data. For example, if you are modeling the vibration of a 75-ton industrial press, you
might want to select mass = Kilopounds mass and displacement = inches.
If you divide the mass (about 150 klbm) by the expected vibration magnitude (1.5 inches), you obtain a
model scale number of approximately 100, which is well within the range for an easy numerical solution.
Using grams and meters in the same model would result in a scale number of about 109; other units would
be even worse. Poorly scaled models can present numerical difficulties to Adams Solver, and you should
avoid them.
544 Adams View
Possible Errors when Using Adams View
Improving Your Model Designs
Using the Adams View parameterization and parametric analysis tools, you can efficiently improve your
model design. The entries below explain how to improve your model using these tools. It assumes that
you have a moderate level of knowledge about Design of experiments (DOE) and Optimization and that
you have access to in-depth references on them.
You can also perform more sophisticated design of experiments using Adams Insight. Adams Insight lets
you design sophisticated experiments for measuring the performance of your mechanical system model.
It also provides a collection of statistical tools for analyzing the results of your experiments so that you
can better understand how to refine and improve your model. For more information on Adams Insight,
see Adams Insight online help, if installed, or contact your MSC sales representative.
Parameterization Basics
546 Adams View
Introducing Parameterization and Parametric Tools
• Parameterization move tools (f(x) and f( θ )that let you specify how one objects moves relative to
another object.
• Expressions, which are the basis of all parameterization.
The first step in using parametric analyses is to understand design studies, DOEs, and optimizations, what
they do for you, and how they can work together. Depending on your model and interest, you may use
one, two, or all three to explore your model.
In all cases, you start by deciding which design variables to vary and how to measure the performance of
your model. In the latch model from the guide, Getting Started Using Adams View, for example, the
design variables are the coordinates of the pivot points, and the performance measure is the maximum
spring force during the simulation.
Learn more about the different types of parametric analyses you can run and how you can use them
together:
• About Design Studies
• About Design of Experiments
• About Optimization
• Using Design Study, DOE, and Optimization Together
• Identify which design variables and combinations of design variables most affect the
performance of your model (screening).
• Control the effects of variations due to real-world manufacturing and operating conditions
(robust design or the Taguchi method).
About Optimization
An optimization adjusts design variables to minimize or maximize a performance measure. You can set
ranges on how far to vary the design variables and add general constraints to keep the optimized design
within overall limits. Using an optimization, you can find the best performing values for design variables.
For more information on optimization techniques, see About Optimization and Running Parametric
Analyses.
Using Expressions
Expressions are the basis of all parameterization. You can specify most modeling data in Adams View as
either a constant value or an expression that can change its value based on other objects and values in
your model. When you specify an expression, Adams View stores the expression and automatically
updates the value whenever a value in the expression changes.
Parameterization Basics 549
Introducing Parameterization and Parametric Tools
For example, when you specify the mass of a part, you can supply a constant value, such as 5.0, or an
expression, such as:
(2 * .model_1.part_1.mass)
Using the expression above, the new part mass is always twice the mass of part_1, even if you change
the mass of part_1.
Expressions are always enclosed in parentheses and can include:
• Constants
• Standard mathematical operators and functions
• Special Adams View functions
• References to other object data in your model
You enter an expression directly in the text box for the value you want to parameterize. You can enter an
expression when you create the object or modify it later to use an expression.
Adams View contains a Function Builder to help you construct expressions. You access the Function
Builder by displaying the shortcut menu in a text box that accepts an expression, as explained in the next
section.
Using Points
Points are the easiest way to parameterize the geometry of your model. Points let you specify important
locations once and build other modeling objects from them. When you move a point, the related objects
update automatically.
You create points using the Geometric Modeling Palette and Tool Stack on the Main toolbox. For
information on points, also see the following sections:
• Building Parameterization into Your Model as You Create Parts
• Creating Points
550 Adams View
Introducing Parameterization and Parametric Tools
You attach new modeling objects to points by selecting the points as you graphically construct the object.
When you build objects on points, Adams View creates the necessary expressions for you.
Tip: Right-click near the point to display a list of all objects in the area and then select the
desired point from the list to ensure it gets selected.
You can also attach existing objects to a new point by using the Attach Near option when creating the
new point. In this case, Adams View creates expressions, using the function LOC_RELATIVE, to attach
any nearby markers to the new point. With this option, you can parameterize model geometry, forces, and
constraints as you need to rather than creating all points first.
If you later try to move an object that is attached to a point, Adams View warns you that doing so can
break the parameterization and asks you how you want to continue. The warning prevents you from
accidentally removing a relationship and also allows you to delete the relationship.
Usually you do not need to look at or understand the expressions that tie geometry to points. If you want
to create more complicated geometric relationships, however, understanding how points work can help
you write your own expressions.
If you draw a link between two points, for example, Adams View locates markers at each end of the link
on top of the points. Adams View also creates expressions to keep the markers tied to the points. If you
request information on one of the markers at the ends, you see something like the following for the
location of the marker:
Location: -150.0, 250.0, 0.0 (mm, mm, mm)
(LOC_RELATIVE_TO({0, 0, 0}, .model_1.ground.POINT_1))
The first line is the current value of the location of the marker relative to the link part. The second line is
the expression that Adams View created to keep the marker at the point. If you change the location of the
point, Adams View automatically evaluates the expression and computes a new location for the marker.
LOC_RELATIVE_TO is one of the Adams View functions that lets you locate points and markers
relative to other objects in your model. For more on Adams View functions, see the Adams View Function
Builder online help.
Parameterization Basics 551
Using the Parameterization Move Tools
Note: The f(x) tool described in this section is not the same as the f(x) tool explained in the Table
Editor. They perform different operations. For more information on the f(x) tool in the
Table Editor, see Working with Cells in the Table Editor.
For general information about the move tools, see Moving Objects Using the Move Tools.
f(x) Tool
Ties the location of a modeling object to a point or marker. You can either superimpose the object on the
point or marker (collapse the two objects) or keep the object offset from a point or marker (maintain
current distance).
The following figures show the two options for parameterizing locations using f(x). The first figure
shows how you can use the f(x) tool to collapse a marker that belongs to a link on a point. In the figure,
Adams View replaces the specific location of MAR_1 in the database with the expression:
(LOC_RELATIVE_TO ( {0,0,0}, .model_1.part_1.POINT_1))
The second figures shows the effects of using the f(x) tool to maintain the position of a marker on the
link, relative to a point. If you set Adams View to maintain their distance, when you move the point, the
552 Adams View
Using the Parameterization Move Tools
marker moves so it and the point are always the same distance relative to each other. In the figure, Adams
View replaces the specific location of MAR_1 in the database with the expression:
(LOC_RELATIVE_TO ({0,10,0}, .model_1.part_1.POINT_1))
f( θ ) Tool
Ties the orientation of a marker, constraint, or force to a marker. You have three options for tying the
orientation:
• Same As
• Along Axis
• In Plane
f( θ ) - Same As
Same As is similar to using the f(x) Tool. It keeps the orientation of the object the same as a marker or
keeps the orientation offset from a marker. The Collapse and Maintain options are similar to those in the
f(x) tool, and the steps for parameterizing are the same as when using the f(x) tool.
The following two figures show the two options you have available for parameterizing locations using
Same As. The first figure shows how you can use the maintain option. The maintain option sets one
object so its current orientation is locked relative to a second object. In the figure, when you rotate
MAR_2, MAR_1 on the cylinder also rotates so it maintains its orientation relative to MAR_2. In the
figure, Adams View replaces the orientation of MAR_1 in the database with the expression:
(ORI_RELATIVE_TO ({90d, 90d, 0}, .MODEL_1.PART_1.MAR_2))
The next figure shows how to use the collapse option. The collapse option keeps the orientation of two
objects the same. The figure shows that when you lock the orientation of MAR_1 to that of MAR_2, the
cylinder changes accordingly when you rotate MAR_2. In the figure, Adams View replaces the
orientation of MAR_1 in the database with the expression:
554 Adams View
Using the Parameterization Move Tools
f( θ ) - Along Axis
Keeps an axis of a marker, constraint, or force pointed toward a marker. This is useful if a marker in your
model defines a unique axis used in a joint or force.
Along Axis only controls one axis of the object. Adams View positions the object at an arbitrary angle
about the axis. If you need to completely control the orientation of the object, use the Same As or In Plane
options.
The following figure shows how you can set the alignment of the unique axis (z) of a revolute joint to that
of a marker using Along Axis so the joint always aligns to the marker. In the figure, Adams View replaces
the orientation of the I and J markers that JOINT_1 references with the expression:
(ORI_ALONG_AXIS (.MODEL_1.PART_1.MAR_4, .MODEL_1.PART_1.MAR_1,
“z”))
f( θ ) - In Plane
Controls the orientation of a marker, constraint, or force by pointing one axis towards one marker and
another axis towards another marker. This completely determines the orientation because the third axis
Parameterization Basics 555
Using the Parameterization Move Tools
must be perpendicular to the first two, with the positive direction based on the right-hand rule. In Plane
uses the function expression ORI_IN_PLANE.
To tie an axis of a marker, constraint, or force so it points along the axis of another point or
marker:
1. Main Menu → Object Manipulation Strip → tool.
To tie two axes of a marker, constraint, or force to a plane defined by three markers:
1. From the Move tool stack, select the f( θ ) tool.
2. Select the option In Plane.
3. In the settings container, set the first and second axes of the object to control (X, Y, or Z).
4. Select the marker, constraint, or force to control.
5. Now define three locations to define the plane:
• The marker defining the axis start location.
• The marker defining the axis end location.
• A final location to complete the plane.
Adams View rotates the object so that the first axis points toward the first point or marker, and the second
axis points as closely as possible towards the second point or marker. Adams View also creates an
expression to keep the axes directed at the markers. If you move either of the markers, Adams View
rotates the object to realign the axis with the marker.
Depending on the locations that you selected, it may not be possible for both axes to pass through the
locations. Adams View orients the object so that the first axis passes through the first location, and the
plane defined by the two axes passes through the second location. This means that the second axis comes
as close as possible to the second location, but may not pass through it.
556 Adams View
Using Design Variables
To create a design variable using the Create Design Variable dialog box:
1. On the ribbon menu, click the Design Exploration tab. From the Design Variable container,
click the Design Variable icon .
2. In the Name text box, enter the name of the design variable. Adams View creates a default name
for you. Select the type of design variable to create.
3. If you selected the type real, optionally select the type of units.
4. Enter a standard value for the design variable, and set any other options as explained in the
Create/Modify Design Variable dialog box.
5. Select OK.
Adams View creates the design variable.
Now that you've created a design variable, you'll need to reference it in your model. You can enter the
design variable directly, using the Reference Design Variable command, or you can type it into a text
box. You can also use the Function Builder to create a more complex expression using the design
variable. When you reference your design variable, Adams View places parentheses () around the
variable because you are creating a simple expression that references the value of the design variable.
• If you are using the Table Editor, select the cell to parameterize, and then place your cursor in
the Input text box.
2. Enter the desired value for the variable into the text box, if necessary.
3. Right-click the text box, point to Parameterize, and then select Create Design Variable.
Adams View creates a new design variable with a default name and the value that was in the text
box and inserts an expression such as (.my_model.DV_1) into the text box.
4. Create or modify the object as appropriate.
Adams View creates or modifies the object using your design variable for the value you selected.
To modify a design variable using the Modify Design Variable dialog box:
1. From the Build menu, select Design Variable, and then point to Modify.
The Database Navigator appears.
2. Select the design variable you want to modify, and then select OK.
Adams View displays the Create/Modify Design Variable dialog box and loads the current
properties for the design variable you selected.
3. Change the properties as desired, following the instructions in the Create/Modify Design Variable
dialog box.
4. Select OK.
If you changed the value of the design variable, Adams View immediately updates any objects
that refer to the design variable.
If you changed the value of a design variable, Adams View immediately updates any objects that
refer to the design variable.
Note: By default, the Table Editor displays only variables of the type real in your model. You can
display other types of variables, such as string, object, or integer, and control the columns
that are displayed using the Filters button, which displays the Variables Table Editor Filters
dialog box. Learn about Setting Types of Objects Displayed in the Table Editor.
Adams View may have set a default range when you created the design variable, so you may not need to
change the variable to run a parametric analysis. It is a good idea, however, to review the settings for a
variable before using it in a parametric analysis.
A good way to start is to set the variable range to include values you think are interesting and realistic for
your design. Using a range gives you the most flexibility in selecting the number of values to use in a
design study or DOE and it also keeps the optimization analysis from changing the variable to an
unrealistic value.
If only a certain range of values is possible, use absolute limits to keep the variable within that fixed
range. Otherwise, use relative or percent relative limits to include a reasonable amount above and below
your initial value. Relative and percent-relative limits tie the range to the value of the variable, so if you
change the value of the variable, the limits automatically change with it.
You control design variable values using the:
Parameterization Basics 561
Preparing for Parametric Analyses
To control variable values using the Modify Design Variable dialog box:
1. On the ribbon menu, click the Design Exploration tab. From the Design Variable container,
click the Design Variable icon .
Adams View displays the Database Navigator.
2. Select the design variable, and then select OK.
Adams View displays the Modify Design Variable dialog box and loads the current properties for
the design variable you selected.
3. Set the Value Range option menu to absolute, relative, or percent-relative limits and enter the
limits in the Min/Max or +/- Delta text boxes. Adams View applies the Value Range setting to
both the range limits and the allowed values, if any.
4. If you want to allow an optimization to use any value for the variable, select Allow Optimization
to ignore range.
Note: Selecting Allow Optimization to ignore range also disables the range for a design study and
DOE, however, so you should turn off this option when you are preparing for a design study
or DOE. If you try to start a design study or DOE while this option is selected, Adams View
issues an error (unless you have also entered a list of values).
5. If you want to specify a list of values, select List of allowed values and enter the values in the
text box that appears. To keep the list of values and still use the range for a design study and DOE,
select the Allow Design Study to ignore list check box. By selecting Allow Design Study to
ignore list, you can switch back and forth between using the range and the list of values without
re-entering the list each time.
Note: The Value Range setting also affects the allowed values you enter. For example, if you
selected a Value Range of percent relative, then Adams View interprets your entered
allowed values as percentages relative to the standard value.
6. Select OK.
• In the dialog box that appears, select Range, Allowed Values, and Delta Type.
• Select OK.
The Table Editor displays columns for Range, Use_Range, Allowed_Values,
Use_Allowed_Values, and Delta_Type.
Note: The Table Editor column headings are based on the Adams View command language and
are more concise than the dialog box labels.
4. Change the properties of a design variable as explained the table below for the columns you
displayed, and then select OK. Learn about Editing Objects Using the Table Editor.
Options for Controlling Design Variables
work cycle for a piece of machinery. Finding a good objective, however, is not always easy. How do you
quantify a goal such as: Keep this component in position during a disturbance? Depending on your
application, it might mean:
• Keep the position from changing abruptly.
• Keep the maximum movement small.
• Return the component to position quickly.
In addition, improving one aspect can hurt others. It may take you some thought and experimentation to
formulate the right objective for your needs.
On the other hand, if you are concerned about aspects of performance such as noise, wear, or operator
comfort, you may need to do some investigation to be able to relate the objective to quantities you can
measure in Adams View. Just as you model the mechanical aspects of your system, you may need to
develop a model of the performance of your system.
In many cases, the System elements (differential equations, transfer functions, and so on) can be helpful
in numerically integrating, filtering, or transforming model outputs into more useful objectives. Learn
more about System Elements.
Types of Objectives
Adams View gives you four options for the type of objective to create:
This is similar to the measure option, but lets you reference any
Adams Solver output data, such as data from a request. You enter
just the name of the result set and component, for example req1.x.
Adams View uses the result set component in the analysis for
which Adams View is computing the objective function. For
more on result set components, see About Simulation Output.
result_set_component = "REQ1/Z"
output_characteristic = maximum
Parameterization Basics 565
Preparing for Parametric Analyses
function_name = FUN1
text_of_expressions =
"max(analysis.req1.z.values)"
argument_names = analysis
type = real
Then, create the objective as explained in Creating an Objective
Object.
function_name = FUN1
text_of_expression =".mod1.par4.mass +
.mod1.par5.mass - 50.0"
argument_names = analysis
type = real
Note that you still specify one argument named analysis, even
when you do not use analysis data.
The macro must have one parameter, and the parameter must be
named analysis. Adams View invokes the macro with parameter
analysis set to the name of the analysis for which Adams View is
computing the objective. Your macro must perform the
computations, and put the resulting objective value into the
specified variable. For more information on creating macros and
parameters, see About Creating Macros.
Parameterization Basics 567
Preparing for Parametric Analyses
Note: Objectives usually involve simulation results, but they are not required to do so.
You can create an objective that depends only on the model data, such as overall
weight or size. You can then use Adams View to vary, or even optimize, the design
variables and immediately see the results on the model.
In this case, use the function or variable/macro option for the objective, and ignore
the analysis argument or parameter that Adams View supplies. Because you do not
need simulation results, you should also create a dummy simulation script that does
nothing (see Creating a Simulation Script). Then, Adams View repeatedly sets the
variables and evaluate the objective, but does not run any simulations.
3. Enter the name of the measure, result set component, function, or macro and variable. If you are
entering a result set component, enter the name of the result set and component, for example
req1.x.
568 Adams View
Preparing for Parametric Analyses
4. If you are using a measure or result set component, set the Design Objective's value is the option
menu to the selected value.
5. Select OK.
Note: You do not need to create an explicit constraint to limit the value of a design variable. You
can do this directly by setting properties for the variable. See Controlling Variable Values.
Each constraint object creates an inequality constraint. The optimization keeps the value of the constraint
less than or equal to zero. You can create an equality constraint, in effect, by creating a pair of constraint
objects, each the negative of the other.
Constraints can involve the simulation results, but are not required to do so. You can constrain overall
size, weight, or other factors that depend only on model data. In these cases, use the function or
macro/variable option for the constraint, and ignore the analysis data that Adams View supplies. Instead,
compute the constraint directly from the appropriate model data.
As those sections explain, there are three types of scripts: simple run, Adams View, and Adams Solver.
You can use a script of any type for a parametric analysis. An Adams View script can be particularly
useful for complex parametric analysis.
An Adams View script usually contains one or more Adams View simulation commands, but it can
contain other commands as well. For example, if you want to activate or deactivate portions of your
model before each simulation you can include those commands before the simulation commands. If you
Parameterization Basics 569
Preparing for Parametric Analyses
want to do some post-processing of results before computing the objective, you can add those commands
after the simulation commands.
If you do not need a simulation to evaluate your model, you can even use a script with no simulation
commands or no commands at all. Perhaps your objective is a function of model data only and you want
to see the effects of the design variables on the model itself. In this case, you can use a dummy script with
only a blank line or comments in it. In addition, if you want to evaluate your model with an outside
program, your script can contain commands to write data, run an external utility, and read results back
into Adams View.
You should first check your settings for Adams Solver error tolerances, such as digits of precision under
Dynamic on the Solver Settings dialog box. An error tolerance that is acceptable for a single run may not
accurately show the effects of a small design variable change. When Adams View changes a design
variable, the results of the new simulation are still within the tolerance you specified, but if that tolerance
is large compared to the change due to the design variable, then comparing the results may be useless.
Learn about Setting Simulation Controls.
If your objective is the minimum or maximum value of an output, check the size of your output steps.
Adams View reports the smallest or largest value seen at an output step. If your output step size is too
large, the reported value may not be accurate and may suddenly jump from output point to output point
as the model varies, giving discontinuous results.
Make sure that there are enough output steps to capture the peak or valley of the output. If not, you can
decrease the step size for the whole simulation, or if the minimum or maximum point falls in a predictable
time range, you can run the simulation in several parts and decrease the step size only in the portion
containing the minimum or maximum.
570 Adams View
Preparing for Parametric Analyses
If your objective is the last value of an output, check to make sure the simulation is not ending too soon.
If the output should reach a steady state, make sure that it really converges to an accurate value for all
simulations.
In all these cases, you may need to experiment to find the right setting. For example, you might try a
design study over a small range and check if the response is smooth and fairly linear. If not, you may need
to adjust one or more of these settings.
Parameterization Basics 571
Running Parametric Analyses
Note: You may want to change the display, output, and optimizer options before you run a
parametric analysis. Learn more about Optimization Settings.
Tip: Before running the parametric analysis, you can preview it by selecting Preview. Preview
shows you each configuration of your model for every design variable. It displays an alert
box asking you if you want to pause after each configuration. Select YES to pause.
572 Adams View
Running Parametric Analyses
To complete the information for a design study and execute the analysis:
1. Begin the analysis as explained in Beginning a Design Study, DOE, or Optimization Analysis.
2. In the Design Variable text box in the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box, enter the name of the
design variable that you want to vary.
Note: You cannot enter more than one design variable in the text box. If you need to enter more
than one design variable, then perform a DOE.
3. If you specified only a range for the design variable, enter the number of levels (values) you want
to use in the Default Levels text box.
4. Select Start.
Adams View runs a simulation for each level of the design variable. When the simulations are
done, Adams View returns the variable to its original value.
• If you specified only a range for the design variable, Adams View uses equally spaced levels
across the range. You specify the number of levels in the Default Levels text box.
• If you specified a list of values for the design variable, Adams View runs a simulation using
each value, ignoring the Default Levels text box.
For more information about variable ranges and values, see Controlling Variable Values.
Analysis Results
Adams View creates an analysis object named Last_Multi under your model. The analysis contains a
result set named Design_Study_Results. The result set contains the following components:
• Trial, which contains the number of each run (one through the number of runs).
• Component with the same name as the design variable, which contains the values used for the
variable for each run.
Parameterization Basics 573
Running Parametric Analyses
• For each measure or objective, a component with the same name as the objective or measure,
which contains the values of the performance measure for each run.
Note: If the analysis Last_Multi already exists from a previous parametric analysis, Adams View
deletes the previous results and replaces them with the new results. Learn how to save
results permanently at Saving Results.
Completing a DOE
Learn how to complete a Design of experiments (DOE) analysis and how Adams View stores the results
of the analysis:
• Completing and Executing a DOE
• Analysis Results
Note: The enhanced DOE capabilities found in Adams Insight, provide you with more
sophisticated experiments and improved results in an easy-to-use interface. For more
information, see the Adams Insight online help, or contact your MSC sales representative.
The DOE technique or trial matrix controls the number of simulations and the combination of
variable values to use for each simulation. For example, the Full Factorial technique simulates
every possible combination of levels. If you use two variables with three levels each, Adams View
runs nine simulations. For more information on the DOE techniques and entering your own trial
matrix, see About Design of Experiments.
The DOE technique or trial matrix selects values for a variable based on the range or list of values
you defined for the variable.
• If you specified only a range for a design variable, Adams View selects from equally spaced
values across the range. You enter the number of values in the Default Levels text box.
• If you specified a list of values for a design variable, Adams View selects directly from those
values, ignoring the value in the Default Levels text box.
• For more information about variable ranges and values, see Controlling Variable Values.
Analysis Results
Adams View creates an analysis named Last_Multi under your model. The analysis contains a result set
named DOE_Results. The result set contains:
• Component named Trial that contains the number of each run (one through the number of runs).
• For each design variable, a component with the same name as the variable, which contains the
values used for the variable in each run.
• For each measure or objective, a component with the same name as the objective or measure,
which contains the values of the performance measure for each run.
Note: If analysis Last_Multi already existed from a previous parametric analysis, Adams View
deletes the previous results and replaces them with the new results. For instructions on
permanently saving previous results, see Saving Results.
Completing an Optimization
Learn how to complete an Optimization and how Adams View stores the results of an analysis:
• Completing and Executing an Optimization
• Analysis Results
Note: If you simultaneously run optimizations of two Adams View models, from the same
working directory, Adams View may crash.
2. In the Design Variable text box in the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box, enter the name of the
design variables to vary.
3. If you want to automatically save the original values of the design variables before starting the
optimization analysis, select Auto. Save.
4. If you want to immediately save the current values of the design variables, select Save.
5. Set Goal to Maximize or Minimize.
6. If you want to add constraints, select Constraints and enter the names of the constraints in the
text box that appears.
7. Select Start.
If you selected Maximize as the goal, Adams View adjusts the design variable values to increase
the measure or objective as much as possible. If you selected Minimize, Adams View reduces the
objective as much as possible.
If you specified value ranges on any of the design variables, Adams View increases or decreases
the objective as much as possible without exceeding the value limits. For more information about
variable ranges, see Controlling Variable Values.
If you specified constraints, Adams View increases or decreases the objective as much as possible
without violating the constraints. For information about using constraints to control the
optimization, see Creating Constraints (Optimization Only).
Adams View iteratively adjusts the design variable values, attempting to improve the model
performance with each iteration. Adams View may need to backtrack to avoid violating a
constraint or limit on a variable value. Therefore, the model performance does not necessarily
improve with each iteration. At each iteration, Adams View runs several simulations to
approximate derivatives and converge on the next iteration.
The last iteration will be the best values that the optimization could find without violating
constraints or limits. Adams View normally leaves the design variables set to the optimized
values. If you interrupt the analysis or Adams View encounters an error during the analysis,
Adams View resets the variables to their original values.
If you do not want to keep the optimized values, and you selected the Auto. Save check box or
used the Save button to save the original values, you can select the Restore button to return the
variables to their original values.
Analysis Results
Adams View creates an analysis object named Last_Multi under the current model in the Modeling
database. The analysis contains a result set named Optimization_Results. The result set contains:
• Component named Iteration that contains the number of each iteration (one through the number
of iteration). Iteration zero is the initial model configuration.
• For each design variable, a component with the same name as the variable that contains the
values used for the variable for each iteration.
576 Adams View
Running Parametric Analyses
• Component with the same name as the objective or measure that contains the values of the
performance measure for each iteration.
Note: If the analysis Last_Multi already existed from a previous parametric analysis, Adams
View deletes the previous results and replaces them with the new results. Learn about
Saving Results.
Parameterization Basics 577
Reviewing and Using Parametric Analysis Results
Saving Results
By default, Adams View overwrites the current results if you perform another parametric analysis. You
can automatically and permanently save all parametric results using the Solver Settings dialog box. Learn
About Setting Simulation Controls. You can also save a single set of results using the Save Design Results
to Database tool at the bottom of the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box.
Note: Be sure to save your modeling database after you save the parametric analysis results.
Learn about Saving Modeling Database.
Deleting Results
To delete a single set of simulation results:
1. From the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box, right-click the Save Design Results to Database
tool to display its Tool stack.
2. From the tool stack, select the Delete Results from Database tool .
The Database Navigator appears.
3. Select the names of the Simulations that you want to delete from your Modeling database. Learn
About the Database Navigator.
4. Select OK.
578 Adams View
Reviewing and Using Parametric Analysis Results
Generating Plots
You can plot parametric results in the following ways:
1. At the top of the Solver Settings dialog box, set Category to Display.
2. Select More.
3. In the Design Evaluation Display area, select Chart objective and
Save Curve.
For more information, press F1 when the Solver Settings dialog box is
active.
Manual plots You can also transfer the strip chart to the plotting window for further use,
or you can use the Results option in the plotting window to plot the
parametric results directly. For more information on creating and modifying
plots using the plotting window, see Transferring a Strip Chart to Adams
PostProcessor, and the Adams PostProcessor online help.
Parameterization Basics 579
Reviewing and Using Parametric Analysis Results
1. From the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box, select the Plot Results
tool .
Adams View displays the Plot Design Evaluation Results dialog box.
2. In the Result Set text box, enter the name of the parametric analysis
result set you want to plot.
3. To generate a plot of the measure or objectives versus the variable
value, trial number, or iteration number, select Measure/Objective
vs. Run.
4. To generate a plot of the measure or objectives versus time with a
curve for each trial or iteration, select Measure vs. Time For All
Runs. If you use this option, you must have specified a measure or an
objective that refers to a measure or result set component (not a
macro or function). In addition, you must have saved the results from
the individual runs. For information on saving results from individual
runs, see Setting Simulation Controls.
5. Select OK.
Adams View generates one or two plots and displays the plotting
window showing the last plot.
Generating a Table
You can set up Adams View to create a table that contains the following:
• Description of the model.
• measure or objective.
• Constraints (if any).
• Design variables used in the analysis.
• Table of the objective, constraint, and variable values for each trial or iteration.
For a Design study, the table also includes a column of approximate design sensitivities for each trial.
The approximate design sensitivity is the average of the sensitivity with respect to the preceding trial and
580 Adams View
Reviewing and Using Parametric Analysis Results
the sensitivity with respect to the following trial, as shown in the formula below:
where:
• O - Objective value
• V - Design variable value
• i - Iterations
Note: For the first trial, Adams View computes the value from the changes between the first and
second trial. For the last trial, it computes the value from the changes between the next-to-
last trial and the last trial.
You can control the format of the numbers in the table, the width of the columns, and the precision of the
numbers. For the format of the numbers, you can select:
• Automatic - Selects either exponential or fixed, depending on the size of the number and the
column width. If you select automatic format, the value you enter for the precision of the
numbers sets the overall number of digits.
• Exponential or fixed - The value you enter for the precision sets the number of digits past the
decimal point.
Note: You can set Adams View to automatically display a table at the end of a parametric
analysis. Setting Simulation Controls.
Updating Variables
You can use the Update Variables tool from the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box to set the design
variable values to those of a trial or iteration. This is helpful if you want to:
• Update your model to match the best trial of a Design study or Design of experiments (DOE)
analysis.
• Visualize the variable settings of a particular trial or iteration.
• Use an intermediate iteration in an Optimization instead of the final values.
DOE/Optimization
582 Adams View
About Design of Experiments
Note: For more on DOE techniques, see the Adams Insight online help, if installed.
What is DOE?
Design of experiments (also called experimental design) is a collection of procedures and statistical tools
for planning experiments and analyzing the results. In general, the experiments may measure the
performance of a physical prototype, the yield of a manufacturing process, or the quality of a finished
product.
Although DOE techniques were developed around physical experiments, they work just as well with
virtual experiments in Adams View. In the case of Adams View, the experiments help you better
understand and refine the performance of your mechanical system. DOE techniques can improve your
understanding of your design, increase the reliability of your conclusions, and often get you an answer
faster than trial-and-error experimentation.
For simple design problems, it is often possible to explore and optimize the behavior of your system using
a combination of intuition, trial-and-error, and brute force. As the number of design options increases,
however, it becomes more and more difficult to do this quickly and systematically. Varying just one
parameter at a time does not tell you a lot about the interactions between parameters. Trying many
different parameter combinations can require many simulations, therefore leaving you with a great deal
of output data to sift through and understand.
DOE methods provide planning and analysis tools for running a series of experiments. The basic process
is to first determine the purpose of the experiments. You might want to identify which variations have the
biggest effect on your system, for example. You then choose a set of parameters (called factors) for the
system you are investigating and develop a way to measure the appropriate system response. You then
select a set of values for each parameter (called levels) and plan a set of experiments (called runs, trials,
or treatments) in which you vary the parameter values from one experiment to another. The combination
of actual runs to perform is called the design.
An experiment set up in this way is called a designed experiment, or matrix experiment. The runs are
described by the design matrix, that has a column for each factor and a row for each run. The matrix
entries are the level for each factor for each run. For an example of a design matrix, see Specifying a
Design Matrix.
You then execute the runs, recording the performance of the system at each run and analyze the changes
in performance across the runs. The type of analysis depends on the purpose of the experiment. Common
analyses are analysis of variance (ANOVA) that determines the relative importance of the factors, and
linear regression, which fits an assumed mathematical model to the results.
DOE/Optimization 583
About Design of Experiments
Experiments with two or three factors may only require five or ten runs. As the number of factors and
levels grows, however, the number of runs can quickly escalate to dozens, even hundreds. As a result, a
good design is critical to the success of the experiment. It should contain as few runs as possible, yet give
enough information to accurately depict the behavior of your system. The best design depends on the
number of factors and levels, the nature of the factors, assumptions about the behavior of the product or
process, and the overall purpose of the experiment.
DOE methods allow you to combine all of these requirements into a efficient, effective design for your
problem, and couple it with the appropriate analysis of the results.
Screening identifies which factors and combinations of factors most affect the behavior of the system.
You consider every factor that may potentially affect the response, and use a screening analysis to
determine how much each contributes to the response. This helps you narrow down further
experimentation to just the important factors, and also ensures that you do not leave out significant
factors. Screening is usually followed by a more in-depth experiment on the most important factors.
Robust design, developed by Dr. Genichi Taguchi, is a methodology for improving quality by controlling
the effects of variations in a system. All real-world systems encounter variations due to manufacturing
tolerances, material properties, age, wear, or operating conditions. These variations often decrease the
quality of the system. Robust design identifies which parameters contribute most to quality variations,
and helps you discover how to best minimize their impact on quality. This might mean choosing the least-
sensitive configuration from the best-performing combinations, or modifying your system to react less
to the variations.
Response surface methods (RSM) fit polynomials to the results of the runs, which gives you an easy-to-
use approximation of your system's behavior. The fitted relationships estimate the performance of your
system. You may use this model for plotting and evaluating, quick what-if studies, as input for an
optimization algorithm, or as a subsystem model in a larger system.
Although screening, robust design, and RSM all use the same basic DOE process as described above,
they use different means to generate the designs and analyze the results. Screening, robust design, and
RSM are all applicable to Adams models, and you can use Adams as the experimental evaluation for
screening and robust design methods.
584 Adams View
About Design of Experiments
Built-in Designs
When you run a DOE in Adams View, you may select from several built-in designs. If you select any one
of these, Adams View generates the design matrix for you. Adams View generates full-factorial designs.
The full-factorial design uses all of the combinations of levels. The total number of runs will be mn, where
m is the number of levels and n is the number of factors. Because this grows very quickly, full factorial
is only practical for a small number of factors and levels.
DOE/Optimization 585
About Design of Experiments
You should also consult a good reference guide on the particular method you are using. There are many
textbooks on DOE and related methods, such as robust design. Any math library should have references
on the statistical aspects of DOE, and engineering libraries have references on applying DOE to quality
and design problems.
For information about specifying your own trial matrix or transferring a design matrix from an outside
program into Adams View, see Specifying a Design Matrix.
About Optimization
Learn general information on Optimization, tips on using the optimization tools in Adams View, and
additional reference material for the Adams View optimization analysis:
Optimization Background
Learn general information on Optimization:
• Why Optimize?
• What is Optimization?
• Mathematics and Methods
• Additional References
Why Optimize?
Optimization is a sophisticated tool that helps you improve the overall design of your product. Having a
good design early in the process helps you shorten your design cycle.
Most designs have specific requirements, such as to support a specified load or trace a specified path.
There is usually some means of distinguishing a good design from a bad design: it is too heavy or it will
cost too much to produce. Some requirements can be restrictions on a design: packaging, end conditions,
or material availability.
Part of the design process is to manipulate the unknowns (variables) in a design to arrive at a good design
that satisfies all goals (objectives) and restrictions (constraints). If these features can be quantified,
optimization techniques can be used to analytically arrive at the theoretical best solution. The process of
optimization can also provide you with important information such as:
• Are there too many constraints on the solution, where relaxing certain specifications might
provide an acceptable result?
• Are there superfluous design constraints, and do some design constraints dictate the results?
• Is the overall design sensitive to certain design parameters and not others?
What is Optimization?
In general, an optimization problem is described as a problem to minimize or maximize an objective
function over a selection of design variables, while satisfying various constraints on the design and state
variables of the system. Various algorithms are available for finding a solution to an optimization
problem, given the problem has been formulated in the manner described in this section.
The objective function is a numerical representation of the quality, efficiency, cost, or stability of the
model. You decide whether the optimization chooses to find the minimum or maximum of the function.
The optimum value of this function corresponds to the best design possible using that particular
mathematical model. Examples of objective functions include execution time, energy (effort) required,
and total material costs.
588 Adams View
About Optimization
Design variables can be thought of as the unknowns for the design problem. These are the parameters
you can alter to define the design. Changes in the design variables should result in changes to the
objective. Examples of design variables are part dimensions, force amplitudes, and individual part
masses.
Constraints are boundaries that directly or indirectly eliminate unacceptable designs. Constraints often
take the form of additional goals for the design:
• The overall weight of the machine must be less than 1 ton.
• The path traced by a robot arm must pass through certain points
• The fundamental frequency of a vehicle must be greater than 1 Hz.
minJ ( x, u ) )
u
(read as: minimize the objective function J over choices of u, the design variables)
subject to:
x· = f ( x, u )
g ( x, u ) ≤ 0
with initial and final conditions given by:
If a solution exists, the output of the optimization gives the optimal design variables u* that satisfy all of
the constraints and minimize the objective function J. The formulation and solution of such an
optimization problem involves standard techniques of mathematical programming. You are only required
to describe the optimization problem in the terms outlined above.
Solutions
A local minimum or maximum exists where the gradient, or derivative of J with respect to u, goes to zero.
For this reason, the solution to an optimization is the solution to a system of nonlinear equations.
Nonlinear solvers are iterative methods that take steps of the form:
(i + 1) (i)
u ←u – αS
Where the u's are the iterates, S is referred to as the search direction, and is the step size. In English,
each step of the process tries to get close to the solution by traveling along the direction S by an amount
. The determination of and S distinguishes the solution algorithms. S is usually of the form:
S = HΔJ
DOE/Optimization 589
About Optimization
-J denotes the gradient of J. H is referred to as the Hessian (matrix) of J and is constructed to improve
the convergence of the algorithm. The best convergence is achieved when H is the Jacobian matrix of
second partial derivative of J. This is the Newton-Raphson method. Newton-Raphson is rarely used,
since the computation of these derivatives is often impossible or too expensive to calculate. Other
methods use various, less expensive approximations to the Jacobian.
Once the search direction, S, is chosen, the step size is chosen using a one-dimensional minimization
of J with as the design variable. This is usually referred to as the line search and uses the bisection
algorithm, golden search, or any of a number of minimization methods.
Additional References
• VMA Engineering. DOT User's Manual. Goleta, CA, 1993.
• J. J. More and S. J. Wright. Optimization Software Guide, SIAM, Philadelphia, 1993.
• D. E. Kirk. Optimal Control Theory. Prentice - Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1970.
• U. Kirsch. Optimum Structural Design. McGraw-Hill, 1981
• Minimum time - Use a SENSOR to stop an analysis when the conditions of the optimization are
satisfied. The time for the analysis is then written as the last record of a result set. If you use a
SENSOR to HALT the analysis, also set the PRINT argument on that SENSOR. Otherwise, the
optimizer only uses information from the previous output step.
• Minimum mass - Write an Adams View function that sums the masses of all applicable parts.
The masses of the parts are the design variables.
• Minimum effort - Write a DIFF that describes the torques applied to the system that are to be
minimized. The integral of this differential equation is given as the last record in the result set.
Adams View prints the objective or constraint value in the Information window.
If the model is not robust, optimization is still possible, but more effort is required. In particular, the
parameters for the finite differencing need to be massaged. The key to accurate optimization is good
gradient information. Presently, Adams uses finite differences to compute gradients. You have control
over the method and step size used. The forward difference method passes a line through the design point
and a forward perturbation. The central difference method passes a parabola through the design point and
both a forward and backward perturbation.
If you are certain that your model is robust, use forward differences since it is faster. If not, use central
differences to focus in on the optimum, then switch to forward differences.
The size of the perturbation can also reduce the effect of errors in the analysis. Naturally, you want to
remove as much of this as you can. If you are uncertain of the accuracy and smoothness of your model,
use a large perturbation at first, then reduce it as you get better designs. Remember that the accuracy of
the gradients generally improves as the perturbations get smaller.
When optimizing curves, try to define the curve using analytical functions. If you must use discrete
values, use control points. The optimizer tends to perturb curve points one at a time. The interpolation
using curve points (cubic splines) tends to be more oscillatory under single point perturbation, which can
confuse an optimization algorithm.
The scaling of the optimization variables (design, constraints, and objective) also affects the
performance. It is best to choose variables and functions that are similar in magnitude.
Monitor the scale of objectives, gradients, and constraints. Large values for objectives and gradients
impede optimization. Small values of constraints under-emphasize the constraints.
Once the gradients are computed, the optimization algorithm determines a search direction. A line search
is performed in this direction, attempting to improve the design. The number of iterations performed by
the line search is determined greatly by the accuracy of the gradients. If the gradients are highly accurate,
then the line search often terminates after one or two analyses. If the gradients are poor, then the line
search can cause ten or more analyses to be performed. These estimates vary widely depending upon your
particular optimization algorithm.
So, for forward differencing:
runs_per_iteration =number_of_design_variables + length_of_line_search
For central differencing:
runs_per_iteration =2 * number_of_design_variables + length_of_line_search
Refining an Optimization
Optimization is an iterative process in more ways than one. You will probably perform several
optimizations before you are satisfied with the results.
The way you define design variables, constraints, and objective functions has a profound effect on the
performance of the optimizer and on the results of the optimization. You may need to change your
objective, add constraints, or make other changes before you pose your problem in the right way.
The default values for optimization parameters may not always give the final answer, but can bring you
closer to the final answer. You may need to experiment with optimization settings to arrive at the best
combination for your application.
Optimization Settings
The optimization settings are accessible from the Solver Settings dialog box when you select
Optimization. Learn about Accessing the Solver Settings Dialog Box.
Learn about each of the optimizer settings:
• Algorithm
• Convergence Tolerance
• Maximum Iterations
• Rescale Iterations
• Differencing Technique
• Differencing Increment
DOE/Optimization 593
About Optimization
• Debugging Output
• Minimum Number of Converged Iterations
• User Parameters
Algorithm
Algorithm specifies the algorithm used to perform the optimization. The OPTDES algorithms are
provided with Adams View. The DOT algorithms can be purchased from Vanderplaats R&D, Inc. You
can also include your own optimization algorithm. The contact information for Vanderplaats R&D, Inc.
is:
Vanderplaats R&D, Inc.
1767 S. 8th Street, Suite. 100
Colorado Springs, CO 80906
http://www.vrand.com/
http://www.vrand.com/dot.htm
• OPTDES-GRG - Use the GRG (Generalized Reduced Gradient) algorithm from the OptDes code
of Design Synthesis. This algorithm requires that design variables have range limits, since it
works in scaled space.
• OPTDES-SQP - Use the SQP (Sequential Quadratic Programming) algorithm from the OptDes
code of Design Synthesis. This algorithm requires that design variables have range limits, since
it works in scaled space.
• DOT1 - Use DOT with BFGS (Broydon-Fletcher-Goldfarb-Shanno) for unconstrained
problems. Use DOT with MMFD (Modified Method of Feasible Directions) for constrained
problems.
• DOT2 - Use DOT with FR (Fletcher-Reeves) for unconstrained problems. Use DOT with SLP
(Sequential Linear Programming) for constrained problems.
• DOT3 - Use DOT with FR (same as DOT2) for unconstrained problems. Use DOT with SQP
(Sequential Quadratic Programming) for constrained problems.
• User 1, User 2, User 3 - Allows you to invoke a user-written optimization algorithm that has
been linked to Adams View. (See Linking External Algorithms.)
Convergence Tolerance
Convergence tolerance is the limit below which subsequent differences of the objective must fall before
an optimization is considered successful. If the condition ABS(objective[now] - objective[now-1]) <
convergence_tolerance is true for a certain number of iterations (usually two), then the convergence
tolerance criterion is met. Note that this is only one test that is made by most optimization algorithms
before they terminate successfully.
Like other Adams Solver tolerances, you may need to experiment with this tolerance to find the right
value for your application. Display the objective versus iteration strip chart. If the optimizer quits even
though the last iteration made noticeable progress, try reducing the tolerance. If the optimizer continues
iterating even after the objective has stopped changing very much, make the tolerance larger.
594 Adams View
About Optimization
Maximum Iterations
Maximum iterations tells the optimization algorithm how many iterations it should take before it admits
failure.
Note that a single iteration can have an arbitrarily large number of analysis runs (see Predicting Execution
Time).
Rescale Iterations
Rescale iterations is the number of iterations after which the design variable values are rescaled. If you
set the value to -1, scaling is turned off.
Differencing Technique
The differencing technique controls how the optimizer computes gradients for the design functions.
Centered differencing perturbs each design variable in the negative direction from the nominal value,
then again in the positive direction using finite differencing between the perturbed results to compute the
gradient. If you choose forward differencing, each design variable is perturbed in a positive direction
only.
Centered differencing can sometimes generate smoother, more reliable gradients (especially in noisy
models), but it causes twice as many analysis runs to be performed.
Differencing Increment
The differencing increment specifies the size of increment to use when performing finite differencing to
compute gradients. When using forward differencing this value is added to the nominal value of each
design variable on successive runs. When using central differencing, this value is first subtracted from
the nominal value and then added to it.
Smaller increments may give more accurate approximations of the gradient, but are also more susceptible
to random variations from run to run. Larger increments help minimize the effects of variations, but gives
less accurate gradients. For more information on controlling variations, see Ensuring Accurate Run
Results.
Debugging Output
Turning on debugging output sends copious optimizer diagnostics to the window that launched Adams
View. Keep an eye on that window anyway, as some important warnings might be written there.
The debugging output shows you the data the optimizer is receiving from Adams View, among other
things. If the optimizer is behaving erratically, this may help you determine the source of the problem.
User Parameters
Adams View passes the user parameters to a user-written optimization algorithm. Realizing that there
may be parameter information that is not conveyed through the existing parameter set, this parameter was
added to allow you to pass any real numeric data to your algorithm.
To make it easy for you to create a macro, Adams View contains tools to automate the creation of macros.
The tools let you interactively record, play, and test your macros and command files. You can also use
text-editing applications to modify existing macros or create them from scratch.
• Using the Command Navigator or Command window to type in the commands to create macros
as well as the commands to be executed. Learn about using the Command Navigator and
Command Window.
Recording a macro is easiest for simple macros, while reading in a file is best for more complex macros.
When you read in a file, you can also specify the help file or string that you want associated with the
macro. Using the Macro Editor is best for editing existing macros. If you use the Macro Editor to create
macros, you must type in the commands that the macro is to execute.
3. If you are creating a macro, in the Macro Name text box, enter the name of the macro.
600 Adams View
About Adams View Macros
4. In the Command text box, enter the command string that executes the macro. To use the name of
the macro, select Use Macro Name.
Note: The command string you enter must be unique. You cannot redefine an existing command,
although you can add a new keyword at any level to an existing command. For instance,
entering MARKER CREATE is invalid, because a MARKER CREATE command already
exists, but entering MARKER GENERATE is valid.
5. Specify whether or not the entire macro can be undone with a single Undo command. Note that a
single Undo=yes, while convenient, can consume a great deal of memory for very large macros,
or slow macro execution noticeably, even if you do not ever use the Undo. You might want to
specify Undo=yes during initial creation and debugging until your macro works properly, then
switch to Undo=no to improve performance.
6. In the Commands text area, enter the commands that the macro is to execute, and select OK.
Recording Macros
Recording a Macro is easiest for simple macros.
To record a macro:
1. From the Tools menu, point to Macro, point to Record/Replay, and then select Record Start.
2. Perform the operations you want included in the macro.
3. To stop recording the macro, from the Tools menu, point to Macro, point to Record/Replay, and
then select Record Stop.
The file you supply that contains the macro definition is a command file that can also contain parameters
embedded in the commands and can have special comments at the top.
Some of the comments in the file you supply can correspond to Read command parameters that are listed
in the Macro Read dialog box, such as the command users enter to execute the macro. These comments
must appear at the beginning of the file and must contain the name of one of the reserved parameters
(USER_ENTERED_COMMAND, WRAP_IN_UNDO, HELP_STRING, or HELP_FILE) followed by
an appropriate value.
These reserved parameters must be in uppercase letters and must immediately follow the comment
character (!). You enter the values without equal signs or quotes. Adams View treats the values in the
comments as defaults. For example, the following comments set the default values for
USER_ENTERED_COMMAND and HELP_STRING.
!USER_ENTERED_COMMAND lmark
!HELP_STRING This command lists information on all markers in your database.
list_info marker marker_name=.*
If you specify values for these parameters using the Macro Read dialog box, the values in the dialog box
override the values in the comments.
Note: The Macro Read dialog box contains an option to create a panel. This option is no
longer supported or recommended.
2. In the Macro Name text box, enter the name of the macro that Adams View uses to store the
macro in the current database.
3. In the File Name text box, enter the name of the file containing the commands to be executed.
4. In the User Entered Command text box, specify the command string that will execute the macro.
The command string defaults to the name of the macro if you do not enter a command string.
5. Specify whether or not the entire macro can be undone with a single Undo command. Note that
a single Undo, while convenient, can consume a great deal of memory for very large macros or
slow macro execution noticeably, even if you do not actually use the Undo.
6. Specify a text file containing help on the macro or enter a text string describing the macro.
Currently, you can only specify help for the entire macro command, not its parameters or leading
keywords.
7. To ensure that you do not create an outdated dialog box, from the Create Panel option menu,
select no.
602 Adams View
About Adams View Macros
8. Select OK.
Note: To create an up-to-date dialog box to execute your macro, go to the Command
Navigator and double-click on the name of your macro after you have created it.
Adams View automatically creates a dialog box whose name is based on the user-
entered commands associated with the macro. For example, if you create a macro
called mar_scale_down and associated with it the user-entered commands: marker
scale down, then Adams View names the auto-generated dialog box
.gui.mar_sca_dow (Adams View uses the first three characters of each command in
the user-entered commands to create the name of the dialog box). See also
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder, and the example.
Saving Macros
Adams View automatically stores your macros in the current modeling session. You can also export your
macros to command (.cmd) files, which allows you to edit, archive, or import them into other modeling
session. It also lets you give the macro to another user, and also helps you to modify long macros when
you do not have the original file
If you used non-default values for the other macro data, such as the help string, the command file includes
comments with those values. You can read in the command file using the Macro Read command.
Deleting Macros
To delete objects using the Database Navigator:
1. Clear the select list of any existing selections by selecting the Select Tool .
2. On the Edit menu, select Delete.
The Database Navigator appears.
3. Select the macro or macros that you want to delete. Learn about navigating through a modeling
database using the Database Navigator.
Automating Your Work Using Macros 603
About Adams View Macros
4. Select OK.
Note: If the Database Navigator does not appear as indicated in Step 2, the select list was
not cleared before executing the Delete command. You can always use the Edit ->
Select List commands to be sure it is cleared.
Debugging Macros
Adams View provides a debugging tool to help you troubleshoot your macros if they don't run or work
as expected. You can use the debugging tool to:
• View your macro and the output from it.
• Step through each command in the macro.
• Print your macro.
Executing Macros
Once you have created a macro, you execute it by issuing the command that you specified when you
created the macro. You can issue the command by:
• Entering the command in the Command window. The full command is a combination of the
command and macro parameters, if any.
• Using the Command Navigator to execute the command. Selecting the macro command in the
Command Navigator, automatically displays a dialog box in which to enter parameters.
• Using a custom dialog box and menu command that you created to execute the macro. Learn
more about Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder.
Adams View treats the macro as it does other Adams View commands. For example, if you enter the
command in the command window, but do not enter all required parameters, Adams View prompts you
for the missing required parameters.
It can also be slow and distracting, however, once your macro is working properly. You can prevent this
by including the following as the first command in the macro:
defaults command_file echo=off update=off
Including the command allows macros to run more quickly because Adams View does not echo the
macro commands to the command information area and updates the views only once, when the macro is
finished. You can reset the defaults by including the following command as the last line in your macro:
defaults command_file echo=on update=on
If you execute a macro from a dialog box or menu, Adams View, by default, updates the screen at each
change, but does not echo the macro commands to the command information area.
For example, you can use an IF command to conditionally execute commands within your macro. You
can create a parameter to specify a choice of options, then use the IF statement to determine which option
was chosen and execute the appropriate commands.
For more information on the different conditional constructs, see Conditional Constructs and Loops.
By including the System command, you can create macros that invoke outside utilities and programs.
You could, for example, create a macro that generates hardcopy files for a standard series of plots, then
use the System command to issue comments to print and delete the plots.
The single quotes and qualifiers are optional (see below), giving four possible formats:
• $name
• $'name'
• $name:q1:q2:q3...
• $'name:q1:q2:q3...'
You can use the qualifiers in any combination and any order, and you do not need to define all of them.
If you repeat a qualifier, Adams View uses the last value. Qualifiers can be in upper or lowercase.
Examples of qualifiers are:
Examples of Qualifiers
The qualifiers: Specify that the parameter requires:
$parts:t=part:c=2 Names for two existing parts.
$NSpokes:T=INTEGER:GE=3:LE=8:D=3 An integer from 3 to 8 and a constant default of 3.
$infile:t=file(*.dat) A file name. The File Selection dialog box lists all files
with the extension .dat.
Type Qualifier
The type qualifier specifies the type of value a user must enter. The format for the type qualifier is:
• T = type
• T = type(additional data)
where:
• type is a basic type, database object type, or database object class type as explained in the next
sections.
• Additional data is either optional or required depending on the type.
Range Qualifiers
A range qualifier specifies the minimum and/or maximum values allowed. It only applies to numeric
types. The formats for the range qualifiers are listed in the table below.
Count Qualifiers
Count qualifiers specify the number of values required. The formats for the count qualifier are listed in
the table below.
Default Qualifiers
Default qualifiers are optional. If a parameter has no default, users must enter a value when executing the
macro. There are three types of default qualifiers as well as a default value:
• Constant - The parameter is optional. Adams View uses the default value if a user does not
supply a parameter value.
• Updated - The parameter is optional and Adams View uses the last value the user entered if the
user does not supply a parameter value. If a user has not yet entered any value for a parameter,
Adams View uses the default value.
• Database object - The default for database objects is automatic. If the type is an existing
database object, the automatic default is the current default object.
The table below lists the formats for the default qualifiers.
preceding command parameter. If there are no qualifiers and the parameter does not appear immediately
after an "=" in a valid command, the default characteristics are one string value with no default.
Tip: To avoid unexpected results, we recommend that you explicitly set the characteristics of
your parameters in comments at the beginning of your macro. For examples of setting the
characteristics in comments, see Example Macros.
In the example below, parameter $text defaults to a string because it has no qualifiers and is not in a
command. Parameter $numbers has qualifiers that specify it as one or more integers greater than zero.
Parameter $part_1 is a part because it immediately follows an "=" and, therefore, inherits the type from
parameter part_name. Parameter $part_2 defaults to string because it does not immediately follow the
"=". Parameters $part_3 and $part_4 have qualifiers that specify them both as parts.
! Parameter $text is a string.
! $numbers:t=integer:c=0:gt=0
list_info part part_name=$part_1, $part_2
list_info part part_name=$part_3:t=part, $part_4:t=part
Automating Your Work Using Macros 611
Helpful Commands in Macros
Tip: For more help on using commands, see the online help available from the Command
Navigator. Simply select a command and then select the Help button at the bottom
of the Command Navigator.
You can specify to write to a file, a variable, both, or neither. If writing to a file, you must open it first
using the file text open command.
If you specify:
• Just the file_name, Adams View writes the output to that file.
• Just the variable_name, Adams View assigns the text string to that variable.
• Both file_name and variable_name, Adams View performs both actions.
• Neither, Adams View assumes the last opened, written, or read file is the intended destination. If
you perform a write after a read, you should explicitly identify the file with the file_name
parameter, so Adams View does not overwrite the file you last read from.
612 Adams View
Helpful Commands in Macros
Parameters
file_name Specifies the name of the text file to be written. The proper extension is the
(optional) default, but you can be override it by supplying a different extension.
It's not necessary to enclose the file name in quotes if it only contains alpha-
numeric characters and starts with a letter. If you want to include other
characters, such as a '.' for an extension or '/' or '[]' for directory paths, you
must enclose the name in quotes.
variable_name Specifies a variable to which Adams View stores a formatted string.
(optional)
format_for_output Specifies the format of the output text. Output formats are a mixture of text
(required) and conversion specifications. Each conversion specification usually has a
matching argument in the values_for_output parameter. A conversion
specification begins with a percent sign, %, and is terminated by a letter or
another percent sign.
Most conversion specifications can contain flags between the leading percent
sign and the terminating conversion specifier. These flags allow you to further
refine the format of your output. Some of the valid flags are:
- Indicates that the output is to be left justified in the field, with the default
being right justification. This is only useful when the field width is specified
(see below).
"005.....7"
You specify precision by entering a decimal point followed by a number. You
enter the precision after the field width. For example:
You can write information from the Adams View database to the text file by
using data access references in the value expressions. For example,
VALUES= (.mod1.par1.mass) writes the mass of part par1. For more
information on expressions and database access, see Adams View Function
Builder online help.
614 Adams View
Helpful Commands in Macros
system
Issues a device-dependent operating system command. You can select to display the results of the
command in the Information Window or the Adams View Log file.
Parameters
Examples
The following example issues a Linux-appropriate command to remove the file named test.txt without
displaying the command in either the Adams View Information window or a log file:
SYSTEM COMMAND="rm test.txt" SEND=OFF ECHO=OFF
Automating Your Work Using Macros 615
Conditional Constructs and Loops
BREAK
Use the BREAK command to exit the innermost FOR or WHILE loop immediately and stop execution
of the loop.
When Adams View encounters a BREAK command inside a loop, it immediately exits the loop without
executing the remaining commands for that iteration.
The BREAK command affects only the innermost FOR or WHILE loop.
Format
BREAK
Example
In this example, Adams View creates markers, named MAR1, MAR2, MAR3, MAR4, and MAR5,
unless a marker already exists with one of those names. As soon as it encounters an existing marker,
Adams View exits the loop and does not create any more.
variable create variable_name=ip integer_value=0
while condition=(ip < 5)
variable modify variable_name=ip integer_value(eval(ip+1))
if condition=(eval(DB_EXISTS ("MAR"//ip)))
break
end
marker create marker_name=(eval("MAR"//ip)) &
location=(eval(ip-1)),0,0
end
variable delete variable_name=ip
CONTINUE
Use the CONTINUE command to skip commands inside the innermost FOR or WHILE loop and
continue with the next iteration of the loop.
When Adams View encounters a CONTINUE command inside of a loop, it skips over the remaining
commands of the loop and goes directly to the END of the innermost loop. Adams View tests the loop
condition and continues looping if the condition is still valid.
The CONTINUE command affects only the innermost FOR or WHILE loop.
Format
CONTINUE
616 Adams View
Conditional Constructs and Loops
Example
In this example Adams View creates four markers on the default part: MAR1, MAR2, MAR4, and
MAR5. Adams View skips MAR3, because when ip evaluates to 3, Adams View encounters the
CONTINUE command and skips to the END of the WHILE loop.
variable create variable_name=ip integer_value=0
while condition=(ip < 5)
variable modify variable_name=ip integer_value=(eval(ip+1))
if condition=(ip == 3)
continue
end
marker create marker_name=(eval("MAR"//ip)) &
location=(eval(ip-1)),0,0
end
variable delete variable_name=ip
The results of the example would be:
IF/ELSEIF/ELSE/END
Use the IF, ELSE, ELSEIF, and END commands to execute a group of commands conditionally. The
execution of commands bracketed by IF and END depends on the value of an expression.
You can nest any combination of looping (FOR/END, WHILE/END) and conditional constructs
(IF/ELSEIF/ELSE/END).
Note: As with all Adams View commands, you can use the IF, ELSE, ELSEIF, and END
commands on the command line, in macros, and in command files.
Format
You can use the IF command with or without the ELSE command. A few examples of many variations
are shown below.
IF CONDITION=(expression)
...
END
IF CONDITION=(expression)
...
ELSE
...
END
IF CONDITION=(expression)
...
ELSEIF CONDITION=(expression)
...
ELSE
...
END
If the expression evaluates to a non-zero value, Adams View executes the commands following the IF or
ELSEIF command up to the ELSE, when present, or the END if you do not use the ELSE. If the
expression evaluates to zero and you used ELSE, Adams View executes the commands between the
ELSE and the END commands.
The question-mark/colon (?:) operator used in a conditional expression replaces and IF/ELSE command
that distinguishes one of two values. The expression consists of three parts, a condition whose truth
determines which value is selected, and two expressions for the values.
condition expression ? expression a : expression b
When evaluated, the conditional takes on one of the two values. The expression that comes before the
question-mark is interpreted as boolean-valued. If it is true (non-zero), then expression a is used as the
value of the conditional, otherwise expression b is used as the value.
For example, consider the commands below:
if condition = (variable_a < variable_b) variable set variable =
variable_min real = (EVAL(variable_a)) else variable set
variable = variable_min real = (EVAL(variable_b)) end
This can be expressed more concisely by using a ?: conditional operator:
variable set variable = variable_min & real = (EVAL((variable_a <
variable_b)? variable_a : variable_b))
Example
In the following example, if the marker MAR1 exists, Adams View modifies its location. If the marker
does not exist, Adams View creates it and sets its location.
if condition=(DB_EXISTS ("MAR1"))
marker modify marker=mar1 location=2,0,0
else
marker create marker=mar1 location=2,0,0
end
618 Adams View
Conditional Constructs and Loops
The next example illustrates how to use ELSEIF to determine the type of object and then perform an
operation on the object based on the object's type. The example assumes that an Adams View variable
named .mdi.org exists and its type is database object.
! Bodies
variable create variable=object_type string=(eval(DB_TYPE(.MDI.obj)))
if condition=(object_type == "marker")
interface command_builder command="marker modify marker" initial=(.MDI.obj)
elseif condition=(object_type == "point")
interface dialog display dialog=.gui.main_objecttable parameter="Points"
elseif condition=(object_type == "flexible_body")
interface dialog display dialog=.gui.flx_dia_panel parameter=(.MDI.obj)
! Constraints - complex joints
elseif condition=(object_type == "coupler" )
interface dialog display dialog=.gui.coupler_cremod parameter=(.MDI.obj)
elseif condition=(object_type == "gear" )
interface command_builder command="constraint modify complex_joint gear"
initial=(.MDI.obj)
! Constraints - Higher Pair contact
elseif condition=(object_type == "curve_curve" )
interface command_builder command="constraint modify higher_pair_contact
curve_curve" init=(.MDI.obj)
elseif condition=(object_type == "point_curve" )
interface command_builder command="constraint modify higher_pair_contact
point_curve" init=(.MDI.obj)
end
FOR/END
The FOR and END commands allow you to execute a group of commands a fixed set of times. You can
use FOR either to perform numeric iteration or to operate on a set of Adams View objects, such as
markers or parts. Adams View executes the commands bracketed by the FOR and END for each value of
a variable in the specified range or upon the specified set of objects.
You can nest any combination of looping (FOR/END, WHILE/END) and conditional constructs
(IF/ELSEIF/ELSE/END).
Format
warning message and does not delete the variable at the termination of the loop. If you do not want this
behavior, you can use the EVAL function as described in Examples of Numeric Iteration for FOR/END.
START_VALUE, INCREMENT_VALUE, and END_VALUE can be any valid real expression.
INCREMENT_VALUE can be either positive or negative, and defaults to 1.0 if not specified. If
INCREMENT_VALUE is positive, Adams View increments the value of var by the increment for each
iteration and stops looping when the value of var is greater than END_VALUE.
If INCREMENT_VALUE is negative, Adams View decrements var by the increment for each iteration
and continues looping until var is less than END_VALUE.
The commands inside the FOR/END loop can use var as they would any other Adams View variable of
type REAL.
In this example Adams View renumbers the Adams IDs of markers belonging to the part follower,
starting at 5000, and incrementing by one for each marker in the set.
variable create variable_name=ip integer_value=5000
for variable_name=the_marker object_names=.fourbar.follower.*
type=marker
marker modify marker_name=(eval(the_marker))
adams_id=(eval(ip))
variable modify variable_name=ip integer_value=(eval(ip+1))
end
variable delete variable_name=ip
As in the previous example, you can use the EVAL function to get the instantaneous value of an
expression rather than assigning the expression itself.
As shown, you can use wildcards to specify the objects for the OBJECT_NAME parameter. The TYPE
parameter applies a filter to the set of objects, in this case, matching only children of the part that are
markers.
If you use a more general wildcard, Adams View may execute the command more slowly than if you use
a more specific wildcard. For example, if you want all the markers in the model MOD1, use
OBJECT_NAME=.MOD1.* type=MARKER instead of OBJECT_NAME=* type=MARKER.
For more sophisticated searching and filtering, see the database functions, such as DB_CHILDREN, in
the Design-Time Functions section of the Adams View Function Builder online help. You also may want
to use the miscellaneous function SELECT_OBJECT of the same guide.
WHILE/END
Use the WHILE and END commands to execute a group of commands zero or more times. Adams View
executes the commands that WHILE and END bracket repeatedly until the condition associated with the
WHILE command is FALSE (zero).
You can nest any combination of looping (FOR/END, WHILE/END) and conditional constructs
(IF/ELSE/ELSEIF/END).
Format
The format of the WHILE command is:
WHILE CONDITION=(expression)
...
END
Adams View evaluates the value of expression and executes the commands between the WHILE and the
END command if the value is non-zero. Adams View evaluates the expression at the end of the loop and
continues looping as long as the value of the expression is non-zero.
Automating Your Work Using Macros 621
Conditional Constructs and Loops
Examples
In this example, Adams View creates 10 markers, MAR1 through MAR10, on the default part, and
locates them one unit apart on the x-axis of the coordinate system.
variable create variable_name=ip integer_value=0
while condition=(ip < 10)
marker create marker_name=(eval("MAR"//ip+1)) &
location=(eval(ip)),0,0
variable modify variable_name=ip integer_value=(eval(ip+1))
end
variable delete variable_name=ip
You can use the EVAL function to get the value of an expression rather than assigning the expression
itself. Use of the EVAL function with loops is described in the FOR/END.
RETURN
Use the RETURN command to exit a command file or macro and return to the command file or macro
that invoked it. Its effect is similar to BREAK when you use it to exit a loop, skipping all remaining
commands in the command file or macro (including any cleanup commands you may have at the end of
your macro).
If a RETURN is executed within loops (nested to any depth), it exits those loops and performs all required
cleanup, just as multiple BREAKs would do. You can have as many RETURN commands in your
command files or macros as you want.
Format
RETURN
Example
RETURN is often used as a means for recovering from an error condition or allowing a user to cancel an
operation. Below are two examples.
Example 1
In the example, the RETURN command lists information on the contents of the select list, but only if
there are objects on the list. If it finds no objects, it returns and issues an error message.
if condition=(DB_COUNT(.SELECT_LIST, "objects_in_group")==0)
mdi gui_utl_alert_box_1 type="Error" text="Select List is
empty. Select objects first."
return
end !if
!
info empty
!
list_info group &
group_name = .SELECT_LIST &
brief = on &
622 Adams View
Conditional Constructs and Loops
write_to_terminal = on
!
Example 2
This example macro determines if a particular file exists and asks the user if it should overwrite the
existing file.
variable create variable=$_self.fileName string="file.dat"
if condition=(file_exists($_self.fileName))
if condition=(alert("warning", "Delete existing
"//$_self.fileName//"?", "Ok", "Cancel", "", 2) == 2)
variable create variable=$_self.junk &
int=(alert("information", "File "//$_self.fileName//" not
destroyed.", "Ok", "", "", 1))
variable delete variable=$_self.*
return
end
! Clean up.
variable delete variable=$_self.*
Format
condition expression ? expression a : expression b
When evaluated, the conditional takes on one of the two values. The expression that comes before the
question mark is interpreted as Boolean-valued. If it is true (nonzero), then expression a is used as the
value of the conditional, otherwise expression b is used as the value.
Example
For example, consider the commands below:
if condition = (variable_a < variable_b)
variable set variable = variable_min real = (EVAL(variable_a))
else
variable set variable = variable_min real = (EVAL(variable_b))
end
Interface 623
Conditional Constructs and Loops
You can express this more concisely using the ternary conditional operator:
variable set variable = variable_min &
real = (EVAL((variable_a < variable_b)? variable_a : variable_b))
Note: The ternary conditional operator has lower precedence than all other operators. Any
operations performed in sub expressions are performed before the ternary operator is
evaluated:
x < 10 ? x + 10 : x * 10
is the same as:
(x < 10) ? (x + 10) : (x * 10)
Likewise:
s == "Bob" ? "Hello" : "Goodbye" // ", " // s
is evaluated as:
(s == "Bob") ? ("Hello") : ("Goodbye" // ", " // s)
Interface
624 Adams View
About Adams View Menus and Dialog Boxes
Note: You cannot customize all Adams View dialog boxes and tools. For example, you cannot
customize the Plugin Manager or the Information window. The Dialog-Box Builder's
Dialog Box -> Open menu provides access to those dialog boxes, containers, and toolbars
that you can customize.
• Dialog-Box Builder
• Command Navigator
• Data Browser in the plotting window
• File Selection dialog box
• Coordinate window
• Plugin Manager
When you create menus in Adams View, you can specify keyboard accelerators (shortcuts) and
mnemonics.
There are four types of objects in menus: menus, push buttons or icon buttons, toggle buttons, and
separators. The text lines that define these are shown in the table below. Click a text line to learn more.
MENU
A MENU entry creates a pull-down or pull-right menu. First-level menus, MENU1, appear in the menu
bar and pull downward. Lower-level menus, such as MENU2 and MENU3, appear as cascading pull-
right menus.
Syntax
MENUn TITLE
NAME=name
HELP=Help
Parameters
• n = Number identifying whether the menu appears on the menu bar or on a pull-down menu. Can
be either:
• n = 1 - Menu appears on menu bar.
• n 2 - Menu appears on pull-down menus.
• TITLE = Text string that appears in the menu bar. You can also place an & in the title in front of
the letter to be used as the keyboard mnemonic (for example, enter &File to have the resulting
menu be File and the mnemonic would be Alt+F).
632 Adams View
Customizing Menus Using the Menu Builder
• NAME = Name of the object in the modeling database. If you omit NAME, Adams View
constructs a default identifier, such as MENU_4 or BUTTON_7.
• HELP = Text that appears in the status bar and in the tool tips, and describes the menu group.
Example
MENU1 File
NAME=file
HELP=Read and write files
Syntax
BUTTONn LABEL :: ACCELERATOR
NAME=name
HELP=help
CMD=command
Parameters
• n = Number identifying the placement of the button. Can be either:
• n = 2 - Button appears on pull-down menu.
• n = 3 - Button appears on a sub-menu.
• LABEL = Button name that appears in the pull-down or sub-menu. By convention, you should
include ellipsis (...) after the button name if the button displays a dialog box. You can also place
an & in the label in front of the letter to be used as the keyboard mnemonic (for example, enter
&Save to have the resulting menu command be Save and its mnemonic be Alt+S.)
• ACCELERATOR = Key or series of keys that execute the menu command. To create a series of
keys, you use the Shift, Ctrl, or Alt keys followed by the plus symbol (+) and any letter (a to z)
or function key (F1, F2, and so on). No spaces can be between any of the keys (for example,
Alt+A, instead of Alt + A).
The Shift, Ctrl, and Alt keys are case sensitive (the first letter must be capitalized), while the
key letters are not (user can enter A or a). You also can group the Shift key with the Ctrl and Alt
keys (for example, Shift+Ctrl+A). If you combine the keys, the Shift key must be executed first.
• NAME = Name of the menu object in the modeling database. If you omit NAME, Adams View
constructs a default identifier, such as MENU_4 or BUTTON_7.
• HELP = Text that appears in the status bar or tool tips describing the button.
Interface 633
Customizing Menus Using the Menu Builder
Example
BUTTON2 &Export
NAME=export
HELP=Write data to file
CMD=interface dialog_box display dialog_box_name=.gui.file_export
TOGGLE
A toggle creates a menu entry that toggles between two states. It creates a check mark depending on the
state value (on or off). Make sure that if you create a toggle, you maintain its state. A TOGGLE can be
on a pull-down or sub-menu.
Syntax
TOGGLEn TITLE
NAME=name
HELP=help
STATE=state
CMD=command
Parameters
• n = Number identifying the placement of the toggle. Can be either:
• n = 2 - Toggle appears on pull-down menu
• n = 3 - Toggle appears on a sub-menu
• TITLE = Toggle name that appears in the pull-down or sub-menu.
• NAME = Text that identifies the toggle so that you can define keyboard shortcuts and
mnemonics for it. If you omit NAME, Adams View constructs a default identifier, such as
MENU_4 or BUTTON_7.
• HELP = Text that appears in the status bar or tool tips describing the toggle.
• STATE = Current state of toggle (on or off).
• CMD = Command to execute.
SEPARATOR
A separator creates a horizontal line between menu entries on either a pull-down or sub-menu to indicate
groups of comments.
Syntax
SEPARATORn
634 Adams View
Customizing Menus Using the Menu Builder
Parameters
• n = Number identifying the placement of the separator. Can be either:
• n = 2 - Separator appears on pull-down menu
• n = 3 - Separator appears on a sub-menu
Example
SEPARATOR2
These menu commands are helpful if you have a new version of Adams View or created a new Modeling
database and want to read in your customized menus.
To import text:
1. In the Menu Builder, place the cursor at the location you want to bring in the text.
2. From the Menu Builder File menu, select Import.
3. Enter the name and location of the text file containing the menu text.
4. Select OK.
6. On the Tools menu, point to Ribbon → Read and select the my_ribbon.xml from the
my_custom_ribbon folder.
7. The following Ribbon will be displayed. Moving your mouse over these icons will display the tool
tip text that had been set in my_ribbon.xml.
8. Selecting the light icon will open the Lighting settings dialog box as shown below:
9. Clicking on the Color icon will open the Modify Background color dialog box as shown
below:
638 Adams View
Customizing the Ribbon
10. If you want to revert to the original Ribbon provided with the installation, select Tools → Read
Local Ribbon.
11. If you want my_ribbon.xml to be launched at the startup, then add the following line to
aview.cmd file in the working directory and keep the my_ribbon.xml in the same working
directory along with the icons.
interface ribbon read filename = "my_ribbon.xml"
Interface 639
Customizing the ModelBrowser for Adams View
Structure of ModelBrowser.xml
The various tags and attributes in ModelBrowser.xml explained in the below table.
For example, if variable DV_1 is a child MODEL_1 and variable DV_2 is a child of DV_1 the model
browser will show:
A variable created under DV_2 will not be shown since the model browser does not support more than 2
levels.
In order to see all variables under the model, the model browser will have to be customized.
Copy the ModelBrowser.xml to the current working directory and modify the section related to 'Design
Variables' as below:
<Folder Name="Design Variables">
<L1 Exhaustive="true">variable</L1>
</Folder>
642 Adams View
Customizing the ModelBrowser for Adams View
On running Adams View with the above change, all the variables under the active model can be seen in
the model browser
Interface 643
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder
Note: You cannot customize all Adams View dialog boxes and tools. For example, you cannot
customize the Plugin Manager or the Information window. The Dialog-Box Builder's
Dialog Box -> Open menu provides access to those dialog boxes, containers, and toolbars
that you can customize.
Note: You cannot customize all Adams View dialog boxes and tools. For example, you cannot
customize the Plugin Manager or the Information window. The Dialog-Box Builder's
Dialog Box -> Open menu provides access to those dialog boxes, containers, and toolbars
that you can customize.
644 Adams View
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder
Tip: After displaying a dialog box from the Tools menu, you can double-click the
background of a displayed dialog box to display the Dialog-Box Builder and modify
the dialog box.
Adding Objects
You can add Interface objects to your dialog box.The instructions for adding objects to your dialog box
are the same for all types of objects.
You can also click the left mouse button, and Adams View creates an object of default size.
Adding Images
You add an image to your dialog box just as you add a label. The image format for the label must be:
• Motif - .xbm (X BitMap) or .xpm (X PixMap)
• Windows - .bmp (must be a 16-color bitmap)
You cannot size the image in the Dialog-Box Builder. Therefore, if you want to fill the entire dialog box,
you'll need a very big image.
For sample images, see the directory /install_dir/aview/bitmaps where install_dir is the directory where
you installed your Adams products.
To add an image:
1. On the Create menu, select Label.
2. Draw the label so it fits the size of the image.
3. Double-click the label to activate it.
646 Adams View
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder
Tip: To see the image, you may need to select Test Box from the Options menu.
• Using the Arrow tools in the Dialog-Box Builder. The tools move objects
to the edges of the dialog box or to the edges of other objects. The tools are located along the top
of the Dialog-Box Builder.
Learn about Setting Distance Between Interface Objects.
6. Select Apply.
To increase the size of objects using the last four arrow icons on the
Dialog-Box Builder toolbar:
1. Select the object(s).
2. Click on the arrow icon indicating the direction in which you want to increase your object(s).
2. Increase or decrease the size of your object by moving the reshaping handles.
5. Select Apply.
To make two or more objects the same height or width with respect to the first object
you select:
1. Select the objects. The height and width are with respect to the first object you select.
2. Select one of the following:
• Height tool to make objects the same height.
• Width tool to make objects the same width.
2. Enter a value for Horizontal and Vertical Border Width to specify the distance from the object
to the dialog box border.
3. Enter a value for Horizontal and Vertical Separation to specify the distance between other
interface objects.
Note: Because the snap grid points are not visible, and the default grid is very fine (2 pixel
distance), snapping is not very noticeable by default.
Note: The following steps only include instructions for linking your dialog box to a help file; they
do not explain how to create HTML help files. Refer to HTML reference guides.
2. In the Tip Text text box, enter the text you want displayed in the Status toolbar (at the bottom of
the Adams View window) when your dialog box is open.
3. In the Help File text box, enter the complete path and file name of your help file.
Note: You do not need to complete the Help Link text box. It is used for backward
compatibility only.
Include identifiers starting with the symbol $, to indicate where to substitute text. There are four kinds of
substitutions:
IFor example, to include the contents of the field my_value in a command, you
enter:
If the field contains 123, then Adams View executes the command:
By default, the value of an option menu or radio box is the text of the displayed
or selected button. By default, the value of a toggle is on or off.
You can specify other values for Adams View to substitute. In the toggle
button Value attributes, there are fields to set the toggle values. In the Option
Menu and Radio Box Value attributes, you can add a substitution value after
the text for each choice, separated by a vertical bar "|". The values do not affect
the displayed text; they are only used in commands.
The Object: Has the value:
Field Contents of field
Option-menu Selection of value for current selection
Radio-box Selection or vale for current selection
Toggle button On/off or specified on/off value.
Slider Integer slider value
Interface 653
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder
$_value $_value substitutes the value of the object that contains the command. For
example, if the commands are on a button named my_toggle, $_value is the
same as $my_toggle. Another example might be if you want to create a toggle
button that returns a value of "1" or "0". You would do so with commands like
the following:
if condition=($_value)
! commands executed when user turns on toggle
else
! commands executed when user turns off
toggleend
Wherever possible, you should use $_value instead of the name of the actual
object because it is easier to understand and maintain since it does not rely on
the name of the object holding the command. If you see $_value in a
command, you know immediately that it refers to the value of the interface
object. In addition, if you change the name of the object, you do not need to
change the commands. You will find this especially helpful for toggle buttons,
radio boxes, and option menus, where you almost always want the value of the
object in the associated commands.
$_self, $_parent, These substitute the name of the object executing the commands, the object's
$_topgui immediate parent, or the parent dialog box, window, or toolbar. When Adams
View executes the commands, it substitutes the full database name of the
appropriate object.
$_self, $_parent, and $_topgui help you make your dialog boxes easier to read
and maintain. For example, a dialog box can load one of its child fields with
this command:
Note that $_value and $_self are different, but easy to confuse. $_value inserts
the value of the object, $_self inserts the name of the object.
654 Adams View
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder
$_1, $_2, $_3,... These refer to parameters passed with a window or dialog-box display
command.
The window or dialog-box, and any child of the window or dialog box, can
include $_1,... in the commands. When Adams View executes the commands,
it substitutes the current value of the parameter. This allows you to pass
information to a window or dialog box as you display it. You might, for
example, pass the name of an object to a dialog box. Commands executed by
the dialog box or objects in the dialog box can then refer to this object.
$_1, $_2, $_3,... These refer to parameters passed with a window or dialog-box display
command.
The window or dialog-box, and any child of the window or dialog box, can
include $_1,... in the commands. When Adams View executes the commands,
it substitutes the current value of the parameter. This allows you to pass
information to a window or dialog box as you display it. You might, for
example, pass the name of an object to a dialog box. Commands executed by
the dialog box or objects in the dialog box can then refer to this object.
Example
Conditional expansion allows for the commands for custom interface objects to ignore parameters in
which the user does not enter any value. Back quotes [ parameter=value ] indicate parameters that will
be collapsed when the command is executed. This makes the resulting custom interface object easier to
use and relieves you from having to handle error checking for empty fields.
Interface 655
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder
The Easy Beam Properties custom dialog box below shows how conditional expansion can be used.
The command for this dialog box modifies the indicated beam's properties as shown below:
force modify element_like beam &
beam_name = $f_beam_name &
youngs_modulus = $f_youngs_modulus &
shear_modulus = $f_shear_modulus &
damping_ratio = $f_damping_ratio
The problem with this configuration is that the user must enter all of the fields in the dialog box or the
entire command fails. For example, if the user left the Damping Ratio Field blank, its command would
fail with the following error:
ERROR: ---------------------------------------
ERROR: Invalid input. Enter a number.
ERROR: The command was not executed.
ERROR: &> damping_ratio =
ERROR: -------------------------------
If the command is modified to incorporate conditional expansion, the user could leave fields blank
without affecting the execution of the command.
To add the conditional expansion, you add back quotes ( ) for each parameter. The resulting command
looks like the following:
force modify element_like beam &
beam_name = $f_beam_name &
youngs_modulus = $f_youngs_modulus &
shear_modulus = $f_shear_modulus &
damping_ratio = $f_damping_ratio
Now the command can handle blank fields. For example, if the user of the dialog box leaves the Shear
Modulus field blank with the new command, the following command is executed:
force modify element_like beam &
beam_name = .model_1.ebm_beam4 &
656 Adams View
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder
Example
You can display windows and dialog boxes with a list of parameters. These parameters can be used by
the interface objects and commands within that interface object. The parameters are passed as quoted text
strings into the interface object.
Once the window or dialog box is displayed, it can make use of these parameters in its own commands.
These parameters are automatically assigned the special names $_1, $_2, ..., $_n, for each parameter that
is passed to it.
This functionality is especially useful for specifying default values for fields or other interface objects in
the new window or dialog box. For example, a button labeled Easy Beam Size has been added to the
Interface 657
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder
custom Easy Beam Properties dialog box. The button contains commands that display a new dialog box
for further modification of a beam:
The name of the beam is passed to the new dialog box so that it automatically loads the relevant
parameters. The command for the Easy Beam Size button is:
interface dialog_box display &
dialog_box_name = .gui.db_beam_size &
'parameters="$f_beam_name"'
In addition to specifying the name of the dialog box to open, the command also specifies a parameter to
pass to the new dialog box.
The start command for the new Easy Beam Size dialog box uses this passed parameter to automatically
load the current values for the beam as shown below:
if condition=("$_1" != "")
interface field set field_name=$_self.f_beam_name str="$_1"
end
if condition=("$f_beam_name" != "")
interface field set &
field_name=$_self.f_length &
database_field="$f_beam_name.length"
interface field set &
field_name=$_self.f_area_of_cross_section &
data_base_field="$f_beam_name.area"
interface field set &
field_name=$_self.f_i_marker_name &
database_field="$f_beam_name.i_marker_name"
name of the beam). The second if statement checks to see if the field was set to a beam name. If so, it gets
the current values for the beam and sets the appropriate fields.
Window and dialog box parameters are useful tools for communicating information between interface
objects. To pass multiple parameters, separate them with commas, as in the following example:
interface dialog_box display dialog_box=my_dialog_box
parameters="parameter1", "parameter2", "parameter3"
When the new dialog box appears, it has access to those parameters as $_1, $_2, and $_3, respectively.
Editing Commands
Holding down the right mouse button over the Commands area of the Dialog-Box Builder displays a
shortcut menu with several options for editing the commands as shown in the table below.
Note: You can also save your dialog box by saving your modeling database as a binary file.
All of your changes are saved if you save a binary file.
Before you reload your dialog box, note that Adams View does not allow the command file to create
interface objects with the same names as objects that already exist in the database. You must delete or
rename to read in the command file.
This is the most reliable way of ensuring your custom dialog boxes are upwardly compatible with new
versions of Adams.
Authoring Plugins
660 Adams View
Introduction
Introduction
By definition, a plugin is a computer program that can or must interact with some other program to
provide a specific functionality. Plugins typically use the UI of their parent program and rely on the native
environment of their parent to provide this functionality.
Plugins in Adams
Adams provides plugins as a very powerful way of customization. With plugins, the end user can modify
the Adams environment to suit their needs. This may involve anything from personalizing the UI (menus,
adding custom dialogs etc.) to writing custom routines, directly called by the Adams Solver at runtime.
Information is organized into the following sections:
• Section 1 - This section talks in brief about the files that constitute a plugin, their contents and
their role.
• Section 2 - This section talks about the locations in which the plugin files can reside.
• Section 3 - This section talks about the directory structure in which the files should reside in one
of the locations.
• Section 4 - This section talks about the Ribbon customization for plugins.
Authoring Plugins 661
Section 1: The basic plugin
Plugin xml
The plugin xml serves to publish the existence of a plugin to the product (View, Car, PPT and so on.).
The plugin manager makes use of the xml files that belong to the individual plugins to create a
consolidated list of plugins that is available for use with the current product.
Among other things, the xml contains information such as the plugin name, version and author as well
as the list of products with which the plugin is compatible. This information is made use of by the plugin
manager to display the information about the plugin in its UI as shown below,
It is recommended, that while creating new plugins, existing plugin xml files be used as reference.
Explanation for some of the most common tags in the xml file is given below,
662 Adams View
Section 1: The basic plugin
View GUI
The view GUI is a full or a partial binary file containing a View library object. The library has the same
name as that of the plugin (.plugin). The library object typically contains all the macros, UDE definitions
and dialog boxes which the plugin makes use of.
The library object also contains a load macro (.plugin.load). The load macro is typically responsible for
making changes to the parent UI (like adding plugin specific menus to the parent UI) during the plugin
load operation. It is important that the load macro uses a User-Entered Command, for instance:
myplugin load
The user-entered command is required to have the load macro called upon plugin startup. For this, it
might reference other menu or command files. After Adams View loads the binary, the plugin library will
be searched for this macro for the load process to continue.
Authoring Plugins 663
Section 1: The basic plugin
The View library object will also contain a corresponding unload macro (.plugin.unload). The unload
macro is complementary to the load macro and usually restores the parent environment when the plugin
is unloaded.
Also, plugin dialog boxes should have commands which call plugin specialized macros instead of
building long command structures in the dialog boxes itself. The plugin load operation automatically sets
an environment variable within the Adams View session which helps locate the binary file from which
the plugin was loaded. The variable name is plugin_BIN_DIR where plugin is the upper-cased version
of the plugin name. This can be used in the plugin load macro, for instance, to read gui components that
are inside the plugin library.
Example:
macro create macro = .plugin.load &
user = “mdi plugin load” &
com = “file binary read &”, &
“ file = (getenv(\” PLUGIN_BIN_DIR \”) // \” plugin.bin \”) & “, &
“ entity = .gui.main.mbar.my_menu”
This plugin binary must be named plugin.bin (where plugin is the name of the plugin).
Note that no database object in the plugin library references any object outside of the library, otherwise
an unresolved dependency would be introduced between the plugin and the parent application.
664 Adams View
Section 1: The basic plugin
The bitmap below shows the controls plugin components as seen through the database navigator. Note
the library name (which is the name of the plugin) and the load/unload macros beneath the library.
Solver DLL
This binary contains the custom written functions/routines which are used by the solver during analysis.
The functions can be written in C or FORTRAN and can reside in any number of files. The solver dll is
created using the ‘adams2016 –c cr-u’ command.
The naming convention for the solver dll is plugin.{so, sl, dll}, with the extension specific to the platform
under consideration. The convention is not a requirement. It is a recommendation, just so that the solver
dll is easily distinguished from the view dll.
It is recommended that the solver dll have the two standard functions DLL_INIT and
DLL_TERMINATE, although having them is not a requisite. The INIT and TERMINATE functions have
the same role as the initialize and the terminate functions of a View dll. Typical initialization operations
for a solver dll include allocating memory for the plugin, checking out licenses and opening device
Authoring Plugins 665
Section 1: The basic plugin
handles while termination operations include de-allocating the memory, returning licenses and closing
any open device handles.
The init function is called by the solver as soon as the statements FUNCTION = USER(…), ROUTINE
= libname::fname1 are encountered by the solver. Solver will not initialize the same DLL more than once.
Conversely, DLLs are automatically unloaded under the following conditions,
• A new database is opened
• Solver changed from C++ to FORTRAN or vice-versa.
• The STOP command is issued
• The FILE command is used to read a new model
Again, solver will not call the DLL_TERMINATE function more than once for each dll. Also note that
the terminate function will be called only if the init function was called in the first place.
666 Adams View
Section 2: The search path algorithm for plugin discovery
3. Site location
The site location is specific to verticals and is not applicable to View. This location is defined by
an environment variable which has the format MDI_<product_name>_SITE, where
product_name is the product under consideration. The environment variable is set to the desired
location/locations by the user in the form of a colon separated (semi-colon separated on windows)
list of directories. The site environment variable for individual products is listed below,
For a given product, the list of directories in the corresponding environment variable will be
checked for the existence of a plugin.
4. Installation path
The environment variable $topdir is set to the installation path of the Adams product. The
platform specific sub-directory (win32, hpux11 etc.) as applicable, will be searched for in the
plugin directory, if present in the installation path. Note that the environment variable
$MDI_CPU is set to the appropriate platform. So essentially, the location
$topdir/plugin/$MDI_CPU will be searched for the existence of the specified plugin.
5. Library path
On different platforms, the library path is specified using different environment variables. The list
of the library path environment variable on individual platforms is as specified below,
This variable contains a colon/semi-colon separated list of directories. Individual directories will
be searched for during the plugin load operation.
6. Current working directory
The current working directory is the last location which will be searched for the existence of the
plugin.
668 Adams View
Section 3: The Plugin directory structure
Note: The Plug-in Manager will display a plug-in, if plug-in .xml file located within any sub-
directory inside MDI_USER_PLUGIN_DIR. However the solver and view dll's will only
be searched in the paths mentioned above, not within any sub-directory inside
MDI_USER_PLUGIN_DIR. So, if there is a plug-in .xml file that is contained in a folder
C:/Plugins/Y for plug-in X, then this plug-in X will be displayed in the plug-in manager,
but when the user tries to load the plug-in, it may result in an error since the binary and
view, solver dll's are searched in the 4 paths mentioned above.
The help files associated with a plugin should be placed in the help directory located inside the root.
Similarly examples associated with the plugin should be placed in a directory called as examples. Both,
the xml file and the bin file should be located directly in the root and not inside any directory.
A possible directory structure is shown below,
<Plugin searchable location>
X (root directory)
- rh_linux (o)
- win32 (o)
- win64 (o)
- SuSE linux (o)
- help (o)
- examples (o)
Directories that are optional are marked with an (o) beside them.
Authoring Plugins 669
Section 4: Ribbon customization for plugins
1 Copy any existing plugin files (supertools_plg.xml, supertools.bin, others) and all new icon
files (.xpm) to a "plugin directory" of your choice. Now set the environment variable
MDI_USER_PLUGIN_DIR with this path (for example, "C:\Plugins").
2 The existing .xml file, supertools_plg.xml, residing in the 'plugin directory', should have the
following <ribbon> element appended to it as below:
<ribbon>
<Tab Name="Plugins" Help="">
<Group Name="SuperTools">
<Button Name="Load Super Tools" row="0" col="0">
<tip_text>Load my Super Tools Plugin</tip_text>
<icon_name>lightings.xpm</icon_name>
<single_click_commands>
if cond=(!DB_EXISTS(".mdi.plugins.supertools"))
plugin load plugin_name = supertools
else
interface menu display menu_name=
.gui.main.ribbon_plugin.supertools
end
</single_click_commands>
</Button>
</Group>
</Tab>
</ribbon>
3 The .xpm file must exist in the same folder as the 'plugin directory' or in the current Adams View
working directory.
672 Adams View
Section 4: Ribbon customization for plugins
4 The plugin binary file (supertools.bin in this example) typically contains load and unload
macros (see Section 1: The basic plugin). A typical role of the load macro is to create custom
menus for this plugin. In the 'classic' Adams View interface the load macro would put new
menus on the existing menu structure.
In the modern (ribbon) interface of Adams View there exists a new container element named:
.gui.main.ribbon_plugin
You can add menu items, using the load macro, under .gui.main.ribbon_plugin and display
this menu when a button is clicked on the ribbon. For example, the load macro for 'supertools'
might contain these commands to create a menu and a button:
interface menu create menu_name =
.gui.main.ribbon_plugin.supertools label = "Super"
interface push_button create push_button_name =
.gui.main.ribbon_plugin.supertools.butt_1 label = "Push Me"
commands = " view zoom auto_zoom = on"
Now when the ribbon button is clicked (refer xml section), the Adams View menu named
.gui.main.ribbon_plugin.supertools is displayed.
5 Rebuild (see Creating Partial Binary (.bin) Files) the plugin partial binary (supertools.bin in this
example) if necessary. Ensure that the partial binary exists in the MDI_USER_PLUGIN_DIR
location.
6 Ensure that MDI_USER_PLUGIN_DIR is set properly, then open Adams View.
7 The plugins tab should display a new icon for the plugin. A first click on the icon loads the
plugin, subsequent clicks display the menu for the plugin.
Authoring Plugins 673
Creating Partial Binary (.bin) Files
You can import all other formats using standard Adams View.
Can be:
File format: Description: Imported Exported
Adams Solver Describes a model using Adams Solver Data Yes Yes
dataset (.adm) Language (ADL) statements.
Adams Solver Set of three Adams Solver analysis files: request, Yes Yes
analysis files (.req, results, and graphics. You can import the entire set
.res, .gra) or just a single analysis file.
Adams View Set of Adams View commands. You can use Yes Yes
command file command files to automate the creation of a model
(.cmd) or the investigation of simulation results.
Test data Numerical results generated from an external Yes No
program.
Numeric data Numerical results generated during an Adams No Yes
View session.
CAD files Model geometry. You can import and export the Yes Yes
following formats: STEP, IGES and Parasolid.
Can be:
File format: Description: Imported Exported
Shell Geometry representations. Yes (Adams Yes
PostProcessor)
Adams All the files required to view the results of No Yes
PostProcessor simulations in a stand-alone version of Adams
PostProcessor.
RPC III and DAC Requires Adams Durability. For more Yes Yes
information, Adams Durability online help.
For translation via 'Adams Geometry Translators', the table below lists the format and version support
information.
The Start Server and Stop Server buttons (or corresponding commands above) will start a new TCP/IP
server in Adams View that listens for commands. Simple output from the server is displayed in the main
window of the dialog box above. Starting the server yields output like the following:
Exchanging Data in Adams 681
Adams Command Server
The server has started and is listening for client connections on the TCP/IP port 5002.
Note: The intended usage of the Adams View Command Server is to run one Adams Command
Server session per Adams View database.
3. Binary mode: on or off. Commands beginning with the string "binary" toggle binary mode for
queries on and off. See section Detailed Query Response Handling for binary vs text queries.
Example:
"binary on"
• Lines 8-14: parse the query_description to determine data type and number of values sent.
Format into readable variables and print a description.
Note: Query data is returned from the server in string form by default. The server can also return
data in binary mode for greater efficiency. Examples below, unless noted otherwise, are
presented in the default text (not binary) response mode. Communication with the
Command Server for queries must follow this pattern (default text query response mode
shown, not binary mode):
The size parameter in text query mode generally returns a value of 0 and can be ignored. If binary queries
are turned on then the size parameter represents the size of the packed array structure to be sent from the
server to the client. The client can use this information when reading the data stream from the server.
Query Examples
1. Query for an array of numbers, such as a location (server is in text query mode):
• Of type string
• 1 string being returned
• Size undefined (max 1024
bytes)
3 OK Client acknowledges receipt of
above.
4 suspension Server sends data as a string.
• Of type string
• Array contains 4 elements
• Size undefined (max 1024
bytes)
3 OK Client acknowledges receipt of
above.
4 ('.suspension.ground', Server sends data as a string.
'.suspension.Lower_Arm', Client must parse string to split
'.suspension.Upper_Arm', comma and other characters.
'.suspension.Spindle_Wheel')
• Of type integer
• Array contains 3 elements
• Total size of response is 12
bytes
3 OK Client acknowledges receipt of
above.
4 (19, 20, 17) Server sends data as a packed
integer array. Client must unpack
array to retrieve elements.
688 Adams View
Adams Command Server
Importing CAD Data reduces the need to recreate geometry primitives within Adams View and enhances
your ability to realistically view the behavior of complicated mechanical systems. You can also use the
imported geometry for model building in Adams View and for locating parts, constraints, and forces
based on the imported geometric data.
For recommendations of the best ways to export data from the CAD packages so you can import it
effectively into Adams, see Recommendations for Exporting CAD Data.
Linear Approximation
Adams View directly supports only a subset of the geometry encountered in the IGES file. Some of the
unsupported IGES entities are approximated using a technique called linear approximation. Adams View
translates the nonlinear entities (for example, surface, curve, and so on) it encounters in the IGES file to
polylines. For IGES curves, surfaces, and annotation entities that are nonlinear in definition, linear
approximation produces a piecewise linear string of points or polygons that approximates the geometry
to within a specified tolerance. For more information, refer to the discussion of the tolerance option in
Import - STEP, IGES.
Unit Conversion
The import process in Adams View automatically converts all coordinate data in the IGES file to the
internal units (meters, kilograms, seconds) of Adams View.
• Defining Levels Before Generating IGES File (this is the recommended method)
• Generating Separate IGES File
• Importing Assembly as One Part
Imported Subfigures
Adams View does not support subfigures. Therefore, Adams View does not import any geometry defined
as subfigures in an IGES file.
Exported Colors
Adams View writes the colors of geometric entities to the IGES file. It supports any color defined within
Adams View. The RGB (red, green, blue) values are stored as entity number 314, Color Definition, in the
IGES file. Note that not all IGES vendors support RGB color values.
Exported Visibility
Adams View translates invisible geometric objects to the IGES file as blanked entities. The visibility of
the object as it appears in Adams View determines how it is interpreted when written to the IGES file as
shown in the table below.
Now you have the model with different graphics elements attached to correct parts and at correct
locations and orientations.
A convenient way to read in an entire Viewpoint dataset and avoid some of the problems mentioned
earlier is to reduce the number of group names in the dataset before importing it into Adams View.
Generally, groups in the Wavefront file become parts in Adams View. If a part already exists that has the
same name as a group, however, the graphics simply attach to the existing part without creating a new
part. If Adams View finds a group with no corresponding part, it creates a new part for the group.
If you have multiple groups with the same name in the Wavefront file, all groups attach to the same
Adams View part but become separate geometric entities. This allows you to use different colors within
the same Adams part to create more realistic images.
The only lines that are significant in the Wavefront file are the ones that begin with g (groups), f (facets),
and v (vertex). Adams View ignores everything else.
To reduce the number of group names, open the dataset in a text editor and substitute names before
importing the set into Adams View. For example, a car body dataset typically has the following group
names:
• g hood
• g fender
• g windows
• g bumper
Change them to the same name so they attach to a single part. For example:
• g body
• g body
• g body
• g body
In general, the simpler the representation of the geometric information the better. This is why we often
recommend that you used Stereolithography over formats such as IGES and STEP. Other simple formats
include render and shell files. Shell files are Adams-specific so you will not find them as part of the
standard CAD export formats. Please remember that some of these formats do not have colors.
Successful transfer of IGES and STEP files from CAD systems to Adams View depends on both systems.
Some CAD systems export information that is easily processed by Adams View while others CAD
systems generate files that are difficult or impossible for Adams View to import. We have taken this into
consideration in the Recommendations for Exporting CAD Data.
• Stereolithography
CATIA If using the • IGES and STEP export is time
Adams_CAD_Translators license, consuming and Adams View can have
then CATIA V4 (.model, .dlv, .exp, difficulties reading the resulting files.
session) files and CATIA V5
(.CATPart, .CATProduct) files can
be read by Adams View directly.
• Stereolithography
• STEP
• IGES
700 Adams View
Importing and Exporting Geometry
• Render
• Stereolithography
• IGES
Solidworks If using the • Exporting from the embedded motion
Adams_CAD_Translators license, product automates the geometry
then Soidworks files (.sldprt and export/import process.
.sldasm) can be read by Adams • Using Parasolid is convenient because
View directly. one file contains all the geometry and
Adams View creates a separate part for
Otherwise, export using Dynamic
each solid.
Designer with Shells (v2000)
• Stereolithography is dependable but
Or, export from Solidworks in requires you to output each part
these formats in order of separately. It only works on solid
preference: bodies.
• Parasolid
• Stereolithography
• IGES
SolidEdge Export using Dynamic Designer • Exporting from the embedded motion
with Shells (v2000). product automates the geometry
export/import process.
Or, export from SolidEdge in these
• Using Parasolid is convenient because
file formats in order of preference:
one file contains all the geometry and
• Parasolids Adams View creates a separate part for
each solid.
• Stereolithography
• Stereolithography is dependable but
• IGES requires you to output each part
separately. It only works on solid
bodies.
Exchanging Data in Adams 701
Importing and Exporting Geometry
!
file analysis read file_name=eject
!
! Remove all but one view (the one that will remain is, the “active”
view),
! and display the bottom view in it (this actually recalls from the
data
! base the set of view attributes saved under the name “bottom”).
!
view management delete view_name=all
view management restore saved_view_name=bottom
!
! Display frame 150 from the simulation graphics file.
!
graphic_results single_frame_display frame_number=150
!
! Create a Postscript hardcopy file of this frame.
!
hardcopy generate
! Done
!
exit confirmation=yes
Adams View calculates the loads on a desired body at the specified output steps in a simulation and
exports the load information to a loads file. The loads file contains a series of load cases where the body
is at an instantaneous dynamic equilibrium, such that the external (applied) forces and joint reactions are
in balance with the inertial and gravitational forces. The loads file can be in any of the three formats listed
above. After Adams View exports the file, you can use the loads file directly in the FEA program without
any conversions or edit the file in a text editor, as desired.
See Export - FEA Loads dialog box help.
For a flexible body, Adams View also populates the table with the node IDs of the load points
that correspond to the node IDs on the part in the FEA program. For a rigid body, you assign
node IDs to the load points as explained next.
• Assign Node IDs to Load Points, if desired - For a rigid body, you can assign IDs to the load
points that correspond to the node IDs on the part in the FEA program before exporting the load
information. You can assign the IDs using either of two ways:
• Type the node IDs into the table in Adams View.
• Store the node IDs in a text file and have Adams View read the file. As Adams View reads a
file, it associates the load points it found on the part with the node IDs and locations listed in
the file. Adams View searches the file for node IDs with locations closest to the ones it found
and fills the node IDs into the table in Adams View.
The node location file must be in the following format with commas (,) separating each
element:
Node IDn, X, Y, Z
Node IDn+1, X, Y, Z
...
If your model contains several node IDs, you might want to create a text file of node IDs.
If you choose not to specify any node IDs, the FEA input file that is generated will contain the locations
(with respect to the FEA coordinate reference) and ADAMS ID labels of the specified marker forces. You
will need to replace the ADAMS ID labels with node IDs in the input file before submitting an analysis.
Redundant Constraints
You cannot export loads at the locations of redundant constraints. This is because Adams removes all
redundant constraints in the simulation. Therefore, forces are not computed for these constraints. It is best
to manually remove redundant constraints defined at a part before simulating if you want to export FEA
loads.
Friction
Reaction loads resulting from friction in joints are not supported. In fact, you receive an error if you
attempt to export loads on joints that include friction.
Exchanging Data in Adams 707
Importing and Exporting FEA Loads
Floating Markers
You cannot export FEA loads if the part has a floating marker. You receive the following error message
from Adams View when you try to export loads for a part with a floating marker:
No application point for reaction force. Unable to export loads on floating markers.
This can happen if there are forces, such as six-component general force, three-component force, or
three-component torque, or higher-pair constraints, such as curve-point or curve-curve, are defined on
the part. In the case of forces, there is a workaround:
• Redefine the force by swapping the I- and J-parts so that the part in question does not have a J-
floating marker.
check "Load" for the row labeled "Co-animation". See Plugin Manager section for more information on
managing plugin. The Co-animation plugin will add a "Co-animation" button to the File → Export menu
in Adams Postprocessor. Click this button to launch the Co-animation dialog box which will prompt for
the information required to export the EnSight .case file (and dependent files) to the working directory.
This .case file can then be read in to EnSight. We recommend EnSight version 10.1.1b but other versions
later than 8.2.1(f) may likely function.
710 Adams View
Importing and Exporting Other Data
! This sample file contains only one component and contains the number
! 3. Because we used an exclamation point (!) in front of each line in
this header
! paragraph, however, Adams View does not read the line starting with
3.
1.5
3.0
Overview
The following example illustrates how you can use the Adams View Controls Toolkit to control the speed
of a part in your model based on a known speed profile. To download the model for this example
(ControlVelocity.cmd), go to the following simcompanion link:
http://simcompanion.mscsoftware.com/KB8014381
To see other examples of the Adams View Controls Toolkit, see the following articles in the
simcompanion website.
All of the connecting lines in the diagram are elements that you can create using the Adams View
Controls Toolkit. The specified speed profile is entered into a spline element named SpeedSpline. You
can create this using Build → Data Elements → Spline → New, and then entering the speed vs. time
profile that you want. (Alternatively, you could select File → Import Test Data to enter your values.)
Examples of Using Adams View 3
Example of Using the Adams View Controls Toolkit
After you run the model for one second and 100 time steps, you see two strip charts:
• The actual ball speed measure
• The desired speed versus time profile (using the defined spline element SpeedSpline)
Overview
The following example demonstrates how to create a contact between a cam and follower on a cam valve.
In the example, you import an Adams View command file that builds the valve cam model for you. You
then create a curve-to-curve contact force to define how the cam and follower come into contact. Finally,
you run a simulation of the model to see the forces acting between the cam and follower. The model is
shown in Figure1.
The command file that you’ll use is in the directory install_dir/aview/examples/user_guide, where
install_dir is the directory in which Adams software is installed.
The example is divided into the following sections:
• Importing the Command File
• Creating the Contact Force
• Simulating the Contact Force
Examples of Using Adams View 5
Example of Using Contact Forces
Note: By default on Windows, files in the installation directory are read-only. During
installation, your system adminstration can choose to change the permissions so
you can write to the installation directory. If this has not been done, you will need
to change the permissions of the above file when you copy them to your working
directory.
To run a simulation:
1. From the Main toolbox, select the Simulation tool .
Examples of Using Adams View 7
Example of Using Contact Forces
2. Set the simulation to have an end time of 1.0 second and 100 output steps.
3. Select the Simulation Start tool .
Notice how the follower lifts off the cam during the simulation.
In the model, a spring damper, SPRING_1, connects the larger part, PART_2, to the smaller part,
PART_3. Another spring damper, SPRING_2, connects PART_3 to ground2. Both parts slide with
respect to the ground in translational joints, JOINT_1 and JOINT_2, respectively.
In this example, you will load a command file that builds the model for you. You then use the Adams
View linear modes controls to view the different modes in the model and plot and view a table of the
eigenvalues.
The command file that you’ll use is in the directory install_dir/examples/user_guide, where install_dir
is the directory in which the Adams software is installed.
The example is divided into the following sections:
• Importing the Command File
• Animating Modes
• View the Eigenvalues
Examples of Using Adams View 9
Example of Animating Natural Frequencies
Note: By default on Windows, files in the installation directory are read-only. During installation,
your system adminstration can choose to change the permissions so you can write to the
installation directory. If this has not been done, you will need to change the permissions of
the above file when you copy them to your working directory.
Animating Modes
To animate the modes:
1. Run a linear simulation.
2. From the Review menu, select Linear Modes Control.
3. In the Linear Modes Control dialog box, select Mode, and then enter mode 1 as the mode to be
animated.
4. Select the Animate tool .
The principal motion in this mode is in PART_2. PART_3 has a relatively small amount of
motion.
5. To reduce the amount of gross motion on the parts, set Max. translation to 20.
6. To animate the second mode, enter 2 for the mode number and select the Animate tool.
In this mode, PART_3 has greater motion than PART_2.
The pair of values closest to the real axis corresponds to mode 1 and the other pair corresponds to
mode 2.
2. Select Close and Delete Plot.
3. In the Linear Modes Control dialog box, select Table.
Two rows of data appear in the information window as shown in Figure 7.
Example Macros
Overview
The following are some example macros:
• Create Marker Macros
• Create Extrusion Macros
relative_to = ground
Example 2 - Macro to Create Marker Midway Between Two Existing Markers (Variation)
The macro shown below is similar to the first macro example in that it creates a new marker midway
between two existing markers. It, however, directs the new marker's z-axis so it points from the first
marker towards the second marker. The two markers that a user specifies must both belong to the same
part and to the same part as the new marker being created.
!$FIRST_MARKER: T=marker
!$SECOND_MARKER: T=marker
! $NEW_MARKER_NAME: T=new_marker
!
defaults orient_axis_and_plane
axis_and_plane_setting=z_axis_zx_plane
!
marker create marker_name=$NEW_MARKER_NAME &
location =
((($FIRST_MARKER.loc_x)+($SECOND_MARKER.loc_x))/2), &
((($FIRST_MARKER.loc_y)+($SECOND_MARKER.loc_y))/2), &
((($FIRST_MARKER.loc_z)+($SECOND_MARKER.loc_z))/2) &
along_axis = $FIRST_MARKER, $SECOND_MARKER &
relative_to = ground
reference_marker=$along_Z_axis_of_marker&
relative_to=ground
Overview
In this example, we use a spline to relate the force of a spring to its deformation. The values in Table 1
show the relation of a force in a spring to its deformation.
Using this table, you can determine the force when deflection equals -0.33, and the force when deflection
equals -0.17. You cannot, however, determine the force when the deflection is -0.25. To determine the
force at any deflection value, Adams View creates a continuous function that relates deflection and force.
The continuous approximation is then used to evaluate the value of the spring force at a deflection of -
0.25. If you input two sets of values (x and y) using a spline data element, you can define the curve that
the data represents.
You would then use the spline data element in a function or subroutine that uses cubic spline functions
to fit a curve to the values. The curve allows Adams View to interpolate a value of y for any value of x.
Procedure
Briefly, the steps that you’d perform to use the spline data element to define the force deflections are:
1. Create the spline using the spline editor or the general method.
Examples of Using Adams View 15
Example of Using Splines
2. Build a simple nonlinear spring-damper, and then modify it to use the spline. To use the spline in
the spring-damper definition, under Stiffness and Damping in the Spring-Damper Modify dialog
box, change the stiffness coefficient to Spline: F=f(defo). Adams View builds a function
expression for you, using AKISPL and modeled spring length as free length.
Note: You can also use a single- or multi-component force to define the force deflections. In this
case, you would select Custom as you create the force, and then modify the force by
entering a function expression, such as:
You can use the Function Builder for assistance in building the expression.
16 Adams View
Example of Using Splines Imported from Test Data to Create Curves
Overview
To create geometric splines from a file you must create a matrix, create a curve using the matrix, and then
create a bspline using the curve. The following steps outline this process.
• Importing Test Data
• Creating a Matrix
• Creating a Curve
• Creating Geometry
Creating a Matrix
Now, you create a matrix. Note that you can also import a matrix from a file formatted as explained in
the MATRIX statement in the Adams Solver online help.
To create a matrix:
1. From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to Matrix, and then select New.
2. Do the following:
• Select Enter input ordered by columns.
• Define the number of rows in matrix (number of points used to define curve).
• Define the Column Count as 3 (x,y,z coordinates).
3. Display the Expression Builder to define the x matrix column from a previously created spline:
• Right-click the Values text area, point to Parameterize, and then select Expression
Builder.
• Set Getting Object Data to All Objects.
• Right-click All Object text area, point to All, and then select Browse.
The Database Navigator appears.
4. From the Database Navigator, select the spline containing the x values necessary to define your
curve. For example:
model_1 -> spline_1
Examples of Using Adams View 17
Example of Using Splines Imported from Test Data to Create Curves
Creating a Curve
To create a curve:
1. From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to Curve, and then select New.
2. Select the matrix name of the matrix you created in Creating a Matrix.
3. Select OK.
Creating Geometry
To create geometry:
1. On the Main toolbox, from the Rigid Body tool stack, select the Spline tool .
2. Create a spline using a few points.
3. Right-click the spline you created, point to its geometry name, and then select Modify.
4. In the Curve Name text box, select the name of the curve created in Creating a Curve.
5. Select a reference marker for the geometry.
6. Select OK to create the bspline.
18 Adams View
Example of Using Splines Imported from Test Data to Create Curves
Note: To have your geometry tightly line up with your curve, you should edit it so that the
segment count is very high (for example, 1000 for a 51-point curve). This will give you a
good representation of the curve shape. Remember, however, that geometry is not crucial
to simulation results. Adams Solver will use your curve information. Therefore, if your
curve shape is not what you would expect, it is your curve that must be modified, not your
geometry.
Examples of Using Adams View 19
Example of Adding a Sensor
Overview
The following example demonstrates how to use a sensor to stop a simulation. In the example, you import
an Adams View command file that builds a model of a garage-door mechanism. In the example, you will
add a sensor to the model to stop the simulation when the bottom of the door reaches the ground. The
garage door model is composed of several rigid sections hinged together, just as many typical garage
doors are.
You construct the sensor so it monitors the vertical component of distance between a point on the bottom
tip of the lowest door section and the global xz plane and stops the simulation when this distance becomes
approximately equal to zero.
Mathematically, the following relationship defines the sensor:
Halt the simulation if DY between tip and ground ≤ 1.0E-3
If this never occurs, run to normal completion
We’ve provided you with two command files that you can use depending on how much of the example
you want to do yourself:
• gdoor_without.cmd - Model with no sensor defined.
• gdoor_with.cmd - Model with sensor defined.
You can also use gdoor_with.cmd if you encounter difficulties with the example or want to check
your work. Use the Simulate → Sensor → Modify menu to see how we created SENSOR_1.
The files are in the directory /install_dir/examples/user_guide, where install_dir is the directory in which
Adams software is installed.
The example is divided into the following sections:
• Importing the Command File
• Simulating the Model without a Sensor
• Adding a Sensor
20 Adams View
Example of Adding a Sensor
Note: By default on Windows, files in the installation directory are read-only. During installation,
your system adminstration can choose to change the permissions so you can write to the
installation directory. If this has not been done, you will need to change the permissions of
the above file when you copy them to your working directory.
To perform a simulation:
1. Perform a dynamic simulation from 0 to 5 seconds with 200 steps.
Without a sensor, the simulation runs to time = 5 seconds even though the bottom tip of the door
goes into the ground (that is, below the global xz plane). This does not sufficiently model what
happens in the physical world, so you need to add a sensor to enhance the realism of your
simulation.
2. Reset the model to its initial configuration.
Adding a Sensor
You’ll now add a sensor that uses the run-time function DY to monitor when the tip of the garage door
crosses ground. DY returns the y component of translational displacement from one object, in this case
ground, to another object, the bottom tip of the lowest door section. When the y component is 0 within a
tolerance of 1.0E-3, the sensor stops the simulation.
To add a sensor:
1. From the Simulate menu, point to Sensor, and then select New.
2. Set Event Definition to Run-Time Expression.
3. Define the Expression to be:
DY(.gdoor.PART_2.tip, .gdoor.ground.frame, .gdoor.ground.frame)
Note: The shortened form DY(tip, frame, frame) also works. For help in defining this function,
right-click the Expression text box and use the Function Builder.
4. Select Non-Angular Values to indicate that the expression measures non-angular values.
5. Now set the value to trigger the sensor action:
a. Set the pull-down menu to less than or equal.
b. In the Value text box, enter 0, which is the value to trigger an action.
c. In the Error Tolerance text box, use the default 1.0E-03, which is the allowable error
between the targeted value (0) and the actual sensed value.
6. In the Standard Actions section, select Terminate current simulation step.
7. Select Stop.
8. Ensure that all other standard and special actions are not selected.
9. Select OK.
To perform a simulation:
• Perform a dynamic simulation from 0 to 5 seconds with 200 steps.
The simulation now stops before reaching 5.0 seconds. The last output step should be at time =
4.6 seconds, and you should receive a message similar to the following:
WARNING: Sensor .gdoor.SENSOR_1 halting simulation at time 4.617.
Note: This will measure the y-displacement of the bottom of the door with respect to ground.
6. Select Non-Angular Values to indicate that the expression measures non-angular values.
7. Set the value to trigger the sensor action:
a. Set the pull-down menu to equal.
b. In the Value text box, enter 0.
c. In the Error Tolerance text box, enter 0.05.
8. In Standard Actions, select Generate additional Output Step at event.
9. Ensure that all other standard and special actions are not selected
10. Select OK.
Now you'll create a function measure to track the evaluation of the sensor.
Overview
The following example demonstrates how to use user-defined measures and illustrates some of the useful
capabilities of measures. In the example, you import an Adams View command file that builds a model
of an ideal pendulum. The simple mathematical model of the ideal pendulum assumes the following:
• The link defining the pendulum has no mass or inertia.
• The sphere is a point mass.
• There is no friction in the revolute joint.
• The pendulum oscillates through a small angle.
You will then create an object measure and a user-defined analytical solution to measure the pendulum’s
kinetic energy. After simulating the model, you will use another user-defined measure to compare the two
kinetic energy measurements.
We’ve provided you with three command files that you can use depending on how much of the example
you want to do yourself:
• test_measures_without.cmd - Model with no measures defined.
• test_measures_with.cmd - Model with two of the four required measures.
• test_measures_final.cmd - Model with all four required measures.
The files are in the directory /install_dir/examples/user_guide, where install_dir is the directory in which
Adams software is installed.
The example is divided into the following sections:
• Importing the Command File
• Creating an Object Measure of Kinetic Energy
• Creating a User-Defined Analytical Measure
• Creating a User-Defined Comparison of the Measures
Examples of Using Adams View 25
Example of Using User-Defined Measures in a Model of a Pendulum
Note: By default on Windows, files in the installation directory are read-only. During installation,
your system adminstration can choose to change the permissions so you can write to the
installation directory. If this has not been done, you will need to change the permissions of
the above file when you copy them to your working directory.
Note: The Function Builder can only process 80 characters per line. To avoid any problems, use
multiple lines to input the kinetic energy expression.
4. Select OK.
A strip chart titled MY_KE appears. Because you have not run a simulation, the chart contains no
information.
5. Run an interactive dynamic simulation for 2.0 seconds with 50 steps (the default). Watch the
feedback of both measures.
Both plots should appear similar in period and magnitude. If not, double check the syntax of your
function.
Examples of Using Adams View 27
Example of Using User-Defined Measures in a Model of a Pendulum
Overview
The following examples illustrate basic tasks you can perform with the Menu and Dialog-Box Builders:
• Modifying a Standard Menu
• Modifying a Standard Dialog Box
• Creating and Modifying a Custom Dialog Box
• Using Command Files to Customize the Interface
The Build menu now contains a button called Verify. To test it, create a model and then select
the Verify button. An information dialog box appears, and tells you whether or not your model
verified successfully.
To delete a tool:
1. On the Tools menu, point to Dialog Box, and then select Modify.
The Database Navigator appears.
2. Double-click moag.
The Dialog-Box Builder appears.
3. Double-click the Main toolbox tool that you want to delete. For example, double-click the Select
tool.
4. In the Dialog-Box Builder, on the Edit menu, select Delete.
Adams View removes the selected tool from the Main toolbox.
Figure 11 Example Dialog Box with One Field and One Button
To see the default material types Adams View supplies, do the following in the
Command Navigator:
1. Double-click +material, and then double-click modify.
A dialog box appears.
2. Right-click the Material Name box, point to Material, and select Browse.
The Database Navigator lists all the default material types.
5. Copy the command used for the Aluminum button and modify it for the other buttons.
6. From the Options menu, select Test Box to activate the new dialog box for testing.
7. Use the right mouse button to click in the field next to the Part label in your dialog box, and select
the part to which you want to apply a certain material type.
8. Click the desired Material button.
Your part now has the assigned material type.
9. Click OK to close the dialog box.
2. Create all your custom dialog boxes that are required to execute the macros, test them to make
sure they work correctly, and then save them as .cmd files. If you create your dialog boxes in
Adams View (by either using the Dialog Box Builder or double-clicking on the name of the macro
from within the Command Navigator), then you should export each to a .cmd file when you are
finished. As with macros, once you get familiar with the Adams View commands necessary to
create custom dialog boxes, you may find it faster and easier to create your associated .cmd files
using a text editor.
3. Create a build .cmd file that contains the commands required to accomplish three main objectives:
• Import each of your macro .cmd files into Adams View.
• Import each of your custom dialog box .cmd files into Adams View.
• Create each of the custom menus in Adams View needed to execute the macros, either directly
or indirectly (by displaying the custom dialog boxes).
Command Files
Table 1 lists and briefly explains the command files that make up this example. The text of the command
files follows the table.
Creates the macros contained in the four mac_ command files (macro create
macro_name = ...)
build_my_gui.cmd
Customizes the interface and imports macros.
! --- Import macros
!
!
macro read &
macro_name = mac_vis_all &
file_name = "mac_vis_all.cmd" &
36 Adams View
Examples of Customizing the Adams View Interface
dbox_sca_down.cmd
Creates a dialog box for scaling markers.
Examples of Using Adams View 37
Examples of Customizing the Adams View Interface
!
interface dialog_box create &
dialog_box_name = .gui.mar_sca_dow &
help_text = "Marker Scale Down" &
location = 410.0, 120.0 &
height = 68.0 &
width = 404.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = attach_left &
vert_resizing = attach_top &
title = "Marker Scale Down" &
iconifiable = no &
execution_commands = "marker scale down &", " ‘markers =
$f_markers‘" &
decorate = yes &
resizable = yes &
grab_all_input = no
!
interface label create &
label_name = .gui.mar_sca_dow.l_markers &
location = 2.0, 2.0 &
height = 25.0 &
width = 160.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = attach_left &
vert_resizing = attach_top &
justified = left &
text = "Markers"
!
interface field create &
field_name = .gui.mar_sca_dow.f_markers &
location = 162.0, 2.0 &
height = 25.0 &
width = 240.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = expand &
vert_resizing = attach_top &
scrollable = no &
editable = yes &
required = yes &
execute_cmds_on_exit = no &
number_of_values = 0 &
object_type = old &
type_filter = marker
!
interface push_button create &
push_button_name = .gui.mar_sca_dow.OK &
location = 138.0, 35.0 &
height = 25.0 &
width = 76.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = attach_right &
vert_resizing = attach_bottom &
label = "OK" &
38 Adams View
Examples of Customizing the Adams View Interface
dbx_sca_up.cmd
Creates a dialog box for increasing the size of markers.
!
interface dialog_box create &
dialog_box_name = .gui.mar_sca_up &
help_text = "Marker Scale Up" &
location = 410.0, 120.0 &
height = 68.0 &
width = 404.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = attach_left &
vert_resizing = attach_top &
title = "Marker Scale Up" &
iconifiable = no &
execution_commands = "marker scale up &", " ‘markers =
$f_markers‘" &
decorate = yes &
resizable = yes &
grab_all_input = no
!
interface label create &
label_name = .gui.mar_sca_up.l_markers &
location = 2.0, 2.0 &
height = 25.0 &
width = 160.0 &
units = pixel &
Examples of Using Adams View 39
Examples of Customizing the Adams View Interface
mac_sca_down.cmd
Creates a macro that scales selected markers.
!USER_ENTERED_COMMAND marker scale down
!WRAP_IN_UNDO NO
!$MARKERS:t=marker:c=0
marker attributes scale=0.5 marker_name=$MARKERS
mac_sca_up.cmd
Creates a macro that increases the size of selected markers.
!USER_ENTERED_COMMAND marker scale up
!WRAP_IN_UNDO NO
42 Adams View
Examples of Customizing the Adams View Interface
! $MARKERS:t=marker:c=0
marker attributes scale_of_icons=2.0 marker_name=$MARKERS
mac_vis_all.cmd
Creates a macro that turns on the visibility of all markers.
!USER_ENTERED_COMMAND marker visibility all_on_off
!WRAP_IN_UNDO NO
marker attributes visibility=toggle marker_name=.*
mac_vis_some.cmd
Creates a macro that turns on the visibility of selected markers.
!USER_ENTERED_COMMAND marker visibility some_on_off
!WRAP_IN_UNDO NO
! $MARKERS:t=marker:c=0
marker attributes visibility=toggle marker_name=$MARKERS
A - D 43
Creates a curve-curve constraint that restricts a curve defined on the first part to remain in contact with
a second curve defined on a second part. The curve-curve constraint is useful for modeling cams where
the point of contact between two parts changes during the motion of the mechanism. The curve-curve
constraint removes two Degrees of freedom from your model.
Learn more about Curve-Curve Constraints.
3D Plot Viewer
Build → Data Elements → Spline → New → Type → 3D → 3D Preview
About Adams
Help → About
Names of objects in the database use a hierarchical naming structure. For example, a block built on the
ground part is named .model_1.ground.block.
48 Adams View
Activate/Deactivate
Activate/Deactivate
Right-click object → (De)activate
Sets the Activation status of a selected object and whether or not the object’s children inherit the
activation status of the parent.
Learn about About the Adams View Modeling Database.
Note: If you want to run all the investigation simulations in the current Adams View session, you
can alter some of the Simulate settings to enable the entire series of simulations to run more
efficiently. Alternately, you can run all the simulations external to Adams View with the
MDI INSIGHT BUILD command. This can be accomplished by saving the experiment
after the workspace has been defined, returning to Adams View, and then issuing the MDI
INSIGHT BUILD command.
Note: If you want to run all the investigation simulations in the current Adams View session, you
can alter some of the Simulate settings to enable the entire series of simulations to run more
efficiently. Alternately, you can run all the simulations external to Adams View with the
MDI INSIGHT BUILD command. This can be accomplished by saving the experiment
after the workspace has been defined, returning to Adams View, and then issuing the MDI
INSIGHT BUILD command.
File Operations
To: Select:
Create a new modeling database Ctrl + n
Open an existing modeling database Ctrl + o
Save the current modeling database Ctrl + s
Print Ctrl + p
Read command file F2
Exit Ctrl + q
Edit Operations
To: Select:
Undo the last operation Ctrl + z
Redo the last undone operation Ctrl- Shift + z
Copy objects Ctrl + c
Paste text in text boxes in dialog boxes and as comments Ctrl + v
Cut text from text boxes in dialog boxes Ctrl + x
Quickly clear text from text boxes Left-click at the start of the text box, and
then press Ctrl-k or Ctrl-K
Delete selected object Del
Modify object Ctrl + e
Escape operation Esc
A - D 53
Adams View Keyboard Shortcuts
Display Operations
To display: Select:
Command window F3
Coordinate window F4
Menu Builder F5
Dialog Box Builder F6
Working grid g
Plotting window (Adams PostProcessor) F8
Help window F1
Viewing Operations
To: Select:
Rotate view in the XY directions r
Rotate view in the Z direction (s pin) s (lowercase)
Translate view t
Change perspective depth d
Dynamically zoom view z
Use dynamic increment Shift
Define a zoom area w
Center view c
Orient view to object (e lement) e
Fit view f
Fit view - no ground Ctrl + F
Orient view to front F
Orient view to right R
Orient view to top T
Orient view to isometric I
Toggle render mode between wireframe and shaded S (Uppercase)
Toggle screen icons on and off v
54 Adams View
Adams View Keyboard Shortcuts
Drawing Operations
The Adams Command Server is an Adams View (or Adams Car) component that manages
communication between Adams View and external software. Examples of external software include
user-written applications created in Microsoft Visual Basic, Python, C, Java or similar. The server listens
for either commands or queries from an external application and manages the command or query
interaction with the Adams model.
The server has a simple interface that is accessible from other programming languages that implement
the TCP/IP communication protocol. The server also contains an interface for Microsoft Visual Basic that
simplifies the communication protocol. See section Adams Command Server more information.
Adams2Nastran
Simulate → Adams2Nastran
Add/Replace Simulations
File → Replace Simulations
Updates the data in the plots with that stored in simulation result files, without recreating the plots. Also
lets you add data from other Simulations to your existing plots.
When you update your plots, Adams PostProcessor looks for simulation results in the original simulation
Results file (for example, a Request file) from which you imported the current data. If the time and date
stamp on the original file is more recent than the time and date stamp on the plot, Adams PostProcessor
reloads the plot with the updated data.
If you use the Add Simulation option, a new legend, called the simulation legend, appears on the left side
of the plot. The simulation legend identifies the source of the data grouped by color or line style. The
original legend, called the curve legend, continues to show information about the original curves.
Aggregate Mass
Tools → Aggregate Mass Shared Dialog Box
Calculates the total mass of a part or parts in your model. Adams View returns the information in the
Information window or in a specified file. It ignores the ground part or any part that has no mass.
By default, Adams View calculates all location coordinates and orientation angles in the current global
coordinate system. You can select a different coordinate system or reference frame relative to which you
would like the coordinates and angles returned. When you express the aggregate mass in the global
coordinate system, Adams View essentially places a temporary marker at the center of mass location and
then it provides the inertia properties about the CM location with respect to the global coordinate system
orientation and location.
The orientation shown is the orientation of the principal moments of inertia.
Learn about Calculating Aggregate Mass of Parts.
Select the desired parts from the list of parts in your model.
• Replace
• Append
• None
File Select if you want the output displayed to a file.
Enter the name of the file in which you want to save the information in the text box.
Brief Output Select to show only a brief summary of aggregate mass information.
A - D 59
Angle Measure
Angle Measure
Build → Measure → Angle → New/Modify
Animation Controls
Review → Animation Controls
Main toolbox →
Allows you to work with Animations and control the frames from your simulation. Animations provide
instant feedback to you as your simulation runs.
By default, each time you run a simulation, Adams Solver replaces the previous animation frames. To
replay earlier animations, you must save them in your modeling database.
A - D 61
Animation Controls
During animations, Adams View displays frames as quickly as it can based on the graphics capabilities
of your computer hardware.
Option/Icon Description
Plays the animation backward.
Slider Click and drag until you reach the number of the frame you want to display.
Base Part/ Lets you set the view perspective or camera angle for an Animation. Setting
Fixed Base/ different animation view perspectives can be especially useful when parts
Std Camera undergo large motions and move off your screen during an animation, such
as with vehicle simulations.
To learn about setting defaults for caching animations see PPT Preferences
- Animation.
Option/Icon Description
Cycles/Loop Sets how many times to replay the animation. The default is to play the
specified sequence of frames once.
In the Cycles box, enter a whole number representing the number of times
you want Adams View to play the animation. It automatically rewinds the
animation before each replay.
Displays the full Animation Controls dialog box.
Option/Icon Description
Time Range Defines a subset of the complete sequence of frames in an animation to
play. By default, Adams View plays the complete sequence of frames. You
can set the interval to view based on time or frame number.
Choose from:
• Time Range - Enter a start time and stop time in the text box. Adams
View replays those frames whose time is within the specified range.
• Time - Enter an interval and select Apply.
• Frame Range - Enter a start frame and an end frame.
• Frame - Enter a frame number and select Apply.
Frame Enter a number of frames to skip. For example, enter 5 to have Adams View
Increment display only every fifth frame.
Superimpose Toggles the overlay of frames on top of one another. By default, during an
animation, Adams View erases the previous frame before drawing the next
frame.
We recommend that you use the frame or time range features, as well as the
frame increment so that only certain frames are superimposed on top of one
another.
Display Driver Visualization of the target path data used by the Driving Machine for
Target Path controlling the vehicle (if available).
Display Driver Visualization of the actual path data of the vehicle as a result of the
Actual Path controlling actions of the Driving Machine.
Learn about:
• Using Animations
• Using Toolboxes, Tool Stacks, and Palettes
A - D 65
Append Run Commands
Options for the operation you selected appear in the dialog box. For example, text
boxes and option button appear for setting the duration of a simulation.
If you select Transient - Dynamic or Transient - Kinematic, the following options appear:
Start at For a Transient Dynamic or Kinematic, select to have Adams View perform a static
equilibrium simulation before performing a Dynamic simulation.
End Enter the time interval over which the simulation takes place and set how you want
Time/Duration it defined. You can select:
• End Time - Specify the absolute point in time at which you want the
simulation to stop.
• Duration - Specify the amount of time over which you want the simulation to
run.
Steps/Step Size Set the frequency with which Adams View outputs data during your simulation.
You can specify:
• Steps - Represents the total number of times you want Adams View to provide
output information over your entire simulation. For example, specify 50 steps
over a 1-second simulation interval to define an output period of 0.02 seconds
per step, which yields an output frequency of 50 steps/second.
• Step Size - Represents the amount of time, in current model units, between
output steps. The output frequency remains constant even if you change your
simulation end time or duration. For example, enter a step size of 0.01 seconds
to specify an output period of 0.01 seconds per step, which yields an output
frequency of 100 steps/second.
If you select Transient - Static Steps/Step Size and End Time/Durations options appear
If you select Equilibrium no other options will appear
66 Adams View
Append Run Commands
Arc Tool
Build → Bodies/Geometry → Arc Tool
Creates arcs and circles centered about a location. You begin drawing an arc by specifying its starting and
ending angles. You then indicate its center location and set its radius and the orientation of its x-axis. You
can also specify the arc’s radius before you draw it. The Arc tool draws the angle starting from the x-axis
that you specify and moving counterclockwise (right-hand rule).
See Elements of an arc.
Before you create arc geometry, you can select to create a new part consisting of the arc geometry or add
the arc geometry to an existing part or ground. If you create a new part, it has no mass since it is composed
of only wire geometry. You can extrude a circle into solid geometry that has mass. Learn about Extruding
Construction Geometry Along a Path.
Assembly Measure
Creates a measure on an assembly.
See Measures and Assemblies.
Associativity
Database Navigator → Associativity
Allows you to display the objects that a selected object uses. For example, you can select a joint in the
tree list to show the I and J markers that the joint uses. You can also select to view the objects that use
the selected object.
Learn about Viewing the Associativity of Objects.
Lets you disable or enable modes based on their contribution of strain energy. Learn more about Enabling
and Disabling Modes Based on Strain Energy Contribution.
Contains four colors to which you can set the background of the View window.
Beam
Build → Forces → Beam Tool
Bode Plots
Plot → Bode Plots
Creates a Bode plot in Adams PostProcessor. Bode plots provide a way to study frequency response
functions (FRFs) for linear systems and linearized representations of nonlinear systems. The frequency
response function measures the response at the outputs due to unit harmonic excitation at the inputs at
various frequencies. A Bode plot in Adams PostProcessor shows the amplitude gain and the phase shift
between input to output for all output/input combinations of the linear system.
Bodies
Displays tools for creating rigid body geometry.
Boss Tool
Hollow Tool
Construction or Contains options for creating the selected object. The options change
Settings depending on the type of object that you are creating. For example, when
Container you create a link, Adams View lets you specify its width, length, and height
before creating it. Then, as you create the link, these dimensions are set
regardless of how you move the mouse. You can also define design variables
or expressions for many values.
78 Adams View
Border and Separation
Allows you to enter values to be used by the Dialog-Box Builder functions that change the geometry of
Interface objects such as align, move, and create predefined. See Aligning Interface Objects and Moving
Interface Objects for more information.
Boss Tool
Build → Bodies/Geometry → Boss Tool
As you create a boss, you can specify its radius and height.
Learn about Creating a Hole or Boss.
Box Tool
Build → Bodies/Geometry → Box Tool
Note: One hotpoint appears after you draw the box. It lets you modify the length, height, and
depth of the box. For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using
Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry
82 Adams View
Bushing Tool
Bushing Tool
Build → Forces → Bushing Tool
A bushing is a linear force that represents the forces acting between two parts over a distance. The
bushing applies a force and a torque. You define the force and torque using six components (Fx, Fy, Fz,
Tx, Ty, Tz).
To define a bushing, you need to create two markers, one for each part. The marker on the first part that
you specify is called the I marker. The marker on the second part that you specify is called the J marker.
Learn about:
• Bushings
• 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Learn about Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:
Pick Feature
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force using the x-, y-, and z-axes
of the current Working grid, if it is displayed, or using the x-, y-, and z-
axes of the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as the face of a part. The direction vector
you select defines the z-axis for the force; Adams View automatically
calculates the x- and y-axes.
Translational K Enter the stiffness coefficients.
Translational C Enter the damping coefficients.
Rotational K Enter the rotational stiffness coefficients.
Translational C Enter the rotational damping coefficients.
A - D 83
STEP, IGES ('Adams Geometry Translators' only)
• Model Name - Lets you specify the Adams View model to be written
to the CAD file. Adams places each rigid body in the model on a
separate level. All geometry written to the IGES file is defined with
respect to the global coordinate system of the Adams View model.
• Part Name - Lets you specify the Adams View part to be written to
the CAD file. Adams writes all the geometry owned by the part to the
CAD file. It defines all geometry in the CAD file with respect to the
part coordinate system.
• Analysis Name - Lets you export a model at a particular simulation
frame (time) of a particular analysis. This is helpful for transferring
position data of an Adams View model to a drafting program to
prepare drawings of the mechanism at various states of operation.
Adams writes all parts and geometry to the CAD file in the same
relative position as they appear in a single frame display.
Display Summary Select to write a verbose log file to the disk. A message will be displayed
indicating the log file to which the translation operation details have been
written.
Translation Options Click on this button to invoke the Manage Geometry Translation Options
dialog box for the relevant geometry and translation operation (read or write).
The dialog box would be pre-filled with the option name, short description of
what the option is for and the default value.
Upon changing the desired option values, click on the 'Done' button. The
translation options so set will be used in the ensuing translation operation.
A - D 85
Chain Tool
Chain Tool
Build → Bodies/Geometry → Chain Tool
Links together wire Construction geometry to create a complex profile, which you can then extrude. The
geometry to be chained together must touch at one endpoint and cannot be closed geometry.
The Chain tool adds the final chained geometry to the part that owns the first geometry that you selected
Note: If you want to use the chained geometry with a pin-in-slot or curve-to-curve constraint, you
must turn the geometry into a spline. See the Spline Tool.
Chamfer Tool
Build → Bodies/Geometry → Chamfer Tool
Note: You will get different results when you chamfer one edge at a time than when you chamfer
all edges at once. Also, you may not be able to chamfer an edge if an adjoining edge has
already been chamfered. It depends on the complexity of the chamfering.
Learn about:
• Chamfering and Filleting Objects
• Fillet Tool
A - D 87
Clearance Compute
Clearance Compute
Tools → Clearance →Compute
When you request to run a Clearance study, Adams PostProcessor calculates the minimum and maximum
distances between a pair of objects using data from a selected Simulation. It adds the information to the
animation associated with the simulation, which you can subsequently run. You can also generate a report
of the data and plot it.
Note: The number of frames in your animation can have a significant effect on the accuracy of
the distances reported. Therefore, for best results, we recommend that you perform at least
one clearance study with a large number of frames in the animation (time steps in the
simulation).
Color Picker
Settings → Colors → Color Picker
Lets you select a basic color or create a custom color to be used for displaying objects and the background
of the Main window and any View windows that you create.
Tip: You can define a custom color by clicking the closest basic color,
modifying it, and then selecting Add to Custom Colors.
Custom Colors Select an empty box to create a custom color or select a custom color you've
already defined so you can modify it.
Color Matrix Click anywhere to select a custom color. Use the pointer to change the hue
and Saturation. Change hue by moving the pointer horizontally; change
saturation by moving the pointer vertically.
Luminosity Slider Drag the slider to change the luminosity or relative lightness or darkness of
a color. Changes the value in the Value text box.
Hue Specify the hue of a color. The values range from 0 to 239.
Saturation Specify the saturation of a color.
Value Specify the luminosity of a color.
Red Specify the amount of red in a color. You can use any combination of red,
green, or blue to define a color.
Green Specify the amount of green in a color. You can use any combination of red,
green, or blue to define a color.
Blue Specify the amount of blue in a color. You can use any combination of red,
green, or blue to define a color.
Add to Custom Colors Select to add the color currently displayed in the color matrix to the palette
of custom colors.
90 Adams View
Command File
Command File
Settings → Command File
Allows you to specify whether Adams View displays the command that it executes in the Command
window or displays the results of the commands on the screen. In addition, it lets you specify what Adams
View should do when it encounters an error while reading an Adams View command file.
Learn more with Import - Adams View Command Files dialog box help.
Note: Use this value only if the command file is a literal recording of
your key strokes, complete with back spaces or other corrections
of mistakes.
Ignore Command Select if you want Adams View to ignore the line on which it found the error
and start processing the next line as a new command.
Command Navigator
Tools → Command Navigator Shared Dialog Box
Enables you to enter Adams View commands without having to know the entire syntax of the commands.
The Command Navigator displays a list of all Adams View command Keywords. You can also search
Keywords.
If the entered string does not contain any wildcard character, all
occurrences of the string as a prefix or suffix will be included in the search.
For example, entering "Marker" in the Search option without quotes will
display the result "floating_marker" as well as "marker". If you want to
search for an exact string without any wildcards, enclose the string in " "
(double quotes). In the above example, if "Marker" is entered with quotes,
only keywords/objects that contain the string "marker" are displayed.
Help Help about selected keyword/object.
Close Select to close the command navigator dialog box.
Learn about:
• Showing, Hiding, or Selecting Keywords
• Getting help in the Command Navigator
92 Adams View
Command Window
Command Window
View → Command Window
F3
Provides a text-based way to enter commands using Adams View command language. It assumes that
you understand the Adams View command language underlying the Adams View interface. The
command window contains both a command entry area for entering commands and a command
information area for displaying informational and error messages:
Learn about Using the Command Window with the Adams View command language.
A - D 93
Comments
Comments
Database Navigator → Comments
Generates a state-space matrix representation of your mechanical system, for use with a control system
design application, such as MATLAB, MATRIXx, or EASY5.
Connectors
Displays tools for creating joints. The tab contains the entire library of joints.
Create/Modify General
Constraint
2D Curve-Curve Constraint Tool
Construction Contains options for creating the selected object. The options change depending
or Settings on the type of object that you are creating. For example, when you create a link,
Container Adams View lets you specify its width, length, and height before creating it.
Then, as you create the link, these dimensions are set regardless of how you move
the mouse. You can also define design variables or expressions for many values.
98 Adams View
Constant-Velocity Joint Tool
Creates a constant-velocity joint that allows two rotations on one part with respect to another part, while
remaining coincident and maintaining a constant velocity through the spin axis.
A - D 99
Constant-Velocity Joint Tool
Creates a gear pair that relates the motion of three parts and two joints using a marker, called the common
velocity (CV) marker, to determine the point of contact. Learn more About Gears.
To create a marker, right-click the Common Velocity Marker text box, and then
select Create.
Tip: If you encounter a warning message that the gear has a suspicious
configuration, the z-axis of the CV marker is probably oriented
incorrectly.
102 Adams View
Constraint Modify Complex Joint Gear
Modifies a gear pair that relates the motion of three parts and two joints using a marker, called the
common velocity (CV) marker, to determine the point of contact. Learn more About Gears.
To create a marker, right-click the Common Velocity Marker text box, and
then select Create.
Changes the basic properties and sets initial conditions for a 2D curve-curve constraint. Learn more with
2D Curve-Curve Constraint Tool.
Note: You can also modify constraint properties using the Table Editor.
Changes the basic properties and sets initial conditions for a point-curve constraint. Learn more with
Point-Curve Constraint Tool.
Note: You can also modify constraint properties using the Table Editor.
Ref Marker Name Enter marker that is fixed on the part containing the curve on which the point
must move. Adams Solver uses the reference marker to associate the shape
defined by the curve to the part on which the reference marker lies. The curve
coordinates are, therefore, specified in the coordinate system of the reference
marker.
Displacement Ic/ No Select either:
Displacement Ic
• Displacement Ic - Enter the initial point of contact along the curve.
If the point you specify is not exactly on the curve, Adams View
uses a point on the curve nearest to the point you specify. By default,
you specify the initial point of contact in the coordinate system of
the part containing the curve or specify it in the coordinate system of
the marker you specify for Ic Ref Marker Name.
• No Displacement Ic - Leaves the initial displacement unset.
Learn about Higher-Pair Constraints Initial Conditions.
A - D 109
Constraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Point Curve
• Enter the marker with which the initial point of contact on the curve
is specified.
• Leave blank. Adams View uses the coordinate system of the part
containing the curve.
110 Adams View
Controls_measure_panel
Controls_measure_panel
Modify Controls Block dialog box → Output Measure button
Coordinate System
Settings → Coordinate System
Lets you set the default coordinate system for a Modeling database.
Learn about Coordinate Systems in Adams View.
• Cartesian.
• Cylindrical.
• Spherical.
Rotation Sequence Select the type of rotation sequence. See Rotation Sequences.
Body Fixed/Space Fixed Select either:
• Space fixed - Adams View applies the rotations about axes that
remain in their original orientation.
• Body fixed - Adams View applies the rotations about axes that
move with the body as it rotates.
As Adams View applies each rotation to an axis, it produces a new set of
axes.
112 Adams View
Coupler Joint Tool
It relates the translational and/or rotational motion of the joints through a linear scaling of the relative
motions or through nonlinear relationships that you define by entering parameters to be passed to a user-
written subroutine that is linked into Adams View. Couplers are useful if your model uses belts and
pulleys or chains and sprockets to transfer motion and energy. Although you can couple only two or three
joints, more than one coupler can come from the same joint, as shown in the figure above.
When you create a coupler, you can only create a two-joint coupler. You select the driver joint, the joint
to which the second joint is coupled, and the coupled joint, the joint that follows the driver joint. To
specify the relationship between the driver and the coupled joint or to create a three-joint coupler, you
modify the coupler.
Learn about Creating Couplers.
A - D 113
Create Butterworth Filter
Curve Edit toolbar → Filter Curve Tool → Right-click Filter Name text box → filter_function → Create → Create from
Butterworth Filter
Creates a Butterworth filter to define the coefficients of a transfer function when creating a curve filter
function. The first four options in the dialog box are the same as when you are creating a Butterworth
filter directly. See Create/Modify Filter Function dialog box help. To generate these options based on
Passband and Stopband options, select the Generate Filter Order _ Frequency checkbox.
Learn about Filtering Curve Data.
Using the notation Passband Corner Frequency=fp and Corner Frequency=fs, the following rules apply
for the options below:
• To create a low-pass filter, give one value each for fp and fs, and fp < fs.
• To create a high-pass filter, give one value each for fp and fs, and fp > fs.
• To create a bandpass filter, specify two values each for fp and fs, such that fs1< fp1< fp2 < fs2.
You cannot create a bandstop filter using the options below.
Create Clearance
Tools → Clearance → Create
You can also select Pick to select the object from the screen. (You can select
more than one object at a time.)
J Body Select the second object in the pair.
You can also select Pick to select the object from the screen. (You can select
more than one object at a time.)
Name Enter a name for the study. If you are creating several studies (by selecting more
than one I and J body), you can enter a base name for the studies, and Adams
PostProcessor will add a suffix to the name (base_1, base_2, and so on).
Maximum Set the maximum distance for the clearance beyond which clearances will not
be computed at any given frame. Leave the text box empty if you always want
to calculate the minimum distance.
Method Select the method for calculating the minimum distances.
• Polygon
• Vertex
116 Adams View
Create Design Constraint
Note: You do not need to create an explicit constraint to limit the value of a design variable. You
can do this directly by setting properties for the variable.
Constraints can involve the simulation results, but are not required to do so. You can constrain overall
size, weight, or other factors that depend only on model data. In these cases, use the function or
macro/variable option for the constraint, and ignore the analysis data that Adams View supplies. Instead,
compute the constraint directly from the appropriate model data.
Allows you to create an objective object if a measure is not flexible enough. Objective objects have
options for processing simulation results and are valuable when you want to do complex or multi-step
computations on model outputs.
Learn more about Creating an Objective Object.
Create an FE Load
Build → Force → Special Forces → Adams FE Load
This new force type will be launched from the Forces-Special container.
Distributed Load - The distributed force can be applied to the FE Part which can be defined through the
expression language or user-written subroutines.
AZ Torque
The Adams Solver functions S, SD, SV, SA can be used to define FE Load functions relative to
the position along the length of FE parts that are modelled with the 2D/3D beam formulations.
Force Display If set to "on" 10 force vectors will be displayed along the length of the FE part centreline.
Create FEMDATA
Build → Data Elements → FEMdata → New/Modify
Produces data files of component loads, deformations, stresses, or strains for input to subsequent finite
element or fatigue life analysis for use in third-party products. You use the Settings → Solver → Output
→ More → Durability Files to specify the type of file to produce (for more information, see Solver
Settings - Output dialog box help and the Adams Durability online help). Adams View will not output to
any files unless you specify the format. For more information, see About Setting Simulation Controls.
Note: When you set the Time options, Adams Durability only checks the
time steps within those specifications for the hot spots.
A - D 123
Create FEMDATA
• From - Enter the time at which to start outputting the data. The default
is the start of the simulation.
• To - Enter the time at which to end the output of the data or the search
of a peak load. The default is to output to the end of the simulation.
124 Adams View
Create Forces Palette and Tool Stack
Displays tools for creating forces. The Create Forces palette and tool stack are shown below. Learn about
Using Toolboxes, Tool Stacks, and Palettes. Learn more about Forces.
Icon Link
Translational Spring Damper Tool
Create/Modify Contact
Torsion SpringTool
Bushing Tool
Gravity
Beam
Defines a new color name in the Modeling database. After creating the new color, return to Edit Color
dialog box to define its red, green, and blue values.
Run-Time Clearances can be used to monitor the clearance distance between two selected
geometries/flexible bodies. This clearance distance is based upon tesselation of geometry or analytical
representation of known geometry. For flexible parts, clearance is based upon the external face geometry
in the MNF. After a simulation is complete, the minimum clearance location between the two
geometries/flexible bodies may be animated. This is represented as a line between the objects involved.
You can also plot the clearance result sets and export the clearance data in the results file.
Adds Spec lines to your plots to help you compare curves to a constant baseline value. A spec line can
be a horizontal, vertical, or diagonal line that indicates a value of significance on the vertical axis. You
can start the spec line at any X or Y position.
For example, if you are plotting acceleration and you want to keep the acceleration below a certain value,
you can add a spec line marking that value on the plot. You can then compare any curves that you add to
that plot to see if the curves fall beneath the spec line. There are no limits to the number of spec lines you
can add to a plot.
Creates state variables for use in a plant state object. The variables that a plant state object can only
contain functions of displacement:
• Learn more about plant state objects in the LINERAR command
• Learn about plant states with Data Element Create Plant State dialog box help.
Imports a flexible body into Adams Flex. You specify a Modal Neutral File (MNF) or MD DB file (.master)
or, for a nonlinear flexible body, a Bulk Data File (BDF) and Adams View creates the necessary Adams
View geometry for displaying the flexible body. It also creates a mesh on the flexible body representing
the flexible body nodes.
By default, Adams Flex places the flexible body so the flexible body’s local body reference frame
(LBRF) is at the origin of the global coordinate system. The LBRF corresponds to the origin of the finite
A - D 133
Create a Flexible Body
element (FE) environment in which the body was originally modeled. You can also set the location and
orientation as you import the body or after it is imported as you do any element in Adams View.
Note: The user can wish to view all the flexible bodies in the MD DB,
using the “…” button provided beside the index. The desired
flexible body can be selected by double-clicking on the
displayed list.
Import All This option can be used as an alternative to specifying an index. Using this
option will import all flexible bodies in the specified MD DB at once. All
the created bodies will have a default location and orientation as (0,0,0).
134 Adams View
Create a Flexible Body
• Orientation
• Along Axis Orientation
• In Plane Oriention
Relative to You can:
Note: Adams MNF Import (> ~10MB) May Cause SUSE System to Hang.
In Adams importing .mnf files greater then approximately 10MB in size may cause the
machine to hang/freeze on SUSE Linux operating systems. The root cause is a
configuration setting of the NVidia driver typical for normal users. The workaround is to
change the NVidia configuration file like so:
Create a Request
Build → Measure → REQUEST → New
Creates a request. Note that the options for providing result and component names are only available if
the output of the results set is XML format. See Results (.res) Options dialog box help.
Learn more about Requests.
Enter one or more strings that identify the names of the result set
components the request produces. Learn more about About Naming
Results and Components in Requests.
Component Labels Available for XML result files only.
Enter one or more strings that identify the labels to be used when
plotting the result set components. Labels can be strings that include
white space. Quotes must be used to define the string if you set special
characters or whitespace.
Component Units Available for XML result files only.
Enter one or more strings that identify the unit dimension of the result
set components in XML result files. If you do not specify units, then
the units of the components are predefined based upon standard
request type (for example, displacement, velocity, and acceleration).
See standard units.
A - D 137
Create a Request
This is helpful if you want to group the output from multiple requests
into a single result set. For example, you might have several different
requests measuring driver input for a vehicle, and you might want to
place them all within a result set named Driver_Inputs for easier
viewing in Adams PostProcessor.
Comments Add any comments about the request to help you manage and identify
it. See Comments.
Define Using Type & Set to:
Markers/
• Define Using Type & Markers
Define Using Function • Define Using Function Expressions
Expressions/
• Define Using Subroutines
Define Using • Define Using Variables
Subroutines/Define Using
Variables
If you selected Define Using Type & Markers, the following options appear:
Output Type Select the type of output (Displacement, Velocity, Acceleration, or
Force).
I Marker, J Marker, R Marker Specify the Markers with respect to which the output will be
calculated.
If you selected Define Using Subroutines, the following options appear:
User Function Enter parameters to the user-written subroutine REQSUB. Enter the
user function using the following format where r1 through r30 are
constants passed to the subroutine:
If you do not want to specify a title for a particular column, use two
quotation marks (" ") with no characters between them.
If you selected Define Using Function Expressions, the following options appear:
f2 , f3 , f4 , f6 , f7 , and f8 Enter function expressions in the boxes f2 , f3 , f4 , f6 , f7 , and f8 .
Do not use f1 and f5 . Adams Solver uses them to hold magnitudes for
the three functions that follow. You do not need to enter a function in
every text box. Learn About Specifying Function Expressions.
Title Enter a title for the top of each set of information output. The entire
comment must be on one line. The title can be only eighty characters
long. You can use blank spaces and all alphanumeric characters.
However, you cannot use the comma (,), the semicolon (;), the
ampersand (&), and the exclamation point (!).
If you selected Define Using Variables, the following options appear:
Variables Enter the variables in the text box. Learn about Creating and Modifying
State Variables.
A - D 139
Create/Modify Contact
Create/Modify Contact
Creates or modifies a contact force between two geometries. Learn About Contact Forces. For solids and
curves, you can select more than one geometry as long as the geometry belongs to the same part. The first
geometry is called the I geometry and the second geometry is called the J geometry. For sphere-to-sphere
contacts, you can specify that the contact be inside or outside the sphere.
Learn more about Contacts.
If you type a geometry object name directly in the text box, you must press Enter to register the value.
Contact Name Enter the name of the contact to create or modify.
Contact Type Set to the type of geometry to come into contact. The text boxes change
depending on the type of contact force you selected.
If you selected Solid to Solid, Adams View displays the following two options:
I Solid Enter one or more geometry solids. The solids must all belong to the same part.
J Solid Enter one or more geometry solids. The solids must all belong to the same part.
If you selected Curve to Curve, Adams View displays the following four options:
I Curve Enter one or more geometry curves. The curves must all belong to the same
part.
I Direction(s) Select the geometry on which you want to change the direction of the force, and
then select the Change Direction tool .
J Curve Enter one or more geometry curves. The curves must all belong to the same
part.
J Direction(s) Select the geometry on which you want to change the direction of the force, and
then select the Change Direction tool .
If you selected Point to Curve, Adams View displays the following two options:
Marker Enter a marker.
Curve Enter one or more curves.
Direction(s) Select the geometry on which you want to change the direction of the force, and
then select the Change Direction tool .
If you selected Point to Plane, Adams View displays the following two options:
Marker Enter a marker.
140 Adams View
Create/Modify Contact
Note: If the internal surface(s) of one geometry is selected to be used for contact via the Change
Direction tool, then the other geometry should be contained or nearly contained by the
other's surface(s) in the model design position otherwise the contact force will return a very
large value initially.
Sphere Enter a sphere. To change the direction of the force, select the Change
Direction tool .
Sphere Enter a sphere. To change the direction of the force, select the Change
Direction tool .
If you selected Cylinder to Cylinder, Adams View displays the following three options:
Note: If the internal surface(s) of one geometry is selected to be used for contact via the Change
Direction tool, then the other geometry should be contained or nearly contained by the
other's surface(s) in the model design position otherwise the contact force will return a very
large value initially.
First Cylinder Enter a cylinder. To change the direction of the force, select the Change
Direction tool .
Second Cylinder Enter a cylinder. To change the direction of the force, select the Change
Direction tool .
Face Contact For cylinder-in-cylinder scenarios (that is, where the interior surface of one of
the cylinders was selected) the faces of the outer cylinder can be optionally set
to enforce contact. The “Bottom” face is defined as the one on which the
cylinder geometry’s reference marker is located. The "Top" face is defined as
the one on which the cylinder geometry's reference marker is NOT located.
If you selected Flex Body to Solid, Adams View displays the following two options:
I Flexible Body Select a Flexible Body.
A - D 141
Create/Modify Contact
To change the direction of the force, select the Change Direction tool .
J Curve Select a Curve. Multiple curves are not allowed.
If you selected Flex Edge to Flex Edge, Adams View displays the following four options:
I Flexible Body Select a Flexible Body.
To change the direction of the force, select the Change Direction tool .
J Flexible Body Select a Flexible Body.
To change the direction of the force, select the Change Direction tool .
If you selected Flex Edge to Plane, Adams View displays the following three options:
I Flexible Body Select a Flexible Body.
To change the direction of the force, select the Change Direction tool .
Plane Select a Plane. Multiple Planes are not allowed.
The following options apply to all types of geometry:
142 Adams View
Create/Modify Contact
Note: If you are using an External Adams Solver, you must set the output
files to XML to view the force display. See Solver Settings - Output
dialog box help.
Normal Force Select either:
A large penalty value ensures that the penetration of one geometry into another
will be small. Large values, however, will cause numerical integration
difficulties. A value of 1E6 is appropriate for systems modeled in Kg-mm-sec.
For more information on how to specify this value, see the Extended Definition
for the CONTACT statement in the Adams Solver online help.
STIFFNESS * (PENALTY)**EXPONENT
For more information, see the IMPACT function in the Adams Solver online
help.
Damping Enter a value to define the damping properties of the contacting material.
Consider a damping coefficient that is about one percent of the stiffness
coefficient.
Penetration Depth Enter a value to define the penetration at which Adams Solver turns on full
damping. Adams Solver uses a cubic STEP function to increase the damping
coefficient from zero, at zero penetration, to full damping when the penetration
reaches the damping penetration. A reasonable value for this parameter is 0.01
mm. For more information, see the IMPACT function in the Adams Solver
online help.
If you selected User Defined for Normal Force, define the following two options:
User function Specify the user parameters to be passed to a User-written subroutine CNFSUB.
For more on user-written subroutines, see the Adams Solver online help.
144 Adams View
Create/Modify Contact
• On
• Off
• Dynamics Only
Static Coefficient Specify the coefficient of friction at a contact point when the slip velocity is
smaller than the value for Static Transition Vel. For information on material
types versus commonly used values of the coefficient of static friction, see
Material Contact Properties Table.
• μ ( –Vs ) = μs
• μ ( Vs ) = –μs
• μ(0) = 0
• μ ( –Vd ) = μd
• μ ( Vd ) = μd
Note: Small values for this option cause the integrator difficulties. You
should specify this value as:
Friction Transition Vel. 5* ERROR
where: ERROR is the integration error used for the solution. Its
default value is 1E-3.
Selecting Allow Optimization to ignore range does not disable the range for
a Design study or Design of experiments (DOE). The range is used for a
design study or DOE only if a list of values has not been specified or is to
be ignored.
A - D 151
Create/Modify Design Variable
Note: The Value Range setting also affects the allowed values you
enter. For example, if you have selected a Value Range of
percent relative, then Adams View interprets your entered
allowed values as percentages relative to the standard value.
If you selected List of allowed values, the following two options appear:
Generate Creates a list of values for you automatically.
Allow Design Study to To keep the list of values and still use the range for a design study and
ignore list DOE, select Allow Design Study to ignore list. By selecting Allow Design
Study to ignore list, you can switch back and forth between using the range
and the list of values without re-entering the list each time.
If you selected String, the following option appears:
String value Enter the alphanumeric string for the design variable.
If you selected Object, the following option appears:
Object value Enter the database object for the design variable (for example,
.model_1.part_1). For more on objects and their database name, see Getting
Object Names and Data Dictionary in the Adams View Function Builder
online help.
Select to add any comments about the variable to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
Note: Now that you have created a design variable, you’ll need to reference it in your model. You
can enter the design variable directly, using the Reference Design Variable command, or
you can type it into a text box. You can also use the Function Builder to create a more
complex expression using the design variable. When you reference your design variable,
Adams View places parentheses () around the variable because you are creating a simple
expression that references the value of the design variable.
152 Adams View
Create/Modify Differential Equation
Note: By default, the external system is placed so its local body reference frame (LBRF) is at the
origin of the global coordinate system. The LBRF corresponds to the origin of the finite
element (FE) environment in which the body was originally modeled. You can also set the
location and orientation as you import the body or after it is imported as you do any element
in Adams View. This is applicable only for external systems that have a visual
representation.
1. Nastran
2. User
The default option when the dialog is opened in the Create mode is
‘Nastran’.
input_file_name File containing the input source parameters for the external system. The
button provided on the side of the field can be used to view and / or
edit the specified file.
modal_neutral_file_name An optional (rigid only) MNF, if a visual representation of the external
system is required.
md_db_file_name An optional MD DB, if a visual representation of the external system is
required.
index_in_database Index of the body in the specified MD DB. Valid only if the parameter
md_db_file_name is specified.
A - D 155
Create/modify an External System
• Orientation
• Along Axis Orientation
• In Plane Orientation
Relative to You can:
Shortcut: Curve Edit toolbar → Filter Curve Tool → Right-click Filter Name text box → filter_function → Create
Creates or modifies a curve filter to eliminate noise on time signals or to emphasize a specific frequency
content of a time signal. Adams PostProcessor supports two different types of filters:
• Butterworth filter - butter() in MATLAB™ developed by The MathWorks, Inc.
• Transfer function - A filter you define by directly specifying the coefficients of a transfer
function.
Once you create a filter, you can apply it to any curve.
Learn about Filtering Curve Data.
This differs from how a transfer function is defined for Adams Solver, where
the coefficients are given in increasing order:
Check Format and Select to display a plot of the transfer function's gain (magnitude) or phase.
Display Plot Always check the filter before using it.
Note:
• If you have not defined the filter correctly, an error message appears.
• If you’ve defined the filter correctly, a plot appears in which you can
switch between the filter’s gain and phase plots and change scales.
A - D 159
Create/Modify Friction
Create/Modify Friction
Right-click joint → Modify → Friction tool
Models both static (Coulomb) and dynamic (viscous) friction in revolute, translational, cylindrical,
hooke/universal, and spherical joints. You cannot apply friction to joints connected to Flexible bodies or
Point masses.
For more information on the values to be entered in the dialog box, select a type of joint below:
• Revolute Joint Options
• Cylindrical Joint Options
• Translational Joint Options
• Spherical Joint Options
• Universal/Hooke Joint Options
Learn about:
• Friction Regime Determination (FRD)
160 Adams View
Create/Modify General Constraint
box, select the More tool to display the Adams View Function
Builder. For information on using the Function Builder, see the
Function Builder online help. Learn more about defining a runtime
expression for a general constraint with Extended Definition of
GCON statement.
Report action forces on marker Enter a marker to have the reaction force on this marker measured
and reported as part of standard results. The reaction force reported
is the force that is exerted on the marker to satisfy the constraint
equation. Note that if you specify a marker and the runtine
expression has no dependency on it, the general constraint reports a
zero force.
Note: You cannot enter the Adams ID for the marker; you must
enter the name of the marker. Learn about Adams Solver
IDs.
Add any comments about the general constraint that you want to
enter to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.
A - D 161
Create/Modify General State Equation
Lets you represent a subsystem that has well defined inputs (u), internal states (x), and a set of well
defined outputs (y).
Learn about:
• Creating and Modifying General State Equations
• System Elements
• Continuous
• Discrete
• Sampled
• None (No options appear)
If you selected Continuous or Sampled, the following options appear:
162 Adams View
Create/Modify General State Equation
When you do not specify an IC array for a GSE, all the continuous
states are initialized to zero.
Static Hold Indicate whether or not the continuous GSE states are permitted to
change during static and Quasi-static simulations.
If you selected Discrete or Sampled, the following options appear:
X Array (Discrete) Enter the array element that is used to access the discrete states for the
GSE. It must be of the X type, and it cannot be used in any other linear
state equation, general state equation, or transfer function.
IC Array (Discrete) Enter the array element that specifies the initial conditions for the
discrete states in the system. The array is optional. The array element
must be of the IC type.
When you do not specify an IC array for a GSE, all the discrete states
are initialized to zero.
First Sample Time Specify the Simulation time at which the sampling of the discrete states
is to start. All discrete states before the first sample time are defined to
be at the initial condition specified. The default is zero.
Sample Function/Sample Specify the sampling period associated with the discrete states of a
User Parameters GSE. This tells Adams Solver to control its step size so that the
discrete states of the GSE are updated at:
last_sample_time + sample_period
Select the More button to display the Function Builder and build
an expression. See Function Builder and the Adams View Function
Builder online help.
Add any comments about the GSE to help you manage and identify it.
See Comments.
A - D 163
Create/Modify Material
Create/Modify Material
Build → Materials
Create/Modify Matrix
Build → Data Elements → Matrix → New/Modify
Note: You must create additional matrix elements in your Adams View model if multiple
matrices are to be read from the same file.
Result Set Component • User Entered Numbers to enter the values yourself.
Names • Result Set Component Names to obtain the values from the results
of a Simulation from a Result set component.
See an Example of Entering Matrix in Full Format.
A - D 165
Create/Modify Matrix
• Modal Forces
• Modeling Distributed Loads and Predeformed Flexible Bodies
• Function - Lets you select the modal loadcase and scale function of the
MFORCE. Note that you cannot select Function when defining an
MFORCE on a flexible body that does not contain any modal load case
information in its corresponding MNF.
• Subroutine - Lets you specify up to thirty user-defined constants to be
passed to the user-defined subroutine, MFOSUB to directly compute the
modal load case and scale function whose product is the modal force
applied to the flexible body. The scale function can depend on time or the
state of the system. The load case can only be a function of time.
• Force - Lets you specify up to thirty user-defined constants to be passed
to the user-defined subroutine, MFOSUB to directly compute the modal
force on the flexible body. Each component of the modal force can
depend on time or the state of the system. (Adams Solver (C++) only.
Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog
box help.)
To use a subroutine, you need to build a version of the Adams Solver that
contains your version of the MFOSUB routine that quantifies the modal force.
For more information, see the Subroutines section of the Adams Solver online
help. You can also specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine
in the Routine text box. Learn about specifying your own routine with ROUTINE
Argument.
If you selected to specify a flexible body with modal load case information, you also specify the
following two options:
Load Case Select a modal load case label from a list. The list of modal loadcase labels is
generated from the MNF. Learn about Creating Loadcase Files.
Scale Function Specify an expression for the scale factor to be applied to the modal load case.
168 Adams View
Create/Modify Point Mass
Point masses are points that have mass but no inertia properties or angular velocities. They are
computationally more efficient when rotational effects are not important.
For example, you could use point masses to represent the concentrated masses in a net. You could then
represent the ropes between the masses as forces or springs.
Note: By default, Adams View places the point mass in the center of the
main window.
Select to enter comments to help you manage and identify the point mass. See
Comments.
Displays the Point Mass Measure dialog box to let you create a measure for the
point mass. Learn about creating Object Measures.
Position ICs/ Displays the Modify Body dialog box set to let you change the initial position or
velocity of the point mass.
Velocity ICs
A - D 169
Create/Modify Road
Create/Modify Road
Adds a road assembly to your model. If your model includes tires, you must specify a road because each
tire must reference a road. The road determines the surface friction, bumps, and other inputs to tires.
.
Graphics Select On to display road graphics or select Off to hide any road graphics. You may
want to hide the road graphics when you work on your model. Roads graphics are
typically large and can affect operations such as fitting to view.
Location and Orientation
Location Enter a location for the road. The location determines the origin of the road and,
along with the road property file, determines whether any tires referencing this
road are initially contacting the road.
Orient Using Select a method to orient the road, either Euler Angles or Direction Vectors. The
z direction of the road orientation is always vertical direction. Therefore, you
should orient this axis of the road so it matches the vertical direction in your model.
If you selected Euler Angles, the following option is available:
Euler Angles Enter the euler angles (body 3,1,3) to orient the road.
If you selected Direction Vectors, the following two options become available:
X Vector/ Enter the x- and z-direction vectors to orient the road. The x-, y-, and z-axes of the
Z Vector road are determine from the direction vectors as follows:
• Z = z-vector / | z-vector |
• Y = z-vector x x-vector / | z vector x x-vector |
• X = Y x Z / | Y x Z |
For more information on XP-ZP method in Adams Solver, see argument XP in the
MARKER statement.
170 Adams View
Create/Modify Road
Select to display the contents of the road property file in the Information window.
This helps you determine what kind of road the file models.
A - D 171
Create/Modify Sensor
Create/Modify Sensor
Simulate → Sensor → New
Allows you to add a sensor to your model or modify an existing one. A sensor monitors a Simulation for
a specified event and changes a set of simulation controls when the event occurs.
Learn about:
• Adding Sensors to Your Model
• SENSOR statement in the Adams Solver online help
If you set the following values, you can retrieve the distance between two
markers. You use the SENVAL function to retrieve the distance.
In the figure, the sensor triggers whenever the value of the function being
monitored is in the shaded areas. Be careful that your function does not
evaluate in the shaded area at the start of your simulation unless you want your
sensor to trigger immediately. It is a good idea to define a function measure
using the same expression used for your sensor so you can check it by plotting
it.
Value Enter the target value that triggers an action.
End Tolerance Enter the absolute value of allowable error between the targeted value and the
actual sensed value.
Generate additional Select to create an extra Output step when Adams Solver triggers the sensor so
Output Step at event you can capture the action.
Set Output Stepsize Select to redefine the time between consecutive output steps. Adams Solver
uses this value until it is changed. The default is the current time between
output steps for the simulation.
174 Adams View
Create/Modify Sensor
Create two measures to monitor the expression and state of a sensor during
simulation. Learn about Object Measures.
A - D 175
Create/Modify Simulation Script
• Simple Run
• Adams View Commands
• Adams Solver Commands
Learn more about the Types of Simulation Scripts.
If you select Simple Run:
End Time/Duration Enter the time interval over which the Simulation takes place and set how
you want it defined. You can select:
• End Time - Specify the absolute point in time at which you want
the simulation to stop.
• Duration - Specify the amount of time over which you want the
simulation to run.
Steps/Step Size Set the frequency with which Adams View outputs data during your
simulation. You can specify:
• Transient - Default
• Transient - Dynamic
• Transient - Kinematic
• Transient - Static
Learn more about Types of Simulations.
Start at equilibrium Select to have Adams View perform a static simulation before performing
a dynamic simulation.
If you select Adams View Commands:
Adams View Commands Enter commands below the comment line
!Insert View commands here:.
Append Run Commands Select to get assistance with Adams View simulation commands. See
Getting Assistance with Adams View Commands.
Select and enter any comments you want associated with the script. See
Comments.
Tips: You might find it easier to track which array element goes with
which system element if you name the array elements and the
corresponding system elements with like names. For example, the
states (X) array that goes with general state equation GSE_100 would
be ARRAY_100 ; the inputs (U) array would be ARRAY_101 ; and
the outputs (Y) array would be ARRAY_102 .
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the array. See Adams Solver ID.
Comments Add any comments about the array to help you manage and identify
the array. See Comments.
General/Initial Conditions Set to:
(ICs)/
• General
X (States)/ • Initial Conditions (ICs)
Y (Outputs)/ • X (States)
• Y (Outputs)
U (Inputs)
• U (Inputs)
Learn more about Types of Arrays.
If you selected Define General or Initial Conditions, Adams View displays the following option:
Numbers Enter the values to be stored in the array.
If you selected X (States) or Y (Outputs), Adams View displays the following option:
Size Enter the size of the array.
If you selected U (Inputs), Adams View displays the following option:
Variables Enter the variables to be stored. If the array is used as input to a
transfer function, then you can only enter one variable.
178 Adams View
Create/Modify Spline
Create/Modify Spline
Build → Data Element → Spline → New/Modify
The Spline Editor provides a tabular or plot view of your spline data for editing and plotting. You can
drag points on your spline plots and see the effect of different curve-fitting techniques on your spline.
You can also select linear extrapolation and view its effect.
Using the Spline Editor, you can create a two- or three-dimensional splines. Note, however, that the
Spline Editor does not display a three-dimensional spline in plot view.
Learn about Creating Splines Using the Spline Editor.
To set the view of the Spline Editor:
• Set View As to either Tabular Data or Plot.
A - D 179
Create/Modify Standard Controls Block
Displays the Adams View Controls toolkit, which provides basic control elements such as filters, gains,
and PIDs.
Adams View implements these controllers within the model as differential equations (that is, linear
continuous control). You can modify the user-defined control inputs and outputs for later use with Adams
Linear and Adams Controls.
Learn more about Using the Adams View Controls Toolkit.
180 Adams View
Create/Modify Standard Controls Block
Icon Link
Input-Signal Function Block
Gain Block
Integrator Block
PID Controller
Switch Block
A - D 181
Create/Modify State Variable
• Run-time Expression
• User written subroutine
Learn more about Ways to Define State Variables.
F(time...,) = • If you selected Run-time Expression, enter the function expression
that defines the variable. Select the More button to display the
Function Builder and build an expression. See the Adams View
Function Builder online help.
• If you selected User written subroutine, enter constants to the user-
written subroutine VARSUB to define a variable. See the Subroutines
section of the Adams Solver online help.
Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine VARSUB.
Learn about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
Guess for F(1, 0..) and Select and then specify an approximate initial value for the variable, if
desired. Adams Solver may adjust the value when it performs an Initial
conditions simulation. Entering an accurate value for initial conditions can
help Adams Solver converge to the initial conditions solution.
182 Adams View
Create/Modify String
Create/Modify String
Build → Data Elements → String → New/Modify
Creates or modifies a string element that defines a character string that you can refer to later in the
execution of Adams View or Adams Solver. The character string cannot be broken and continued on the
next line. It can, however, be longer than a single line. You can use the GTSTRG subroutine to retrieve
the character string in a User-written subroutine. For example, you could use a string element to pass a
file name to a user-written subroutine. For more information, see Subroutines section of the Adams
Solver online help.
Enter the initial spin velocity of the wheel-tire. The spin velocity is
the rotational velocity of the wheel-tire about its z-axis in negative
direction. A good approximation of the initial spin velocity is the
longitudinal velocity divided by the unloaded radius of the tire:
• X axis
• Y axis
• Z axis
Angular velocity about (Optional)
Select the reference (WM) marker for the angular initial velocities:
• X axis
• Y axis
• Z axis
Road Enter the name of an existing road property file. To create a road,
right-click the text box, point to vpg_road, and then select Create.
The Create/Modify Road dialog box appears. The road determines the
input your tire sees—rough or smooth, wet or dry, and so on.
Location and Orientation
Location Enter the location of the wheel center.
Orient using Select either Euler Angles or Direction Vectors.
Euler Angles Enter the euler angles (body 3,1,3 angles) to orient the wheel-tire
assembly.
188 Adams View
Create/Modify Wheel and Tire
• Z = z-vector / | z-vector |
• Y = z-vector x x-vector / | z vector x x-
vector |
• X = Y x Z / | Y x Z |
For more information on XP-ZP method, see the argument XP in the
MARKER statement.
Z Vector Enter the z-direction vector (see X Vector above).
Select to add any comments about the variable to help you manage
and identify it. See Comments.
Select to display the contents of the road or tire property file in the
Information window. This helps you determine what kind of road the
file models.
A - D 189
Create/Modify model
Create/Modify model
Creates or modifies a Model. You can store more than one model in a Modeling database. You may find
it helpful to store multiple models in the same database because it lets you:
• Keep multiple versions of the same mechanical system in the same file.
• Store models of subsystems in one file that you want to combine and simulate as a whole.
• Compare results between models.
Create Section
Build → Section
In all cases the Section is normal to the node's X direction. The section dimensions correspond to the
node's Y and Z directions as shown below. For details, see section Orientation of FE Part Nodes.
• Solid Rectangle
• Base - The width of the rectangle (dimension in node's z direction).
• Height - The height of the rectangle (dimension in node's y direction).
A - D 191
Create Section
• Solid Circle
• Radius - Radius of the circular cross-section.
• Hollow Circle
• Radius - Outer radius of the circular shell.
• Thickness - Width of the wall of the circular shell.
192 Adams View
Create Section
• Properties
• Area - Specify the uniform area of the beam cross section. The centroidal axis must
be orthogonal to this cross section.
• Iyz - Enter the product of inertia with respect to the y and z axes.
• Iyy, Izz - Enter the area moments of inertia about the neutral axes of the beam-cross
sectional areas (y-y and z-z). These are sometimes referred to as the second moments
of area about a given axis. They are expressed as unit length to the fourth power.
• Jxx - Enter the polar moment of inertia. It is the torsional constant which is used to
assemble the torsional equation of motion describing the ability to resist torque.
A - D 193
Create Section
Note: Section's Y will flip by 180o based on node's X, that is, tangent for ref_curve.
Note: Jxx is never auto-calculated for the generic section and must always be specified
by the user.
A - D 195
Create Section
Notes: • For FE Part results to be accurate, you need the centroid of the cross-section to lie on
the FE Part centerline. Adams View does this automatically when using the standard
section types for which it supports native-Adams geometry creation (solid
elliptical/circular/rectangular and I-Bar).
• For a user-drawn cross-section, you must draw it such that its centroid ends up at
X,Y=0,0 in the drawing box.
• For user-imported geometry, you must locate/orient it such that…
• one end is located co-incident with the node at S=0 (via ref mar)
• the centroid of the cross-section lies along the FE Part centerline
• the geometry is not longer than the FE Part centerline
196 Adams View
Custom Inertial Modeling
Use to select the inertia invariants to define the modal formulation of the flexible body. Use the Tool tips
to help you decide which invariants to select. Learn more about defining the modal formulation.
A - D 197
Cut Tool
Cut Tool
Build → Bodies/Geometry → Cut Tool
Removes the volume where one solid intersects another solid to create a new solid. It subtracts the
geometry of the second part that you select from the geometry of the first part. The remaining geometry
belongs to the second part that you selected. The following is an example of cutting a solid:
You cannot cut the geometry so that the remaining geometry is split into two solids. For example, you
cannot cut a block from the center of a cylinder so that two cylinders remain after the cut. The following
is an example of cutting a solid into two solids:
198 Adams View
Cut Tool
If a part completely envelopes another part, you cannot cut that part from the enveloped part because no
geometry would result. For example, if a box completely envelopes a sphere, you cannot cut the box from
the sphere and leave a zero mass part. The following is an example of cutting a solid into a zero-mass part
Cylinder Tool
Build → Bodies/Geometry → Cylinder Tool
Creates a Solid geometry with a circular base. You draw the cylinder’s centerline and Adams View creates
the cylinder with a radius 25% of the length of the centerline. Before you draw a cylinder, you can also
specify its length and radius:
The Cylinder tool draws the centerline of the cylinder in the plane of the screen or the Working grid, if
you have it turned on.
Learn about Creating a Cylinder.
If you do not enter a radius, Adams View creates the cylinder with a radius
25% of the length of the center line.
Note: Two hotpoints appear after you draw a cylinder. One lets you modify the length of the
cylinder and one lets you set its radius. For more information on modifying geometry using
hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.
200 Adams View
Cylindrical Joint Tool
Creates a cylindrical joint that allows both relative rotation as well as relative translation of one part with
respect to another part. A cylindrical joint can be located anywhere along the axis about which the parts
can rotate or slide with respect to each other.
The orientation of the cylindrical joint defines the direction of the axis about which the parts can rotate
or slide along with respect to each other. The rotational axis of the cylindrical joint is parallel to the
orientation vector and passes through the location.
Learn about:
• Creating Idealized Joints
A - D 201
Cylindrical Joint Tool
Pick Feature • Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working
grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
First Body/Second Body Set the bodies on which you want to attach the joint. Select either:
(only appears if you
select to explicitly define • Pick Body - Select to attach the joint to a body.
the bodies using the • Pick Curve - Select to attach the joint to a curve. If you select to attach
options 2 Bodies - 1 the joint to a curve, Adams View creates a curve marker, and the joint
Location or 2 Bodies - 2 follows the line of the curve. Learn more about curve markers with
Locations explained Marker Modify dialog box help. Attaching the joint to a spline curve is
above) only available with Adams Solver (C++). Learn about switching solvers
with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box help.
202 Adams View
Data Element Create Array U Input Array
Groups together a set of variables to define the inputs for a system element, either linear state equation,
general state equation, or transfer function.
Learn about Using the Adams View Controls Toolkit.
If you enter a size, it should match the number of variables. Adams View provides
the size parameter mainly for your convenience in model creation (it is not
required).
Variable Name Enter the list of variables.
A - D 203
Data Element Create Array X State Array
• For linear state equation, the X state array size is the row dimension of the
A state matrix.
• For transfer functions, the transformation from polynomial ratio type to
canonical state space type internally determines the X state array size.
• For general state equations, the X state array size is the state equation
count as defined in the general state equation.
204 Adams View
Data Element Create Array Y Output Array
Specifies the output array for a system element, either linear state equation, general state equation, or
transfer function. To use these arrays, you must reference the array name as the output array in the system
element definition. You can use each Y output array with only a single system element.
Learn about Using the Adams View Controls Toolkit.
• For linear state equations, the Y output array size is the row dimension of
the C output matrix or the D feedforward matrix.
• For transfer functions, the Y output array size is always 1.
• For general state equations, the Y output array size is the output equation
count, as defined in the general state equation.
A - D 205
Data Element Create Curve
Interactive Simulation dialog box → Linear States Tool → Right-click Plant Input text box
Defines a set of inputs (state variables) to the mechanical system that Adams Solver recognizes as system
input during an Adams Linear simulation. When you run any other type of simulation, the plant input acts
only as a pointer to the list of the specified variables.
Both function expressions and user-written subroutines can access the plant input:
• Function expressions access the values by using the Adams Solver function PINVAL(i i), where i
specifies the PINPUT ID and i specifies the ith variable in the plant input list. Note that i is not
the ID of the variable.
• User-written subroutines call the subroutine SYSFNC to access single elements of the plant input
list and call the subroutine SYSARY to access all values for a PINPUT (see the Subroutines
section of the Adams Solver online help).
Learn more:
• Plant Inputs and Outputs
• Ways to Use Plant Input and Output
Note: Variables can appear in more than one plant input. This allows you to output two or more
sets of state matrices at the same time.
Interactive Simulation dialog box → Linear States Tool → Right-click Plant Output text box
Defines a set of output (state variables) that Adams Solver recognizes as system output during an Adams
Linear simulation. When you run any other type of simulation, the plant output acts only as a pointer to
the list of the specified variables.
Both function expressions and user-written subroutines can access the plant output:
• Function expressions access the values by using the Adams Solver function POUVAL(i1,i2),
where i1 specifies the plant output ID, and i2 specifies the i2th variable in the plant output list.
Note that i2 is not the ID of the variable.
• User-written subroutines access single elements of the plant output list and call the subroutine
SYSFNC to access all values for a POUTPUT by calling the subroutine SYSARY (see the
Subroutines section of the Adams Solver online help).
Note: Variables can appear in more than one plant output. This allows you to output two or more
sets of state matrices at the same time.
Learn more:
• Plant Inputs and Outputs
• Ways to Use Plant Input and Output
Interactive Simulation dialog box → Linear States Tool → Right-click Plant State text box
Adams Solver (C++) only. Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box
help.
Adams Linear requires a minimum representation of the system to generate the state matrix from which
eigenvalues can be computed. For non-stationary systems, the state matrix is a function of the states used
to linearize the system. This dialog box lets you to define a set of states that are to be used in the
linearization scheme. You can specify as many states as there are degrees-of-freedom. If a smaller set of
states are provided, then the system will "fill in" by choosing a set of internally available states for the
ones that were not explicitly specified. If too many states are specified, Adams Solver identifies and
discards the redundant states.
Plant states are a list of variables. The variables contain expressions that specify the states that are to be
used in linearizing the system. Plant state objects are defined in the model. The LINEAR command can
instruct Adams Solver to use a specific plant state object for generating the linear model. A model can
contain any number of plant state objects. You can use any one of them with the LINEAR command.
• For more information, see the Adams Solver (C++) LINEAR command.
• For theoretical details, see the white paper in Simcompanion Knowledge Base Article
KB8016460.
• For an example of using PSTATE, see Simcompanion Knowledge Base Article KB8016414.
Modifies a set of inputs (state variables) to the mechanical system that Adams Solver recognizes as
system input during an Adams Linear simulation. When you run any other type of simulation, the plant
input acts only as a pointer to the list of the specified variables.
Both function expressions and user-written subroutines can access the plant input:
• Function expressions access the values by using the Adams Solver function PINVAL(i i), where i
specifies the PINPUT ID and i specifies the ith variable in the plant input list. Note that i is not
the ID of the variable.
• User-written subroutines call the subroutine SYSFNC to access single elements of the plant input
list and call the subroutine SYSARY to access all values for a PINPUT (see the Subroutines
section of the Adams Solver online help).
Learn more:
• Plant Inputs and Outputs
• Ways to Use Plant Input and Output
Note: Variables can appear in more than one plant input. This allows you to output two or more
sets of state matrices at the same time.
Modifies a set of output (state variables) that Adams Solver recognizes as system output during an Adams
Linear simulation. When you run any other type of simulation, the plant output acts only as a pointer to
the list of the specified variables.
Both function expressions and user-written subroutines can access the plant output:
• Function expressions access the values by using the Adams Solver function POUVAL(i1,i2),
where i1 specifies the plant output ID, and i2 specifies the i2th variable in the plant output list.
Note that i2 is not the ID of the variable.
• User-written subroutines access single elements of the plant output list and call the subroutine
SYSFNC to access all values for a POUTPUT by calling the subroutine SYSARY (see the
Subroutines section of the Adams Solver online help).
Note: Variables can appear in more than one plant output. This allows you to output two or more
sets of state matrices at the same time.
Learn more:
• Plant Inputs and Outputs
• Ways to Use Plant Input and Output
Interactive Simulation dialog box → Linear States Tool → Right-click Plant State text box
Adams Solver (C++) only. Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box
help.
Adams Linear requires a minimum representation of the system to generate the state matrix from which
eigenvalues can be computed. For non-stationary systems, the state matrix is a function of the states used
to linearize the system. This dialog box lets you to define a set of states that are to be used in the
linearization scheme. You can specify as many states as there are degrees-of-freedom. If a smaller set of
states are provided, then the system will "fill in" by choosing a set of internally available states for the
ones that were not explicitly specified. If too many states are specified, Adams Solver identifies and
discards the redundant states.
Plant states are a list of variables. The variables contain expressions that specify the states that are to be
used in linearizing the system. Plant state objects are defined in the model. The LINEAR command can
instruct Adams Solver to use a specific plant state object for generating the linear model. A model can
contain any number of plant state objects. You can use any one of them with the LINEAR command.
• For more information, see the Adams Solver (C++) LINEAR command.
• For theoretical details, see the white paper in Simcompanion Knowledge Base Article
KB8016460.
• For an example of using PSTATE, see Simcompanion Knowledge Base Article KB8016414.
Modifies a spline created using the general method and a file as input.
Learn more about creating and modifying data element Splines.
Database Navigator
Tools → Database Navigator Shared Dialog Box
Displays the types of objects appropriate for the command you are executing and shows objects in their
database hierarchy. You can browse for objects or set it to rename objects, view information about the
objects and view dependencies. You can also set a filter for the types of objects displayed in the Database
Navigator.
Learn more about Database Navigator.
Database Storage
Settings → Solver → Output → More → Output Category → Database Storage
Selecting Database Storage as the Output Category in the Solver Settings dialog box, lets you set how
Adams View handles the results for:
• Single Simulations - As you perform a single Simulation, Adams View stores the results of the
simulation under the current model in your Modeling database. By default, when you perform
another simulation, Adams View overwrites the results of the previous simulation. You can store
simulations results in your database after a simulation has finished so that Adams View does not
overwrite them. For information on saving the results of individual simulation, see Saving
Simulation Results.
• Multi-run Simulations - For a parametric analysis, Adams View stores the parametric analysis
(multi-run) results in an analysis object called Last_Multi. This analysis is not a full analysis—it
simply contains a summary of the design variable variations and Objective values for each
model that was analyzed in the parametric study. Unless you rename or copy Last_Multi before
running another parametric analysis, subsequent parametric study summaries will overwrite
Last_Multi.
Saving Multi-Run simulations does not save each individual trial resulit simply saves a summary
of the parametric study. To save each individual trial result, use Save Analysis for Individual
Simulations.
Parametric analyses can run many simulations. Use care in saving individual analyses and/or
mult-run analyses. It is possible to exhaust the memory or file space available on your computer.
Running out of memory or file space can lead to unpredictable system problems, and cause the
parametric analysis to fail.
You can use measures to compare specific data between runs without saving all the results.
Create and display a measure for the data of interest, then select Save Curves under the Display
settings of the Solver Settings dialog box. Adams View charts the measure for each simulation
and saves all the curves. At the end, you have a strip chart showing the measure for all
simulations.
Stored simulation results remain in your modeling database when you save your modeling database. Be
careful not to save more simulation results than you need since they require quite a bit of storage space.
To delete simulation results from your modeling database, see Deleting Simulation Results.
Defaults Names
Settings → Names
Allows you to determine whether Adams View uses full object names, short object names, or Adams
Solver IDs when displaying run-time functions or object names in the Information Window and dialog
boxes. This also determines the naming the Function Builder Assist box uses for object names or Adams
Solver IDs to generate run-time functions.
Note: Regardless of the option you choose, you can enter the object's full or short name or its
Adams Solver ID while writing functions.
222 Adams View
Delete Group
Delete Group
Build → Ungroup
Allows you to create a report of the results of the Parametric analyses in a table. Learn more about
Generating a Table.
Note that each type displays some different dialog box options. Learn about options available for all
types.
Design Study
Design Variable Enter the name of the design variable that you want to vary.
Default Levels Enter the number of levels (values) you want to use only if you specified a
range for the design variable.
• If you specified a range for the design variable, Adams View uses
equally spaced levels across the range. You specify the number of
levels in the Default Levels text box.
• If you specified a list of values for the design variable, Adams
View runs a simulation using each value, ignoring the Default
Levels text box.
A - D 225
Design Evaluation Tools
After you select Start, Adams View runs a simulation for each level of the
design variable. When the simulations are done, Adams View returns the
variable to its original value.
Design of Experiments
Design Variables Enter the name of the design variable that you want to vary.
Default Levels Enter the number of levels (values) you want to use only if you specified a
range for the design variable.
Trials defined by Select either Built-In DOE Technique, Direct Input, or File Input from
the pull-down menu.
Select a DOE technique. The DOE technique or trial matrix controls the
number of simulations and the combination of variable values to use for
each simulation. For example, the Full Factorial technique simulates every
possible combination of levels. If you use two variables with three levels
each, Adams View runs nine simulations.
The DOE technique or trial matrix selects values for a variable based on the
range or list of values you defined for the variable.
The last iteration will be the best values that the optimization could find
without violating constraints or limits. Adams View normally leaves the
design variables set to the optimized values. If you interrupt the analysis or
Adams View encounters an error during the analysis, Adams View resets
the variables to their original values.
If you do not want to keep the optimized values, and you selected the Auto.
Save check box or used the Save button to save the original values, you can
select the Restore button to return the variables to their original values.
The following buttons are available for all three types:
Display, Ouput, and Displays the Solver Settings dialog box for either display, output, or
Optimizer optimizer options.
Note that each button brings up a different option in the Solver Settings
Dialog Box.
You can:
• Design studies
• DOE
• Optimizations
Displays the Plot Design Evaluation Results dialog box to display the
results as a plot.
Displays the Design Evaluation Results Table dialog box to display the
results as a table.
Displays the Update Design Variables dialog box to let you update the
design variables.
228 Adams View
Dialog-Box Builder
Dialog-Box Builder
Tools → Dialog Box → Create
Allows you to create and modify Dialog boxes to better suit your needs and preferences.
Creates a discrete flexible link consisting of two or more rigid bodies connected by beam force elements.
You indicate the following and Adams View creates the appropriate parts, Geometry, Forces, and
Constraints at the endpoints:
Note: For more information on beam force elements, see Beam. Also note the caution about the
asymmetry of beams.
230 Adams View
Discrete Flexible Link
Note: Marker 1 and Marker 2 are also used to calculate the orientation
of the link.
Attachment Select how to define the start of the link:
• Solid Rectangle
• Solid Circle
• Hollow Rectangle
• Hollow Circle
• I-Beam
• Properties
A - D 231
Display Attribute
Display Attribute
Database Navigator → Display Attribute
Allows you to set how individual, types of objects, and children of objects appear in Adams View.
Learn about Setting Appearance of Objects Through the Database Navigator.
Shows you a log of the commands you executed and messages that you receive. The Log file marks
messages as comments so Adams View does not try to execute them. It indicates a comment by placing
an exclamation mark (!) in front of the message.
Adams View also displays as comments any commands that it executes when it starts up. To help you
distinguish the startup commands from messages, Adams View follows the exclamation mark (!) with
the command prompt (>>).
Adams View does not update the Display Log File dialog box each time you enter a command. You must
select Update to see the new command/message.
By default, Adams View only shows warning, errors, and fatal messages that you have received. To
change the type of messages displayed and to display commands that Adams View executed, use the
options below.
Learn about Using the Adams View Log File.
Enter the text that the line must contain in the text box. You can also enter
wildcards.
Suppress duplicate lines Select if you want to remove any duplicate lines that occur if you
encounter the same error again.
Update Select to redisplay the log file and apply filters.
A - D 233
Dynamic Rotation Tool Stack
Contains tools for dynamically rotating the View in the View window.
E-I
E - I 235
Edit Appearance Dialog Box
Sets how individual objects or types of objects appear in Adams View. You can set the appearance of any
modeling object in your Modeling database or for a group of objects.
Learn about:
• Setting object appearance
• Using Wildcards
• Icon Settings Dialog Box
Once the name of the object is in the text box, press Enter to update the dialog
box.
Types To specify a group of similar objects, enter a filter or wildcard. For example,
enter Parts to set the appearance of all rigid bodies or Markers to set the
appearance of all markers.
Visibility Select how you want to set the visibility of the selected object or objects. You
can select:
• Polygon Fill - Sets the color of those areas of a graphic that can be
shaded (they include sides of a cylinders, frustums, boxes, and so
on).
• Edge - Sets the color of the lines making up the edges of the facets of
a graphic that can be shaded.
• Outline - Sets the color of the lines that make up those graphics that
cannot be shaded or filled like the coil of a spring damper.
• Text - Sets the color of the text.
• All - Sets the selected color for all elements of an object.
To browse for a color in the Database Navigator or create a new color, right-
click the Color text box, and then select Browse or Create.
Render Set the rendering for the geometry:
Lets you create a background color for the View window by setting its red, green, and blue light
percentages and change the background of all view windows to this new color. You cannot add the color
to the preset palette of colors or change the colors in the preset palette but you can set the gradient effect.
Note: You can also change the background color using the Edit Color dialog box. Learn about
changing object colors, including the background.
Edit Color
Settings → Colors
Allows you to modify the colors used for displaying objects or create a new color.
Red Use the slider to determine the amount of red to be used in the new color.
Green Use the slider to determine the amount of green to be used in the new color.
Blue Use the slider to determine the amount of blue to be used in the new color.
240 Adams View
Enable or Disable a Range of Modes
Lets you disable or enable a group of modes based on either their mode number or frequency by entering
a range of values. Learn more about Enabling and Disabling Modes.
If you select to display the results in the log file, you can keep the command results with the other
commands that you execute so that you can cut and paste the information together into a new file.
If you did not save your work, asks you if you want to save your work:
• To save your work and exit Adams View, select OK. If you want to save the model with a new
name in the current directory, enter the new name in the Filename text box.
• To exit without saving your work, select Exit, Don’t Save.
• To continue using Adams View, select Cancel.
Note: If you accidentally exit without saving your work, you can use the Adams View Log file
(aview.log) to recover your work. Learn about Using the Adams View Log File.
246 Adams View
Export Dialog Box
Exports data from Adams PostProcessor. You can export the following formats:
• Numeric Data
• Spreadsheet Data
• Table
• DAC/RPC (For Adams Durability only; see the Adams Durability online help.)
• HTML Report
E - I 247
Export - Adams PostProcessor Files
The command file also contains commands to read in the other files when you import the command file
into Adams PostProcessor.
Note: The simulation results are not referenced in the command file. You must import the
analysis files (graphics, request, and results files) separately into Adams PostProcessor.
For more information, see Import - Adams Solver Analysis Files.
Adams View names the command file ModelName_to_ppt.cmd, where ModelName is the name of the
model. For example, if the model from which you are exporting data is suspension14, then the command
file is suspension14_to_ppt.cmd.
Adams View exports only a set of output files generated from the same Adams Solver simulation.
If you want the file written to a directory other than the one from which you are
running Adams View, enter the path name in the File Name text box. To browse for
the directory in which you want to export the command file, right-click the File
Name text box, and then select Browse to display the File Selection dialog box.
Analysis Name Enter the name of the simulation whose data you want to export.
Exporting a model as an Adams Solver dataset is a convenient method for transferring a model from one
computer platform to another. When you export a model as an Adams Solver dataset, Adams View
preserves the database names in your model by writing them as comments in the Adams Solver dataset.
This allows you to import the dataset at a later date and still have the original database names.
Your model does not have to be complete to be exported as an Adams Solver dataset. If you want to check
your model for completeness and consistency, verify your model before exporting the dataset.
If you want the file written to a directory other than the one from which you are
running Adams View, enter the path name in the File Name text box. To browse
for the directory in which you want to export the command file, right-click the
File Name text box, and then select Browse to display the File Selection dialog
box.
Model Name Enter the name of the model you want exported as a command file.
Adams View does not indent the text for continuation lines of function
expressions. It assumes that you will add any leading spaces that you want for
indentation of functions. Any indentation Adams View would enter would
interfere with the indention used to show nesting of IFfunctions. Adams View
does, however, indent the argument list of a user function if it requires more
than one line.
Adams View precedes the values of an argument that has multiple string values
separated by colons with a comma and indents the values if you place them on
a continuation line. This applies to the PART/EXACT and COUPLER/TYPE
arguments. It does not apply to the REQUEST/TITLE argument, which doesn't
allow embedded spaces. Instead, Adams View precedes a REQUEST/TITLE
argument with a comma.
Decimal Places Enter the number of decimal places written after the decimal point for real
numbers
Zero Threshold Enter the threshold value for numbers being written to an Adams Solver
dataset. When Adams View writes a number that has an absolute value smaller
than the zero threshold value, it writes it as zero. The zero threshold value is
independent of units.
Significant Digits Control how many significant digits of a real number Adams View retains
during round off. The default is 10. The number you enter is distinct from the
number of places actually printed for real numbers, which the Decimal Places
value controls. Be sure to select Round Off Values so rounding off occurs.
Scientific Notation Specify where the format for real numbers switches from a fixed point format
to scientific notation. Enter the lower and upper power of 10. Separate the
values with commas (,). The default values are -4 and 5, meaning that Adams
View writes any number less than or equal to 1.0E-04 or greater than or equal
to 1.0E+05 in scientific notation.
E - I 251
Export - Adams Solver Dataset
PART/1 ,
QG = 0.5, 0, 0 ,
REULER = 0D, 90D, 0D ,
MASS = 1.2
Upper Case Text/ To control the case of the text of statement keywords and parameters, select one
Lower Case Text, of the following:
Mixed Case Text
• Upper Case Text- Text for keywords and parameters in the dataset are
written in uppercase letters (BEAM). Uppercase is the default.
• Lower Case Text- Text for keywords and parameters in the dataset are
written in lowercase (beam).
• Mixed Case Text- Text for keywords and parameters in the dataset are
written in initial case (Beam). The first character of each word is in
uppercase, and the rest are in lowercase.
Note that the text case control does not affect certain types of string-valued
arguments. For a listing of the arguments to which the text case does not apply,
see Arguments Not Affected by Case Control.
Include Trailing Select Include Trailing Zeros to print all the digits after the decimal point
Zeros whether they are zero or not. If you do not select Include Trailing Zeros, Adams
View drops any zeros at the end of the fractional part of the number leaving the
last digit as a non-zero digit.
Export All Graphics Select Export All Graphics to write all the graphics into the dataset. If this
option is not checked, only the dataset graphics that are supported by the solver
(such as BOX) and those that are referenced by contacts, are included in the
dataset.
Verify Model Select to verify the model before exporting
COMMENT STRING:
STRING REQUEST:
TITLE, COMMENT, FUNCTION, and F1 to F8 MREQUEST:
COMMENT UCON:
FUNCTION MOTION:
FUNCTION FIELD:
FUNCTION SFORCE:
FUNCTION GFORCE:
FUNCTION VFORCE:
FUNCTION VTORQUE:
FUNCTION VARIABLE:
FUNCTION CURVE:
FUNCTION DIFF:
FUNCTION GSE:
FUNCTION SENSOR:
FUNCTION:
254 Adams View
Export - Adams Solver Script Files
If you want the file written to a directory other than the one from which you are
running Adams View, enter the path name and the file name in the File Name
text box. To browse for the directory in which you want to export the command
file, right-click the File Name text box, and then select Browse to display the
File Selection dialog box.
Sim Script Name An existing Simulation Script to export.
E - I 255
Export - Adams View Command File
If you want the file written to a directory other than the one from which you are
running Adams View, enter the path name in the File Name text box. To browse for
the directory in which you want to export the command file, right-click the File
Name text box, and then select Browse to display the File Selection dialog box.
Model Name Enter the name of the model you want exported as a command file.
• For flexible bodies because the node IDs at each load location are known.
• For rigid bodies if the node IDs are not available. Then, the FEA input file will contain the
locations (with respect to the FEA coordinate reference) and Adams ID label of the marker at
each load location. You will need to edit the file, however, replacing these labels with the
actual node IDs, once they are known.
260 Adams View
Export - FEA Loads
Adams View calculates the load points and places the points and their
locations in the Nodes table of the File Export dialog box. The node
coordinates are displayed relative to the FEA origin of the rigid or
flexible body. You might need to resize the File Export dialog box to see
all the point locations. See Example of Nodes Table.
Node_id/Scan file for IDs For rigid bodies only, assign node IDs to the load points Adams View
found, if desired. You can do one of the following:
For DAC and RPC III, you can enter a start output time and an end output
time.
E - I 261
Export - FEA Loads
Caution: Note that loads are output in the Adams View modeling units. These units must be
consistent with those specified in the finite element model or the results of the FE analysis
that includes the Adams loads will be incorrect. After completing the Export FEA Loads
dialog box, Adams View displays the current modeling units and gives you a chance to
modify them before continuing with the FEA loads export.
262 Adams View
Export for Co-animation
Exports data in the current session of Adams PostProcessor as HTML pages for viewing by others in your
organization. It also creates
• Plots and animations as .png or .jpg images
• Movies of animations
• Information on the parts, constraints, forces, and more in the selected models. This is the same
information that appears when you select Info.
When you export an HTML report, Adams PostProcessor creates main homepage with a left frame
containing a tree of information in your model. Learn about the resulting HTML pages.
Tab Link
Files Export - HTML Report - FIles
Title Page Export - HTML Report - Title Page
Pages Export - HTML Report - Pages
Models Export - HTML Report - Models
264 Adams View
Export - HTML Report - FIles
Defines the name of the files in which to export Adams PostProcessor data and where to place the files.
Selects the models for which you want to export information. When you export model information, you
output information about the model objects: parts, constraints, forces, measures, requests, and assembly
objects. Adams PostProcessor creates a folder for each model and objects in the model, grouped by type.
Defines the pages of data you want to export and in which formats to publish them.
• If you select .jpg or .png, Adams Processor, exports each frame as an png or
jpg file, and then plays them as a movie.
• If you select compressed AVI format, set the frame rate, interval between key
frames, and quality (percentage of compression). The default is 75%
compression with each key frame 500 frames apart, and a frame rate of 10
seconds per frame.
• If you select .mpg, set either of the following:
• Compress the file using P frames - Turning off the compression using P
frames ensures your movie plays in many playback programs, including
as xanim. It results, however, in a much larger file (up to 4 times as large).
• Round size to multiples of 16 - Some playback programs require the
pixel height and width to be multiplies of 16. Turning this option on
ensures that you movie plays in many playback programs.
E - I 267
Export - HTML Report - Title Page
Defines what you want displayed on the title page to provide basic information about the exported data.
The title page appears when you first display the homepage. You can also enter an image to appear in the
upper right corner of the title page. The image must be a format supported in Web browsers (.gif, .jpg,
.png).
Note: Plots with more than two axes are not supported. Only the
curves belonging to the first two axes will appear in the
.xlsx file.
E - I 271
Export - Numeric Test Data
You can export the data that Adams generates during Simulations for use in other applications.
Export - Shell
File → Export → Shell Shared Dialog Box
You can export Adams geometry for use as shell geometry in other applications.
Export - Table
File → Export → Table
Export - Wavefront
File → Export → Wavefront Shared Dialog Box
You can export Adams View graphics and motion data to Wavefront to help you create animations in
Wavefront Technologies advanced photorealistic rendering product, the Advanced Visualizer. You can
also select to only export the model geometry, in which case Adams View only creates object files.
• If you select Model Name, you export only your model geometry.
• If you select Analysis, you export all motion and geometry data. You can enter
multiple models or simulations by separating the names with commas.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
276 Adams View
Extrusion Tool
Extrusion Tool
Build → Bodies/Geometry → Extrusion Tool
Creates an Extrusion. To create an extrusion, you can specify points or select a curve that defines the
extrusion’s profile:
The Extrusion tool extrudes the points or curve along the z-axis of the screen or Working grid, if it is
turned on. When you specify points, you can also specify the direction along the z-axis that the Extrusion
tool extrudes the profile. You can also select to extrude along a path.
You can select to create the extrusion using the Analytical Method or Non-analytical Method.
E - I 277
Extrusion Tool
Note: After you draw the extrusion, hotpoints appear. If you used the non-analytical method to
create the extrusion, hotpoints appear at every vertex in the profile and at the point directly
opposite from where you began drawing the profile. If you used the analytical method,
hotpoints appear along the curves that define the extrusion. Use the vertex hotpoints to
modify the profile of the extrusion and the opposite hotpoint to control the depth of the
extrusion. See Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.
You can also use the extrusion modify dialog box to more accurately place the points that
make up the profile and read in location points from a file. See Using Dialog Boxes to
Precisely Modify Geometry and using the Location Table.
E - I 279
Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)
• Mag
• Phase
• PSD
Start Time Enter the start time on the curve for which you want the signal
processing performed.
End Time Enter the end time on the curve for which you want the signal
processing performed.
Window Type Select the type of window type you want to use. Learn more about the
window functions.
Points/Points (Power of 2) Select the number of points to be used for the FFT.
Or, you can enter the segment length directly. This is often referred to
as the window length.
Overlap Points Enter the number of overlaps, which indicates how many signal
samples are used.
280 Adams View
Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) 3D
Constructs a three-dimensional (3D) Fast fourier transform (FFT) plot by performing signal processing
on individual slices of a curve. You define a slice size, and Adams PostProcessor slides this over a range
of a curve, overlapping the slices as specified. Each slice of the curve becomes a row in the 3D plot
surface.
• Mag
• Phase
• PSD
Z-Axis Select result set component to be plotted on Z axis.
FE Part Wizard
To launch the FE Part creation wizard:
1. Click the Bodies tab on the Adams View ribbon.
2. From the Flexible Bodies container, click the icon for Create FE Part.
where:
Default: 300.
The Contour Plots and Datum Node available while modifying the FE part.
Contour Plots Select this checkbox to enable color contour plotting
during animation for the FE Part. The Datum Node can be
selected only if the Contour Plots checkbox is selected.
Datum Node The color contour plot of "deformation" is defined by the
displacement of the geometry vertices relative to its
initial displacement from the datum node. By default the
datum node is the node at S=0. To use a different FE Part
node please select it here. Note that during the simulation
the colors will appear differently than in post-processing
animation because the entire extent of deformation
throughout the simulation is not yet known thus the color
scale is can be changing.
288 Adams View
FE Part Wizard
To define hotspots:
1. In the Hotspots text box, enter the number of hotspots to locate and
output. With this option, a text file containing a tab-delimited table
of hotspot information, such as node ID, maximum value, time
when the maximum value occurred, and location, is generated.
2. From the option menu, specify the value of stress/strain in
determining hotspots from one of Von Mises, Max Prin., Min Prin.,
Max Shear, Normal-X, Normal-Y, Normal-Z, Shear-XY, Shear-
YZ, or Shear-ZX. For more information, see the FEMDATA
statement.
3. In the Radius text box, enter a radius that defines the spherical
extent of each hotspot. A default value of 0.0 (zero) means that all
nodes in the flexible body will be hotspot candidates.
4. In the R Marker text box, enter a coordinate reference marker in the
model that will be used to transform the stress or strain data. If not
specified, the stress or strain will be output in the basic FEA
coordinate system of the flexible body (LPRF). This option can be
useful when correlating strain gauge data from a physical test. If the
orientation of the strain gauge does not match the FEA coordinate
system, you can reference a marker whose orientation does match.
292 Adams View
Field Element Tool
• 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Learn about Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:
Pick Feature
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force using the x-, y-, and z-axes
of the current Working grid, if it is displayed, or using the x-, y-, and z-
axes of the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as the face of a part. The direction vector
you select defines the z-axis for the force; Adams View automatically
calculates the x- and y-axes.
E - I 293
File Export
File Export
File → Export Shared Dialog Box
Exports modeling data in a wide variety of formats so you can exchange modeling data among different
Adams products, as well as with other software manufacturer’s products.
Learn about exporting:
• Adams Solver Dataset
• Adams Solver Analysis Files (Graphics, Requests, and Results)
• Adams Solver Script files (*.acf)
• Adams View Command Files
• Numeric Data
• CAD (STEP, IGES and Parasolid)
• STEP, IGES ('Adams Geometry Translators' only)
• Wavefront
• Shell Geometry
• FEA Loads
• Spreadsheet Data
• Adams PostProcessor
• DAC/RPC III
294 Adams View
File Import
File Import
File → Import Shared Dialog Box
Imports modeling data in a wide variety of formats so you can exchange modeling data among different
Adams products, as well as with other software manufacturer’s products.
Learn about importing:
• Adams View command files
• Adams Solver datasets
• Adams Solver analysis files
• Adams Solver Script files (*.acf)
• Test data
• STEP, IGES
• CatiaV4, CatiaV5, Inventor, STEP, IGES, Acis, ProE, SolidWorks, Unigraphics, JT (Adams
Geometry Translators only)
• Parasolid
• Wavefront files
• Stereolithography and Render
• Shell
• DAC and RPC III files
E - I 295
File Import - Adams PPT
Imports data into Adams PostProcessor. In addition to importing the same data you can import into
Adams View, Adams PostProcessor also imports Reports and plot configuration files for template-based
products.
To import a report:
1. From the File menu, point to Import, and then select Report.
2. Enter the name of the file to import.
3. Select OK.
Files
Settings → Solver → Output → More → Output Category → Files
Selecting Files as the Output Category in the Solver Settings dialog box, lets you set advanced options
for Adams Solver analysis files.
• If you set to On, Adams View writes tables for each request in your model.
• If you set to Off, Adams View does not write the tables. If your simulation
has many output steps or you have many requests, specifying Off results in a
much smaller tabular output file and conserves disk space.
Separator Specify whether or not Adams writes separators to the request, graphics, results,
and tabular output files when you modify the model topology in the middle of a
Simulation. When running a Scripted simulation, you can change the model
topology by adding Adams commands to your script file to activate an element,
deactivate an element, change a marker position, or change the type or point of
application of a force or constraint.
• If you set to On (which is the default), Adams Solver reads the analysis
information into Adams View, one analysis for each block of output between
the separators.
• If you set to Off, Adams Solver reads the analysis information into Adams
View as a single simulation. This allow you to plot or animate the simulation
from beginning to end.
Yaw Pitch Roll Set to Yes to specify that rotational values are to be output in yaw, pitch, and roll
coordinates, rather than in psi, theta, and phi coordinates. First Adams rotates
about the z-axis, then about the new negative y-axis (y'), and then about the
second new x-axis (x"). Note that Yaw Pitch Roll only affects rotational
displacement output. Adams View always outputs angular velocities and
accelerations as vectors, with orthogonal x, y, and z components.
E - I 297
Fillet Tool
Fillet Tool
Build → Bodies/Geometry → Fillet Tool
You can think of creating filleted edges as rolling a ball over the edges or corners of the geometry to round
them.
298 Adams View
Fillet Tool
When filleting an edge or corner, you can specify a start and an end radius for the fillet to create a variable
fillet:
Adams View begins creating the variable fillet using the start radius and then slowly increases or
decreases the size of the fillet until it reaches the end radius. Using the ball analogy again, Adams View
starts rounding edges and corners using one size ball and finishes using a different size.
Note: You will get different results when you fillet one edge at a time than when you fillet all
edges at once. Also, you may not be able to fillet an edge if an adjoining edge has already
been filleted. It depends on the complexity of the filleting.
Learn about:
E - I 299
Fillet Tool
Creates a fixed joint that locks two parts together so they cannot move with respect to each other. The
effect is similar to defining two parts as a single part. If you want to have the two parts move relative to
each other in a future Simulation, simply delete the fixed joint and use another type of joint.
For a fixed joint, the location and orientation of the joint often do not affect the outcome of the simulation.
In these cases, you can place the joint at a location where the graphic icon is easily visible. However,
occasionally the placement of the fixed joint can allow force moments to become quite large depending
on where you place the joint, as shown in this example. In this case, be sure to place it where you get the
results you want.
E - I 301
Fixed Joint Tool
Lets you select a filter type to remove modes from the animation display. By default, all enabled modes
are used to generate nodal displacements for each flexible body during animations. To increase animation
performance, Adams Flex has three filters that let you remove graphically insignificant modes for
animations. A mode that is filtered out is excluded from the modal superposition and any contribution to
the deformation of the body is ignored. Note that these modes are not filtered out for numeric operations,
such as signal processing or xy plotting.
Lets you modify a flexible body. For example, you can change its modal content or representation to
improve the efficiency or accuracy of a Simulation.
• Accept the default. If you accept the default, Adams Flex applies non-zero
damping as follows:
• 1% damping for all modes with frequency lower than 100.
• 10% damping for modes with frequency in the 100-1000 range.
• 100% critical damping for modes with frequency above 1000.
• Clear the selection of default, and then either:
• Enter the scalar damping ratio that you want applied to all modes.
• Enter a function. To get help building the function, next to the
When you display a mode, Adams Flex displays its frequency in the
Frequency text box. Also, when you display a mode, the mode deformations
appear along with the undeformed flexible body. You can turn this off to
display only the deformed mode.
Select to animate the specified mode to see how it deforms. By default, the
animation runs 3 times or through 3 cycles. (Use the Cycles text box (described
below) to change the number of cycles.)
Tip: You can also use the Animation tool on the Main toolbox to
animate the entire model containing the flexible body after you've
run a simulation.
E - I 305
Flexible Body Modify
Frequency Enter the frequency of the mode you'd like to view, and then press Enter.
When you select Custom, Adams Flex displays a Custom Inertial Modeling
dialog box that lets you set up the invariants that you want selected.
Setting Plot Type
Plot Type Select a plot type to view in Adams Flex:
Note that setting the scale factor to a value other than 1 can make the joints at
the flexible body appear to separate. This is because the motion of a point on a
flexible body is the sum of the deformation that has been scaled and a rigid
body motion that is not scaled.
In addition, if you set the scale to 0, Adams Flex treats the flexible body as a
rigid body during animations.
E - I 307
Flexible Body Modify
[ B ] Rayleigh = α 1 [ M ] + α 2 [ K ]
Rayleigh Stiffness Specifies the scale factor for stiffness portion of Rayleigh damping. Enter a real
Factor (ALPHA2) number (default is 0). Rayleigh viscous damping is calculated as:
[ B ] Rayleigh = α 1 [ M ] + α 2 [ K ]
Material Factor Specifies the scale factor for material damping. Enter a real number (default is
(GEFACT) 1). Structural damping specified by the G and GEFACT entries will replace any
structural damping by: new[K4] = G[K] + GEFACT[K4].
G GEFACT 1
[ B ] equiv = -------- [ K ] + ------------------------ [ K4 ] + --------- [ KH ]
W3 W4 WH
310 Adams View
Flexible Body Modify (NLFE)
G GEFACT 1
[ B ] equiv = -------- [ K ] + ------------------------ [ K4 ] + --------- [ KH ]
W3 W4 WH
Hybrid Frequency Specifies the average frequency for calculation of hybrid 'structural' damping
(WH) in a transient response. Enter a real number >= 0 (default is 0). The W3 and W4
values are used in transient response only. A zero value (default) will result in
no damping. The equivalent viscous damping is calculated as:
G GEFACT 1
[ B ] equiv = -------- [ K ] + ------------------------ [ K4 ] + --------- [ KH ]
W3 W4 WH
Load Cases Tab - Building Flex Body Models > Load Case Selection.
Graphics Tab
Substituting Graphics with an Outline (Learn more about Substituting Outline Graphics for the Finite
Element Mesh.)
Full graphics Select to turn on the viewing of the full graphics; clear to turn off the viewing.
Outline Select to turn on the viewing of the Outline.
Select to sketch an outline.
Note: When animating deformation while the analysis is still running, the
color scale can only take into account the maximum deformation to
that point in the simulation; so, the colors may appear differently
when animating partial results as opposed to when animating a
completed analysis.
E - I 311
Flexible Body Modify (NLFE)
Note: Setting the scale factor to a value other than 1 can make the joints at
the flexible body appear to separate. This is because the total
displacement of each point on the flexible body will be magnified. In
addition, if you set the scale to 0, the flexible body will not move
during animations.
Select to add any comments to help you manage and identify the flexible body.
See Comments.
Results Tab
Stress This option controls the stress output to the Nastran result file (.op2 file) during
the simulation. If this option is not set, no stress will be computed during the
simulation for this flexible body, and you will not be able to post-process them.
Strain This option controls the strain output to the Nastran result file (.op2 file) during
the simulation. If this option is not set, no strains will be computed during the
simulation for this flexible body, and you will not be able to post-process them.
FEA Settings Tab
Self Contact Select to enable self-contact for this flex body during the simulation. Default is
off. Contact could increase the solution time so only use this option if you think
the flexible body may come in contact with itself.
Furthermore, the originating BDF must be setup for self-contact in the finite
element pre-processor. Specifically, there must be a "BCBODY" statement in
the bulk data section referencing a "BSURF" that defines the specific elements
to be used for contact detection. If the case control section of the original BDF
also has a "BCONTACT" statement then its ID is applied to the run-ready deck
(.dat) which Adams View creates. If not, the youngest ID of the "BCBODY"
statements in the BDF is applied. If the self-contact option is checked and no
"BCBODY" is present then the self-contact is deactivated.
By default, here, Adams uses a value of 0.5 divided by the number of nonlinear
flexible bodies in the model solved on the same machine. One may want to use
this setting if they do not want to evenly distribute memory to each flexible
body in the model because some are much larger than others. If, for example,
the model has three nonlinear flexible bodies where two are relatively small
compared to another, then one may want to set Memory Scale Factor to 0.4 for
the large one and 0.05 for the two smaller ones.
Memory Setting If "Automatically Allocate Memory" is not selected, then specify the precise
amount of open core memory (in MB) to allocate to this nonlinear flexible
body. Be careful to leave some memory for the Adams process or other
processes if they are executing on the same machine.
Buffer Size Select from one of the following:
• "Auto"
• "8193 Words"
• "16385 Words"
• "32769 Words"
• "65537 Words"
This specifies the number of words in a physical record. If "Auto" is selected,
then the Buffer Size is computed internally based upon the degrees of freedom
of the Non-Linear flexible body. Please refer to the Note below, Estimating
BUFFSIZE, for more details.
E - I 313
Flexible Body Modify (NLFE)
Notes: 1. Units (Mass, Length, Force and Time) specified in this dialog box indicate the
Nastran units specified in the BDF or while creating the non-linear flexible body
and cannot be modified using the Flexible Body Modify dialog box. If you wish to
use different units from what was specified during creation, please delete the
flexible body and recreate it again with the desired units.
2. Estimating BUFFSIZE:
The Table 4-1 presents recommendations for BUFFER SIZE based on model size.
These values have been chosen to represent the best compromise between database
access speed and storage requirements for typical problems. An excessively large
BUFFER SIZE can result in more I/O data transferred and wasted space in the
database for smaller problems; an excessively small BUFFER SIZE can result in
increase I/O counts for larger problems. You may be able to achieve higher
performance or smaller database using other values.
The Default Buffer Size is set to "Auto", in which the Degrees of Freedom (DOF)
will be computed approximately using the Nastran Estimate functionality and the
Buffer Size is then selected based on the Table 4-1 below.
The DOF can also be computed approximately by the following formula:
DOF ~= (Number of nodes on solid elements)* 3 + (Number of nodes on the other
elements) * 6
The Buffer Size can be then selected based on Table 4-1.
Note: • If you defined force graphics for any force elements in your model, but do not see the
associated arrows during animation, you should probably increase the appropriate scale
and animate again. Repeat the scaling process until the arrows of interest are visible.
• Conversely, if you see force graphic arrows on the screen, but they are too large or not
completely visible, you should either zoom out, fit your view, or decrease the scale
factor and animate again. Repeat the scaling process until at least the arrows of interest
are completely visible.
316 Adams View
Force Modify Element Like Beam
where:
where:
Enter the elements by columns from top to bottom, then from left to
right. The damping matrix defaults to a matrix with thirty-six zero
entries; that is, r1 through r21 each default to zero.
The damping matrix should be positive semidefinite. This ensures that
damping does not feed energy into the model. Adams Solver does not
warn you if the matrix is not positive semidefinite.
E - I 319
Force Modify Element Like Beam
By definition, the beam lies along the positive x-axis of the J marker.
Therefore, the I marker must have a positive x displacement with respect to
the J marker when viewed from the J marker. In its undeformed
configuration, the orientation of the I and the J markers must be the same.
When the x-axes of the markers defining a beam are not collinear, the beam
deflection and, consequently, the force corresponding to this deflection are
calculated. To minimize the effect of such misalignments, perform a static
equilibrium at the start of the simulation.
When the beam element angular deflections are small, the stiffness matrix
provides a meaningful description of the beam behavior. When the angular
deflections are large, they are not commutative; so the stiffness matrix that
produces the translational and rotational force components may not
correctly describe the beam behavior. Adams Solver issues a warning
message if the beam translational displacements exceed 10 percent of the
undeformed length.
Specifies the theory to be used to define the force this element will apply.
By default the LINEAR theory is used. If the NONLINEAR option is used,
the full non linear Euler-Bernoulli theory is used. If the STRING option is
used, a simplified non linear theory is used. The simplified non linear
theory may speed up your simulations with little performance penalties.
320 Adams View
Force Modify Element Like Field
Enter the elements by columns from top to bottom, then from left to right.
Learn about units.
Tip: A finite element analysis program can give you the values for the
stiffness matrix.
322 Adams View
Force Modify Element Like Field
Enter the elements by columns from top to bottom, then from left to right.
• To enter a damping ratio that defines the ratio of the damping matrix to
the stiffness matrix, select Damping Ratio and enter the value. If you
enter a damping ratio, Adams Solver multiplies the stiffness matrix by
the ratio to obtain the damping matrix. Do not enter a ratio without also
entering a stiffness matrix.
Tip: A finite element analysis program can give you the values for the
damping matrix.
If you selected Define Using Subroutine, the following options appear:
User Function Enter up to 30 values (r1[,...,r30]) that Adams Solver is to pass to Learn about
units. For more on FIESUB and nonlinear fields, see the Adams Solver online
help.
Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn about
specifying your own routine with ROUTINE Argument.
FORMULATION By default, the LINEAR option is used. The LINEAR option matches the
behavior of previous releases. The NONLINEAR option forces Adams Solver
to add a geometric stiffness term; this option is useful if the FIELD is being
used to model beams.
Default: LINEAR
LENGTH_TOL When using FORMULATION=NONLINEAR, the geometric stiffness uses the
larger of the current length and length tolerance.
Default: 1.e-05
E - I 323
Force Modify Element Like Friction
Forces
Displays tools for creating forces. Learn more about Forces.
Flexible Connections
Bushing Tool
Torsion SpringTool
Beam
E - I 325
Frustum Tool
Frustum Tool
Build → Bodies/Geometry → Frustrum Tool
Creates a frustum, which is a cone, the top of which has been cut off. You create a frustum by drawing
its length. The Frustum tool makes the bottom radius 12.5% of the length and makes the top radius of the
frustum 50% of the radius of the base radius. Before drawing, you can also specify the frustum's length
and the radii of its bottom and top
Note: Three hotpoints appear on a frustrum after you draw it. One controls the length of the
frustum, one controls its top radius, and the other controls the bottom radius. For more
information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically
Modify Geometry.
E - I 327
Function Builder
Function Builder
Tools → Function Builder
Helps you create and modify functions and parameterize values for various entities. You can either work
in the Expression mode or the Run-time mode.
Expression Mode
328 Adams View
Function Builder
Run-time Mode
E - I 329
Function Builder
For more information on Function Builder, see the Adams View Function Builder online help.
• All Functions
• Math Functions
• Location/Orientation Functions
• Modeling Functions
• Matrix/Array Functions
• String Functions
• Database Functions
• File Functions
• Misc. Functions
Information on Types of Functions.
Assist Only available for certain functions. Displays a dialog box to help
you with function parameters.
Click to add a plus (+) sign or right-click for more operators.
• real
• integer
• array
• string
• object
• location_orientation
Arguments Enter the names of arguments for the function object.
Assumed Values Select to specify assumed values for arguments to be used during
validation and/or plotting.
330 Adams View
Function Builder
• Markers
• Parts
• Design Points
• Design Variables
• Results Data
• Measures
• All Objects
Enter the name of an object to insert into your function definition in
the field next to the pull-down menu.
Get Data Owned By Object Select if you want to get the name of a data field owned by the object
and insert it into your function definition.
Insert Object Name Select if you want to insert the object name into your function
definition.
Plot Select to plot your function.
Plot Limits Select to specify the horizontal limits for plotting your function.
Evaluate Select to evaluate your function.
E - I 331
Function Builder Plot Limits
When working in the Function Builder in Run-time mode, you can set limits for the horizontal axis
values. Adams View plots the independent data on the horizontal axis.
For more information, see the Adams View Function Builder online help.
Gain Block
Gain blocks create the s-domain (Laplace domain) representation of basic linear transfer functions. You
specify the gain as an Adams View scalar real value. You can parameterize this constant with an Adams
View real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the gain of the associated block.
Specify the assembly name of any controls block as the input field to these blocks.
Creates a gear pair that relates the motion of three parts and two joints using a marker, called the common
velocity (CV) marker, to determine the point of contact.
Learn about:
• Creating and Modifying Gears
• About Gears
• Equations for Gears
334 Adams View
General Point Motion Tool
Construction or Contains options for creating the selected object. The options change
Settings depending on the type of object that you are creating. For example, when
Container you create a link, Adams View lets you specify its width, length, and height
before creating it. Then, as you create the link, these dimensions are set
regardless of how you move the mouse. You can also define design variables
or expressions for many values.
E - I 337
Geometry Modify Curve Arc
Allows you to control the size and location of an arc. You can modify a circle by following the same steps.
Learn about the Arc Tool.
• Chord or Yes - Closes the arc from the starting point to the
ending point.
• Sector - Closes the arc so that it creates a pie-shaped arc.
• No - Creates an open arc.
E - I 339
Geometry Modify Curve Polyline
Allows you to control the size and location of the polyline. Learn about the Polyline Tool.
To easily edit the locations, select the More button to display the
Location table.
• A geometry object whose path defines the polyline. You can select arcs,
circles, spline curves, polylines, and outlines. Adams View extracts the
values of the vertices of the path curve and uses them to create the
polyline.
Close Select if you want to create a closed polyline. If closed, the polyline can be filled
(shaded). The endpoints of the polyline do not need to be coincident for you to
close it; the two endpoints will be connected with a line segment.
If you do not select Close, you create a polyline that appears as a segmented
curve. Adams View creates the polyline by connecting the locations you
specified in the Location text box together with straight line segments in the
order in which you specified them.
Select to add any comments about the polyline that you want to enter to help
you manage and identify it. See Comments.
Allows you to control the radius of the chamfer or fillet. Learn more about:
• Chamfer Tool
• Fillet Tool
Allows you to control the thickness of a hollowed shell. Learn about the Hollow Tool.
Allows you to control the corner marker used as the anchor point of a block (box). By controlling the
corner marker, such as changing the marker used or changing its location, you change the block's location
and orientation.
Learn about the Box Tool.
Allows you to control the center marker used as the anchor point of a cylinder. By controlling the center
marker, such as changing the marker used or changing its location, you change the cylinder's location and
orientation.
Learn about the Cylinder Tool.
Center Marker Specify the center marker that defines the center of base of the cylinder.
The length of the cylinder is oriented along the z-axis of the center marker.
Angle Extent Specify the extended angle measured positive (according to the right-hand
rule) about the z-axis of the center marker. The angle starts at the positive
x-axis of the center marker and extends the arc of the cylinder.
Length Enter the length of the cylinder. Adams View uses the value of length to
specify the z distance between the two circles. A positive value specifies a
cylinder along the positive z-axis of the center marker.
Radius/Ref Radius By Specify the radius of circles at the top and bottom of the cylinder or a radius
Marker marker. If you enter a radius marker, Adams View calculates the radius of
the cylinder as the distance from the center marker z-axis to the radius
marker. Adams View stores the radius value, not the marker name. If you
later move this marker, the radius does not change.
E - I 345
Geometry Modify Shape Cylinder
Allows you to control the center marker used as the anchor point of a ellipsoid (sphere). By controlling
the center marker, such as changing the marker used or changing its location, you change the ellipsoid's
location and orientation.
Learn about the Sphere Tool.
Allows you to precisely control the size, location, and shape of a Link. Learn about the Link Tool.
Allows you to control the location and orientation of planes and change the name of the planes.
Learn about the Plane Tool.
Allows you to control the location and orientation of a plate and allows you to rename the plate.
Learn about the Plate Tool.
See an example of Plate.
Note: To change the corner locations of a plate, modify the markers that define the corner
locations.
E - I 351
Geometry Modify Shape Torus
Graphical Topology
Database Navigator → Graphical Topology
Allows you to display a representation of the selected part and shows its connections to other parts. The
connections represent the joints or forces between the parts. Each time you select a different part in the
tree list of the Database Navigator, the graphical display changes to show the selected part at the center
of the display. If the object is inactive, the part appears dimmed.
Below is an example of graphical view topology.
Learn about Viewing Model Topology Through the Database Navigator.
E - I 353
Gravity
Gravity
Settings → Gravity
You can specify the magnitude and direction of the acceleration of gravity. For each part with mass, the
gravitational force produces a point force at its center of mass.
When you turn on gravity, an icon appears in the middle of the Adams View Main window. To turn off
the display of the gravity icon, see Displaying View Accessories.
Learn about setting gravity.
Group Attributes
Build → Group → Attributes
Group Create
Build → Group → New ...
Lets you group several objects so that you can work on them as a single object. This is particularly helpful
for objects that make up a unit or subsystem of your model, such as a suspension system or a handle of
a latch. Once you’ve grouped the objects, you can add them to the Select list all at once so that you can
perform editing operations on them, such as move or copy them. You can also set up their activation and
deactivation status during simulations. (Learn about Activating and Deactivating Objects.)
When you create a group, you can specify the objects to be included or set up a filter to specify the objects
in the group. You can also enter an expression that sets whether or not the objects are active or deactive
during a simulation.
Learn about the procedures for Grouping and Ungrouping Objects.
• In the Objects in Group text box, enter the names of the objects.
Separate each name with a comma (,).
You can select an object on the screen or browse for an object in the
Database Navigator. If you select objects to group using the shortcut
menu, Adams View enters commas between the objects.
To set filters for specifying objects to be grouped:
• In the Objects in Group text box, enter a wildcard, and then specify
the type of objects in the Type Filter text box. For example, enter
Parts to include only rigid bodies or Markers to include only
coordinate system markers.
Type Filter If you set a filter in Objects in Group, specify the type of objects to be
included in the group. For example, enter Parts to include only rigid bodies
or Markers to include only coordinate system markers.
Expand Group Do not use. It is only present to provide backward compatibility. We
recommend that you not use it.
Expr Active Specify whether or not the group of objects is active during a simulation. You
can enter an expression that evaluates to 0 (not active) or 1 (active) or enter
1 or 0. If you do not specify a value, Adams View uses the activation status
you set using the Activate and Deactivate commands.
356 Adams View
Group Modify
Group Modify
Build → Group → Modify ...
Lets you modify an exisitng group. A group is particularly helpful for objects that make up a unit or
subsystem of your model, such as a suspension system or a handle of a latch. Once you’ve grouped the
objects, you can add them to the Select list all at once so that you can perform editing operations on them,
such as move or copy them. You can also set up their activation and deactivation status during
simulations. (Learn about Activating and Deactivating Objects.)
When you create a group, you can specify the objects to be included or set up a filter to specify the objects
in the group. You can also enter an expression that sets whether or not the objects are active or deactive
during a simulation.
Learn about the procedures for Grouping and Ungrouping Objects.
• In the Objects in Group text box, enter the names of the objects.
Separate each name with a comma (,).
You can select an object on the screen or browse for an object in the
Database Navigator. If you select objects to group using the shortcut
menu, Adams View enters commas between the objects.
To set filters for specifying objects to be grouped:
• In the Objects in Group text box, enter a wildcard, and then specify
the type of objects in the Type Filter text box. For example, enter
Parts to include only rigid bodies or Markers to include only
coordinate system markers.
Type Filter If you set a filter in Objects in Group, specify the type of objects to be
included in the group. For example, enter Parts to include only rigid bodies
or Markers to include only coordinate system markers.
Expand Group Do not use. It is only present to provide backward compatibility. We
recommend that you not use it.
Expr Active Specify whether or not the group of objects is active during a simulation. You
can enter an expression that evaluates to 0 (not active) or 1 (active) or enter
1 or 0. If you do not specify a value, Adams View uses the activation status
you set using the Activate and Deactivate commands.
E - I 357
Hole Tool
Hole Tool
Build → Bodies/Geometry → Hole Tool
As you create a hole, you can specify its radius and depth.
Note: You cannot specify the radius and depth of a hole so that it splits the current geometry into
two separate geometries.
Hollow Tool
Build → Bodies/Geometry → Hollow Tool
Hollows out one or more faces of a solid object to create a shell. As you hollow an object, you can specify
the thickness of the remaining shell and the faces to be hollowed. You can also specify that Adams View
add material to the outside of the object. In this case, Adams View uses the original object as a mold.
Adams View adds material of the specified thickness to the original object and then takes the original
object away, leaving a shell.
Example of Hollowed Boxes.
Note: You can hollow any object that has a face. You cannot hollow spheres, revolutions, or
Construction geometry
Creates a hooke/universal joint that allows the rotation of one rigid body to be transferred to the rotation
of another rigid body.
This joint is particularly useful when transferring rotational motion around corners, when you need to
simulate the non-constant velocity of a physical universal joint, or when transferring rotational motion
between two connected shafts that are permitted to bend at the connection point (such as the drive shaft
on an automobile).
The location point of the universal joint represents the connection point of the two parts. For a hooke
joint, two shaft axes leading to the cross bars identify the axes about which the two parts are permitted
to rotate with respect to each other. Note that Adams View uses rotational axes that are parallel to the
rotational axes you identify but that pass through the location point for the hooke joint. For a universal
joint, the cross bars identify the axes about which the two parts are permitted to rotate with respect to
each other.
Learn about:
• Creating Idealized Joints
360 Adams View
Hooke/Universal Joint Tool
Sets up how you want Screen icons displayed for the entire Modeling database or a particular type of
object, such as all parts or joints. By default, all objects inherit the screen icon display options that you
specify for the modeling database. You can set screen icon options for the following types of objects:
• Curve-curves
• Couplers
• Data elements
• Equations (System elements)
• Forces
• Gears
• Joints
• Markers (Note that markers belong to parts and, therefore, by default, inherit screen icon display
options for parts.)Motion
• Parts
• Points
• Point-curves
• FE_Nodes (FE Part Nodes)
• On - Turns on the display of screen icons for the selected type of object.
• Off - Turns off the display of screen icons for the selected type of object.
Remember, however, that turning on the display of screen icons for the
entire database overrides this setting.
• Inherit - Lets the object type simply inherit the display settings from its
parent. For example, a coordinate system marker inherits settings from
its parent part.
• No Change - Does not change the current settings. Lets you make
changes to other display options without affecting the visibility of the
icons.
Size of Icons/Scale Enter the size you want for the icons or select the amount by which you want to
of Icons scale the icons. The scale factor is relative to the current size set. A scale factor
of 1 keeps the icons the same size. A scale factor less than 1.0 reduces the size of
the icons and a scale factor greater than 1.0 increases the size of the icons. Note
that these changes take precedence over the size you specify globally for the
modeling database.
Color Enter the color you want to use for the icons.
To browse for or create a color, right-click the Color text box, and then select
Browse or Create.
Name Visibility Select whether or not you want the names of objects of the selected type
displayed in the view. Refer to Visibility option above for choices.
Reset Select to reset the screen icon display to the previous values.
364 Adams View
Import - Adams Solver Analysis Files
You can import multiple files if you associate and store the files with a model. Adams View reads and
creates all analyses under the specified model. If you do not provide a model name, Adams View reads
each analysis into its own model. For request files, when you specify multiple files, the Request IDs
button only displays the requests from the first file listed. The list of IDs will, however, be applied to all
files.
If you select to associate the files with a particular simulation, you can only import one set of output files
generated from the same Adams Solver simulation. Adams View uses the time-date stamp placed at the
beginning of each output file to determine if the files were generated by the same simulation run.
If you have very large request files that you want to import, Adams View lets you read in only a subset
of the request file to conserve memory use. You can specify to read in only the request IDs in which you
are interested and skip time steps. Note that this is only available when reading in a single request file,
not when reading in an entire set of analysis files.
Note: Importing an entire set of analysis files works even if you have only one of the three files
included in the analysis set as explained below.
If Adams View cannot find any of the three files, it issues a message. The most common
reasons that Adams View cannot find one or more of the files are that the path to the files
is incorrect or you do not have permission to read the file. You can either:
Note: If Adams View encounters special characters in the file, such as <CTRL m>, it cancels the
operation. Special characters can appear in files that have been transferred between
different computer systems (for example, from Windows NT to Linux). If Adams View
cancels the operation, edit the file to remove the special characters and import the file into
Adams View again.
Tip: You can also use Tools → Read Command File to import a command file, and set the
options using Settings → Command File.
Learn about:
• Sources of Command Files
• Command File Format
• Ensuring Upward Compatibility of Command Files
• Reading Command Files
When you import CAD geometry, Adams reads the CAD file and converts the geometry into a set of
Adams geometric elements. By importing geometry from standard CAD packages you can reduce the
need to recreate geometry primitives within Adams, and you can enhance your ability to realistically
view the behavior of complicated mechanical systems.
Be sure that the model into which you want to import the geometry is currently open and displayed in
Adams. You can associate the geometry that you import with an existing part or create a new part with
which to associate it. See Manage Geometry Options for more information.
370 Adams View
Import - CatiaV4, CatiaV5, Inventor, STEP, IGES, ACIS, Pro/Engineer, SolidWorks, Unigraphics, JT
You can specify a single level or a range of levels. Separate the range with a comma
(,). For example, enter 10, 15 to translate levels 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, and 15.
Scale Enter the factor by which you want to scale the size of the geometry created in
Adams View. The default scale factor is 1.0, meaning that the geometry in Adams
View will be the same size as the geometry in the CAD file. A scale factor less than
1.0 reduces the size of geometry and a scale factor greater than 1.0 increases the
size of the geometry.
For example, if you specify a scale factor of 0.5, Adams translates a cylinder of
length 2 meters and diameter of .5 meters to a length of 1 meter and diameter of
.25 meters. Adams also scales the distance from the geometry to the coordinate
system specified in the Relative To text box according to the scale value. If the
cylinder was located at 3, 2, 0 in the file, it would be located at 1.5, 1, 0 after it is
translated to Adams. The orientation of the geometry is not effected by scale value.
E - I 371
Import - CatiaV4, CatiaV5, Inventor, STEP, IGES, ACIS, Pro/Engineer, SolidWorks, Unigraphics, JT
For example, the geometry was created via a copy/paste/move action performed on
an original piece of geometry, or an assembly is composed of a number of
parts/sub-assemblies re-located relative to the origins about which they were
originally modelled.
Blanked entities are typically construction entities that are used in the definition of
another geometric entity. For example, a line can be used as the center of rotation
of another line in the definition of a cylinder. The center line and the sweep line
rotated about the center line are both blanked because they are temporary entities
used in the construction of the cylinder.
By default, you enter Cartesian (x,y,z) coordinates. You can change the convention
for entering translational positions. Learn about Setting Default Coordinate
System.
Note: This parameter is valid only when importing the geometry under a part
and not a model. If the geometry is being imported under a model, the
parameter will simply be ignored.
Orientation Specify the angular position where the geometry in the CAD file is to be oriented
relative to the Adams part coordinate system. These orientation coordinates can be
relative to any other coordinate system defined in the model.
Adams View orients the coordinate system starting from the initial coordinate
system and applying three successive rotations. By default, you supply body-fixed
313 angles. You can change the convention for entering orientation angles.Learn
about Setting Default Coordinate System.
Note: This parameter is valid only when importing the geometry under a part
and not a model. If the geometry is being imported under a model, the
parameter will simply be ignored.
Relative To Enter the coordinate system relative to which the translated geometry will be
defined. The coordinates you specified in the Location and Orientation text boxes
are relative to the coordinate system that you specify. You can specify a coordinate
system, part, or model.
Note: This parameter is valid only when importing the geometry under a part
and not a model. If the geometry is being imported under a model, the
parameter will simply be ignored.
Consolidate To Set to import all the geometry as one shell. If you do not select Consolidate To
Shells Shells, Adams imports the geometry as individual entities. We recommend that you
select Consolidate To Shells to receive the best animation results.
Note: This parameter is valid only when importing the geometry under a part
and not a model. If the geometry is being imported under a model, the
parameter will simply be ignored.
E - I 373
Import - CatiaV4, CatiaV5, Inventor, STEP, IGES, ACIS, Pro/Engineer, SolidWorks, Unigraphics, JT
Upon changing the desired option values, click on the 'Done' button. The
translation options so set will be used in the ensuing translation operation.
374 Adams View
Import - DAC or RPC III
Import - Parasolid
File → Import → Parasolid Shared Dialog Box
Imports Parasolid geometry. See Manage Geometry Options for more information.
When you import Parasolid geometry, Adams View reads the file and converts the geometry into a set of
Adams geometric elements. By importing geometry from standard CAD packages you can reduce the
need to recreate geometry primitives within Adams, and you can enhance your ability to realistically
view the behavior of complicated mechanical systems.
Be sure that the model into which you want to import the geometry is currently open and displayed in
Adams. You can associate the geometry that you import with an existing part or create a new part with
which to associate it.
Import - Shell
File → Import →Shell Shared Dialog Box
Imports shell geometry to enhance animations.
Note: In Adams PostProcessor, you can specify whether or not you want Adams PostProcessor
to import triangular geometry into trimesh strips when you import CAD geometry. Trimesh
strips display significantly faster than individual polygons, resulting in faster animations.
Adams PostProcessor automatically imports shell files (.shl , .slp, and .stl) as trimesh strips.
For more information, see PPT Preferences - Geometry.
For example, if you specify a scale factor of 0.5, Adams View translates a cylinder
of length 2 meters and diameter of .5 meters to a length of 1 meter and diameter of
.25 meters. Adams View also scales the distance from the geometry to the
coordinate system specified in the Relative To text box according to the scale
value. If the cylinder was located at 3, 2, 0 in the file, it would be located at 1.5, 1,
0 after it is translated to Adams. The orientation of the geometry is not effected by
scale value.
380 Adams View
Import - STEP, IGES
Blanked entities are typically construction entities that are used in the definition of
another geometric entity. For example, a line can be used as the center of rotation
of another line in the definition of a cylinder. The center line and the sweep line
rotated about the center line are both blanked because they are temporary entities
used in the construction of the cylinder.
By default, you enter Cartesian (x,y,z) coordinates. You can change the convention
for entering translational positions. Learn about Setting Default Coordinate
System.
Orientation Specify the angular position where the geometry in the CAD file is to be oriented
relative to the Adams part coordinate system. These orientation coordinates can be
relative to any other coordinate system defined in the model.
Adams View orients the coordinate system starting from the initial coordinate
system and applying three successive rotations. By default, you supply body-fixed
313 angles. You can change the convention for entering orientation angles. Learn
about Setting Default Coordinate System.
Relative To Enter the coordinate system relative to which the translated geometry will be
defined. The coordinates you specified in the Location and Orientation text boxes
are relative to the coordinate system that you specify. You can specify a coordinate
system, part, or model.
Consolidate To Set to import all the geometry as one shell. If you do not select Consolidate To
Shells Shells, Adams View imports the geometry as individual entities. We recommend
that you select Consolidate To Shells to receive the best animation results.
Display Select to display a summary of the exporting in a message window.
Summary
E - I 381
Import - STEP, IGES
Upon changing the desired option values, click on the 'Done' button. The
translation options so set will be used in the ensuing translation operation.
Ref. Markers Upon import Adams creates reference markers to correspond with each piece of
(Reference geometry created in the Adams model. These markers are typically automatically
Markers) named with the prefix PSMAR. These reference markers are usually located and
oriented at the origin of the Adams model. However, sometimes the geometry in
the CAD file was created in such a way in the CAD system that it has a
location/orientation transformation value relative to the CAD assembly/part
origin.
For example, the geometry was created via a copy/paste/move action performed
on an original piece of geometry, or an assembly is composed of a number of
parts/sub-assemblies re-located relative to the origins about which they were
originally modelled.
Note: Only ASCII .stl files (Stereolithography) are supported. Binary .stl files are not currently
supported.
For example, if you specify a scale factor of 0.5, Adams translates a cylinder of
length 2 meters and diameter .5 meters to a length of 1 meter and diameter of .25
meters. Adams also scales the distance from the geometry to the coordinate system
specified in the Relative To text box according to the scale value. If the cylinder
was located at 3, 2, 0 in the imported file, it would be located at 1.5, 1, 0 after it is
translated to Adams. The orientation of the geometry is not affected by scale value.
E - I 383
Import - Stereolithography and Render Files
By default, you enter Cartesian (x,y,z) coordinates. You can change the convention
for entering translational positions. Learn about Setting Default Coordinate
System.
Orientation Specify the angular position where the geometry in the file is to be oriented relative
to the Adams View part coordinate system. These orientation coordinates can be
relative to any other coordinate system defined in the model.
Adams View orients the coordinate system starting from the initial coordinate
system and applying three successive rotations. By default, you supply body-fixed
313 angles. You can change the convention for entering orientation angles.Learn
about Setting Default Coordinate System.
Relative To Enter the coordinate system to which the translated geometry will be defined
relative to. The coordinates you specified in the Location and Orientation text
boxes are relative to the coordinate system that you specify. You can specify a
coordinate system, part, or model.
384 Adams View
Import - Test Data
If you specify an independent data index for splines, Adams does not
create a spline for the column of the file with that index. Instead, that
column of data is used as the x data for all splines. If you do not include
an independent column index, then the series of numbers 1, 2, 3, and so
on is used for the x data of all splines.
E - I 385
Import - Test Data
Once Adams assigns the units to the spline, it performs automatic unit
conversions based on the current default units specified (Settings →
Units). For example, if you import test data and assign the unit category
of length, and then you change the length unit from millimeter to meter,
Adams View automatically converts the test data by 0.001.
Note that you should take care to ensure the current units in Adams are
set to the appropriate units for the data in the file before importing the file.
If the Adams default units are millimeter, and you are importing data in
inches, the data in the file will be interpreted as millimeters.
The units field is optional. If you omit it, Adams assigns no_units to the
imported data, and performs no automatic unit conversion.
Model Name/ Specify the name of the model or, for measures, the name of the analysis
Analysis Name in which you want to store the data. Select:
• Model Name and then enter the name of the model in the text box
next next to the pull-down menu.
• Analysis Name and then enter the name of the simulation in the text
box next to the pull-down menu. You can only store measures under
simulation results. (Not available if you are importing the data as a
spline.)
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Names in File Specify how to define the names of the splines or measures
• If there are textual column headers in the file, select Names in File.
Adams uses the column header text as the names of each spline.
• If there are no textual column headers, do not select Names in File.
Adams automatically generates names for the splines (for example,
SPLINE_1, SPLINE_2, and so on).
386 Adams View
Import - Wavefront Files
• Model Name - If you select to associate the geometry with a model, Adams
View creates a new part for each unique group name that appears in the file. If
the same group name appears more than once, Adams View adds a separate
shell geometric entity to the part with the same name as the group. It assigns
names to the shell using the convention SHLx, where x is a unique integer.
• Part Name - If you select to associate the geometry with a single part, Adams
View creates a new shell for each group that appears in the file. It assigns
names to the shells using the convention group_name_x where x is a unique
integer.
• Marker Name - If you select to associate the geometry with a marker, Adams
View creates a new shell for each group that appears in the file. It assigns
names to the shells using the convention group_name_x where x is a unique
integer.
The parts Adams View creates are massless and editing their properties and then
attaching them to your model could be cumbersome. Therefore, we suggest you
use the Part Name option. See also Tips on Importing Wavefront Files.
Impose Motion(s)
Right-click general motion → Modify
Lets you modify a general Point Motion. It displays a set of options for each of the motion's six Degrees
of freedom (DOF). It displays a pull-down menu next to a DOF if it is free and can have motion applied
to it, and displays the label fixed if the DOF is constrained and cannot move.
Learn more:
• About Motion
• Modifying General Point Motion
Information
Database Navigator → Information
Allows you to view information about the selected object. This lists the database fields for the selected
object.
Learn Viewing Object Information Through Database Navigator.
Information Window
Tools → Model Topology Map/Model Verify or Right-click on a part → Info
Adams View uses the Information window to display many different types of information about your
model, simulation, or motion data. In addition to just viewing information about your model, you can
perform a variety of operations in the Information window.
The information includes:
• Topology on the different objects in your model
• Object information, such as information about a part or a view
• Model verification results
• Measurements from one coordinate system marker to another
• Result set component information
• View attributes
• Results from a system command you run using the Tools → System Command
Performs an initial conditions simulation to check for any inconsistencies in your model. An initial
conditions simulation tries to reconcile any positioning inconsistencies that exist in your model at its
design configuration and make it suitable for performing a nonlinear or linear simulation. Most
importantly, the initial conditions simulation tries to ensure that all joint connections are defined properly.
For example, for a revolute joint to be defined properly, the origins of the Markers that define the joint
must be coincident throughout a simulation. If the markers are not coincident, the joint is broken and
needs to be repaired. In this example, the initial conditions simulation helps repair the broken revolute
joint by moving the origins of the two markers until they are coincident
You can also use the initial conditions simulation if you are creating parts in exploded view. Exploded
view is simply creating the individual parts separately and then assembling them together into a model.
You might find this convenient if you have several complicated parts that you want to create individually
without seeing how they work together until much later. Adams View provides options for specifying that
you are creating your model in exploded view as you create constraints.
After selecting the Initial Conditions tool, Adams View tells you when it has assembled your model
properly. You can revert back to your original design configuration or you can save your assembled
model as the new design configuration for your model.
Learn about Performing Initial Conditions Simulation.
392 Adams View
Inline Joint Tool
Constrains one part so that it can only move along a straight line defined on a second part as shown below.
In the figure, the solid circle indicates the first part that the joint connects and the hollow circle indicates
the second part that the joint connects. The first part is constrained relative to the second part.
The location of the inline joint on the first part must remain on the z-axis of the second part.
Learn about Creating Joint Primitives.
Pick Geometry Feature • Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working
grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction
vector on a feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
E - I 393
Inplane Joint Tool
Constrains one part so that it can only move in a plane of a second part as shown below. In the figure, the
solid circle indicates the first part that the joint connects and the hollow circle indicates the second part
that the joint connects. The first part is constrained relative to the second part.
The origin of the inplane joint on the first part must remain in the xy plane of the second part.
394 Adams View
Inplane Joint Tool
Pick Geometry Feature • Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working
grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction
vector on a feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
E - I 395
Input-Signal Function Block
Input function blocks are needed wherever a control or filter block does not receive its input from another
control or filter block. This includes external time functions that need to be passed into a block, as well
as measures of your model that represent error signals to pass into a block.
An input function block takes any valid Adams Solver (run-time) expression as its input. The input
function block is a valid controls block to reference as the input to any other controls block.
Integrator Block
Integrator filter blocks create the s-domain (Laplace domain) representation of basic linear transfer
functions. The filter coefficients are specified as an Adams View scalar real value. You can parameterize
this constant with an Adams View real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the gain of
the associated block.
Specify the assembly name of any controls block as the input field to these blocks.
Display tools for controlling Simulation. The dialog box contains a complete set of simulation controls,
while the Simulation container contains only a subset of the most commonly used simulation controls.
Learn about:
• Simulation Basics
• Types of Simulations
398 Adams View
Interactive Simulation Palette and Container
Icon Description
Sets your model back to its initial design configuration so you can modify
your model or perform another simulation starting at time 0.
You do not have to set the model back to its design configuration to
continue simulating. You can pick up from the last frame of your animation
and continue.
How Adams View replays your simulation depends on whether or not you
have finished the simulation and reset the model back to its initial design
configuration.
• If you have run a simulation, or part of a simulation, but not set the
model back to its initial configuration, when you select to replay the
animation, Adams View animates the model up to the last simulation
step and leaves your model there.
• If you reset your model back to its initial configuration, when you select
to replay the animation, Adams View automatically sets the model back
to the initial design configuration when the animation is complete.
Model Verify Tool
E - I 399
Interactive Simulation Palette and Container
Icon Description
Sim. Type Sets the type of Simulation:
• Default
• Dynamic simulation
• Kinematic simulation
• Static equilibrium
End Time/ Enter the time interval over which the simulation takes place and set how
Duration/Forever you want it defined. You can select:
• End Time - Specify the absolute point in time at which you want
the simulation to stop.
• Duration - Specify the amount of time over which you want the
simulation to run.
• Forever - Adams View continues simulating until you stop the
simulation or until it can no longer solve the equations of motion to
within your specified tolerance. This option is only available on the
Simulation Control dialog box.
Steps/Step Size Set the frequency with which Adams View outputs data during your
simulation. You can specify:
• Steps - Represents the total number of times you want Adams
View to provide output information over your entire simulation.
For example, specify 50 steps over a 1-second simulation interval
to define an output period of 0.02 seconds per step, which yields an
output frequency of 50 steps/second.
• Step Size - Represents the amount of time, in current model units,
between output steps. The output frequency remains constant even
if you change your simulation end time or duration. For example,
enter a step size of 0.01 seconds to specify an output period of 0.01
seconds per step, which yields an output frequency of 100
steps/second.
Static Equilibrium Tool
Icon Description
Icons By default, Adams View turns off all Screen icons during animations to
speed up the animation.
Allows the user to grab a part and drag it while the C++ Solver honors all
of the model's constraints. Useful for quickly verifying a model's behavior.
If this is attempted while a simulation is already running, the running
simulation will stop.
Displays the Compute Linear Modes dialog box.
Displays the Perform Vibration Analysis dialog box. Only available when
you have Adams Vibration. For more information, see the Adams Vibration
help.
See Linear Modes.
Displays the Compute and Export Linear States dialog box letting you
generate a state-space matrix representation of your mechanical system.
Update Graphics Display Clear the selection to never have your model updated during the simulation.
Select this when you are sure that your simulation will run to completion
without difficulty, and you want to maximize the efficiency of the
simulation.
Learn about setting more options for simulation display with Solver
Settings - Display dialog box help.
E - I 401
Interactive Simulation Palette and Container
Icon Description
Interactive/Scripted Displays tools for controlling either an interactive or Scripted simulation.
Save/Delete Simulation Results
• Left-click to display the Save Run Results dialog box so you can
save the simulation results.
• Right-click to select a set of simulation results to delete.
Save Simulated Position
Displays the Save Model at Simulation Position dialog box so you can save
the model at a simulated position into the Modeling database under a new
name.
Displays the Animation Controls dialog box.
Simulation Settings... Displays the Solver Settings dialog box, letting you set how you want the
Simulation performed.
402 Adams View
Intersect Tool
Intersect Tool
Build → Bodies/Geometry → Intersect Tool
Creates a single part that is made up of only the intersecting geometries of two solids. It merges the
second part that you select with the geometry of the first part that you select and forms one rigid body
from the two geometries.
Learn about Creating One Part from the Intersection of Two Solids.
J - O 403
Intersect Tool
J-O
404 Adams View
Joint Initial Conditions
Sets initial conditions for revolute, translational, and cylindrical joints, including translational and
rotational displacement and velocity. If you specify initial conditions, Adams View uses them as the
initial displacement velocity of the part during an Initial conditions simulation regardless of any other
forces acting on the part.
Some options in the dialog box are not available (ghosted) depending on the type of joint for which you
are setting initial conditions.
Learn more about initial conditions for joints.
Note: If the initial rotational displacement of a revolute or cylindrical joint varies by anywhere
from 5 to 60 degrees from the actual location of the joint, Adams Solver issues a warning
message and continues execution. If the variation is greater than 60 degrees, Adams View
issues an error message and stops execution.
J - O 405
Joint Motion
Joint Motion
Right-click joint motion → Modify
Displays tools for creating joints. The palette contains the entire library of joints while the tool stacks on
the Main toolbox contain only subsets of the most commonly used joints.
Learn about Using Toolboxes, Tool Stacks, and Palettes. Also learn about:
• Types of Motion
408 Adams View
Joint Palette and Joint and Motion Tool Stacks
• Overview of Constraints
J - O 409
Joint Palette and Joint and Motion Tool Stacks
Construction Contains options for creating the selected object. The options change depending
or Settings on the type of object that you are creating. For example, when you create a link,
Container Adams View lets you specify its width, length, and height before creating it.
Then, as you create the link, these dimensions are set regardless of how you move
the mouse. You can also define design variables or expressions for many values.
J - O 411
Lead-Lag Filter Block
Lead-lag filter blocks create the s-domain (Laplace domain) representation of basic linear transfer
functions. The filter coefficients are specified as an Adams View scalar real value. You can parameterize
this constant with an Adams View real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the gain of
the associated block.
Specify the assembly name of any controls block as the input.
Lighting Settings
Settings → Lighting Settings
Icon Description
Intensity Slide to set how bright the overall light is.
Ambient Slide to set the ambient light.
Angle Slide to set how far from the center line the light source is. May not be appropriate
for all light sources, such as front.
Reflections Toggle to set up reflections off of parts. See Reflections Example.
Two-Sided Turn on to have lighting come from two sides.
Turns on and off the light
J - O 413
Lighting Settings
Icon Description
Set from upper left corner.
Icon Description
Set from upper right corner
Icon Description
Set from right side
Icon Description
Set from bottom
Allows you to view your model oscillating at one of its natural frequencies. It cycles through the model
deformation starting from the operating point of the requested natural frequency of the eigensolution.
You can also see the effect of the damping on the model and display a table and plot of modes and
frequencies.
Learn about Animating Natural Frequencies.
Frames Per Cycle Enter the number of frames to be displayed for each cycle.
Showing the trail is useful in showing the relationship of the model parts
between frames but often obscures the view of the motion.
Show undeformed Select if you want the undeformed model to be displayed with the
deformed shape superimposed on top of it.
If you select Show undeformed, select a color for the underformed model.
If you do not specify a color, Adams View displays the undeformed model
using the same color as the deformed mode.
Show icons Select to turn on the display icons during an animation.
Undef. Color Specify the color for undeformed shape or use original colors.
Max. Translation Enter a value to scale mode shape so that translations are smaller than it.
Note: If you have not specified a either scales, then use 20% of the
maximum dimension of the model for translational and 20
degrees for rotational.
Max. Rotation Enter a value to scale mode shape so that rotations are smaller than it.
Table Select to display eigenvalues in a tabular form.
Plot Select to plot complex eigenvalue scatter.
Select to switch to Simulation Controls.
J - O 419
Linear Modes Eigenvalue Plot
Displays the plot of eigenvalues and allows you to save or delete the plot.
Learn about Animating Natural Frequencies.
Link Tool
Buid → Bodies/Geometry → Link Tool
Creates a link by drawing a line indicating the link’s length. By default, the Link tool creates the link with
a width that is 10% of the indicated length and a depth that is 5% of the length. The radius of the ends of
the link is equal to half the width. Before drawing, you can also define the length, width, and depth of the
link.
Note: Two hotpoints appear after you draw the link: one hotpoint lets you modify the length of
the link and the other hotpoint lets you modify the depth, width, and height. For more
information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically
Modify Geometry.
J - O 421
Location Table
Location Table
Lets you view the points in polylines, splines, extrusions, and revolutions and edit them. You can also
save the location information to a file or read in location information from a file.
Learn more:
• Displaying the Location Table
• Working in the Location Table
• Reading and Writing Location Information
For general information on using tables in Adams View, see Using Tables to Enter Values.
422 Adams View
LocationEvent
LocationEvent
When Adams View asks you for a location, right-click
Lets you enter location coordinates to precisely set the location of an object, such as a design point or a
force. You can enter the location relative to the origin of the Working grid, the global coordinate system,
or any other object on the screen.
Learn about:
• Entering Precise Location Coordinates
• Selecting Objects from a Crowd
Low-pass filter blocks create the s-domain (Laplace domain) representation of basic linear transfer
functions. The filter coefficients are specified as an Adams View scalar real value. You can parametrize
this constant with an Adams View real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the gain of
the associated block.
Specify the assembly name of any controls block as the input field to these blocks.
This command enables you to write all the investigation .adm and .acf files out to disk. This can be
helpful if you do not want to run all the simulations in one Adams View session or if you want to
distribute the jobs to multiple CPUs. This command temporarily sets solver preferences to
write_files_only and creates the simulation and command files. You can subsequently use the primary
driver .acf file (<prefix>_bat.acf) to run all the simulations. When all the jobs have completed
successfully, you use the commands MDI INSIGHT LOAD to load the results back into the Adams
Insight experiment file with the use of <prefix>_bat.cmd.
If you use the <prefix>_bat.acf file to launch all the simulations, note the following:
• Be sure your SENSOR statements do not have the HALT qualifier.
• If one job fails, the process will need to be restarted manually.
• Instead of the <prefix>_bat.acf you can create a script to run the jobs.
• Set nosep.
Once the analysis files have been written, it is important to check a few of the files to verify that the
factors are actually being altered the way you expect them to. Using a text file differencing tool is a
convenient way to accomplish this task.
To run the simulations external to Adams View, make sure you select the appropriate simulation script
type and that you're saving the appropriate OUTPUT files. It is recommended that you perform a
Perimeter Study exercising each aspect of this process before running the longer set of simulations.
Once the simulations have completed, be sure to review the simulations results by checking .req and .msg
file sizes. Also, perform a grep for ERROR in the .msg files.
After the simulation results have been completed and read back into Adams Insight, make sure you
review the contents of the response columns in the WorkSpace matrix.
Macro Editor
Tools → Macro → Edit → New
Edits Macros that you recorded or that you created by reading in a macro file. You can also use the Macro
Editor to create a macro.
Note: If you select Modify from this menu, the Database Navigator appears. From the Database
Navigator, select a macro to modify.
Macro Read
Tools → Macro → Read
Allows you to read in an existing command file containing the commands to be executed as a macro. You
can also assign a help file or text string to the macro that explains the macro's use.
Learn about Automating Your Work Using Macros.
Note: The command string you enter must be unique. You cannot
redefine an existing command, although you can add a new
keyword at any level to an existing command.
Wrap in Undo Specify if the entire macro can be undone with a single Undo command.
Note that a single Undo, while convenient, can consume a great deal of
memory for very large macros or slow macro execution noticeably, even if
you do not actually use the Undo.
Create Panel Select Yes if you want to create a dialog box, or select no if you do not want
to create a dialog box.
J - O 427
Macro Write
Macro Write
Tools → Macro → Write
Saves the macro to a command file. Saving the macro to a command file lets you give the macro to
another user, and also helps you modify long macros when you do not have the original file.
If you used non-default values for the other macro data, such as the help string, the command file includes
comments with those values.
Note: Adams View saves all macros in the current Modeling database when you save the
database.
Main Toolbox
Displays commonly used tools for creating, editing, and selecting modeling elements, as well as
simulating the model and undoing operations. The tools are shortcuts to using the menus in the menu bar.
In addition, many of the tools are Tool stacks. Right-click a tool to display its tool stack.
J - O 429
Main Toolbox
Icon Description
Select Tool
Measure Toolstack
Joint Toolstack
Motion Toolstack
Animation Controls
Move Toolstack
Icon Description
Dynamic Rotation Tool Stack
Increment Entering a value lets you more precisely control the view display changes,
such as zooming and rotations.
View Orientation Tools
Window Layout
Note: All but STEP and IGES require the 'Adams Geometry Translators' license.
Import: IGES, STEP, ACIS, CATIA V4, CATIA V5, Pro/E (and Creo), Inventor, Solidworks,
Unigraphics, JT
Export: IGES, STEP
Sew If set to true, all the bodies are sewed together. The default is 'false' for all
formats except IGES.
Color (applicable for If set to true, color of the data will be taken into account during import. The
Unigraphics, Solidworks default is 'true'. Setting to 'false' may improve import speed under some
and JT only) conditions.
Use Direct Approach If set to true, the data translator component will save the data directly into
Parasolid. The default is 'false'.
CurveChordToleranceScale Curve chord tolerance scale is the multiplying factor for the curve chord tolerance.
Curve chord tolerance is the maximum chordal distance between a facet edge and
its original edge entity.
If the curve chord tolerance scale is less than 0.3, the tessellation will be finer. A
value greater than 0.3 will result in a coarser tessellation.
J - O 435
Manage Geometry Options
CurveChordAngle Curve chord angle is the maximum angle (always in radians, irrespective of model
units) which is permitted between a facet chord and its original edge entity.
The default is 0.26 (that is 15 deg) which means a value will be automatically set by
Adams if it is not explicitly set by the user.
Lesser curve chord angle will result in a finer tessellation. Greater angle will result
in a coarser tessellation.
436 Adams View
Manage Geometry Options
SurfacePlaneToleranceScale Surface plane tolerance scale is the multiplying factor for the surface plane
tolerance. Surface plane tolerance is the maximum distance between the mid-plane
of a facet and its original face entity.
If the surface plane tolerance scale is less than 0.3 the tessellation will be finer. A
value greater than 0.3 will result in a coarser tessellation.
J - O 437
Manage Geometry Options
SurfacePlaneAngle Surface plane angle is the maximum angle (always in radians, irrespective of model
units) which is permitted between the surface normal at any two positions on the
surface which lie within the facet boundary.
The default is 0.26 (that is 15 deg) which means a value will be automatically set by
Adams if it is not explicitly set by the user.
Lesser surface plane angle will result in a finer tessellation. Greater angle will result
in a coarser tessellation.
Note: Finer or coarser tessellation will impact performance in loading the model and all graphics
operations like view manipulation, wireframe/shaded mode change and so on. Finer
tessellation will result in better rendering but will negatively impact the performance.
Coarser tessellation will improve the performance but will negatively impact the rendering
quality.
438 Adams View
Marker Modify
Marker Modify
Right-click a marker → Modify
Allows you to precisely control the location and orientation of your marker. The options available depend
on whether or not the marker is attached to a part, ground, or curve or a node on a flexible body. Select
a topic below:
• Marker on Part, Ground, or Curve
• Marker Attached to Node on Flexible Body or an external system (when an MNF/MD DB is
specified)
the marker so it is offset from the node or you can attach it to several nodes. Learn about Adding Markers
to Flexible Bodies.
Marker Tool
Build → Bodies/Geometry → Marker Tool
When you select to create a marker using the Marker tool, you specify the marker's location and
orientation (when you define a marker on a curve, its orientation is prescribed implicitly). You can align
the orientation of the marker with the global coordinate system, the current view coordinate system, or a
coordinate system that you define. When you define a coordinate system, you specify one or two of its
axes and Adams View calculates the other axes accordingly.
After you create the marker, you can make changes to it, such as attach it to several nodes of a flexible
body and align it so it stays along a specified curve. Learn about modifying marker with Marker Modify
dialog box help.
Note: You can parameterize the locations and orientations of other objects to that of markers. For
example, you can align the location of a part to be the same as a marker regardless of how
the marker moves. Unlike points, whose parameterization is automatic, you must set up
relationship of markers to other objects. For more information on establishing parameteric
relationships, see, Improving Your Model Designs.
Tip: To reorient the marker, use the Align & Rotate tool from the Move tool stack, select Align
One Axis, and then follow the prompts:
Displays the Debug table, which contains a running count of the iterations needed to solve the equations
of motion for the current Simulation. You can use the information as a measure of how many
computations Adams Solver is performing.
Learn more about Debugging Your Model.
Measure Attributes
Build → Object Measure → Modify → Measure Attributes Tool
When you modify a measure, you can set the attributes for a Strip chart, including creating a legend,
setting axis limits, and setting the color and line type for the curve.
Note that you have to redisplay the strip chart to see the effects of changing the legend using the options
below. Learn about redisplaying strip charts.
Line Type Select a type of line style for the curve. For example, you can select a line that
alternates between dots and dashes.
Symbol Set the type of symbol displayed at data points along the curve.
446 Adams View
Measure Attributes
Measure Distance
Tools → Measure Distance Shared Dialog Box
Calculates the relative distance and orientation between two positions in your model (Markers, Points, or
a marker/point) and ground. Adams View calculates the following distance information:
• Magnitude
• x, y, and z component
• Angular displacement
You can also select that Adams View calculate the results relative to a reference marker. You can select
to measure the distance at the model's initial configuration (how you built it) or at a particular simulation
step. You can specify a time, frame number, or a configuration of the model. You can view the results in
an Information window or have Adams View store the results in a file.
Learn more about Measuring Distance Between Positions.
Analysis Name • Model Name - To calculate the distance based on the current
configuration of a model.
• Analysis Name - To calculate the distance based on a
configuration or simulation time in a particular Simulation.
If you selected Model Name, the following option appears:
448 Adams View
Measure Distance
Measure Toolstack
Main toolbox → Measure toolstack
Merge Tool
Build → Bodies/Geometry → Merge Tool
Merges two non-intersecting rigid body geometries into one without performing any Boolean operations
on the geometry. The geometry can contain any type of geometry: solid, wire, or complex. The geometry
can also belong to the same part. If the geometry belongs to the different parts, The Merge tool merges
the parts into one.
Because Adams View does not perform any Boolean operations on the merged geometries, overlapping
volumes produce double-density mass in the part and change the results of the mass property
calculations. Therefore, you should use this operation only for non-intersecting rigid bodies that the Unite
Tool cannot combine.
Adams View merges the second geometry that you select into the first geometry you select.
Learn about Merging Geometry.
J - O 451
Merge Two Models
Allows you to merge one Model in your Modeling database into another model. Adams View maintains
the source model and does not change it after the merge operation.
This is helpful for merging two subsystems stored in the same database into a single model. It allows you
to work on each subsystem individually and merge them together when you are ready to work on them
as a whole.
Learn about the procedure for Merging Models.
You can browse for a model by right-clicking the text boxes and selecting
the appropriate commands.
Translate Specify the translations to apply to the source model before merging it
with the destination model.
By default, you enter Cartesian (x,y,z) coordinates. You can change the
convention for entering translational positions. Learn more about
Coordinate Systems in Adams View.
Rotation Specify the angular position of the parts and polylines in the source
model.
Add all elements to a Optional. Enter a new or existing group into which Adams View adds all
Group named merged objects. Learn about Grouping and Ungrouping Objects.
Merge/Rename Select either:
Selecting Message (.msg) Content as the Output Category in the Solver Settings dialog box lets you set
the contents of the Message file. You only receive a message file when you are using External Adams
Solver. Learn about setting the type of Adams Solver.
Message Settings
View → Message Window → Settings
Allows you to set the messages displayed in the Message Window and clear the messages from the
window. By default, the message window only displays error and fatal messages and messages from
commands that you execute from the user interface (for example, menus and dialog boxes). You can also
display messages that you execute from the Command window, Command Navigator, and command files.
In addition, you can set the severity level of the messages displayed, from informational to fatal
messages. Learn about Managing Messages in Adams View.
Message Window
View → Message Window
Provides you with messages on the status of Adams View and displays helpful information while you are
using Adams.
Adams View displays messages about the execution of a command in the message window. By default,
the message window only displays messages about commands you execute from the user interface. You
can also set it to display messages about commands that you execute from the Command window,
Command Navigator, and command files.
It performs transformation on an already existing flexible body or Modal Neutral File (MNF) or MD DB
File (.master). The types of transformation operations that can be performed are:
• Translation - Translate along a vector, by specified distance.
• Rotation - Rotate about an axis, by specified angle.
• Mirroring - Mirror about a plane.
Note: You can view all the flexible bodies in the MD DB, using the “…”
button provided beside the Index. The desired flexible body can be
selected by double-clicking on the displayed list.
MNF/MD DB Select the appropriate option for Output File and enter the name of the MNF
or the MD DB file.
Create Flexible Select to open Create a Flexible Body dialog box after the intended
Body... transformation is carried out, so that you can create the flexible body and see
the transformation.
Mirror Select to perform mirroring operation. You need to specify mirroring plane to
perform mirroring operation.
Translate Select to perform translation operation. You need to specify a direction for
translation and a distance to translate.
Rotate Select to perform rotation operation. You need to specify the axis about which
rotation can be done and an angle for rotation.
If Mirror option is selected, following options are available.
456 Adams View
MNF and MD DB Transformation
• Global X - This option specifies that the mirror plane is normal to the
global X axis.
• Global Y - This option specifies that the mirror plane is normal to the
global Y axis.
• Global Z - This option specifies that the mirror plane is normal to the
global Z axis.
• X axis of Marker - This option specifies that the mirror plane is
normal to the specified Marker's X axis.
• Y axis of Marker - This option specifies that the mirror plane is
normal to the specified Marker's Y axis.
• Z axis of Marker - This option specifies that the mirror plane is
normal to the specified Marker's Z axis.
• User Defined - This option specifies the mirror plane is normal to the
user entered vector.
Marker Only available if Direction is either X Axis, Y Axis or Z Axis of Marker.
Checks for error conditions in your model, such as misaligned joints, unconstrained parts, or massless
parts in dynamic models, and alerts you to other possible problems. It is a good tool to use periodically
as you add detail to or refine your model.
The Model Verify tool calculates the number of Degrees of freedom (DOF) in your model. It gives you
two separate calculations:
• The Gruebler count, which is a rough estimate of the number of DOF in your model using the
Gruebler equation to add up the number of DOF introduced by parts and to subtract the number
of DOF removed by constraints.
• The actual number and type of movable parts and constraints in the model that Adams Solver
determines after it formulates your model’s equations of motion.
It issues warning messages to alert you to any inconsistencies in your model. For example,
inconsistencies can occur when you have not defined connections properly or parts are free to move but
have no mass properties assigned to them.
The verification results appear in the Information Window.
Learn about Verifying Your Model.
J - O 461
Modify Body
Modify Body
Right-click part → Part name → Modify
• Material Type
• Geometry and Density
• User Input
If you selected Material Type, the following options appears:
Material Type Enter the type of material for the rigid body. Adams View displays the
material’s composition below the text box. Adams View uses the density
associated with the material type and volume of the geometry of the part to
calculate the part’s mass and inertia. Learn about Standard Material
Properties. Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Show calculated inertia Select to view the mass-inertia tensor matrix that Adams View calculates.
If you selected Geometry and Density, the following options appears:
Density Enter the density of the part. Adams View uses the part’s density and the
volume of the geometry to calculate its mass and inertia.
Show calculated inertia Select to view the mass-inertia tensor matrix that Adams View calculates.
If you selected User Input, the following options appear:
Mass Enter the mass of the part.
Moments of inertia Enter the mass moments of inertia. Learn About Entering Mass Moments of
Inertia.
Center of Mass Marker Enter the marker that is to be used to define the center-of-mass (CM) for
the part.
464 Adams View
Modify Body - Mass Properties
You can specify translational and angular velocities for rigid bodies and only translational velocity for
point masses.
• Translational velocity defines the time rate of change of a part’s center of mass with respect to
ground or another marker in your model. You can specify translational velocity for each vector
component of the marker.
• Angular velocity defines the time rate of change of a part’s rotational position with respect to the
CM marker of the part or another marker in your model. You can specify angular velocity for
each vector component of the marker.
If you specify initial velocities, Adams View uses them as the initial velocity of the part during assemble
model operations, regardless of any other forces acting on the part. You can also leave some or all of the
velocities unset. Leaving a velocity unset lets Adams View calculate the velocity of the part during an
assemble operation depending on the other forces and constraints acting on the part. Note that it is not
the same as setting the initial velocity to zero. Setting an initial velocity to zero means that the part will
not be moving in the specified direction when the simulation starts, regardless of any forces and
constraints acting upon it.
Translational Velocity
Ground Select to specify the global reference coordinate system as the system in
which the translational velocity vector components will be specified.
Marker Select and enter a marker along whose axes the translational velocity vector
components will be specified.
X Axis/Y Axis/Z Axis Select the axes in which you want to define velocity and enter the velocity
in the text box that appears next to the axes check boxes. Remember,
leaving a velocity unset lets Adams View calculate the velocity of the part
during an initial conditions simulation, depending on the other forces and
constraints acting on the part. It is not the same as setting the initial velocity
to zero.
Angular Velocity (Not available if you are modifying a point mass.)
Part CM Select to specify the part’s center-of-mass (CM) marker as the coordinate
system about whose axes the translational or angular velocity vector
components will be specified.
Marker Select and enter a marker about whose axes the translational or angular
velocity vector components will be specified.
468 Adams View
Modify Body - Velocity Initial Conditions
Modify Bushing
Right-click bushing → Modify
Select to change the position of the force using the Precision Move dialog
box.
Modify Comment
Modify Coupler
Right-click coupler → Modify
Modifies a coupler allowing you to specify the relationship between the driver and the coupled joint or
to create a three-joint coupler.
Learn about:
• Modifying Couplers
• Creating Couplers
Modify Extrusion
Right-click an extrusion → Modify
Allows you to control the location and orientation of an Extrusion and allows you to rename the extrusion.
Learn about Extrusion tool.
To edit the locations of the points, select the More button to display the
Location table.
• Profile Curve - Enter the object used to define the profile of the extrusion.
You can specify an arc, circle, spline curve, polyline, chain, or outline as the
profile curve. The object should be in the xy plane of the reference marker.
Path Points/ Select either:
Path Curve/
Length along Z • Path Points - Enter points used to define the path of the extrusion. The points
are relative to the reference marker. The points define the path along which the
profile curve will be extended.
To edit the locations of the points, select the More button to display the
Location Table.
• Path Curve - Enter the object used to define the path of the extrusion. You can
specify an arc, circle, spline curve, polyline, chain, or outline. The object
defines the path along which the profile curve is extended.
• Length along Z - Z-axis of the reference marker defining the straight line
along which the profile curve will be extruded. Enter a positive length to
extrude along the +z-axis.
474 Adams View
Modify Extrusion
Modify FEMDATA
Build → Data Elements → FEMDATA → Modify
Produces data files of component loads, deformations, stresses, or strains for input to subsequent finite
element or fatigue life analysis. You use the Solver → Settings → Output → More → Durability Files
to specify the type of file to produce (for more information, see Solver Settings - Output dialog box help
and Adams Durability online help). Adams View will not output to any files unless you specify the format.
For the
option: Do the following:
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Name Enter the name of the FEMDATA element to modify.
Type Select the information that you want output:
For the
option: Do the following:
Peak Slice Select that FEM load data are to be output only at those time steps where the
specified peak load occurred in the simulation. With the START and END, Adams
View only checks the time steps within those specifications for the peak load. You
can specify one or more of FX, FY, FZ, FMAG, and GMAG.
If you selected Loads on Flexible Body, the following options appear:
Flex Body Enter the name of the flexible body whose data Adams View outputs. Adams View
outputs the data in the FEM basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible
body.
Peak Slice Select that FEM load data are to be output only at those time steps where the
specified peak load occurred in the simulation. With the START and END, Adams
View only checks the time steps within those specifications for the peak load. You
can specify one or more of FX, FY, FZ, FMAG, GMAG.
If you selected Modal Deformation, the following option appears:
Flex Body Specifies the name of the flexible body whose data FEMDATA outputs. FEMDATA
outputs the data in the FEM basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible
body.
If you selected Nodal Deformation, the following option appears:
Flex Body Enter the name of the flexible body whose data FEMDATA outputs. FEMDATA
outputs the data in the FEM basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible
body.
Nodes Enter the node numbers of a flexible body whose data is to be output. If you do not
specify a node list, FEMDATA exports nodal data at each attachment point of the
flexible body. Adams Solver issues a warning if a node id is specified that does not
belong to the flexible body.
Datum Enter a node ID of the flexible body to be the datum of the nodal displacements.
Adams Solver computes all nodal displacements relative to this node ID. If you do
not specify a datum node, Adams Solver generates an arbitrary relative set of nodal
displacements. It displays a warning message if the specified node does not belong
to the flexible body.
If you selected Stress or Strain, the following two options appear:
Flex Body Specifies the name of the flexible body whose data FEMDATA outputs. FEMDATA
outputs the data in the FEM basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible
body.
Nodes Enter the node numbers of a flexible body whose data is to be output. If you do not
specify a node list, FEMDATA exports nodal data at each attachment point of the
flexible body. Adams Solver issues a warning if a node id is specified that does not
belong to the flexible body.
For all types, set the following options:
J - O 477
Modify FEMDATA
For the
option: Do the following:
File Enter the output file name for the FEM data. You can specify an existing directory,
root name, and/or extension. By default, the file name will be composed of the
Adams run and body IDs according to the type of data and file format that you
specified in the Solver → Settings → Output → More → Durability Files (for more
information, see Adams Durability online help).
Time Specify the start and end times for outputting the data:
• From - Enter the time at which to start outputting the data. The default is the
start of the simulation.
• To - Enter the time at which to end the output of the data or the search of a
peak load. The default is to output to the end of the simulation.
478 Adams View
Modify Force
Modify Force
Right-click single-component force → Modify
The options available in the dialog box change depending on the direction of the force.
Learn more about:
• How To create a single-component force:
• Specifying Force Direction for Single-Component Forces
• Modifying Single-Component Forces
Function text box, select the More button to display the Function Builder.
Parameters and ID If you selected Subroutine for Define Using, enter the parameters to be passed
to a user-written subroutine and its ID. Entering an ID is optional.
Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine SFOSUB. Learn
about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
Force Display Set whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts, both, or none.
By default, Adams View displays the force graphic on the action body for single-
component forces.
480 Adams View
Modify General Force
Action Marker
Reaction Part/ Change the reaction body or marker that receives the reaction forces.
Reaction Marker
Reference Marker Change the reference marker that indicates the direction of the force.
Define Using Enter how you want to define the force. Select:
For an open curve, Adams View defaults to a segment count that is five times the
number of curve points that you have provided. Specifying fewer segments results
in a coarser curve. For a closed curve, Adams View defaults to a segment count
that is five times the number of points, plus one. In mathematical terms:
5 * ( #pts + 1 )
For both closed and open curves, there are no limits to how many or how few
segments you use (other than hardware limitations), but for every curve there is a
plateau, beyond which increasing the number of segments does not enhance the
graphics of your spline.
Values Enter values for the locations of the points that define the spline. The points are
relative to the reference marker.
You can edit the locations of the points by selecting the More button to
display the Location table. The values cannot be modified if a reference_profile is
specified.
Reference Marker Enter the marker that defines the location and orientation of the spline. The marker
acts as a reference coordinate system for the coordinate values used to define the
reference curve points.
Reference Curve Displays the existing data element curve that is used to mathematically define the
spline. When you define the points that make up the spline, Adams View creates a
curve fit through the points. Learn about Data Element Modify Curve dialog box.
Reference Profile Enter an existing Wire Geometry from which the bspline is to be created. Note that
the ref curve and matrix will be automatically generated and hence the
corresponding fields are disabled if a profile is specified.
J - O 483
Modify Geometric Spline
Modify Joint
Right-click idealized or primitive joint → Modify
• You can only change a simple idealized joint to another type of simple
idealized joint or to a joint primitive.
• You cannot change a joint’s type if motion is applied to the joint. In
addition, if a joint has friction and you change the joint type, Adams View
returns an error.
First Body Change the part that moves relative to the second body.
Second Body Change the part that the first body moves relative to.
Force Graphics Select to display force graphics.
Pitch Value For a screw joint, enter its pitch value (translational displacement for every full
rotational cycle).
Impose Motion Select to impose motion on the joint. After selecting, set the translational or
rotational displacement or velocity, and then select OK.
Select to change the position of the joint using the Precision Move dialog box.
Select to apply friction to the joint. See Create/Modify Friction dialog box help.
486 Adams View
Modify Modal ICs
Displays all the modes in the flexible body and lets you enable and disable them, and set their initial
conditions. An asterisk (*) appears next to all modes that are enabled.
To enable or disable modes:
• Highlight the modes that you want to enable or disable.
• Select Disable Highlighted Modes or Enable Highlighted Modes.
Run-Time Clearances can be used to monitor the clearance distance between two selected
geometries/flexible bodies. This clearance distance is based upon tesselation of geometry or analytical
representation of known geometry. For flexible parts, clearance is based upon the external face geometry
in the MNF.
The clearance tool only considers distance between polygons (whether from a mesh for flexible parts or
from tesselation of geometry) so additional single point nodes are left out of the clearance analysis.
After a simulation is complete, the minimum clearance location between the two geometries/flexible
bodies may be animated. This is represented as a line between the objects involved. You can also plot the
clearance result sets and export the clearance data in the results file.
Multiple clearance analyses may be conducted between the same two bodies by selecting different
regions of a flexible part for each analysis.
Allows you to control the location and orientation of a revolution. Learn about the Revolution Tool.
Modify Torque
Right-click single-component torque → Modify
The options available in the dialog box change depending on the direction of the force.
Learn about:
• Single-Component Torque tool
• Modifying Single-Component Forces
• Specifying Force Direction for Single-Component Forces
Modifies either a Three-component torque or a Six-component general force. Its title and options change
depending on the type of force. Select a title below for more information on the options available:
• Modify Torque Vector (three-component torque)
• Modify General Force
J - O 495
Modify a Request
Modify a Request
Build → Measure → REQUEST → Modify
Modifies a request.
Learn about Creating Requests.
Learn about:
• Translational Spring Damper Tool
• Equations Defining the Force of Spring Dampers
No Stiffness/ • Stiffness Coefficient and enter a stiffness value for the spring
damper.
Spline: F=f(defo)
• No Stiffness to turn off all spring forces and create a pure damper.
• Spline: F=f(defo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship of
force to deformation.
Damping Coefficient/ Select one of the following:
No Damping/ • Damping Coefficient and enter a viscous damping value for the
spring damper.
Spline: F=f(velo)
• No Damping to turn off all damping forces and create a pure spring.
• Spline: F=f(velo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship of
force to velocity.
Length and Preload:
Preload Enter the preload force for the spring damper. Preload force is the force of
the spring damper in its reference position.
498 Adams View
Modify a Spring-Damper Force
Length at Preload • Default Length to automatically use the length of the spring damper
when you created it as its reference length.
• Length at Preload and enter the reference length of the spring at its
preload position.
Tip: If you set preload to zero, then displacement at preload is the
same as the spring’s free length. If the preload value is non-
zero, then the displacement at preload is not the same as the
spring’s free length.
Spring Graphic Specify whether coil spring graphics are always on, always off, or on
whenever you have defined a spring coefficient.
Force Display Specify whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts, both,
or none. By default, Adams View displays the force graphic on the action
body.
Damper Graphic Specify whether cylinder damper graphics are always on, always off, or on
whenever you have defined a damping coefficient.
Select to add any comments about the variable to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
Select to change the position of the spring damper using the Precision Move
dialog box.
No Stiffness/ • Stiffness Coefficient to enter a stiffness value for the torsion spring.
• No Stiffness to turn off all spring forces and create a pure damping force.
Spline: F=f(defo)
• Spline: F=f(defo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship of
stiffness to rotational deformation (radians). Learn about defining Splines.
Damping Coefficient/ Select one of the following:
No Damping/ • Damping Coefficient and enter a viscous damping coefficient for the
torsion spring.
Spline: F=f(velo)
• No Damping to turn off all damping forces and create a pure spring force.
• Spline: F=f(velo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship of force to
angular velocity (radians per second).
Length and Preload:
Preload Enter the preload force for the torsion spring. Preload force is the force of the
torsion spring in its preload position.
Default Angle/ Select one of the following:
Angle at Preload • Default Angle to set the rotation angle of the spring when you created it at
its preload position.
• Angle at Preload and enter the angle of the spring at its preload position.
Torque Display Specify whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts, both,
or none.
500 Adams View
Motions
Motions
Displays tools for creating motions.
Construction Contains options for creating the selected object. The options change depending
or Settings on the type of object that you are creating. For example, when you create a link,
Container Adams View lets you specify its width, length, and height before creating it.
Then, as you create the link, these dimensions are set regardless of how you move
the mouse. You can also define design variables or expressions for many values.
J - O 501
New Color
New Color
Postprocessing → Edit → Preferences → Colors Tab → New Color button
Defines a new color name in the Modeling database. After creating the new color, return to the Colors
tab in the PPT Preferences dialog box to define its color values. See PPT Preferences - Colors.
No Help Available
There is currently no help available for this dialog box.
504 Adams View
Node Finder Dialog Box
Searches for nodes on the replacement flexible body that are within a specified radius or closest to a given
marker. It displays the nodes that it found in the lower portion of the dialog box. This is helpful if you are
not sure to which node to transfer a marker.
Learn about Replacing Existing Bodies with Flexible Bodies.
Enter the number of nodes to search for which are closest to the specified
marker. For example, find the 10 nodes closest to a marker.
Radius Available only when By Radius Around Marker is selected.
Object Measure
Select object → Build → Measure → Object → Create/Modify
Creates a measure on an object in your model, including Point Measures. Its title changes depending on
the type of object. For example, its title is Joint Measure if you are creating a measure on a joint.
In general, all objects in your model have some pre-defined measurable characteristics. For example, you
can capture and investigate the power consumption of a motion, or measure a part’s center-of-mass
velocity along the global x-axis, taking time derivatives in the ground reference frame. The default
coordinate system is the ground coordinate system, but you can use any marker as the coordinate system.
Note: You cannot modify a point measure from the Build menu as noted above. Instead, right-
click in the Strip chart of the point measure and select Modify Measure. You can also clear
the select list and, from the Edit menu, select Modify.
Lets you interactively apply the design constraint to an analysis and print the resulting value. This helps
you develop and debug constraints. It is a good idea to test your constraint on an existing analysis before
using it in an optimization.
Adams View prints the constraint value in the Information window.
Learn more About Optimization.
Lets you interactively apply the design objective to an analysis and print the resulting value. This helps
you develop and debug objectives. It is a good idea to test your objective on an existing analysis before
using it in an optimization.
Adams View prints the objective value in the Information window.
Learn more About Optimization.
Constrains the marker of one part so that it cannot rotate with respect to a second part as shown below.
In the figure, the solid circle indicates the first part that the joint connects and the hollow circle indicates
the second part that the joint connects. The first part is constrained relative to the second part. The axes
of the coordinate systems must maintain the same orientation.
The location of the origins of the coordinate systems does not matter.
Learn:
• About Joint Primitives
512 Adams View
Orientation Joint Tool
Pick Geometry • Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working grid, if it
Feature is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction vector on
a feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
J - O 513
Orientation Measure
Orientation Measure
Build → Measure → Orientation → New/Modify
Note: When creating an object or point measure, select the Orientation button from the Object
Measure Dialog Box.
Learn more :
• About Measuring Orientation Characteristics
• About Simulation Output
Selecting Output (Out) Content as the Output Category in the Solver Settings dialog box lets you set
the format of the tabular output file. You only receive a tabular output file when you are using External
Adams Solver. Learn about setting type of Adams Solver.
P-Z
516 Adams View
PPT Preferences
PPT Preferences
Edit → Preferences
Changes the ways in which Adams PostProcessor works. In addition, you can specify the directory to
which Adams PostProcessor saves files.
Tab Link
Animation PPT Preferences - Animation
Colors PPT Preferences - Colors
Curves PPT Preferences - Curves
Files PPT Preferences - Files
Fonts PPT Preferences - Fonts
Geometry PPT Preferences - Geometry
Orientation PPT Preferences - Orientation
Page PPT Preferences - Page
Plot PPT Preferences - Plot
Units PPT Preferences - Units
Stereo PPT Preferences - Stereo
P - Z 517
PPT Preferences
Tab Link
Restore Select to restore the settings to their defaults
Save Save
518 Adams View
Page Layouts
Page Layouts
View → Page→ Page Layouts
Allows you to select different page layouts so you can see more than one viewport. Page layout is also
referred to as the viewport layout.
Note: A page that contains a Fast fourier transform (FFT) or Bode plot has two viewports. For an
FFT plot, the top viewport contains the plot with the input data and the bottom viewport
contains the plot with the output from the FFT. For a Bode plot, the top viewport contains
the gain plot and the bottom viewport contains the phase plot.
Selecting a Layout
You can access the page layout palette in two ways. Both methods contain the same set of viewport
options.
To select a layout:
1. Do either of the following:
• On the View menu, point to Page, and then select Page Layouts. The palette appears.
• On the Main toolbar, right-click the Page Layout tool stack . A selection of layouts
appears.
2. Select a layout.
3. If you used the palette, select Close to close the palette. You can leave the palette open and
continue working so you can quickly change the window.
P - Z 519
Parallel Axes Joint Tool
Constrains the z-axis of the marker of one part so that it remains parallel to the z-axis of the marker of a
second part, as shown below. In the figure, the solid circle indicates the first part that the joint connects
and the hollow circle indicates the second part that the joint connects. The first part is constrained relative
to the second part.
The marker of the first part can only rotate about one axis with respect to the coordinate system of the
second part.
Learn:
• About Joint Primitives
520 Adams View
Parallel Axes Joint Tool
Pick Geometry Feature • Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working grid,
if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction
vector on a feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
P - Z 521
Part Create Equation Linear State Equation
The B and D matrices must have the same number of columns as there
are elements in the inputs (U) array.
Y Output Array Name Enter the array element that defines the column matrix of output
variables for the linear system. Entering an outputs (Y) array is
optional. If you enter an outputs (Y) array, you must also specify a C
output matrix or a D feedforward matrix. The corresponding matrix
elements must have the same number of rows as there are elements in
the outputs (Y) array. It also must be an outputs (Y) array, and it cannot
be used in any other linear state equation, general state equation, or
transfer function.
IC Array Name Enter the array element that defines the column matrix of initial
conditions for the linear system. Entering the IC array is optional. The
IC array must have the same number of elements as the states (X) array
(equal to the number of rows in the A state matrix). When you do not
specify an IC array, Adams Solver initializes all states to zero.
522 Adams View
Part Create Equation Linear State Equation
When you enter a D feedforward matrix, you must also include both a
Y output matrix and an inputs (U) array.
Static Hold Select yes to hold states at the constant value determined during static
and quasi-static simulations; select no if they can change. Learn about
Controlling Equilibrium Values When Using System Elements.
P - Z 523
Part Modify Equation Linear State Equation
The B and D matrices must have the same number of columns as there
are elements in the inputs (U) array.
Y Output Array Name Enter the array element that defines the column matrix of output
variables for the linear system. Entering an outputs (Y) array is optional.
If you enter an outputs (Y) array, you must also specify a C output
matrix or a D feedforward matrix. The corresponding matrix elements
must have the same number of rows as there are elements in the outputs
(Y) array. It also must be an outputs (Y) array, and it cannot be used in
any other linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer
function.
IC Array Name Enter the array element that defines the column matrix of initial
conditions for the linear system. Entering the IC array is optional. The
IC array must have the same number of elements as the states (X) array
(equal to the number of rows in the A state matrix). When you do not
specify an IC array, Adams Solver initializes all states to zero.
A State Matrix Name Enter the matrix data element that defines the state transition matrix for
the linear system. The matrix must be a square matrix (same number of
rows and columns), and it must have the same number of columns as the
number of rows in the states (X) array.
524 Adams View
Part Modify Equation Linear State Equation
When you enter a D feedforward matrix, you must also include both a
Y output matrix and an inputs (U) array.
Static Hold Select yes if you do not want the linear state equation states to change
during static and quasi-static simulations; select no if they can change.
For more information on holding values constant, see Controlling
Equilibrium Values When Using System Elements..
P - Z 525
Perpendicular Axes Joint Tool
Constrains the marker of one part so that it remains perpendicular to the z-axis of a second part as shown
below. In the figure, the solid circle indicates the first part that the joint connects and the hollow circle
indicates the second part that the joint connects. The first part is constrained relative to the second part.
The marker of the first part can rotate about two axes with respect to the second part.
Learn:
• About Joint Primitives
526 Adams View
Perpendicular Axes Joint Tool
Pick Geometry Feature • Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working grid,
if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction
vector on a feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
P - Z 527
Picture of Marker and Node Table
PID Controller
The PID controller creates a general proportional-integral-derivative control block. Two inputs are
necessary for this block: the proportional input and the derivative input. You must specify the derivative
state for input to this block that is consistent with the proportional state. For example, if the proportional
input is the measured x position of a part, the derivative input should be the linear velocity in the x
direction.
This block automatically creates the integrated state of the proportional input for use as the integrated
input. You can parameterize the P, I, and D gains of this block with an Adams View real design variable
to quickly study the effect of changing control gains.
Creates a planar joint that allows a plane on one part to slide and rotate in the plane of another part. The
location of the planar joint determines a point in space through which the joint’s plane of motion passes.
The orientation vector of the planar joint is perpendicular to the joint’s plane of motion. The rotational
axis of the planar joint, which is normal to the joint’s plane of motion, is parallel to the orientation vector.
Learn about:
• Creating Idealized Joints
530 Adams View
Planar Joint Tool
Plane Tool
Build → Bodies/Geometry → Plane Tool
Creates a two-dimensional box. You can draw a plane’s length and width in the plane of the screen or the
Working grid, if it is turned on. You will find planes most useful when you are creating contact forces
between objects, as explained in Contacts.
When you create a plane, you can select to create a new part consisting of the plane geometry or add the
plane geometry to an existing part or ground. If you create a new part, it has no mass since it is composed
of only wire geometry.
Learn about Creating Two-Dimensional Plane.
Notes on Modifying Planes: One hotpoint appears after you draw the plane. It lets you modify the length
and height of the plane. For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using
Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.
532 Adams View
Plate Tool
Plate Tool
Build → Bodies/Geometry → Plate Tool
Creates a plate, which is an extruded polygon solid with rounded corners. You create a plate by indicating
the location of its corners. You must select at least three locations. The first location you select acts as an
anchor point defining the position and orientation of the plate in space. The Plate tool creates markers at
each location. The marker at the anchor point is called the reference marker.
After you indicate the locations, the Plate tool creates a polygon with the specified number of sides and
extrudes it. By default, it creates the plate with a depth that is 1 and has corners with radii of 1 in current
length units. Before drawing, you can also specify the thickness and radius of the corners of the plate.
Note: The reference marker of the plate determines the plate orientation and defines the plane of
the plate to its x and y axes. Adams View defines the x and y axes of the reference marker
using the working grid, if it is turned on, or the view screen. Adams View defines the plate
vertices as the component of distance from the reference marker to the vertex marker as
defined along the reference marker's y-axis. Therefore, if you choose a plate vertex marker
that is out-of-plane from the xy plane of the reference marker, the vertex marker is not the
actual plate vertex.
P - Z 533
Plate Tool
If you do not specify a thickness, Adams View creates the plate with a thickness
of 1 in current length units.
Radius Select and then enter the radius of the plate corners.
If you do not specify a radius, Adams View creates the plate with corners with
radii of 1 in current length units.
Note: After you draw a plate, a hotpoint appears at the reference marker. It lets you change the
depth of the plate. For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using
Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry
You can also use the Geometry Modify Shape Plate dialog box to change the markers used
to define the plate, the thickness of the plate, and the radius of the corners of the plate.
534 Adams View
Plot Design Evaluation Results
Displays a plot of the transfer function you created using the Create/Modify Transfer Function dialog box.
Learn more about Creating and Modifying Transfer Functions.
536 Adams View
Plots Transfer Function
Note: There are several operations displayed in the shortcut menu when
you right-click but many are not supported in the plot display.
Min Set the minimum value for the frequency axis (horizontal). Press Enter to
enable the Redraw button.
Max Set the maximum value for the frequency axis (horizontal). Press Enter to
enable the Redraw button.
Scale Select either:
• log - Scales the axis values so that each power of 10 is separated by the
same distance. For example, the values 1, 10, 100, 1000, and 10,000 are
equally spaced.
• lin - Displays the axis values linearly, starting at 0.
Redraw Redraws the plot after you change the scale of the plot.
P - Z 537
Plugin Manager
Plugin Manager
Tools → Plugin Manager Shared Dialog Box
Manages the add-on modules or plugins to Adams View, which expand its functionality. The MSC
plugins include Adams Vibration, Adams Controls, and Adams Durability. The Plugin Manager lets you
run these products from within Adams View and set Adams View to load them automatically when you
start up. It also lets you unload them while in your current session of Adams View, and view whether or
not there is a license available to run them.
Learn about Loading and Unloading Plugins.
Point Motion
Right-click point motion → Modify
Modifies either a Point Motion or a Joint motion. Its title and options change depending on the type of
motion. Select a motion below for more information on the options available:
• Point Motion
• Joint Motion
540 Adams View
Point Tool
Point Tool
Build → Bodies/Geometry → Point Tool
Defines locations in three-dimensional space upon which you can build your model. Points allow you to
build parameterization between objects, as well as position objects. For example, you can attach a link to
points so that each time you move the points, the link’s geometry changes accordingly.
You can also use points to define the location where modeling objects connect, such as the point where
a joint connects two parts. Points do not define an orientation, only a location.
As you create a point, you define whether Adams View should add it to ground or to another part. In
addition, you specify whether other parts near the same location should be attached (parameterized) to
the point. If you attach other bodies to the point, then the location of those bodies is tied to the location
of that point. As you change the location of the point, the location of all attached bodies change
accordingly.
Note: You should not attach a part’s center of mass marker to a point, however. If you attach a
center of mass marker, Adams View removes the parameterization whenever it recomputes
the center of a part, unless you defined mass properties for the part.
Learn about:
• Creating Points
• Parameterization
Attach Near - Attach other nearby objects to the point. When you change the
location of the points, the other objects locations and orientations update
accordingly.
P - Z 541
Point Tool
Note: After creating the point, you can modify its name and set its location using the Table Editor.
Learn about Editing Objects Using the Table Editor.
542 Adams View
Point-Curve Constraint Tool
The point-curve constraint restricts a fixed point defined on one part to lie on a curve defined on a second
part. The first part is free to roll and slide on the curve that is fixed to a second part. The curve on the
second part can be planar or spatial or open or closed. The first part cannot lift off the second part; it must
always lie on the curve. A point-curve constraint removes two translational Degrees of freedom from
your model.
When you specify the location of the point-curve constraint on the first part, Adams View creates a
marker at that location. The marker is called the I marker. The I marker can only translate in one direction
relative to the curve. The I marker, however, is free to rotate in all three directions.
You can use the point-curve constraint to model a Pin-in-slot mechanism or a Simple Cam Follower
mechanism where a lever arm is articulated by the profile of a revolving cam.
When modeling a pin-in-slot mechanism, the point-curve constraint keeps the center of the pin in the
center of the slot, while allowing it to move freely along the slot and rotate in the slot.
Learn more about:
• Point-Curve Constraints
• Tips on Creating Higher-Pair Constraints
Point-to-Point Measure
Select object → Build → Measure → Point-to-Point → Create/Modify
Measures kinematic characteristics, such as displacement or velocity, between two locations on a model
during a Simulation.
Learn more about:
• Point-to-Point Measures
• Methods for Creating Point-to-Point Characteristics
• About Simulation Output
You can:
Polyline Tool
Build → Bodies/Geometry → Polyline Tool
Creates single- and multi-line segments (polylines) and create open or closed polylines (polygons)
Before drawing lines or polylines, you can specify the length of the line or lines to be created so you can
quickly create perfectly sized lines and polylines.
When creating a single line, you can also specify the angle of the line. The angle you specify is relative
to the x-axis of the global coordinate system or the working grid, if it is turned on. When you create line
geometry, you can select to create a new part consisting of the line geometry or add the line geometry to
an existing part. If you create a new part, it has no mass since it is composed of only wire geometry. You
can extrude the lines into solid geometry that has mass. For more information, see Extruding Construction
Geometry Along a Path.
Note: Adams View places hotpoints at the endpoint of each line segment after you draw the
objects. The hotpoints let you reshape the lines. If you create a closed polyline, Adams
View maintains it as a closed polyline regardless of how you move the hotpoints. For more
information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically
Modify Geometry.
You can also use the line or polyline modify dialog box to more accurately place the points
that make up the line or polyline. You can also read in location points from a file. For more
information, see Using Dialog Boxes to Precisely Modify Geometry and Using the Location
Table.
546 Adams View
Precision Move
Precision Move
Edit → Move
Learn about Moving Objects Using the Precision Move Dialog Box (Classic Interface).
Option Description
Rotate Y, X, Z Select each to rotate an object with respect to a body-fixed or reference
coordinate system in incremental amounts specified in the +/- text box. You
specify the reference coordinate system using the Relative to/About the
options.
Translate Y, X, Z Select each box to translate an object with respect to a body-fixed or
reference coordinate system in incremental amounts specified in the +/-
text box. You specify the reference coordinate system using the Relative
to/About the options.
Relocate the Enter the object or objects to be moved.
P - Z 547
Precision Move
Option Description
Relative to/About the Select to define the coordinate system whose axes are to be used for
defining rotations and translations. For rotations:
Option Description
C1 - C3 Enter the coordinates to which you want to move an object relative to
another object’s coordinate system (the reference coordinate system). You
specify the reference coordinate system using the Relative to the and About
the options.
For example, if you want to ensure that two markers, which you want to
connect using an inplane joint, are in the same plane, you can set one
marker as the object to be moved and the other object as the relative to
object. You can then view the rotation coordinates of the first marker to
ensure that they are (0, 0, 0).
P - Z 549
Print
Print
Adams PostProcessor → File → Print
You can print pages directly to a printer or store them in a file for printing at a later time.
Note: Adams PostProcessor only prints the portion of a report or table that fits on the paper.
• To print a multi-page report, open the report in a browser and print from there.
• To print a multi-page table, export the table in HTML format, open the report in a
browser, and print from there. Pages with only reports and tables on them print
significantly faster than pages with mixed views (for example, plot and report),
depending on the type of printer being used.
• Printer:
• On Linux, in the Print to area, select Printer and enter an operating system
command to execute the print job (for example, lpr -Psp2 or lp -c -Ppd1).
• On Windows, select also show Windows print dialog to display the
default Windows printer dialog box from which you can select a printer.
The dialog box appears after you select OK.
• File:
• In the Print to area, select File and enter the location and name of the file
to which you want to print the page.
Note that if you print more than one page to a file, Adams PostProcessor
uses the page number of each page as the name of the file.
If you selected to print to a file, select the type of file format. You can
select Postscript, HPGL, Encapsulated Postscript, tif, jpg, xpm, bmp, and
Native Windows (Windows only).
Note: If you select jpg format, you can set the level of quality.
(A)Paper Size Select the size of paper, or to accept the current default paper for the printer, select
default.
Landscape Select if you want the page to print horizontally.
Portrait Select if you want the page to print vertically.
550 Adams View
Print
If you select Black and White, Adams PostProcessor prints all colors in black and
the background in white even if you are using a color printer.
Selecting black and white is generally considered more readable for presentations,
but you should use altering line style or line thickness to distinguish between the
curves on the plot.
Color Select if you want to print the plot in color.
If you print a plot in color but send it to a black-and-white printer, the printer
approximates the colors using grayscale.
Current Page Select to print the page you currently have displayed.
All Pages Select to print all the pages.
Page Range Select to print specific pages and enter the first page and last page.
P - Z 551
Range Measure
Range Measure
Build → Measure → Range → New/Modify
Creates range measures with which you can obtain statistical feedback about any existing measure.
Ranges dynamically calculate the maximum, minimum, average, or variation characteristics of any
measure.
Learn about Range Measures.
Rename
Database Navigator → Rename
Rename Object
Edit → Rename
Lets you rename any object in your Modeling database. You can change the default name assigned to the
object but you cannot change its full name.
Learn About Object Naming.
Identifies and deletes the markers that are unused anywhere in a single model in an Adams View or
Adams Car Template Builder session.
Learn about Deleting Objects.
Selecting Results (.res) Content as the Output Category in the Solver Settings dialog box lets you set the
content of the results file.
Select the options for the content you want in the results file. See RESULTS section for more information.
558 Adams View
Results (.res) Options
Selecting Results (.res) Options as the Output Category in the Solver Settings dialog box lets you set the
format of the results file.
• Binary - By default, Adams View saves the results file as a binary file.
You cannot view a binary file nor can you move it to different computer
platforms. It, however, provides greater precision, faster access, and
more compact size than a standard Adams View text file.
• ASCII - Standard Adams View text file with no formatting.
• XML - XML is a license-free, platform-independent file format used
often for Web applications. The XML format's structured data
representation is an ideal framework for storing Adams information.
Because XML is an ASCII file, you can use it across all platforms and
read it in a text editor. Although the formatting is not optimized for
reading in text editors, you will find it useful to quickly check the
progress of a simulation, or debugging a model. You can tag XML-
formatted results for retrieval from many database or pdm systems.
Freely available tools for reading and writing XML files makes it easy to
incorporate Adams results into other programs.
If you selected XML as the format, the following options are active:
Decimal Places Specify how many digits are written after the decimal point for real numbers.
The default value is 17 decimal places (full precision for recovery of double-
precision numbers).
Round Off Set to On to turn on the roundoff feature for real numbers (the default is
disabled). The Significant digits option controls the actual numbers of digits
retained during rounding off.
Scientific Notation Specify the boundaries at which the format for real numbers switches from a
fixed point format to scientific notation. The values are exponents for the base
ten. The default values are -4 and 5, meaning that any number less than or equal
to 1.0E-04 or greater than or equal to 1.0E+05 will be written in scientific
notation.
P - Z 559
Results (.res) Options
-------------------------------------
xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<Results>
< Analysis>
< ModelInfo title="model_1" />
< Units angle="deg" length="mm" mass="kg" time="sec"
/>
...
Significant digits Specify how many significant figures of a real number are retained during round
off (when round off is enabled). The default is to use ten significant figures. This
number is distinct from the number of places actually printed for a real number,
which the Decimal Places option controls. Significant Figures includes digits to
the left and right of the decimal point.
Trailing Zeros Set to On to specify that trailing zeros are printed for real numbers. The default
is not to print trailing zeros. When enabled, all the digits after the decimal point
will be printed, whether they are zero or not. When disabled, any zeros at the end
of the fractional part of the number will be dropped, leaving the last digit as a
non-zero digit.
Zero Threshold Enter the zero threshold value for numbers being written to an output file. If a
number has an absolute value smaller than the zero threshold value, then it will
be written out as zero. This value is independent of units.
560 Adams View
Revolute Joint Tool
Creates a revolute joint that allows the rotation of one part with respect to another part about a common
axis. The revolute joint can be located anywhere along the axis about which the joint’s parts can rotate
with respect to each other.
The orientation of the revolute joint defines the direction of the axis about which the joint’s parts can
rotate with respect to each other. The rotational axis of the revolute joint is parallel to the orientation
vector and passes through the location.
Learn about:
• Creating Idealized Joints
P - Z 561
Revolute Joint Tool
Revolution Tool
Build → Bodies/Geometry → Revolution Tool
Creates geometry by revolving a profile. You specify the profile and the axis about which to revolve the
profile. The Revolution tool revolves the profile around the axis in a counterclockwise direction (right-
hand rule)
You can create an open or closed revolution. If you create a closed revolution, the Revolution tool closes
the profile by drawing a line segment between the profile’s first and last points and creates a solid
revolution from this profile. If you leave the revolution open, the Revolution tool creates a skin that has
no mass properties.
You can also select to create the revolution using the Non-analytical Method or Analytical Method.
Learn about Creating a Revolution.
• Points to select the locations on the screen that define the profile.
• Curve to select the curve to be used to define the profile.
P - Z 563
Revolution Tool
Note: After you draw a revolution, hotpoints appear. If you used the non-analytical method to
create the revolution, the hotpoints appear at the vertexes of the profile. If you used the
analytical method, hotpoints appear at points along the curves that define the revolution.
The hotpoints let you resize and reshape the revolution. For more information on
modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.
You can also use the revolution modify dialog box to more accurately place the points that
make up the profile and read in location points from a file. For more information, see Using
Dialog Boxes to Precisely Modify Geometry and Using the Location Table.
564 Adams View
Rotational Motion Tool
Rotates the first part that the joint connects about the z-axis of a second part. The right-hand rule
determines the sign of the motion. The z-axis of the first part must be aligned with the z-axis of the second
part at all times. The angle is zero when the x-axis of the first part is also aligned with the x-axis of the
second part.
Learn about:
• Overview of Motion
• Creating Joint Motion
In stand-alone mode, Adams PostProcessor saves your current session in notebooks, which are binary
files that store all the simulation results, animations, and plots that you are working on. You can also save
a copy of a notebook with a different name or in a different location. When you save a notebook, Adams
Posrocessor saves all the pages you created and their content. It also saves the simulation results in the
binary file. The results are not associated with the files you imported.
Notes: • Currently we only support saving of binary files having a file size of less than 2 GB. If
the binary file size exceeds 2GB, you will be given an error message at the time of
creating the binary file.
• If your database file is approaching the 2GB limit, you should delete results, plots or
animations to keep the file size down before saving the binary. An alternative is to
export the model as an Adams View command file and the simulation results should be
exported as an Adams Solver results file, if the binary size exceeds 2 GB.
To save the document in a different directory, right-click the File Name text box,
select Browse, and then select the desired directory.
566 Adams View
Save Database
Save Database
File → Save Database
Alerts you that Adams View is saving the current Modeling database as an Adams View binary file and
asks you if you want to create a backup file. To save the model data in another format, see the File Export
dialog box.
Learn about Modeling Database.
Save Database As
File → Save Database As
Saves the current Modeling database to a binary file with a new name. This lets you keep several versions
of your database under different names and reduces the risk of losing your work if you inadvertently
change or delete your model. Saving your modeling database saves all modeling information, including
any customization changes you made.
To save the model data in another format, export the data as explained Exchanging Data in Adams. To
save your preferences, see Saving and Restoring Settings.
If you want the file written to a directory other than the one from which you are
running Adams View, enter the path name in the File Name text box.
Simulate → Interactive →
Saves the model at a simulated position into the Modeling database under a new name so you can use it
as your new design configuration.
Learn about Saving a Simulation Frame as New Model.
Simulate → Interactive →
Saves the results of the last Simulation under a new name so that you can animate or plot the results at a
later time. Saving simulation results is particularly important when you want to compare the results from
several design variations.
Be sure to save your Modeling database after you save your simulation results (File → Save Database).
Note: By default, the results of a simulation are only saved to the modeling database, not to
external Adams Solver analysis files. To save the results to external Adams Solver analysis
files, set the simulation output before you run the simulation, as explained in Setting
Simulation Controls. To export the results to analysis files, see Export - Adams Solver
Analysis Files.
Creates a screw joint that specifies the rotation of one part about an axis, as the part translates along the
axis with respect to a second part.
The screw joint does not require that the two parts remain parallel with respect to the axis of rotation and
translation. However, the z-axis of the coordinate system marker on the first part and the z-axis of the
coordinate system marker on the second part must always be parallel and co-directed. Although the screw
joint does not enforce this parallelism, the chain of parts and joints that connects the two markers should.
After you create a screw joint, you need to specify the pitch value. The pitch value is the distance from
one peak on a thread of the screw to the next thread. It defines the amount of translational displacement
of the first part for every rotation of the second part about the axis of rotation.
By default, Adams View sets the pitch value to 1. The pitch value is in length units. A positive pitch
creates a right-hand thread, and a negative pitch creates a left-hand thread.
572 Adams View
Screw Joint Tool
Scripted Simulation
Simulate → Scripted
Icon Description
Sets your model back to its initial design configuration so you can modify
your model or perform another simulation starting at time 0.
You do not have to set the model back to its design configuration to
continue simulating. You can pick up from the last frame of your animation
and continue.
How Adams View replays your simulation depends on whether or not you
have finished the simulation and reset the model back to its initial design
configuration.
• If you have run a simulation, or part of a simulation, but not set the
model back to its initial configuration, when you select to replay the
animation, Adams View animates the model up to the last simulation
step and leaves your model there.
• If you reset your model back to its initial configuration, when you select
to replay the animation, Adams View automatically sets the model back
to the initial design configuration when the animation is complete.
Model Verify Tool
Icon Description
Save/Delete Simulation Results
• Left-click to display the Save Run Results dialog box so you can
save the simulation results.
• Right-click to select a set of simulation results to delete.
Save Simulated Position
Displays the Save Model at Simulation Position dialog box so you can save
the model at a simulated position into the Modeling database under a new
name.
Displays the Animation Controls dialog box.
Simulation Settings... Displays the Solver Settings dialog box, letting you set how you want the
Simulation performed.
576 Adams View
Second-Order Filter Block
The second-order filter block creates a second-order filter by specifying the undamped natural frequency
and the damping ratio. You can parameterize the undamped natural frequency or damping ratio constant
with an Adams View real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the frequency or damping
ratio of the associated block.
Select List
Database Navigator → Select List
Allows you to view objects that you've selected. You can also add and remove objects from the select list.
Learn about:
• Managing the Select List
• Showing, Hiding, and Selecting Objects in the Database Navigator
Lets you view objects you’ve selected and add to and remove objects from the select list. You can add
and remove objects based on their name, type, group, and parent.
Learn more about Selecting Objects (Classic Interface).
Changes the font Adams View uses to display text in a view, such as the name of a part or a note on the
screen, or to print text to a printer. The fonts available for displaying text in a view are those available
with your operating system. The fonts available for printing text are a fixed set of 12 fonts.
Note: Your printer may not support all of these printer fonts.
To browse for a font, right-click the text box, point to Browse, and then select a
font.
Postscript Font Select the font you want to use to print the text.
580 Adams View
Simulation Controls
Simulation Controls
Simulate → Interactive/Scripted
Displays tools for controlling Interactive Simulation and Scripted simulations. Select a topic below:
• Interactive Simulation Palette and Container
• Scripted Simulation
P - Z 581
Single-Component Force tool
You cannot use the line-of-sight method if the two points that define the force will become coincident
during a simulation because the force direction becomes undefined. When running a simulation, Adams
Solver warns you when the points become nearly coincident. The following shows an example of a
warning:
Caution: The direction cosines for SFORCE model_1.FORCE_1 are invalid. This is usually caused
by a (nearly) zero length SFORCE or SPRINGDAMPER.
You can ignore the warning only if the computed force is zero when the points are coincident (for
example, when you are using a BISTOP function that is inactive when its markers are coincident).
Otherwise, having coincident points is a modeling error with unpredictable results.
Learn more about:
582 Adams View
Single-Component Force tool
• Single-Component Forces
• Space Fixed
• Body Moving
• Two Bodies
Learn about Specifying Force Direction for Single-Component Forces.
Construction Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force normal to the current
working grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as along an edge or normal to the face of a
part.
Characteristic Specify the characteristics of the force:
• Constant torque - Lets you enter a constant torque value or let Adams
View use a default value.
• Spring-Damper - Lets you enter stiffness and damping coefficients and
lets Adams View create a function expression for damping and stiffness
based on the coefficient values. (Not available when you are using the
Main toolbox to access the force tool.)
• Custom - Adams View does not set any values for you, which, in effect,
creates a force with zero magnitude. After you create the force, you
modify it by entering a function expressions or parameters to a User-
written subroutine that is linked to Adams View. You can also specify an
alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn about
specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
If you selected Constant Torque, the following option appears:
Force Value Enter a constant torque value.
If you selected Spring-Damper, the following two options appear:
Translational K Enter the stiffness coefficients.
Translational C Enter the damping coefficients.
P - Z 583
Single-Component Torque tool
Applies a rotational force to either one part or two about a specified axis. You specify the point of
application and the direction. The following figure shows an example of a single-component torque
applied to one part.
• Space Fixed
• Body Moving
• Two Bodies
Learn about Specifying Force Direction for Single-Component Forces.
Construction Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force normal to the current
Working grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as along an edge or normal to the face of a
part.
584 Adams View
Single-Component Torque tool
• Constant torque - Lets you enter a constant torque value or let Adams
View use a default value.
• Spring-Damper - Lets you enter stiffness and damping coefficients and
lets Adams View create a function expression for damping and stiffness
based on the coefficient values. (Not available when you are using the
Main toolbox to access the force tool.)
• Custom - Adams View does not set any values for you, which, in effect,
creates a force with zero magnitude. After you create the force, you
modify it by entering a function expressions or parameters to a User-
written subroutine that is linked to Adams View. You can also specify an
alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn about
specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
If you selected Constant Torque, the following option appears:
Force Value Enter a constant torque value.
If you selected Spring-Damper, the following two options appear:
Translational K Enter the stiffness coefficients.
Translational C Enter the damping coefficients.
P - Z 585
Single Point Motion Tool
Creates rotational and translational force between two parts in your model using six orthogonal
components.
Learn more about:
• Multi-Component Forces
• 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Learn about Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:
Pick Feature • Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force normal to the current
Working grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as along an edge or normal to the face of a
part.
Characteristic Specify the characteristics of the force:
• Constant - Lets you enter a constant force and torque values or lets
Adams View use a default value.
• Bushing Like- Lets you enter stiffness and damping coefficients and
lets Adams View create a function expression for damping and stiffness
based on the coefficient values.
• Custom - Adams View does not set any values for you, which, in effect,
creates a force with zero magnitude. After you create the force, you
modify it by entering a function expressions or parameters to a User-
written subroutine that is linked to Adams View. You can also specify an
alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn about
specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
If you selected Constant Force, the following options appears:
Force and Torque Enter a constant force value.
588 Adams View
Six-Component General Force tool
Sizes
Dialog-Box Builder → Preferences → Sizes
Displays the default size of a new interface object if you create it by clicking in the new dialog box or
container.
It does not display the size for the objects you created and modified by dragging the item to a desired size.
Learn more about Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder.
Snap Grid
Dialog Box-Builder →Preferences → Snap Grid
Allows you to restrict the possible positions and sizes of your interface objects, similar to the Working
grid in the modeling window.
When you drag an item with the mouse to move or resize it, the mouse position will snap to the nearest
grid point. Because the snap grid points are not visible, and the default grid is very fine (2 pixel distance)
it is generally not very noticeable.
You can turn this option on or off in the Option menu in the Dialog-Box Builder.
Solver Settings
Settings → Solver → Dynamics/Kinematics/Equilibrium/Initial
Conditions/Executable/Display/Output/Optimizer/Debugging
Displays options for setting the Simulation depending on the command you selected:
• Dynamics
• Kinematics
• Equillibrium
• Initial Conditions
• Executable
• Display
• Output
• Pattern for Jacobian
• Optimizer
• Debugging
• Contacts
• Flexible Bodies
592 Adams View
Solver Settings - Contacts
You can set default options for the performing three-dimensional contact operations.
The default value Faceting Tolerances is 300.0028. Increasing this value will
result in a finer mesh of triangles, which gives a more accurate representation of
surfaces which are curved. Increasing the tolerance, however, also increases the
memory requirements of the geometry engine and adds to the computational
overhead, which makes it run slower. Setting the faceting tolerance to values
greater than 1000 is not recommended. Values smaller than 300.0028 will give
negligible performance improvements. The faceting tolerance has no effect on
inherently polygonal surfaces such as boxes.
P - Z 593
Solver Settings - Debugging
You can set default options for the debugging information that appears when you run a Simulation.
You can also turn on the display of Strip charts and step through a simulation. Learn more about
Debugging Your Model.
• Error - Track objects with the largest equation residual error. This number
is an indicator of how far Adams Solver is from a solution. It should
decrease with every iteration.
• Force - Track objects generating the greatest force. Includes forces and
constraints.
• Change - Track variables with the most change.
• Acceleration - Track objects experiencing the greatest acceleration.
Includes only parts.
More Select to display options for stepping through a simulation and displaying strip
charts.
594 Adams View
Solver Settings - Debugging
Controls how Adams View displays your model during a single Simulation or how it displays your model
during a parametric analysis. You can also set the information that Adams View displays during a
parametric analysis.
Use the Solver Settings dialog box so you see just the amount of information you need during a
simulation. For example, when you perform a simulation on a new model, set up the display to see the
model change as the solution proceeds to determine if the simulation is working properly. Updating the
display of the model frequently can, however, slow down the overall solution process. Once your model
runs properly, change the options so Adams View only updates the model at the end of the simulation.
You can even set Adams View so it never updates the model. You can then play an animation of the
simulation, as required.
• Never - No updates. Use this option only when you are sure that your
simulation will run to completion without difficulty, and you want to
maximize the efficiency of the simulation. (You can also set this option
directly from the Interactive Simulation Palette and Container when
Running an Interactive Simulation.)
• At Simulation - Update your model display only at the end of the
simulation.
• At Output Step - Update your model display at every output time step
that you specified when you submitted your simulation and omit any
contact steps. Because it does not display contact steps, your simulation
time may improve because the graphical processing operations will not be
burdened with intermediate contact events.
• At Contact/Output Step - Update the model display at each output time
step and contact step. This is the default.
• At Integration Step - An update of your model display at every
integration time step that Adams Solver requires to provide a solution to
your specified level of accuracy. This option only applies to dynamic
simulations since they are the only type requiring numerical integration. It
is helpful for debugging purposes but can lead to significantly longer
simulation times. For more information, see Solver Settings - Dynamic.
• At Iteration - Update your model display at every iteration. This option is
most useful when debugging static simulations because they are purely
iterative in nature since there is no integration required. This option is also
available for dynamic simulations, in which case Adams View displays
the model at every corrector step associated with each predictor step.
Using the At Every Iteration option with dynamic simulations can result
in significantly longer simulation times.
Icons To see all your model icons as your model is updated, set to On. Keeping your
icons on as your model is updated can help you understand how model objects
behave, especially constraints and forces. By default, icons are not visible during
animations.
More Select to more display options, including those for parametric analysis.
Prompt Set to Yes to indicate that you want to be prompted whether or not Adams View
should display each updated frame. By default, there is no delay and you are not
prompted to display each updated frame.
Time Delay Enter the number of seconds Adams View should pause after displaying each
updated frame so you can study it. By default, there is no delay.
P - Z 597
Solver Settings - Display
tool to display this table at any time, write it to a file, and control its format
(see Generating a Table).
598 Adams View
Solver Settings - Dynamic
Dynamic simulations are transient or time-varying simulations used to investigate the movements of parts
over time; these movements result from the combined effects of forces and constraint relationships. You
can perform dynamic simulations on models that have any number of Degrees of freedom (DOF).
It is computationally more efficient, however, to perform Kinematic simulations on models with zero DOF
and to perform dynamic simulations only on models with one or more DOF. For dynamic simulations,
Adams Solver can use several numerical algorithms to calculate an approximate solution to the equations
of motion it formulates for your mechanical system.
Learn more About Dynamic Simulations.
• I3
• SI2
• SI1 - only available in Adams Solver (FORTRAN)
See Equation Formulation Comparison and the INTEGRATOR statement in the
Adams Solver online help, for more on the integrators.
Note: Unknown appears if your model uses an integration method that is not
used or no longer supported. If you try to select Unknown, Adams View
defaults to I3.
P - Z 599
Solver Settings - Dynamic
Note that the value for error is units-sensitive. For example, if a system is modeled in
mm-kg-s units, the units of length must be in mm. Assuming that all the translational
states are larger than 1 mm, setting ERROR=1E-3 implies that the integrator
monitors all changes of the order of 1 micron.
When setting the Interpolate option, the integration step size is limited to the value
that is specified for Hmax. If Hmax is not defined, no limit is placed on the
integration step size. If you do not set the Interpolate option, the maximum step size
is limited to the output step.
Note: In the dialog box, click More to see Interpolate, Hinit, and Hmin options.
More Click to set more advanced options.
Hmin Specify the minimum time step that the integrator is allowed to take.
When setting a value for Adaptivity, begin with a small number, such as 1E-8. Note
that this relaxes the tolerance of the corrector, which can introduce additional error
into the dynamic solution. The corrector tolerance must be at least a factor of 10
stricter than the integration tolerance. The ratio advocated in theoretical literature
ranges from .1 to .001 and is a function of the integrator order and step size. The ratio
that Adams Solver uses varies with the integrator chosen, but is within the range
specified above. If you use an Adaptivity value to relax the corrector tolerances, be
sure to validate your results by running another simulation using a different
integration error tolerance.
The Adaptivity value affects only the GSTIFF, WSTIFF, and Constant BDF
integrators.
We recommend that you do not set Maxit larger than 10. This is because round-off
errors start becoming large when a large number of iterations are taken. This can
cause an error in the solution.
The scale applies to only WSTIFF and ABAM. It is does not apply to GSTIFF and
Constant BDF. The use of scale factors is not supported in Adams Solver (C++).
Beta One of the two defining coefficients associated with the Newmark method. Learn
more about the Newmark integrator with INTEGRATOR statement help.
Range is defined in conjunction with Gamma. Together they must satisfy the stability
condition.
Gamma One of the two (together with Beta) defining coefficients associated with the
Newmark method.
Range is defined in conjunction with Beta. Together they must satisfy the stability
condition.
Specifies error tolerances and other parameters for Static equilibrium and Quasi-static simulations.
A static or quasi-static equilibrium analysis is appropriate only when inertia forces, such as, d’Alembert
forces, are not important and the system has one or more Degrees of freedom (degrees of freedom after
Adams Solver has removed any redundant constraints). Static and quasi-static equilibrium simulations
solve for displacement and static forces, but not for velocity, acceleration, or inertia forces, which are all
assumed to be zero.
P - Z 605
Solver Settings - Equilibrium
To set the Jacobian matrix for dynamic simulations, see Solver Settings - Pattern for Jacobian.
The default is 1.0E-06 and the range is 0.0 ≤ atol < 1.0
P - Z 607
Solver Settings - Equilibrium
The default is 0.0 and the range is 0.0 ≤ rtol < 1.0 .
Maxitl Specifies the maximum number of allowed inner loops in all the solvers, except
ORIGINAL, ORIGINAL+Krylov and ORIGINAL+UMF. For Hooke-Jeeves
method, allowed budget of function evaluations is set to MAXITL*N, where N is
the size of the problem (number of unknowns).
The default is 0.9 and the range is 0.0 ≤ etamax < 1.0 .
If you selected Aggressive or All, along with the above options (i.e Atol, Rtol, Maxitl and Etamax)
following additional options will also be available:
Eta Specify the initial residual tolerance for the linear Krylov Solver for
Tensor_Krylov method. The Tensor-Krylov ETA parameter is maintained
adaptively by the Krylov algorithm but ETA is the indicated starting value, while
ETAMAX is the maximum threshold for ETA.
Default: 1.0e-4
Range: 0.0 < ETA < 1.0
Specify the dimensionless radius of the trust-region for Trust-region method. The
smaller the value, the more the refinement of Trust-region solution (hence more
work).
The default is 1.0E-02 and the range is Kinetic Energy Error > 0.
• Skin - Adams Solver C++ will check the deformation of all the nodes on the
skin to see whether they exceed the linear limit. To use this option,
MNF_FILE or DB_FILE need to be specified in FLEX_BODY statement.
• Selnod - Adams Solver C++ will only check the nodes specified in
SELNOD section in MTX file.
• None
The linear limit is defined as 10% of the characteristic length of the flexible
body. You can use CHAR_LEN in FLEX_BODY statement to specify the
characteristic length. If CHAR_LEN is not specified, Adams Solver C++ will
calculate the characteristic length using MNF or MD DB if MNF_FILE or
DB_FILE is specified. Otherwise, Adams Solver C++ issues a warning.
Limit Action Select the action to be performed when flexible body exceeds its linear limit.
• Internal - Run Adams Solver from within Adams View and animate the
results as they are calculated, which is the default
• External - Perform a Simulation with Adams Solver while in Adams
View, but without seeing the model update on your screen during the
simulation. Adams View automatically plays an animation of the
simulation when the simulation is complete.
• Write Files Only - Instruct Adams View to write out the files that are
needed to run a simulation using Adams Solver from outside of Adams
View. The files include the:
• Dataset (.adm) file
• Command (.acf) file, which contains the commands necessary to run
the desired simulation.
If you select Internal, you can perform either an Interactive Simulation or a
Scripted simulation. If you select External or Write Files Only, you can only
perform a scripted simulation. Adams View issues an error if you try to perform
an interactive simulation after choosing either of these options.
If you selected Internal or External, you can set the following options:
Solver Library Set it to use the standard Adams Solver executable (leave it blank) or a user-
defined or customized Adams Solver library. A customized Adams Solver library
is required if you used subroutines to define any objects in your model, such as
motions or forces. For more information, see the following:
• If you set Hold License to Yes, then Adams View checks out the
necessary licenses when you perform a model verify operation (because
of the degrees of freedom calculation, which uses Adams Solver) or any
type of simulation using the internal Adams Solver. It only releases the
licenses when you exit Adams View or when you run a simulation using
the external Adams Solver.
• If you set Hold License to No, Adams View releases all Adams Solver
licenses (static, kinematic, and dynamic) in these cases:
• You run a simulation using the external Adams Solver (as before).
• After a model verify operation.
• When you reset after a single simulation using the internal Adams
Solver.
• After a parametric analysis (licenses are held throughout the
parametric analysis)
More Select to display options for setting the remote computer on which to run Adams
Solver.
612 Adams View
Solver Settings - Executable
Specify the number of parallel threads that Adams Solver (C++) uses when
performing the simulation. The number of threads, n, must be an integer in the
range of 1 to 128. The default value is 1. By executing multiple threads in parallel
across multiple processors, Adams Solver (C++) can reduce the walltime required
for a simulation.
Typically, the optimal number of threads is between N and 2N, where N is the
number of processors (including virtual processors in the case of Pentium
processors with HyperThreading enabled, refer below note for more information).
Sets error tolerances and other parameters for an Initial conditions simulation. By default, the integrators
ABAM, WSTIFF, and HASTIFF reconcile integrator results to be consistent with constraints; GSTIFF
does not, unless you set Interpolate to Yes in Solver Settings - Dynamic.
The initial conditions simulation ensures that the system satisfies all constraints within the system. If
necessary, Adams Solver moves parts until both parts of each joint are in contact. The simulation involves
three separate phases:
• First, Adams Solver makes the displacements between all parts and joints in the system
physically consistent. This requires the use of Newton-Raphson iteration to solve a set of
nonlinear algebraic equations. (To learn more about Newton-Raphson solutions, see the DEBUG
statement in the Adams Solver online help.)
• Once the displacements are consistent, Adams Solver makes the velocities physically consistent.
Because this requires solving a set of linear equations, iteration is not necessary.
• Finally, Adams Solver calculates consistent accelerations and forces. This solution also requires
solving a set of nonlinear equations using Newton-Raphson iteration.
When reconciling, the integrator uses the initial conditions solution process at each Output step to ensure
that velocities, accelerations, and forces are consistent with the system constraints. If you set Interpolate
to Yes, the integrator also uses the initial conditions solution at each output step to ensure displacements
are consistent with the constraints. The IC parameters control those solutions as well as the initial
conditions solution.
Because the initial conditions simulation relies on an iterative procedure, it is possible for it to fail if
model inconsistencies are initially too large. If this ever occurs, you should review your model for errors
in part and constraint inconsistencies. When using the Stabilized Index 2 (SI2) and Stabilized Index 1
(SI1) integrators, it is also important to ensure that initial velocities do not introduce discontinuities at
time equal to zero. The initial conditions settings can be used to adjust the convergence criteria as
appropriate for problematic modeling scenarios. See Equation Formulation Comparison for more
information.
To set the Jacobian matrix for initial condition simulations, see Solver Settings - Pattern for Jacobian.
The default is 1.0E10 (no limit) and the range is Tlimit > 0.
Alimit Specify the maximum angular increment Adams Solver is to allow while testing
trial solutions for a set of consistent initial conditions that satisfy all system
constraints. The default units for Alimit are radians. To specify Alimit in degrees,
add a D after the value.
After finding the displacements, Adams Solver solves a system of linear equations to find the velocities,
then solves another set of nonlinear equations to find accelerations and forces. Adams Solver repeats this
procedure at successively later times until it obtains results over the period of time specified in a
SIMULATE command.
To set the Jacobian matrix for dynamic simulations, see Solver Settings - Pattern for Jacobian.
The default is 1.0E10 (no limit) and the range is Tlimit > 0.
Alimit Specifies the maximum angular increment Adams Solver is to allow per iteration.
The default units for Alimit are radians. To specify Alimit in degrees, add a D after
the value.
http://www.vrand.com/
http://www.vrand.com/dot.htm
Like other Adams Solver tolerances, you may need to experiment with this
tolerance to find the right value for your application. Display the objective versus
iteration Strip chart. (See Solver Settings - Display) If the optimizer quits even
though the last iteration made noticeable progress, try reducing the tolerance. If the
optimizer continues iterating even after the objective has stopped changing very
much, make the tolerance larger.
Max. Iterations Set how many iterations the optimization algorithm should take before it admits
failure. Note that a single iteration can have an arbitrarily large number of analysis
runs.
Rescale Enter the number of iterations after which the design variable values are rescaled.
If you set the value to -1, scaling is turned off.
618 Adams View
Solver Settings - Optimizations
Smaller increments may give more accurate approximations of the gradient, but are
also more susceptible to random variations from run to run. Larger increments help
minimize the effects of variations, but give less accurate gradients.
Debug Set to display messages from the optimizer. Turning on debugging output sends
copious optimizer diagnostics to the window that launched Adams View. Keep an
eye on that window anyway, as some important warnings might be written there.
The debugging output shows you the data the optimizer is receiving from Adams
View, among other things. If the optimizer is behaving erratically, this may help
you determine the source of the problem.
User Adams View passes the user parameters to a user-written optimization algorithm.
Realizing that there may be parameter information that is not conveyed through the
existing parameter set, this parameter was added to allow you to pass any real
numeric data to your algorithm.
Min. Converged The number of consecutive iterations for which the absolute or relative
convergence criteria must be met to indicate convergence in the DOT Sequential
Linear Programming method.
P - Z 619
Solver Settings - Output
Sets whether or not Adams View stores Simulation results in three external files: graphics, request, and
results.
Selecting More lets you set options for the format and content of the results files, and the format and
content of the message and tabular output file when you are using External Adams Solver. In addition,
you can set up how Adams View stores the simulation results in the Modeling database.
To learn more, see the DEBUG statement in the Adams Solver online help.
• Files
• Database Storage
• Results (.res) Options
• Results (.res) Content
• Output (Out) Content
• Message (.msg) Content
• Durability Files - For more information, see Adams Durability online help.
620 Adams View
Solver Settings - Pattern for Jacobian
Specifies as many as ten character strings that together establish the pattern for evaluating the Jacobian
matrix during the modified Newton-Raphson solution for a dynamic, kinematic, or Initial conditions
simulation. (To learn more about Newton-Raphson solutions, see the DEBUG statement in the Adams
Solver online help.)
For each iteration, T or TRUE indicates that Adams Solver is to evaluate the Jacobian, and F or FALSE
indicates that Adams Solver is not to evaluate the Jacobian, instead it is to use the previously calculated
Jacobian matrix as an approximation of the current one. Therefore, cj determines whether or not Adams
Solver is to evaluate the Jacobian at the jth iteration. If necessary, Adams Solver repeats the pattern of
evaluations until it reaches the maximum number of iterations (set by the option Amaxit or Maxit).
Sorting Settings
Tools → Table Editor → Sorting
Allows you to sort the type of objects and category information after you have set it up in the Filter menu
of the Table Editor.
You can sort the information by object name or by a particular column. You can set the type of sorting.
You can select:
• Alphanumeric sorting - Sorts the information so that alphabetic characters are first followed by
numeric characters
• Numeric sorting - Sorts objects based on their numeric values. It sorts any alphanumeric
characters as zeros.
Note: When you sort the Table Editor, Adams View sets the values displayed in cells back to
those stored in the Modeling database. Therefore, you lose any changes you made to cells
and did not apply to your modeling database.
Sphere Tool
Build → Bodies/Geometry → Sphere Tool
Creates a solid ellipsoid whose three radii are of equal length. You draw the sphere by indicating its center
point and the radius for the three radii.
Before you draw the sphere, you can also specify the radius value for the three radii
Note: After you draw the sphere, three hotpoints appear on it that let you reshape the radii of the
sphere. For example, you can elongate the sphere into an ellipsoidal shape. For more
information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically
Modify Geometry.
P - Z 623
Spherical Joint Tool
Creates a spherical joint that allows the free rotation about a common point of one part with respect to
another part. The location of the spherical joint determines the point about which the joint’s parts can
pivot freely with respect to each other.
Learn about:
• Creating Idealized Joints
624 Adams View
Spherical Joint Tool
2 Bodies - 1 Location/ • 1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the
joint and have Adams View determine the two parts that should be
2 Bodies - 2 Locations connected. Adams View selects the parts closest to the joint
location. If there is only one part near the joint, Adams View
connects the joint to that part and ground.
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to
be connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint
remains fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to
be connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part.
You should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For
more on exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool.
For more on the effects of these options, see About Connecting
Constraints to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the joint oriented:
Pick Geometry Feature • Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current
Working grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a
direction vector on a feature in your model, such as the face of a
part.
First Body/Second Body Set the bodies on which you want to attach the joint. Select either:
(only appears if you select to
explicitly define the bodies • Pick Body - Select to attach the joint to a body.
using the options 2 Bodies - 1 • Pick Curve - Select to attach the joint to a curve. If you select to
Location or 2 Bodies - 2 attach the joint to a curve, Adams View creates a curve marker, and
Locations explained above) the joint follows the line of the curve. Learn more about curve
markers with Marker Modify dialog box help. Attaching the joint to
a spline curve is only available with Adams Solver (C++). Learn
about switching solvers.
P - Z 625
Spline Tool
Spline Tool
Build → Bodies/Geometry → Spline Tool
Creates a spline, which is a smooth curve that a set of location coordinates define.
You create splines by defining the locations of the coordinates that define the curve or by selecting an
existing geometric curve or edge and specifying the number of points to be used to define the spline. The
Spline tool produces a smooth curve through the points.
You can also close the spline or leave it open. A closed spline must be composed of at least eight points;
an open spline must be composed of at least four points.
Tip: You can extrude a closed spline into solid geometry that has
mass. For more information, see the Extrusion Tool.
Create by Picking Select:
• Points to select the locations on the screen where you want the spline
to pass through. You must specify at least eight locations for a closed
spline and four locations for an open spline.
• Curve to select the curve to define the spline.
• Edge to select the edge to define the edge.
If you selected Curve or Edge for Create by Picking, you have one additional option:
Spread Points Set how many points you want used to define the curve or clear the selection
and let Adams View calculate the number of points needed.
Note: If you are using this tool from the Main toolbox, the Spread Points text
box is called # of Points.
Note: Adams View places hotpoints at locations on the spline as you draw it. The hotpoints let
you reshape the spline. For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see
Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.
You can also modify the spline by editing the point locations directly or by changing the
curve and matrix data elements that Adams View creates to support the spline. In addition,
you can change the number of segments that Adams View creates through the spline. For
more information on modifying splines, see Using Dialog Boxes to Precisely Modify
Geometry.
P - Z 627
Split Tool
Split Tool
Build → Bodies/Geometry → Split Tool
Splits a complex solid (often referred to as a CSG) that you created using the other Boolean tools back
into its primitive solids. It creates a part for each solid resulting from the split operation.
Learn about Splitting a Solid.
628 Adams View
Static Equilibrium Tool
Performs a static simulation on your model. Adams Solver iteratively repositions all the parts in an
attempt to balance all the forces for one particular point in time. Each static simulation is independent of
the time-varying effects of velocity and acceleration. Therefore, no inertial forces are taken into account.
A positioning of your parts for which all your forces balance is known as an equilibrium configuration.
If your force and motion inputs change over time and you want to investigate how your equilibrium
configurations change, you can choose to perform a series of static simulations over an interval of time.
A series of static simulations is often referred to as a quasi-static simulation because time is allowed to
vary between static simulations but time-varying inertial effects are neglected for each individual static
simulation. Quasi-static simulations are useful for approximating the dynamic response of models that
move very slowly and for which you can assume that the effects of inertial force can be neglected.
Since Adams Solver must be able to move parts around as it attempts to iterate to an equilibrium
configuration, it does not make sense to perform a static simulation on a model that has no Degrees of
freedom (DOF). If the model has no DOF, no parts are allowed to move.
Stereo Viewing
Settings → Stereo Viewing
Sets options for using Adams View with stereo viewing. Stereo viewing is available on all Linux
platforms but not Windows.
Before running Adams View in stereo-viewing mode, you need to set the MDI_STEREO environment
variable MDI_STEREO (setenv MDI_STEREO 1). Learn more about setting Adams View Environment
Variables.
Stereo viewing is only available when running Native OpenGL graphics with the
OpenGL_Software_Assisted registry setting set to disabled. You use the Registry Editor.
Summing junction blocks add or subtract the outputs from other standard blocks. You can select whether
the positive or negative value of an input to a summing junction is used by single-clicking on the +/- sign
button.
A summing junction block takes any valid controls block output as its input.
Lets you substitute an existing flexible body in your model for an external system.
To substitute a flexible body for an external system, use the following tabs:
• Alignment
• Connections
Alignment
The “…” button can be used to invoke the ‘External System Cremod’ dialog,
in order to create an external system as a replacement for the rigid body.
Note: Only external systems with an MNF or an MD DB specified are
supported for the swap operation. If the selected external system
does not have either an MNF or an MD DB specified, then an error
message is seen, indicating that such external systems are not
supported.
External System Positioning
Align External System Select to align the external system by comparing the center of mass and inertia
CM with CM of tensor of the two bodies. The external system is:
Current Part
• Positioned such that its center of mass (CM) is coincident with the
flexible body CM.
• Oriented such that its principal inertia directions are coincident with
the part's principal inertia directions.
If the inertia properties of the two bodies are similar, this method closely
aligns the external system with the flexible body. If the bodies are symmetric
about a plane, this method may rotate the external system 180° from the
flexible body. In this case, you can use the Flip about buttons to rotate the
flexible body 180° back into position.
Launch Precision Displays the Precision Move dialog box, which lets you move objects either
Move Panel by increments or to precise coordinates.
P - Z 633
Swap a flexible body for an external system
Select either of the following to rotate the flexible about the corresponding
axis:
• X axis - Rotate external system 180° about its largest principal inertia
direction.
• Y axis - Rotate external system 180° about its second largest principal
inertia direction.
• Z axis - Rotate external system 180° about its smallest principal
inertia direction.
View parts only Select to display only the flexible body and its replacement external system.
View topology Select to display a flexible representation of the body and its connections to
other parts. Learn more about Graphically Viewing Model Topology.
Copy original part Leave a copy of the flexible body in the modeling database. This is helpful if
you want to reactivate the flexible body.
Connections
For the
option: Do the following:
Update Table Select to update the Marker and Node table with the changes you have made.
Reset Table Select to reset the Marker and Node table to the original connections found.
Node Finder Select to display the Node Finder Dialog Box and search for nodes.
Node Enter a node ID, and then select Apply to replace the node in a selected row of the
ID/Apply Marker and Node table with the node ID you entered.
Move to Select to move the marker in the selected row of the Marker and Node table to the
node location of the specified node.
Preserve Select to maintain the parameterization of the marker in the selected row of the Marker
expression and Node table. The parameterization would be specified through Adams View
expressions. This will keep the marker at its parameterized position.
634 Adams View
Swap a flexible body for an external system
For the
option: Do the following:
Preserve Select to maintain the location of the marker in the selected row of the Marker and Node
location table. If a marker is not coincident with the attachment node, Adams Flex preserves the
offset. This is helpful if you have defined a joint location on the marker. It keeps the
joint from breaking.
Note: Adams Solver (FORTRAN) does not support markers offset from their
attachment nodes. Therefore, Adams Flex (FORTRAN) automatically
introduces a massless link between the marker and the flexible body. Learn
more.
Number of Enter the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point in the Marker and
digits Node table.
P - Z 635
Swap a flexible body for an external system
For the
option: Do the following:
Sort by Select how to sort the Marker and Node table based on the headings of the columns. For
example, you can sort the table by the marker that is the most distant from its selected
node.
For the
option: Do the following:
Marker and Displays the markers on the existing body and the node to which the marker will be
Node Table transferred on the replacement external system. See the Picture of Marker and Node
Table. Note that if a marker is attached to more than one node, the marker is listed in
the table for each node to which it is attached. You need to change the marker
individually for each of the nodes.
• Marker - All the markers on the flexible body that will be transferred to the
external system.
• Connections - All the forces and joints on the flexible body that use the marker
for their definitions. These joints and forces will be transferred to the external
system.
• Old Node - The nodes the marker is attached to on the replacement external
system.
• Interface - The existing or replacement node may or may not be an interface
node. An asterisk appears if the node is an interface node.
• Old Relative Location - The x, y, and z coordinates of the old node relative to
the marker's current position, resolved in the marker's coordinate system.
• Old Distance - The magnitude of the old relative location vector.
• New Node - The attachment node chosen for the marker when it is transferred
to the external system. When Adams Flex initially creates the table, it chooses
the closest node. You can change the chosen node using the Node ID text box.
• New Distance - The magnitude of the relative location vector.
• New Relative Location - The x,y,z coordinates of the chosen attachment node
relative to the marker's current position, resolved in the marker's coordinate
system. A perfect match is 0.
• Move column - Indicates how Adams Flex will position the marker. The three
options are:
• move - When Adams Flex transfers the marker to the external system, it
will move it to the chosen attachment node. How far the marker will be
moved is given in the Distance column.
• loc - The current location of the marker will be preserved. If the marker's
position was defined by an Adams View expression, the parameterization
will be lost.
• expr - If the marker's position is defined by an Adams View expression,
the parameterization will be preserved. Otherwise, the marker's current
position will be preserved. This is helpful if you have defined a joint
location using the marker. It keeps the joint from breaking.
Use the Move to node, Preserve location, and Preserve expression buttons to set the
Move column value.
P - Z 637
Swap a flexible body for another flexible body
Lets you substitute an existing flexible body in your model for another flexible body. The name of the
replacement flexible body is the name of the existing body with _flex appended to it.
Learn more about Replacing Existing Bodies with Flexible Bodies.
To substitute a flexible body for a flexible body, you use the following tabs:
• Alignment
• Connections
Alignment
Note: The user can wish to view all the flexible bodies in the MD DB,
using the “…” button provided beside the index. The desired
flexible body can be selected by double-clicking on the displayed
list.
Flex body positioning
Node ID Method Select this method to automatically align the flexible body based on the
locations of three Markers with identical Node ID specified in both the
original and swapped bodies. Three markers that are not collinear are selected
for the swap, and the swap is performed automatically if the triangle formed
by the three markers of both bodies are identical. If no Markers with Node ID
specified can be found that meet this criteria, an error message is issued and
the swap is aborted.
638 Adams View
Swap a flexible body for another flexible body
Select either of the following to rotate the flexible about the corresponding
axis:
• X axis - Rotate flexible body 180° about its largest principal inertia
direction
• Y axis - Rotate flexible body 180° about its second largest principal
inertia direction
• Z axis - Rotate flexible body 180° about its smallest principal inertia
direction
View parts only Select to display only the original flexible body and its replacement.
View topology Select to display a flexible representation of the body and its connections to
other parts. Learn more about Graphically Viewing Model Topology.
Copy original part Leave a copy of the original flexible body in the modeling database. This is
helpful if you want to reactivate the original flexible body.
P - Z 639
Swap a flexible body for another flexible body
Connections
For the
option: Do the following:
Update Table Select to update the Marker and Node table with the changes you've made.
Reset Table Select to reset the Marker and Node table to the original connections found.
Node Finder Select to display the Node Finder Dialog Box and search for nodes.
Node Enter a node ID, and then select Apply to replace the node in a selected row of the
ID/Apply Marker and Node table with the node ID you entered.
Move to node Select to move the marker in the selected row of the Marker and Node table to the
location of the specified node.
Preserve Select to maintain the parameterization of the marker in the selected row of the Marker
expression and Node table. The parameterization would be specified through Adams View
expressions. This will keep the marker at its parameterized position.
Preserve Select to maintain the location of the marker in the selected row of the Marker and
location Node table. If a marker is not coincident with the attachment node, Adams Flex
preserves the offset. This is helpful if you have defined a joint location on the marker.
It keeps the joint from breaking.
Note: Adams Solver (FORTRAN) does not support markers offset from their
attachment nodes. Therefore, Adams Flex (FORTRAN) automatically
introduces a massless link between the marker and the flexible body. Learn
more.
Number of Enter the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point in the Marker and
digits Node table.
Sort by Select how to sort the Marker and Node table based on the headings of the columns.
For example, you can sort the table by the marker that is the most distant from its
selected node.
For the
option: Do the following:
Marker and Displays the markers on the existing body and the node to which the marker will be
Node Table transferred on the replacement flexible body. See a Picture of Marker and Node Table.
Note that if a marker is attached to more than one node, the marker is listed in the table
for each node to which it is attached. You need to change the marker individually for
each of the nodes.
• Marker - All the markers on the rigid body that will be transferred to the flexible
body.
• Connections - All the forces and joints on the rigid body that use the marker for
their definitions. These joints and forces will be transferred to the flexible body.
• Old Node - The nodes the marker is attached to on the replacement flexible body.
• Interface - Whether or not the existing or replacement node is an interface node.
An asterisk appears if the node is an interface node.
• Old Relative Location - The x, y, and z coordinates of the old node relative to the
marker's current position, resolved in the marker's coordinate system.
• Old Distance - The magnitude of the old relative location vector.
• New Node - The attachment node chosen for the marker when it is transferred to
the flexible body. When Adams Flex initially creates the table, it chooses the
closest node. You can change the chosen node using the Node ID text box.
• New Distance - The magnitude of the relative location vector.
• New Relative Location - The x,y,z coordinates of the chosen attachment node
relative to the marker's current position, resolved in the marker's coordinate
system. A perfect match is 0.
• Move column - Indicates how Adams Flex will position the marker. The three
options are:
• move - When Adams Flex transfers the marker to the flexible body, it will
move it to the chosen attachment node. How far the marker will be moved is
given in the Distance column.
• loc - The current location of the marker will be preserved. If the marker's
position was defined by an Adams View expression, the parameterization will
be lost.
• expr - If the marker's position is defined by an Adams View expression, the
parameterization will be preserved. Otherwise, the marker's current position
will be preserved. This is helpful if you have defined a joint location using the
marker. It keeps the joint from breaking.
You use the Move to node, Preserve location, and Preserve expression buttons to set
the Move column value.
P - Z 641
Swap a flexible body for another flexible body
For the
option: Do the following:
If Bulk Data File (BDF) option is selected the following options displayed:
Mass, Force, If the BDF does not specify its modeling units, they must be specified here. If the BDF
Length, Time does specify its modeling units, they will be shown here. If the BDF units differ from
those of the Adams model, Adams View will scale the geometry and mass properties
appropriately in session; however, it does not edit the values within the BDF to reflect
the Adams model units
642 Adams View
Swap a rigid body for an external system
Alignment
Select either of the following to rotate the flexible about the corresponding
axis:
Connections
• Marker - All the markers on the rigid body that will be transferred to the
external system.
• Connections - All the forces and joints on the rigid body that use the
marker for their definitions. These joints and forces will be transferred to
the external system.
• Node ID - The attachment node chosen for the marker when it is
transferred to the external system. When Adams Flex initially creates the
table, it chooses the closest node. You can change the chosen node using
the Node ID text box.
• Interface - An asterisk (*) in this column indicates that the chosen
attachment node is an interface node.
• Relative Location - The x,y,z coordinates of the chosen attachment
node relative to the marker's current position, resolved in the marker's
coordinate system. A perfect match is 0.
• Distance - The magnitude of the relative location vector.
• Move column - Indicates how Adams Flex will position the marker. The
three options are:
• move - When Adams Flex transfers the marker to the external system,
it will move it to the chosen attachment node. How far the marker will
be moved is given in the Distance column.
• loc - The current location of the marker will be preserved. If the
marker's position was defined by an Adams View expression, the
parameterization will be lost.
• expr - If the marker's position is defined by an Adams View
expression, the parameterization will be preserved. Otherwise, the
marker's current position will be preserved. This is helpful if you have
defined a joint location using the marker. It keeps the joint from
breaking.
Use the Move to node, Preserve location, and Preserve expression buttons to
set the Move column value.
P - Z 647
Swap a rigid body for another flexible body
Lets you substitute a rigid body for an Adams Flex flexible body. The name of the replacement flexible
body is the name of the existing body with _flex appended to it.
Learn more about Replacing Existing Bodies with Flexible Bodies.
To substitute a rigid body for a flexible body, you use the following tabs:
• Alignment
• Connections
Alignment
Note: The user can wish to view all the flexible bodies in the MD DB,
using the “…” button provided beside the index. The desired
flexible body can be selected by double-clicking on the
displayed list.
648 Adams View
Swap a rigid body for another flexible body
For the flex-body and MNF option, the load button stays disabled and
cannot be used.
Flex Body Positioning
Node ID Method Select this method to automatically align the flexible body based on the
locations of three Markers with identical Node ID specified in both the
original and swapped bodies. Three markers that are not collinear are
selected for the swap, and the swap is performed automatically if the
triangle formed by the three markers of both bodies are identical. If no
Markers with Node ID specified can be found that meet this criteria, an
error message is issued and the swap is aborted.
Align Flex Body CM with Select to align the flexible body by comparing the center of mass and
CM of Current Part inertia tensor of the two bodies. The flexible body is:
• Positioned such that its center of mass (CM) is coincident with the
rigid body CM.
• Oriented such that its principal inertia directions are coincident
with the part's principal inertia directions.
If the inertia properties of the two bodies are similar, this method closely
aligns the flexible body with the rigid body. If the bodies are symmetric
about a plane, this method may rotate the flexible body 180° from the rigid
body. In this case, you can use the Flip about buttons to rotate the flexible
body 180° back into position.
Launch Precision Move Displays the Precision Move dialog box, which lets you move objects
Panel either by increments or to precise coordinates.
3 Point Method Select to specify three point pairs to define the location and orientation of
the flexible body. A point pair consists of a point on the rigid body and a
point on the flexible body. The three points on each body must uniquely
define a plane. The first point pair defines the location of the flexible body
and the second and third points define the orientation. The flexible body is
positioned by making the first point pair coincident. It is then oriented by
making points 2 and 3 on the flexible body reside in the plane defined by
points 2 and 3 on the rigid body.
P - Z 649
Swap a rigid body for another flexible body
Select either of the following to rotate the flexible about the corresponding
axis:
Connections
• Marker - All the markers on the rigid body that will be transferred
to the flexible body.
• Connections - All the forces and joints on the rigid body that use
the marker for their definitions. These joints and forces will be
transferred to the flexible body.
• Node ID - The attachment node chosen for the marker when it is
transferred to the flexible body. When Adams Flex initially creates
the table, it chooses the closest node. You can change the chosen
node using the Node ID text box.
• Interface - An asterisk (*) in this column indicates that the chosen
attachment node is an interface node.
• Relative Location - The x,y,z coordinates of the chosen
attachment node relative to the marker's current position, resolved
in the marker's coordinate system. A perfect match is 0.
• Distance - The magnitude of the relative location vector.
• Move column - Indicates how Adams Flex will position the
marker. The three options are:
• move - When Adams Flex transfers the marker to the flexible
body, it will move it to the chosen attachment node. How far the
marker will be moved is given in the Distance column.
• loc - The current location of the marker will be preserved. If the
marker's position was defined by an Adams View expression,
the parameterization will be lost.
• expr - If the marker's position is defined by an Adams View
expression, the parameterization will be preserved. Otherwise,
the marker's current position will be preserved. This is helpful
if you have defined a joint location using the marker. It keeps
the joint from breaking.
You use the Move to node, Preserve location, and Preserve
expression buttons to set the Move column value.
If Bulk Data File (BDF) option is selected the following options displayed:
Mass, Force, Length, If the BDF does not specify its modeling units, they must be specified here.
Time If the BDF does specify its modeling units, they will be shown here. If the
BDF units differ from those of the Adams model, Adams View will scale
the geometry and mass properties appropriately in session; however, it
does not edit the values within the BDF to reflect the Adams model units
652 Adams View
Switch Block
Switch Block
The switch is a convenient means to “zero” the signal into any block. Connect the switch at a point in the
feedback loop to quickly see the change from open loop control to closed loop control. The switch takes
any control block as its input.
Table Editor
Tools → Table Editor
Allows you to enter values for all types of objects. It displays the objects in your Modeling database in
table format so you can compare, update, and manage the objects. The object information you can view
and update depends on the type of object. You can create and delete object.
To set the type of objects displayed:
• Select a check box of the desired object type from along the bottom of the Table Editor.
Adams View updates the Table Editor to display the selected type of object.
Learn about Editing Objects Using the Table Editor.
(Insert tool) Select to insert text from the input cell into the selected cells.
(Object Name & Field tool) Select to insert the database name for the next selected cell into the
input box. Learn about entering database names into cells.
(Cell Variable tool) Select to insert the self-reference operator into the input cell. Learn
about entering modifying cells based on their current contents.
Input cell Enter text to add to more than one cell at a time and quickly update the
values in the cell. Learn more about Working with Cells in the Table
Editor.
Apply Click to execute the object table's commands.
OK Click to execute the object table's commands and close the Table
Editor.
Create Select to create a new object for the current table type.
Filters Displays the Table Editor Filters dialog box.
Sorting Displays the Sorting Settings dialog box.
654 Adams View
Table Editor
Narrows the display of objects in Table Editor based on an object’s name or parent, such as to display
only markers that belong to PART_1, which is called setting the scope. You can also narrow the display
based on the names of objects. For example, you can set the name filter to only display the names of
objects that contain the number 2 (MARKER_20, MARKER_21, and so on). Using the scope and name
filter together, you can focus on those objects of interest and filter out the rest.
The categories of information that you can display about an object depend on the type of object. For
example, for parts, you can display their location, initial conditions, and attributes, such as whether they
are visible or active in the current Simulation. For markers, you can view their locations, as well as their
locations relative to ground. For forces, you cannot change the information displayed, only the types of
forces displayed. For joints, you can change the information displayed as well as the type of joints
displayed.
Learn more about Editing Objects Using the Table Editor.
For example, enter .model_1 to display all objects under your entire model or
enter .model_1.PART_3 to display objects belonging only to PART_3.
Creates a translational force between two parts in your model using three orthogonal components.
Learn more about:
• Multi-Component Forces
• 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Learn about Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:
Pick Feature • Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force normal to the current
Working grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as along an edge or normal to the face of a
part.
Characteristic Specify the characteristics of the force:
• Constant force - Lets you enter a constant force value or let Adams
View use a default value.
• Bushing Like- Lets you enter stiffness and damping coefficients and
lets Adams View create a function expression for damping and stiffness
based on the coefficient values.
• Custom - Adams View does not set any values for you, which, in effect,
creates a force with zero magnitude. After you create the force, you
modify it by entering a function expressions or parameters to a User-
written subroutine that is linked to Adams View. You can also specify an
alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn about
specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
If you selected Constant Force, the following option appears:
Force Value Enter a constant force value.
If you selected Bushing Like, the following two options appear:
P - Z 657
Three-Component Force tool
Creates a rotational force between two parts in your model using three orthogonal components.
Learn more about:
• Multi-Component Forces
• 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Learn about Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:
Pick Feature • Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force normal to the current
Working grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as along an edge or normal to the face of a
part.
Characteristic Specify the characteristics of the force:
• Constant - Lets you enter a constant force value or let Adams View use
a default value.
• Bushing Like- Lets you enter stiffness and damping coefficients and
lets Adams View create a function expression for damping and stiffness
based on the coefficient values.
• Custom - Adams View does not set any values for you, which, in effect,
creates a force with zero magnitude. After you create the force, you
modify it by entering a function expressions or parameters to a User-
written subroutine that is linked to Adams View. You can also specify an
alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn about
specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
If you selected Constant , the following option appears:
Torque Enter a constant torque value.
If you selected Bushing Like, the following two options appear:
P - Z 659
Three-Component Torque tool
Tool Settings
View → Toolbox and Toolbars
Turns on and off the Model Browser, Ribbon Capability and Standard toolbar. You can also set where the
model browser and status toolbars appear. By default, the model browser appears at the left of the main
window and the status bar appears at the bottom of the window.
Turns on and off the Main toolbox and the Standard toolbar and Status bars. You can also set where the
Standard and status toolbars appear—either at the top of thes main window under the menu bar or at the
bottom of the window. By default, the Main toolbox appears at the left of the main window, the Standard
toolbar is turned off, and the status bar appears at the bottom of the window.
Toolbar Settings
View → Toolbars → Settings
Allows you to turn the display of toolbars on and off. The toolbars are:
• Main toolbar - The Main toolbar appears by default. It contains tools for setting options and
performing operations. The contents of the toolbar change depending on the Adams
PostProcessor mode. Learn About the Main Toolbar.
• Curve Edit toolbar - Lets you manipulate curve data. Learn about using the Curve Edit toolbar.
• Statistics toolbar - Lets you view statistics about curves, such as the minimum and maximum
values. Learn about viewing statistics.
• Status bar - Displays information messages and prompts while you work. The right side of the
status bar displays the number of the displayed page and the total number of pages.
You can also set where the toolbars appear—either at the top of the window under the menu bar or at the
bottom of the window. You can also turn on and off the dashboard and treeview. By default, the dashboard
and treeview are displayed, the Main toolbar appears at the top of the window, the Curve Edit and
Statistics toolbars are turned off, and the status bar appears at the bottom of the window.
Topology By Connections
Database Navigator → Topology By Connections
Allows you to display information about a selected constraint or force with the parts that they connect
and act on.
Learn about Viewing Model Topology Through the Database Navigator.
Topology By Parts
Database Navigator → Topology By Parts
Allows you to display information about a selected part of your model. It displays information of the
selected part and shows its connections to other parts.
Learn about Viewing Model Topology Through the Database Navigator.
Torsion SpringTool
Build → Forces → Torsion SpringTool
• 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Learn about Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:
Pick Feature
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force using the x-, y-, and z-axes
of the current Working grid, if it is displayed, or using the x-, y-, and z-
axes of the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as the face of a part. The direction vector
you select defines the z-axis for the force; Adams View automatically
calculates the x- and y-axes.
KT Enter the torsional stiffness coefficients.
CT Enter the torsional damping coefficients.
666 Adams View
Torus Tool
Torus Tool
Build → Bodies/Geometry → Torus Tool
Creates a solid circular ring. You draw the ring from the center outward. By default, the Torus tool makes
the radius of outer ring (minor radius) 25% of the inner ring (major radius).
You can also specify the minor and major radii before you draw.
Learn about Creating a Torus.
Note: Two hotpoints appear on a torus after you draw it. One controls the centerline of the torus’
circular shape and the other controls the radius of the circular cross-section. For more
information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically
Modify Geometry.
668 Adams View
Translate Nastran Output to Modal Neutral File
Translates either:
• MSC.Nastran output data into a Modal Neutral File (MNF) using the MSC.Nastran-Adams
Interface. You generate the output data by running MSC.Nastran first and then running the
Adams Flex DMAP alter.
• Universal file into an MNF that you can use to create a flexible body with a constant coupling
inertia invariant formulation. Learn more.
To set the type of translation:
• Set the option menu in the upper left corner to either:
• MSC.Nastran
• Test Modal
MSC.Nastran
• Fast Set - If you select Fast Set, Adams Flex does not compute
invariants five and nine. It corresponds to the Partial Coupling
formulation mode for modal flexibility. It is also suitable for use with
the Constant Coupling formulation. Only Full Coupling requires all
nine invariants. Unless you think you might need the Full Coupling
formulation, you can safely select Fast Set. Learn about the different
formulations.
• Full Set - If you select Full Set, Adams Flex computes all inertia
invariants, including invariants five and nine.
• None - If you select None, Adams Flex does not perform any invariant
calculations, and must compute invariants each time you save an
Adams Solver dataset with a modified selection of modes or nodes.
P - Z 669
Translate Nastran Output to Modal Neutral File
• To turn off the encoding that makes the MNF platform independent,
select Platform Specific.
The encoding has some computational overhead that you may want to
remove if you are not concerned about MNF portability.
• To keep the encoding and portability, select Standard Portable.
Remove Internal Solid Select to remove certain interior geometry, such as the mated faces of two brick
Element Geometry elements, to enhance graphics performance. When used with invariants
computation (explained above), removing interior geometry can significantly
reduce the size of an MNF.
670 Adams View
Translate Nastran Output to Modal Neutral File
When you remove the interior geometry, the graphics performance of Adams
View is greatly enhanced. When you remove both interior geometry and
calculate the invariants, Adams Flex removes nodes that were only connected
to the geometry that it also removed. Occasionally, the removal of the
geometry may be undesirable especially when a particular interior node is to
be the target for an attachment in Adams.
Apply Mesh Select and then use the sliders to set the following:
Coarsening Algorithm
• Target Mesh Resolution - Slide the Mesh Resolution slider to the
fraction of the total component size below which Adams Flex removes
the detail of the mesh. For example, if your component is
approximately 1 m long, and you select 15% mesh resolution, the
coarsening results in a mesh with 15 cm-wide mesh cells.
• Face Smoothing - Slide the Face Smoothing slider to the angle
between adjacent faces below which Adams Flex should merge faces.
For example, if you select 15, the coarsening algorithm does not merge
two faces when one face is more than 15o out of the plane of the other
face.
• Colinear Point Removal - Select Remove Colinear Points to control
removal of nodes that are intermediate nodes on the straight edge of a
face.
• Retain Particular Nodes - In the Retained Node List text box,
specify a list of nodes that Adams Flex should not remove during
coarsening.
When you use mesh coarsening and also calculate the invariants, Adams Flex
removes nodes that were only connected to the geometry that was removed by
coarsening, which results in a great reduction in MNF size.
Test Modal
Center of Mass Enter the x, y, and z coordinates of the tested component’s center of
mass, relative to datum used to measure the nodal positions in dataset 15
of the Universal file.
Inertia Tensor Enter the inertia tensor of the tested component relative to the center of
mass.
Title Enter a title for the MNF to help you identify it (optional).
Comment #1/ Comment #2/ Enter comments for the MNF to help you identify it (optional).
Comment #3
Length/Mass/Time/Force Set Length Units, Mass Units, Time Units, and Force Units to, Mass
Units Units, Time Units, and Force Units toto the units used in the Universal
file and the data entered in this dialog box.
672 Adams View
Translate Tool Stack
Contains tools for translating the view in the View window and setting the perspective.
Icon Link
Dynamically Translating a View
Creates a translational joint that allows one part to translate along a vector with respect to another part.
The parts can only translate, not rotate, with respect to each other.
When you create a translational joint, you specify its location and orientation. The location of a
translational joint does not affect the motion of the joint. It simply determines where Adams View places
the joint. The orientation of the translational joint, however, determines the direction of the axis along
which the parts can slide with respect to each other. The direction of the motion of the translational joint
is parallel to the orientation vector and passes through the location.
Learn about:
• Creating Idealized Joints
674 Adams View
Translational Joint Tool
Moves the first part that the joint connects along the z-axis of the second part.
Learn about:
• Overview of Motion
• Creating Joint Motion
Adds a translational spring damper to your model by defining the locations on two parts between which
the spring-damper acts. You define the action force that is applied to the first location, and Adams Solver
automatically applies the equal and opposite reaction force to the second location.
Learn about:
• Equations Defining the Force of Spring Dampers
• Translational Spring Dampers
Unite Tool
Build → Bodies/Geometry → Unite Tool
Creates complex geometry by joining two intersecting solids. It merges the second part you select into
the first part, resulting in a single part.
The union has a mass computed from the volume of the new solid. Any overlapping volume is only
counted once.
Learn about Creating One Part from the Union of Two Solids
678 Adams View
Units
Units
Settings → Units
Changes the default units Adams View uses in modeling, importing, and exporting files. You can select
individual units or select a set group of units.
Learn about:
• Units of Measurement in Adams View
• Unit Labels
• Entering Unit Measurements in Text Boxes
Note: In all the unit systems, time is in seconds and angle is in degrees.
P - Z 679
Update Design Variables
Allows you to set the design variable values to those of a trial or iteration. This is helpful if you want to:
• Update your model to match the best trial of a Design study or Design of experiments (DOE).
• Visualize the variable settings of a particular trial or iteration.
• Use an intermediate iteration in an optimization instead of the final values.
The user-defined transfer function block creates general rational polynomial blocks by specifying the
polynomial coefficients. Specify the coefficients in the order n0, n1, n2 for the numerator.
Specify the assembly name of any controls block as the input.
View Accessories
View → View Accessories
Sets the display of the following in the currently active View window:
• Working grid
• Screen icons
• View triad
• View title
Note: You can also use the tools in the Main toolbox to set the display of these items. If you use
the tools, you can change the accessories for all view windows at once but you cannot
change the view title.
Provide seven pre-set views of your model that you can display in any of your view windows. You can
access the pre-set views using the Pre-set command on the View menu or using the set of View Orientation
Tool Stacks on the Main toolbox.
Learn about:
• The different Orientations and the tools that activate them
• Changing the View in a Window
P - Z 683
View Rotation
View Rotation
Main toolbox → Toggle toolstack → View Rotation
Rotates the View in a View window about the x, y, and z screen axes by a specified increment.
Icon Description
Rotate view about the screen’s z-axis
Set the amount by which you want to incrementally rotate the view in the text box.
684 Adams View
Welcome to Adams
Welcome to Adams
Lets you start your Adams session by creating a new model or opening an existing one. It also lets you
to specify your working directory.
• New Model - Lets you start a new modeling session with a new
modeling database.
Lets you create a new Modeling database or use an existing one. It also lets you import modeling data
and specify your working directory. Learn about creating a modeling database.
Window Layout
View → Layout
Provides 12 View window layouts for the Main window. The layouts vary from a single view window of
your model up to six windows. Each window displays a different view of your model. Adams Views
displays the current model (if there is one) into any of the views that are empty.
688 Adams View
Window Layout
You select the layout you’d like for your main window from a palette of layouts or from the Window
Layouts tool stack on the Main toolbox. The palette and tool stack contain the same set of view layouts.
If you display the palette, you can keep it open so that you can quickly select another layout.
Working Grid
Settings → Working Grid
Sets the appearance of various elements in the Working grid and toggle their visibility.
.
Spacing For a rectangular grid only, enter the spacing between each point in the
grid in the x and y directions in length units.
Maximum Radius For polar grid only, enter the radius of the working grid from its origin to
its outermost circle.
Circle Spacing For polar grid only, enter the amount of space between each circle in the
working grid. The smaller the spacing, the more circles Adams View
defines.
P - Z 691
Working Grid
θ = 360×/N
The colors listed for the working grid elements are the same colors provided
for setting the color of objects. The colors do not include any new colors
that you created.
• Global Origin to set the center location of the working grid to the
center of the view window.
• Pick and click a location on the screen to set as the center of the
working grid.
Set Orientation Select how you want to orient the working grid. You can set its orientation
by picking points or by aligning it with the screen plane. Note that if you
select Pick for orientation, you will also set the location of the working grid.
692 Adams View
Working Grid
Appendix
A-C
666 Adams View
ABAM integrator
ABAM integrator
The Adams-Bashforth and Adams-Moulton (ABAM) integrator reduces the full set of differential and
algebraic equations to a set of ordinary differential equations during a Dynamic simulation. The ABAM
integrator uses a Predict-Evaluate-Correct-Evaluate scheme to integrate the ordinary differential
equations. The ABAM integrator is better for simulations of models undergoing sudden changes or with
high, active (excited, but not damped out) frequencies.
See Integrator.
A - C 667
Accuracy tolerance
Accuracy tolerance
The accuracy tolerance is the number of decimal digits required at each Integration step to solve the
Dynamic simulation. In general, the more decimal digits of accuracy you select, the slower the Simulation
but the better the results. You can select a range of 1 to 7 for the decimal digits. The default is 3.
668 Adams View
Action marker
Action marker
A marker belonging to the body to which Adams View applies a multi-component applied force (see
Applied forces). Action Markers are also referred to as I markers.
A - C 669
Activation status
Activation status
Determines whether or not an object is included in a Simulation.
670 Adams View
Adams Toolbar
Adams Toolbar
The Adams Toolbar is your starting point to using Adams products on Linux. It gives you access to the
major products you installed. It uses a registry service that maintains values and settings that you need
when running Adams.
Adams Insight
Adams Insight lets you design sophisticated experiments for measuring the performance of your
mechanical system. It also provides a collection of statistical tools for analyzing the results of your
experiments so that you can better understand how to refine and improve your model. For more
information on Adams Insight, see the Adams Insight online help.
A - C 673
Adams Linear
Adams Linear
Adams Linear is a module to Adams Solver that linearizes Adams models. Linearized Adams models can
be represented by complex-valued eigendata (eigenvalues, mode shapes) or by a state-space
representation in the form of real-valued state matrices (A,B,C, and D). Adams uses a condensation
scheme to reduce an Adams model to a minimal realization linear form for efficient solution.
674 Adams View
Adams PostProcessor
Adams PostProcessor
Adams PostProcessor is a powerful post-processing tool that lets you view the results of simulations you
performed using other Adams products. Your Adams product launches it when you select Postprocessing
from the Review menu.
For more information, see the Adams PostProcessor online help.
A - C 675
Adams Solver
Adams Solver
MSC’s software program for kinematically and dynamically analyzing mechanical systems. For more
information, see the Adams Solver online help.
676 Adams View
Adams Solver ID
Adams Solver ID
An Adams Solver ID is an integer used to identify the element in the Adams Solver dataset files (.adm).
You only need to specify an ID number if you have User-written subroutine.
Enter a 0 to have Adams Solver assign the ID for you.
A - C 677
Adams Solver analysis files
Adams View
A powerful modeling and simulating environment you use to build, simulate, and refine virtual models
of any mechanical system that has moving parts, from automobiles and trains to VCRs and backhoes.
680 Adams View
Adams View command file
Adaptivity value
Loosens or tightens the convergence tolerance for the corrector phase of the Integration step when solving
a Dynamic simulation.
682 Adams View
Analytical Method
Analytical Method
The analytical method uses the curves of the path and profile you specify for the revolution or extrusion
and uses the curves to define the revolution or extrusion. Unlike the Non-analytical Method, for a
revolution, it maintains the relationship of the profile and axis. When you edit the revolution or extrusion,
you edit the curves making up the object, not the individual points of the profile as you do for non-
analytical.
Comparision of revolutions created with analytical and non-analytical methods
Animation
An Adams View tool that allows you to replay the frames from your Simulation, and helps you review
and study the part movements within your model.
684 Adams View
Applied forces
Applied forces
Forces that define loads and compliances on parts (see Part (also called Bodies)). They allow you to write
your own equations to represent a wide variety of force relationships. To help you write force equations,
we’ve provided a Function Builder, which steps you through writing a function and evaluates the
function before adding it to your model. For more information on the Function Builder, see Adams View
Function Builder online help.
A - C 685
Array
Array
A list of input variables, state variables, output variables, and initial conditions associated with System
elements, such as general state equations, linear state equations, and transfer functions. You can also use
general arrays to define lists of constants. You can access the values in function Expressions or User-
written subroutines.
686 Adams View
Assemblies
Assemblies
Assemblies, also referred to as user-defined elements, let you collect generic modeling elements into a
single object that you can easily duplicate. Assemblies are accessible only from the command line or
through macros. Examples of assemblies are the Adams View Controls tool kit; some forces, such as the
spring damper; and general motions. To see assemblies in Adams View, display the Database Navigator
and select to view assemblies.
A - C 687
Background color tool stack
Basic Type
Includes the following:
real, integer, location, orientation, string, function, list(str1, str2, str3,...), file(path wildcard)
The list type must be followed by the list of allowed values.
The file type can optionally be followed by a wildcard with or without a path. The File Selection dialog
box uses the specified path and wildcard as the defaults for the parameter. If you do not specify a
wildcard, the File Selection dialog box lists all files.
A - C 689
Bulk Data File (BDF)
Notes: • Adams View reads the BDF and if it does not contain units data, then the user must
specify it in the flexible body creation dialog. If the BDF units differ from those of the
Adams model, Adams View will scale the geometry and mass properties appropriately
in session; however, it does not edit the values within the BDF to reflect the Adams
model units.
• Abaqus input files can be converted to MSC Nastran SOL400 BDF's via the Adams
Flex Toolkit's ABQ2NAS command .
690 Adams View
Beam
Beam
A linear translational and rotational force between two locations.
A - C 691
Beam example
Beam example
692 Adams View
Binary format
Binary format
The format of the Adams View Modeling database that saves all aspects of your modeling session,
including Models, Simulation results, defaults, and changes to the interface. You can save your work to a
binary file and later reload it and resume working where you left off.
A - C 693
Bode plot
Bode plot
Helps you study frequency response functions (FRFs) for linear systems and linearized representations
of nonlinear systems. The frequency response function measures the response at the outputs due to unit
harmonic excitation at the inputs at various frequencies. A Bode plot shows the amplitude gain and the
phase shift between input to output for all output/input combinations of the linear system.
694 Adams View
Body-fixed rotation
Body-fixed rotation
To apply rotations about axes that move with the body as it rotates. As Adams View applies each rotation
to an axis, it produces a new set of axes.
A - C 695
Boss
Boss
Raised circular protrusions on the face of solid objects.
696 Adams View
Bushing
Bushing
Spring and damper forces acting between two parts. You define the force and torque magnitudes using
six Cartesian components (Fx, Fy, Fz, Tx, Ty, and Tz), which are a linear function of the translational and
rotational displacement between two coordinate systems moving with the two parts.
A - C 697
Cartesian coordinate system
Chamfer
A beveled edge or corner on a solid object.
A - C 699
Check button
Check button
A small square button in a dialog box that selects an option. You can select more than one check box in
a group.
700 Adams View
Clearance study
Clearance study
A clearance study reports the minimum distance between objects in your model at each frame of an
animation in Adams PostProcessor. For example, you might want to perform a clearance study to ensure
packaging requirements are satisfied.
When you view an animation of the clearance study, Adams PostProcessor displays a line between the
two objects in the study to track the minimum distance. You can also plot the data and generate reports.
A - C 701
Click
Click
To press and quickly release the mouse button.
702 Adams View
Command Navigator
Command Navigator
The Command Navigator displays a list of all Adams View command keywords. A plus (+) in front of a
keyword indicates that the command has more keywords below it but they are hidden. A minus (-)
indicates that all keywords below the keyword are displayed. No indicator in front of a keyword indicates
that there are no more keywords below the object. When you select an object with no indicator, a dialog
box appears in which you enter parameters for executing the command.
A - C 703
Command window
Command window
An Adams View window that lets you enter Adams View commands directly instead of using menus. The
commands correspond to menu selections and the parameters correspond to Dialog box choices. You can
either enter the full command or an abbreviation to the command.
Learn more about the Command Window.
704 Adams View
Comments
Comments
For comments, you can enter any alphanumeric characters. The comments that you create appear in the
Information window when you select to display information about the object, in the Adams View Log file,
and in a Adams View command file or Adams Solver dataset files when you export your model to these
types of files. (Note that Design variables are not output to datasets; therefore, neither are their
comments.)
A - C 705
Comparision of extrusions
Comparision of extrusions
706 Adams View
Comparision of revolutions
Comparision of revolutions
A - C 707
Constraint
Constraint
An Adams View object that defines how two parts are attached and how they can move with respect to
one another. There are four different types of constraints: Idealized joints, Primitive joints, Contacts, and
motions.
708 Adams View
Construction geometry
Construction geometry
Primitive objects that have no mass. They include Points and Markers as well as wire geometry, such as
lines, arcs, and splines. You can use construction geometry to define other Geometry.
A - C 709
Contacts
Contacts
Objects that model how parts meet at points and how points on parts follow curves. They also model how
curves on one part follow curves on another part.
710 Adams View
Coordinate window
Coordinate window
Displays the coordinate location of the cursor in the main window. It updates the coordinates as you move
the cursor. You can also use the coordinate window to find the distance between two Points.
Curve
A line representing data on a plot.
712 Adams View
Cylindrical coordinate system
• r is the distance in the xy plane to the location. r is measured from the origin to the point
projected onto the xy plane.
• is the angle in the xy plane to the location. is measured from the x-axis to the line
connecting the origin and the location projected into the xy plane. is positive using the right-
hand rule about the z-axis.
• z is the distance to the location along the z-axis.
D - F 713
Cylindrical coordinate system
D-F
714 Adams View
DAC Format
DAC Format
nCode International created the DAC file format. This DAC format supports single-parameter (time
series), two-parameter (x-y), and three-parameter (histogram) files. Adams Durability supports the time
series format. With this DAC format, you can input data from durability test machines and output data to
nSoft and other DAC-compatible programs. This topic contains an overview of the DAC format. For a
detailed description of the DAC format, see the nSoft data File Formats document from nCode
International.
DAC files are binary, sequential, and fixed-length with 512-byte records. The data represent a fixed
sample rate or time step. Real numbers are single-precision (4-byte) values. Each file has header, data,
and footer regions. Adams Durability supports both old (pre version 5.0) and new (version 5.0+) DAC
formats with a single channel of time series data.
In general, DAC files are not portable from platform to platform. For example, files created by Adams
Durability on a Windows platform are not readable by Adams Durability or other programs on Linux
platforms. nCode provides an nSoft utility to convert DAC files from one platform to another. However,
this utility does not have a specification for the Linux platform. When using Adams Durability or Adams
View on a Linux platform, use DAC files that have been converted to Windows or INTEL (Windows
DAC files are compatible with Linux). Note that Linux-generated DAC files can be processed on
Windows and the reverse.
D - F 715
Database Object Type
ADAMS_Output_File Measure_Vector
Body Modeling
Constraint Old_Graphic_User_Interface
Data_Element Optimization_Function
Equation Plotting
Expression_primitive Point_to_Point_Force
Feature Position
Force Reference_Frame
Frame_Display Runtime_Measure
Function_Container Solid_Geometry
Geometry Triad
Graphic_User_Interface Variable_Class
Higher_Pair_Contact Wire_Geometry
Measure
D - F 717
Data element matrix
Data elements
Elements that store alpha-numeric information in your model. Data elements include Arrays, curves,
splines, matrixes, and strings.
Note that data elements by themselves do nothing. They simply hold supporting data for other Adams
elements or for your user function Expressions or User-written subroutines. For example, you reference
matrices in the definition of a linear state equation. In addition, a linear state equation uses arrays of
variables to define input, output, and state characteristics. You can also use curves to create contact
constraints.
D - F 719
Data point
Data point
Represents data that Adams View created at an output step during a Simulation or test data that you’ve
imported.
720 Adams View
Database Navigator
Database Navigator
An Adams View tool that lets you view and select objects in your Modeling database.
Learn more about Database Navigator.
D - F 721
Default
Default
Selects a simulation for you depending on your model:
• If your model contains zero Degrees of freedom (DOF), performs a Kinematic simulation.
• If your model has one or more DOF, Adams View performs a Dynamic simulation.
722 Adams View
Degrees of freedom
Degrees of freedom
The amount a part is free to move in space (see Part (also called Bodies)). A part free in space has six
degrees of freedom: three translational, three rotational. A constraint removes degrees of freedom
between two parts, causing them to remain positioned with respect to one another.
D - F 723
Delta mode
Delta mode
A mode in which the Coordinate window displays the differences between Points. The coordinate window
is in delta mode when you are moving an object or drawing the selection box.
When Adams View starts delta mode, it displays the distance between the current location of the cursor
and its original location. Adams View adds the distance information to the coordinate window below the
coordinate values. It places a D in front of the coordinate values to differentiate them.
Adams View also displays a MAG field near the bottom of the window, which displays the magnitude of
the cursor displacement. The magnitude is the square root of the sum of the squares of the three
coordinate values.
724 Adams View
Design of experiments (DOE)
Design study
A set of Simulations that help you adjust a parameter in your Model to measure its effect on the
performance of your model. For example, you can run a design study to determine the optimal length
required for a driving link in a stamping machine required to make a stamp hit a box.
See Design of experiments (DOE) and Optimization.
726 Adams View
Design variables
Design variables
Design variables represent elements in your model that can change. For example, a design variable can
represent a location for a design point, a magnitude for a force, or spring stiffnesses. After you enter a
design variable in your model, you can run automated simulations that vary the values of the variable
over specified ranges to understand the sensitivity to the variable or to find the optimum values. See
Design of experiments (DOE), Design study, and Optimization.
D - F 727
Dialog box
Dialog box
A panel that appears when you select a command. It requests more information.
728 Adams View
Dialog-Box Builder
Dialog-Box Builder
D - F 729
Dialog-Box builder
Dialog-Box builder
An Adams View tool that helps you create and modify Dialog boxes. For example, you can use it to add
a new button to a dialog box or create a new dialog box to execute a special procedure you run often.
730 Adams View
Dimensions
Dimensions
Any measurable extent, such as velocity, length, mass, and torque.
D - F 731
Double-click
Double-click
To quickly click the mouse button twice without moving the mouse.
732 Adams View
Drag
Drag
To press and hold down the mouse button while moving the mouse.
D - F 733
Dynamic Model Navigator
Dynamic simulation
A time-history solution for all displacements, velocities, accelerations, and internal reaction forces in
your Model driven by a set of external forces and excitations. A dynamic simulation is also known as a
kinetic simulation.
During a dynamic simulation, Adams Solver solves the full set of non linear differential and algebraic
equations (DAEs). It is the most complex and computationally demanding type of Simulation and is
meant to be used with models that have one or more Degrees of freedom.
A dynamic simulation provides a time-history solution for displacements, velocities, accelerations, and
internal reaction forces in your model driven by a set of external forces and excitations.
Learn more About Dynamic Simulations.
D - F 735
Elements of an arc
Elements of an arc
This example shows a 60-degree angle with a starting angle of 15 degrees and an ending angle of 75
degrees.
736 Adams View
Entering a marker name
Eprint
Eprint prints a block of information for each Kinematic simulation, Static equilibrium , or Dynamic
simulation step to a Command window and to your Adams View Log file. The information helps you
monitor the simulation process and locate the source of the error if there is a problem. Each step consists
of two phases:
• A forward step in time (the predictor for dynamics).
• The solution of the equations of motion (the corrector for dynamics).
Eprint displays the same information that the DEBUG command does when used with the argument
EPRINT. For more information, see DEBUG in the Adams Solver online help.
When you select Eprint, a command window appears. It displays the most recent commands that Adams
View executed.
Note: You can close the command window and use your log file to view the debugging
information.
740 Adams View
Example 5x3 mesh
Example of Extrusion
742 Adams View
Example of Extrusion Directions
Expression language
You use the Adams View expression language to write expressions. Expressions are combinations of
constants, operators, functions, and database object references, all enclosed in parentheses. In Adams
View you can use expressions to specify parameter values, such as locations of markers or functions of
motions.
Adams View uses expressions for two purposes:
• To compute values for you, such as when you are entering the radius of a cylinder and the value
is not a simple number, but is the result of a mathematical computation.
• To parameterize your model.
752 Adams View
Expression mode
Expression mode
Function Builder mode in which you create expressions, which are the basis of all parameterization.
D - F 753
Expressions
Expressions
Groups of standard constants, operators, functions, and data references. You use expressions to specify
parameters in your model or to allow Adams View or Adams Solver to calculate values.
754 Adams View
External Adams Solver
Extrusion
A three-dimensional object defined by its profile and depth. An extrusion can be either solid or hollow.
756 Adams View
Fast fourier transform (FFT)
Field element
A translational and rotational force between two locations. The field element can apply either linear or
nonlinear force depending on the values that you specify after you create the field.
758 Adams View
Fillet
Fillet
A rounded edge or corner on a solid object.
D - F 759
Fixed joint
Fixed joint
A constraint that allows no translation or rotation between two parts (see Part (also called Bodies)).
760 Adams View
Flexible bodies
Flexible bodies
A part (see Part (also called Bodies)) that vibrates and bends as Forces are applied to it.
D - F 761
Flexible connectors
Flexible connectors
Flexible connectors let you connect two bodies in a compliant way. In contrast to Joints, which are rigid
connectors, flexible connectors do not absolutely prohibit any part movement and, therefore, do not
remove any Degrees of freedom from your model. Flexible connectors do typically resist movements
between parts (see Part (also called Bodies)), however, by applying spring and damper forces to the
connected bodies. These forces are proportional to the displacement and rate of change in displacement
between two parts, respectively.
762 Adams View
Flexible links
Flexible links
A discrete link consisting of two or more rigid bodies (see Rigid body) connected by beam force elements.
D - F 763
Floating marker
Floating marker
Specifies a site for applying Forces or Constraints to parts. The force or constraint dictates the location
and orientation of the floating marker. Therefore, you do not specify a position for a floating marker. This
allows the floating marker’s location and orientation to change with respect to its body coordinate system
during the simulation, as dictated by the force or constraint.
764 Adams View
Force
Force
An effect that has magnitude and direction and that causes motion of a part (see Part (also called Bodies))
when there is no other external effect on the part. In Adams View, force can refer to both translational
and rotational forces.
D - F 765
Force graphics
Force graphics
Arrows whose magnitudes and directions reflect the scaled, relative magnitudes and directions of the
force vectors acting on your Model during a Simulation.
766 Adams View
Frame
Frame
A single step of an Adams View Simulation applied to a Model.
D - F 767
Function
Function
An operand that takes a list of arguments and computes a value based on the values in the list. Each
argument in the list is an expression that is evaluated and given to the function. Common examples are
SIN( ), SQRT( ), and ABS( ).
768 Adams View
Function Builder
Function Builder
An Adams View tool that helps you build and modify Function expressions and Measures. For more
information, see the Adams View Function Builder online help.
Function Builder has two modes:
• Run-time mode
• Expression mode
D - F 769
Function Builder in Expression Mode
G-M
772 Adams View
Gear Stiff (GSTIFF) integrator
Geometric entities
The following is complete list of entities that can be translated into outlines and markers or polylines.
In addition to the entities listed in the table, you can create outlines for any geometry or annotation entity
that results in a linear approximation of two points. In this case, a line is created. You can also create
outlines for surfaces that are polygonalized.
Geometry
Graphical elements that make up a Rigid body or Flexible bodies. These elements include curves, such as
arcs, and shapes, such as cylinders. A rigid or flexible body can have one or more geometric elements.
Note that a part (see Part (also called Bodies)) can have no geometry associated with it.
776 Adams View
Getting help in the Command Navigator
Note: There is also command language help in this help system. From the help table of contents,
select Adams Package -> Adams View -> View Command Language.
G - M 777
Graphics file
Graphics file
An Adams Solver file that contains graphics output from a Simulation. Has a .gra extension.
778 Adams View
Group
Group
A set of objects that make up a unit or subsystem of your Model. You can work on them as a single object.
Once you’ve grouped the objects, you can add them to the Select list all at once so that you can perform
editing operations on them, such as move or copy them. You can also set up their Activation status and
deactivation status during Simulations.
G - M 779
Highlighting
Highlighting
To display an object, and any objects related to that object, in a specified color so you can see the
relationship between the objects in your Model. For example, you can highlight a Joint and the parts it
constrains (see Part (also called Bodies)) .
780 Adams View
Hotpoints
Hotpoints
Small squares that appear on geometric elements and plot Curves when selected. They enable you to
reshape and resize the Geometry. Each type of geometry has a different number of hotpoints.
G - M 781
Hotspot
Hotspot
A hotspot is a node or region on the flexible body that experienced one of the highest values of
stress/strain during the simulation.
782 Adams View
IGES files
IGES files
Initial Graphics Exchange Specification (IGES) files containing the geometry from Adams View or a
CAD software package. You can import and export IGES files using Adams View. When you import an
IGES file, you associate the geometry in the file with any Rigid body in the current Model.
G - M 783
IMPACT-Function-Based Contact
IMPACT-Function-Based Contact
In this method, Adams Solver computes the contact force from the IMPACT function available in the
Adams function library. The force is essentially modeled as a nonlinear spring damper.
784 Adams View
Idealized joints
Idealized joints
Mathematical representations of joints that have physical counterparts, such as a revolute (hinge) or
translational joint (sliding dovetail). See Primitive joints.
G - M 785
Information window
Information window
Displays many different types of information about your Model, Simulation, or motions, including:
• Topology on the different objects in your model
• Object information, such as information about a part or a view
• Model verification results
• Measurements from one marker to another (see Markers)
• Result set component information
• View attributes
• Results from a system command you run using the Execute System Command
Integration step
The time step that Adams Solver takes internally to solve the equations of motion to the specified
accuracy tolerance. Adams Solver uses variable-step Integrators that constantly increase or decrease the
size of the integration steps as needed. By default, the size of the integration step is proportional to the
size of the Output step.
788 Adams View
Integrator
Integrator
An algorithm that solves the differential equations of motion over an interval of time during a dynamic
Dynamic simulation. Adams View lets you select four types of integrators when you customize how
Adams Solver solves equations of motion. The default is the Gear Stiff (GSTIFF) integrator.
G - M 789
Interactive Simulation
Interactive Simulation
An interactive Simulations lets you run a single simulation and experiment with different simulation
parameters and options. Simulating interactively is helpful when you are not sure exactly what your
model will do or which options you need.
When you perform an interactive simulation, Adams View submits one or two simple commands to
Adams Solver based on the type of simulation, how long the simulation will last, and the frequency with
which you want data to be output. For example, for an interactive Dynamic simulation for which you set
the end time to 5.0 seconds and the frequency of output to 0.1 seconds, Adams View sends the following
command to Adams Solver:
SIMULATE/DYNAMIC, END=5.0, DTOUT=0.1
790 Adams View
Interface objects
Interface objects
The database objects that make up the Adams View interface. All standard interface objects are stored
under the library GUI in your Modeling database.
Learn more about Adams View Interface Objects.
G - M 791
Jacobian matrix
Jacobian matrix
Specifies the pattern Adams Solver should use to check that the Integration step is moving closer to the
desired accuracy. Adams Solver repeats the pattern of checks until it reaches the maximum number of
iterations. The default is to check the process after every iteration.
792 Adams View
Joint
Joint
A mechanical element that connects two parts (see Part (also called Bodies)) and allows relative motion
of one object with respect to another.
See Idealized joints and Primitive joints.
G - M 793
Joint motion
Joint motion
Prescribes translational or rotational motion on a translational, revolute, or cylindrical joint. Each joint
motion removes one degree of freedom (DOF) from your model (see Degrees of freedom). Joint motions
are very easy to create, but they limit you to motions that are applied to the above listed joints and
movements in only one direction or rotation.
794 Adams View
Keywords
Keywords
A word that represents a command or parameter.
G - M 795
Kinematic simulation
Kinematic simulation
Determines the range of values for the displacement, velocity, and acceleration of any point of interest in
the model, independent of Forces applied to it. During a kinematic simulation, Adams Solver solves only
the reduced set of algebraic equations. This type of simulation, therefore, is only available for models
with zero Degrees of freedom.
If you specify the mass and inertial properties of bodies in your Model, a kinematic Simulation also
calculates the corresponding applied and reaction forces required to generate the prescribed motions.
796 Adams View
Libraries
Libraries
A collection of Adams View objects, such as a collection of interface objects. Libraries help organize the
Adams View Modeling database because they collect related objects into one area. For example, there is
a library, called GUI, that collects all standard Adams View interface objects. You can use the Database
Navigator tool to find libraries within the standard Adams View interface for materials, interface objects,
Forces, and controls elements.
You can create libraries of your own. You add objects to a library by creating them as children of the
library object. A library can hold windows and Dialog boxes, groups, macros, materials, Models, plots,
assembly definitions and instances, Views, and other libraries.
G - M 797
Linear Modes
Linear Modes
Calculates eigenvalues and eigenvectors, which give you a better understanding of your system’s natural
frequencies and mode shapes, respectively.
After the calculation is complete, you can choose to view an animation or a table of the values. If you
select an animation, the Linear Modes Controls dialog box appears, letting you make other changes.
For additional information, see the LINEAR command in the Adams Solver online help.
798 Adams View
Linear simulation
Linear simulation
Linearizes your nonlinear dynamic equations of motion about a particular operating point in order to
determine natural frequencies and corresponding mode shapes. You must purchase Adams Linear to
perform a linear simulation.
G - M 799
Link
Link
An extrusion of a rectangle with semi-circular ends.
800 Adams View
Loads on Rigid Body
Location table
The Location Table lets you view the points in lines, polylines, splines, Extrusions, and revolutions and
edit them. You can also save the location information to a file or read in location information from a file.
Log file
An ASCII file called aview.log containing all of the commands that you entered during the current
modeling session, as well as all the error, warning, and fatal messages that you received. Adams View
generates a log file during each Adams View session.
804 Adams View
Macro
Macro
A macro is a single command that you create to execute a series of Adams View commands.
G - M 805
Main toolbox
Main toolbox
Displays tools and Tool stacks that assist you in creating and simulating your Model.
Main window
The Adams View window in which you build and simulate your Model.
Learn about Adams View Main Window (Classic).
G - M 807
Markers
Markers
Define a local coordinate system on any part (flexible, rigid, curve, or ground) in your model (see Part
(also called Bodies)) . A marker has a location (the origin of the coordinate system) and an orientation.
Adams View automatically creates markers at the center of mass of all solid Geometry and at anchor
points on geometry that define the location of the object in space. For example, a link has three markers:
two at its endpoints and one at its center of mass. Adams View also automatically creates markers for you
when you constrain objects, such as add a joint between parts. Adams View displays markers as triads.
808 Adams View
Measures
Measures
Gauge particular quantities in your Model during a Simulation. For example, you can measure the Force
in a spring throughout a simulation or the angle between two Points or axes.
G - M 809
Menu Builder
Menu Builder
An Adams View tool that lets you modify and create menus. For example, you can use the Menu Builder
to change the Main window’s menu bar so that it includes a Tire menu for adding tires to your Model. You
can build menus for a particular model or for an entire application.
810 Adams View
Menu bar
Menu bar
Contains the headings of each menu. The menus contain all the Adams View commands for creating,
simulating, and improving your model.
G - M 811
Message file
Message file
Can contain Adams Solver messages and topology information. Has an .msg extension.
812 Adams View
Modal Deformation
Modal Deformation
Outputs modal deformations as a function of time of the specified flexible body. Adams View will only
export coordinates of the active modes in the simulation.
G - M 813
Modal Neutral File (MNF)
By default an MNF is platform-independent, however, you can obtain a platform-dependent MNF, which
can improve flexible body animation performance in the Adams products.
Learn more About the Flexible Body Description File (MNF).
814 Adams View
Model
Model
A complete description of your virtual prototype in Adams View, including parts (see Part (also called
Bodies)) , Joints, Forces, and Geometry.
G - M 815
Model topology
Model topology
A view of your Modeling database to determine what Constraints your Model owns and what parts the
constraints connect (see Part (also called Bodies)) .
816 Adams View
Modeling database
Modeling database
Contains all your work in the current session of Adams View. It contains any Models you create, their
attributes, Simulation results, plots, customized menus and Dialog boxes, and any preferences you set.
You can view the contents of a modeling database using the Database Navigator.
G - M 817
Move Toolstack
Move Toolstack
Contains tools for moving objects and setting the Working grid and default coordinate system.
818 Adams View
Multi-Component force
Multi-Component force
A translational and/or rotational Force between two parts (see Part (also called Bodies)) in your Model
defined by three or more orthogonal components.
N - R 819
Multi-Component force
N-R
820 Adams View
Nodal Deformation
Nodal Deformation
Outputs nodal deformations as a function of time of the specified flexible. Adams View writes the
deformations in the simulation set of units.
N - R 821
Non-analytical Method
Non-analytical Method
The non-analytical method digitizes the profile and path you specify for the the revolution or extrusion
and uses these points to create the revolution or extrusion. For a revolution, it also moves the profile
making it perpendicular to the path along which you are revolving the profile, and then performs the
revolution. The resulting solid geometry for both a revolution and extrusion are sharp edges where the
points of the profile were. The geometry is not smoothed.
When you modify an extrusion or revolution created using the non-analytical method, you move the
original profile points to change the solid.
Comparision of revolutions created with analytical and non-analytical methods
Non-Manifold
Extrusions that have mixed dimensions, edge or faces shared by another face, or intersecting lines. These
types of extrusions are not allowed in Adams View.
N - R 823
Numeric data
Numeric data
Files that contain numerical results generated during an Adams View session.
824 Adams View
Numeric results sample file
and the number of steps was specified to be 15, the component would contain the values 1, 2, 3.4, -4, 5,
6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 22, 23, .24, 25, 26.
Note: Numbers can be separated by a comma (,) and they do not have to be lined up in even
columns.
826 Adams View
Numeric results sample file
If a paragraph of text contains a line that begins with a number, Adams View tries to read the line. To
avoid this, precede lines that are to be ignored with a non-numeric character. Do not use +, -, or . because
these characters are valid as the first characters in a real number.
This sample file contains only one component but contains the number 3 at the beginning of a line in
this header paragraph. Adams View will try to read this line because it is not considered a comment.
1.5
3.0
4.5
6.0
>>>>>> end of file <<<<<<<
The same file, without a numerical character, ensuring that Adams View does not try to read the
paragraph of text.
1.5
3.0
4.5
6.0
>>>>>> end of file <<<<<<<
N - R 827
Object position handle
Optimization
Helps you find an optimal design. You define the design objective and specify the parameters of the
Model that can change.
N - R 829
Options for Creating Angular Point-to-Point Measures
Orientation angles
Angles that define three rotations about the axes of a coordinate system. These can be Space-fixed
rotations or Body-fixed rotations.
832 Adams View
Orientation tool stacks
Orientations
834 Adams View
Outline
Outline
An outline is a sketch you create to substitute the more complex graphics from an Modal Neutral File
(MNF) with a simpler version. An outline on a flexible body deforms like the flexible body would. A
flexible body can have multiple outlines. The outline is only visible during animations of Simulations,
linear system modes, and when modeling. You cannot use the outline to investigate the component modes
of a flexible body.
Learn more about Substituting Outline Graphics for the Finite Element Mesh.
N - R 835
Output step
Output step
The time step at which Adams Solver supplies data for you to investigate the results of a Simulation.
Adams View displays each output step as an animation frame and as a point of data on a plot.
836 Adams View
Palette
Palette
A Dialog box of tools. You display a palette by selecting the Display Palette tool from a Tool stack or
selecting a modeling command on the Build menu.
Picture of a palette
N - R 837
Parametric analyses
Parametric analyses
Parametric analyses help you investigate the influence of Design variables on model performance.
During a parametric analysis, Adams View runs a series of Simulations with different values for the
design variables and gives you feedback on the effects of the changes.
Adams View has three types of parametric analyses:
• Design study
• Design of experiments (DOE)
• Optimization
838 Adams View
Parasolid
Parasolid
A standard CAD file format that you can import and export using Adams View.
N - R 839
Part (also called Bodies)
Picture of a palette
842 Adams View
Picture of Color Picker
Pin-in-slot mechanism
850 Adams View
Plate
Plate
N - R 851
Point Measures
Point Measures
Point measures provide an easy way to determine the kinematic and force characteristics of any marker
(see Markers), not just center-of-mass markers. For example, you can use point measures to resolve a
force at a specific location on a flexible body (see Flexible bodies), or you can determine the acceleration
of the end marker of a pendulum with respect to the ground reference frame.
852 Adams View
Point Motion
Point Motion
Prescribes the movement between two parts (see Part (also called Bodies)). When you create a point
motion, you specify the direction along which the motion occurs. You can impose a point motion on any
type of idealized joint, such as a spherical or cylindrical.
See Spherical Joint Tool and Cylindrical Joint Tool.
Point motions enable you to build complex movements into your model without having to add joints or
invisible parts. For example, you can represent the movement along an arc, of a ship in the ocean, or a
robot’s arm.
There are two types of point motions:
• Single point motion - Prescribes the motion of two parts along or around one axis.
• General point motion - Prescribes the motion of two parts along or around the three axes (six
Degrees of freedom).
N - R 853
Point mass
Point mass
Part that has mass but no inertia properties or angular velocities.
854 Adams View
Point-to-Point Measures
Point-to-Point Measures
Point-to-point measures let you measure the kinematic relationship between any two Markers in your
model. For example, you can use a point-to-point measure to calculate the global y-component of
distance between any two specified markers.
You can also obtain point-to-point characteristics for geometric vertices. When you select vertices for the
markers, Adams View automatically creates a marker at each vertex and uses it in the point-to-point
measure.
N - R 855
Points
Points
Locations (x, y, and z) that define a point in space. You can attach other objects in your Models to points
to establish parametric relationships. If you move a point to which other objects have been attached, the
objects move accordingly.
You can also define the location of points using Design variables so that Adams View can vary the
location of the coordinates to understand the sensitivity of the design to the variable or to find its optimum
values.
856 Adams View
Polar working grid
Primitive joints
A Joint that places a restriction on relative motion, such as restricting one part (see Part (also called
Bodies)) to always move parallel to another part. The joint primitives do not have physical counterparts
as the Idealized joints do.
N - R 861
Pull-down menu
Pull-down menu
An element in a Dialog box that displays a list of choices when you select it.
862 Adams View
Push buttons
Push buttons
Buttons in a Dialog box that execute a command or display another dialog box.
N - R 863
Quasi-static simulation
Quasi-static simulation
Sequence of static Simulations performed for different configurations of the Model. Typically, Static
equilibrium is computed at fixed time intervals throughout a prescribed motion for a model.
864 Adams View
RPC III Format
Adams View and Adams Durability can read any of the binary formats, so from the point of view of an
Adams user, these files are portable between platforms. These products can also write RPC III files in the
BINARY_IEEE_LITTLE_END format because MTS only provides RPC III software for the Windows
platform.
The RPC III file format supports multi-channel time history data with a fixed sample rate or time step.
Adams View and Adams Durability support an unlimited number of channels. These binary files map
real data into a short (2-byte) signed integer with the header providing a scaling factor for each channel.
Because the scaling factor essentially determines where the decimal point appears in these signed
numbers, the maximum resolution of data in an RPC III file is 0.0000305 () when the scaling factor is 1.
A key point to remember is that data that varies less than the magnitude of the channel resolution won’t
be reflected in an RPC III file. For example, with a scaling factor of 1, changes less than ±0.0000305
won’t register in the RPC III data file.
N - R 865
Radio buttons
Radio buttons
One of a series of buttons in a Dialog box that display alternative choices. You can only select one button
at a time.
866 Adams View
Reaction markers
Reaction markers
A marker (see Markers) belonging to the body to which Adams View applies the reaction Force of a
multi-component applied force. Reaction markers are also referred to as J markers.
N - R 867
Rectangular working grid
Reference markers
A marker (see Markers) that indicates the direction of a multi-component applied Force.
870 Adams View
Reflections Example
Reflections Example
No Reflections Reflections
N - R 871
Render files
Render files
Render files are polygonal representation of surfaces that you create using Parametric Technology’s
Pro/ENGINEER. The format of the render files is almost identical to the Stereolithography (SLA) format
but it includes material information, such as color, with the polygonal surfaces.
872 Adams View
Rendering mode
Rendering mode
The application of shading and light to the objects in your Model. Adams View provides you with six
rendering modes.
Request file
Contains requests for standard displacement, velocity, acceleration, or force information. You can also
define other quantities (such as pressure, work, energy, momentum, and more) that you want output
during a Simulation.
874 Adams View
Requests
Requests
Requests contain standard displacement, velocity, acceleration, or force information that will help you
investigate the results of your simulation. You can also define other quantities (such as pressure, work,
energy, momentum, and more) that you want output during a Simulation.
Adams stores the requests in Request files (.req).
N - R 875
Restitution-based contact
Restitution-based contact
In this method, Adams Solver computes the contact force from a penalty parameter and a coefficient of
restitution. The penalty parameter enforces the unilateral constraint, and the coefficient of restitution
controls the dissipation of energy at the contact.
876 Adams View
Result set component
vx vy vz wx wy wz
Results file
A file containing the set of state variable information that Adams Solver calculates during a Simulation.
By default, Adams Solver does not create a results file when working with Adams View.
N - R 879
Right-click
Right-click
To hold the right mouse button down over an object, such a text box or part on the screen.
880 Adams View
Rigid body
Rigid body
A part (see Part (also called Bodies)) with inertial properties and mass that cannot deform. Every time
you add a rigid body to your Model, it adds six Degrees of freedom to your model. Rigid bodies can move
relative to other parts and can be used as a reference frame to measure another part's velocity or
acceleration.
Adams View provides you with geometric constructions and solids with which you can create rigid
bodies. You can also refine the part geometry by adding features and performing Boolean operations to
combine bodies.
By default, Adams View uses the geometry of the rigid body to determine its mass and inertia properties.
You can also enter your own values for mass and inertia properties.
N - R 881
Run-time mode
Run-time mode
Function Builder mode in which you define the functions Adams Solver uses during a Simulation.
882 Adams View
Run-time mode
S-Z
S - Z 883
SI2 integrator
SI2 integrator
The SI2 Integrator uses the Stabilized Index-2 formulation, in conjunction with the Gear Stiff (GSTIFF)
integrator, for formulating and integrating differential equations of motion.
884 Adams View
STEP file
STEP file
A standard CAD file format that you can import and export using Adams View.
S - Z 885
Saturation
Saturation
Saturation is the strength or purity of a color in a specified hue, up to a maximum of 240. The higher the
saturation, the purer the color.
886 Adams View
Save the simulation position as a model
Saves the model to the database at a simulated position, and under a new name.
Learn more about Saving a Simulation Frame as New Model.
S - Z 887
Screen icons
Screen icons
Graphical representations of various modeling objects that do not have a geometric representation, such
as force application points and directions.
888 Adams View
Script
Script
A list of commands that Adams Solver executes during a Scripted simulation. Scripts give you access to
capabilities that are not available interactively. For example, you can use a simulation script to activate
and deactivate portions of your model or change solution settings during the simulation. Simulation
scripts can do everything that the interactive controls can.
S - Z 889
Scripted simulation
Scripted simulation
A Simulation that uses a set of commands stored in a Script instead of the standard simulation commands.
Simulation scripts are useful when you have come up with a good set of simulation parameters that you
want to repeat again and again. They are also needed for Design study, Design of experiments (DOE), and
Optimization simulations.
890 Adams View
Select List Manager
Select list
A list of all the objects that you have selected. You can view the list in the Select List Manager.
892 Adams View
Shaded rendering mode
Shell
The remains of a solid object once you’ve hollowed out one of its faces.
S - Z 895
Shortcut menus
Shortcut menus
Menus that appear when you place the cursor over an object and hold down the right mouse button
(Example of shortcut menu). The commands in the menus differ depending on the object that the cursor
is currently over.
Learn more about Using Shortcut Menus.
896 Adams View
Show, Hide, and Select Objects in the Database Navigator
You can use the Database Navigator to select any object in the database. You can also select more than
one object to complete a command. You can create a list of selected objects on which to perform options
by choosing Select List from the pull down menu at the top of the Database Navigator.
To use the Up and Down arrow keys to select a continuous set of objects:
1. In the tree list, click on the first object, hold down the Shift key, and then use Up or Down arrows
to select a block of objects.
2. Select OK.
Sim_controls
Simulation
A prediction of how your physical prototype will behave. When you run a simulation, Adams Solver
verifies the Model and applies Forces and motion to it. It displays an animation of the simulation in the
Main window by default.
You can select the types of simulation that Adams Solver runs on your model as well as set the level of
output. You can also supply a Script of commands to be performed.
S - Z 901
Simulation Debugger
Simulation Debugger
The Simulation Debugger provides both graphical and tabular feedback on how hard Adams Solver is
working to simulate your model. For example, during a simulation, the Simulation Debugger provides a
table of those objects with the greatest simulation error. The Simulation Debugger can also highlight
trouble areas during a simulation and provide measures of integrator progress, such as step size and
integrator order.
The graphical and tabular feedback helps you determine:
• Which modeling elements (forces, constraints, and so on) are causing numerical difficulties.
Often, the information directly points out modeling elements that you should change. You should
always carefully inspect any modeling elements to which the Simulation Debugger calls
attention.
• Determine what simulation events are causing numerical difficulties. For example, if your model
simulates fine until there is an impact between two parts, you should closely monitor simulation
performance before, during, and after the impact.
The Simulation Debugger has several options for how you want to view its debugging information.
During an interactive simulation, you can:
• Step through the simulation one output step, time step, or iteration at a time, depending on your
output preference. Adams View pauses after each simulation output step so that you can closely
inspect the behavior of the simulation.
• View a table of objects that list the objects that have the most error or the greatest change,
acceleration, or force. You can also view Adams Solver integrator progress.
• Highlight objects that have the most error or the greatest change, acceleration, or force.
• Display strip charts of Adams Solver settings.
You can select to view any or all of these options during a single simulation. Note, however, that the
options significantly slow down your simulation.
902 Adams View
Single-component force
Single-component force
A Force defined as one resultant magnitude along a direction.
S - Z 903
Six-component general force
Snap
To lock geometry so it aligns with the Working grid.
906 Adams View
Solid fill
Solid fill
To show both the faces and edges of objects. Uses flat shading.
S - Z 907
Solid geometry
Solid geometry
Geometric objects that have mass. Adams View comes with several types of predefined solid geometry,
including boxes, cylinders, and links. You can also create solid geometry from Construction geometry by
extruding it.
908 Adams View
Space-fixed rotation
Space-fixed rotation
To apply rotations about axes that remain in their original orientation.
S - Z 909
Spec lines
Spec lines
A line that represents a constant baseline value in a plot.
910 Adams View
Sphere
Sphere
A solid ellipsoid whose three axes are of equal length.
S - Z 911
Spherical coordinate system
• is the angle between the z-axis of the coordinate system and the line connecting the origin of
the coordinate system and the location.
Spline Editor
An Adams View tool that provides a tabular or plot view of spline data for editing and plotting. You can
drag points on the spline plots and see the effect of different curve-fitting techniques on your spline. You
can also select linear extrapolation and view its effect.
S - Z 913
Standard toolbar
Standard toolbar
Contains tools for performing basic file and edit operations. We have not filled the entire toolbar with
tools so you can add your own tools to customize your work environment.
Start at Equilibrium
Performs a Static equilibrium before performing a Dynamic simulation.
S - Z 915
State variables
State variables
State variables define scalar algebraic equations for independent use or as part of the plant input, plant
output, or Array elements.
916 Adams View
Static equilibrium
Static equilibrium
Finds the state of the Model in which all internal and external forces are balanced in the absence of any
system motions or inertial Forces. It sets all system velocities and accelerations to zero, so inertial forces
are not taken into consideration. A static simulation is for use with models that have one or more Degrees
of freedom so Adams Solver can move parts around as it seeks to balance all the forces acting on the
model.
You can request to perform a static equilibrium before a Dynamic simulation to remove unwanted system
transients at the start of the Simulation. (Unbalanced forces in the initial configuration can generate
undesirable effects at the beginning of a dynamic analysis).
S - Z 917
Status bar
Status bar
A line at the bottom of the Main window that displays information about the element your cursor is
currently on, the action you should perform, or an error message. The following shows the status bar in
Adams View.
918 Adams View
Stereolithography (SLA)
Stereolithography (SLA)
Files containing triangularized polygon information representing the surface of geometry. You specify
the quality of surface representation when you produce the SLA files in your CAD program. You usually
specify the error tolerance, chord height, or quality factor. When you import the files, Adams transfers
the surfaces to shells.
S - Z 919
Strain
Strain
Outputs strain information if strain modes are available in the modal neutral file (MNF) of the specified
flexible body. Adams View outputs all six components of strain (normal-X, normal-Y, normal-Z, shear-
XY, shear-YZ, and shear-ZX). It outputs strains in the basic FEA coordinate system of the flexible body.
In the Flex Body text box, enter the flexible body whose data Adams View outputs. Adams View outputs
the data in the FE model basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible body.
920 Adams View
Stress
Stress
Outputs stress information if modal stresses are available in the MNF of the flexible body. Adams View
outputs all six components of stress (normal-X, normal-Y, normal-Z, shear-XY, shear-YZ, and shear-
ZX). It outputs stresses in the basic FEA coordinate system of the flexible body. In the Flex Body text
box, enter the flexible body whose data Adams View outputs. Adams View outputs the data in the FE
model basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible body.
S - Z 921
Stress/strain flags
Stress/strain flags
You specify the value of stress or strain to be evaluated in the HOT_SPOTS, MAX_STRESS, or
TOP_SPOTS function using the Value argument. The following settings are supported for the Value
argument:
0 - Von mises
1 - Normal x
2 - Normal y
3 - Normal z
4 - Shear xy
5 - Shear yz
6 - Shear zx
7 - Maximum principal
8 - Minimum principal
9 - Maximum shear
922 Adams View
Strip chart
Strip chart
A monitoring device in which Adams View plots a measure (See Measures). The strip chart monitors the
measure during a Simulation.
You can transfer a Curve in a strip chart to Adams PostProcessor so you can further manipulate it, such
as zoom in on it or view its statistical data. In addition, you can view multiple curves from successive
simulations in a single strip chart to chart changes.
S - Z 923
System elements
System elements
System elements let you create one or more general differential and/or algebraic equations that enable
you to model system components that are not as easily represented by standard Adams View modeling
objects, such as parts (see Part (also called Bodies)), Constraints, and Forces.
924 Adams View
Table
Table
Displays the Maximum Equation Error (Debug Table) dialog box, which contains a running count of the
iterations needed to solve the equations of motion.
S - Z 925
Table Editor
Table Editor
An Adams View tool that displays the objects in your Modeling database in table format so you can
compare the objects and quickly update them.
Learn more about Editing Objects Using the Table Editor.
926 Adams View
Tabular output file
Template-Based products
The template-based products expand MSC's virtual prototyping to provide you with standard building
blocks so you can rapidly prototype your real system, such as engine parts, car suspensions, and rail cars.
They offer fully parametric modeling techniques so if you move one entity, its dependents move
accordingly.
The template-based products include Adams Car and Adams Driveline.
928 Adams View
Text box
Text box
A field in a Dialog box in which you enter text.
S - Z 929
Three-component torque
Three-component torque
A rotational force between two parts in your model using three orthogonal components.
930 Adams View
Tic marks
Tic marks
Short lines that mark the axis at regular intervals to define the scale of the axis on a plot. You can set how
the tic marks are placed along the axis and their color.
S - Z 931
Toggle Tool Stack
Toggles on and off the display of view accessories, such as the Coordinate window.
To select objects:
• To select a single object, click the part.
• To use the mouse to select a continuous set of objects, drag the mouse over the objects that you
want to select or click on one objects, hold down the Shift key, and click the last object in the set.
All the objects between the two selected parts are highlighted.
• To use the up and down arrow keys to select a continuous set of objects, click on the first part,
hold down the Shift key, and then use the up or down arrow to select a block of objects.
• To select a noncontinuous set of objects, click on an object, hold down the Ctrl key, and click on
the individual object that you want.
• To clear any object in the selected list, hold down the Ctrl key and then click the selected object
to clear its selection.
S - Z 933
Showing, Hiding, or Selecting Keywords
Tool stack
A collection of tools in a toolbox or Toolbar. For example, the Main toolbox has a View Layout tool stack
that contains all the ways in which you can display the views in the main window. The last selected or
default tool appears on top of the stack. A small triangle in the lower right corner of the top tool indicates
that there are additional tools.
S - Z 935
Tool tips
Tool tips
Boxes that display information about the command or Toolbar button that the cursor is currently over.
Use the Tips On/Off command on the Help menu to turn the tips on and off.
936 Adams View
Toolbar
Toolbar
An area of a window that contains icons that represent Adams View commands for creating and viewing
your Model.
S - Z 937
Torsion spring
Torsion spring
A rotational spring-damper applied between two parts (see Part (also called Bodies)).
938 Adams View
Transient simulation
Transient simulation
During a transient simulation, Adams Solver performs either a:
• Kinematic simulation if your model has zero Degrees of freedom.
• Dynamic simulation if your model has one or more degrees of freedom.
S - Z 939
Translational spring damper
Tree list
The tree list is a hierarchical listing of objects in your model. It appears on the left side of the Database
Navigator.
• A plus (+) appears in front of an object to indicate that the object has children below it but they
are hidden.
• A minus (-) indicates that all objects immediately below the object are displayed.
The text (OFF) appears next any object that has been deactivated.
S - Z 941
Treeview
Treeview
The treeview is a hierarchical listing of objects in your current session of Adams PostProcessor. It
appears along the left side of the Adams PostProcessor window. A folder appears in front of each page
in the tree to indicate that there are objects stored on the page.
942 Adams View
User-written subroutine
User-written subroutine
Subroutines that you link into Adams Solver through dynamic link libraries that allow you to customize
Adams Solver to:
• Define your own modeling elements.
• Make Adams work in your preferred environment, such as a control system design package.
For more information, See the Subroutines section of the Adams Solver online help.
S - Z 943
View
View
The position of the model in a View window. There are six standard views of a Model. They include the
front, back, top, bottom, left, and right views.
944 Adams View
View Orientation Tool Stacks
View title
Title of View window, which, by default, displays the name of the model currently displayed in the
window.
• On the Main toolbox, from the Toggle Tool Stack, click the View Title tool .
• Double-click to apply the change to all view windows. The tool must be on top of the tool stack
to double-click it.
946 Adams View
View triad
View triad
A triad that displays the orientation of the global coordinate system axes. It appears in the lower left
corner of each view window. As you move the view of a window, the triad displays the changes to the
coordinate system orientation.
• On the Main toolbox, from the Toggle Tool Stack, click the View Triad tool .
• Double-click to apply the change to all view windows. The tool must be on top of the tool stack
to double-click it.
S - Z 947
View window
View window
A portion of the Main window that displays different aspects of your Model.
Picture of main window divided into two view windows:
948 Adams View
Wavefront files
Wavefront files
Set of files that contain a description of the model graphics. Their format is suitable for the Wavefront®
visualization system so you can create network broadcast quality animations of your Simulations.
S - Z 949
Window Layout Tool Stack
Working grid
A grid of points that defines the plane on which you are creating objects. Initially, it is aligned with the
global coordinate system but you can move it as desired. When you turn on the grid, objects
automatically Snap to the grid points whenever you create, move, or reshape them. You can select a
Rectangular working grid or Polar working grid.
Zoom
To change the magnification of your Model on the screen.
954 Adams View
Zoom